AECOM AL GARHOUD Mixed-Use Arch Specs (Tender Clean Version) 20-09-2015

17 September 2015 AL GARHOUD MIXED-USE DEVELOPMENT
Architectural Specification
Tender Issue
Specification
Prepared for
Hasabi Real Estate
Prepared by
AECOM Middle East Limited
‫ﻟﯾـﻣـﺗـــد‬ ‫اﯾـﺳـــت‬
‫اﯾـﺴـــﺖ ﻟﯿـﻤـﺘـــﺪ‬ ‫ﻣـﯾـــدلﻣـﯿـــﺪل‬
‫أﯾـﻛــــوم أﯾـﻜــــﻮم‬
PO Box 51028, DubaiPO Box 43266, Abu Dhabi
United Arab Emirates
www.aecom.com
17 September 2015
© AECOM
The information contained in this document produced by AECOM Middle East Limited is solely
for the use of the Client identified on the cover sheet for the purpose for which it has been
prepared and AECOM Middle East Limited undertakes no duty to or accepts any responsibility
to any third party who may rely upon this document.
All rights reserved. No section or element of this document may be removed from this
document, reproduced, electronically stored or transmitted in any form without the written
permission of AECOM Middle East Limited.
Quality Information
Document Architectural Specification
Ref ADH-GMD-DMP-SPC-Y15-00007-0 Date 17 September 2015

ECCE/ Jelena Vranic/
Prepared by Joseph Claveria Reviewed by
Mohammed Ammous
Revision History
Authorised
Revision Revision Date Details Name/Position Signature
00 17 September 2015 Tender Issue Hanadi Ali

Al Garhoud Mixed-Use Development
Table of Contents
Technical Reference Sheet [T-Sheet]
034500 - Precast Architectural Concrete
035400 - Cast Underlayment
042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry
050513 - Shop Applied Coatings For Metal
050523 - Metal Fastenings
055200 - Metal Railings
060573 - Wood Treatment
062023 - Interior Finish Carpentry
064200 - Wood Paneling
071352 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
071353 - Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing
071416 - Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
071450 - Grp Lining Waterproofing
071600 - Cementitious And Reactive Waterproofing
071800 - Traffic Coatings
072100 - Thermal Insulation
074200 - Wall Panels
077200 - Roof Accessories
078413 - Penetration Firestopping
079200 - Joint Sealants
079513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
081100 - Metal Doors And Frames
081416 - Flush Wood Doors
083200 - Glass Doors
083323 - Overhead Coiling Doors
084233 - Revolving Door Entrances
084413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

Architectural Specification AECOM Middle East
Tender Issue 2
17 September 2015
085113 - Aluminum Windows
087100 - Door Hardware
088000 - Glazing
088300 - Mirrors
089000 - Louvers And Vents
092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
092400 - Cement Plastering
093000 - Tiling
093033 - Stone Tiling
095133 - Acoustical Metal Pan Ceilings
096500 - Resilient Flooring
096723 - Resinous Flooring
096810 - Carpeting
096900 - Access Flooring
099100 - Painting
099646 - Intumescent Painting
102100 - Compartments And Cubicles
102613 - Corner Guards
107113 - Exterior Sun Control Devices
124816 - Entrance Floor Grilles
125000 - Furniture
149100 - Facility Chutes
224000 - Plumbing Fixtures

Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) T-SHEET
T-Sheet Code
Description CSI Section
Reference
AM ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK
AM-700 Series FACILITIES CHUTES 149100
AM-702 Laundry Chute 149100
BAL BALUSTRADES/ HANDRAILS/ GUARDRAILS
BAL-200 Series PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS 055200
BAL-201 Metal Balustrade and Railing 055200
BAL-205 Glass Balustrade and Railing 055200
BLK BLOCKWORK
BLK-100 Series COMMON BLOCKWORK 042200
BLK-101 Hollow Blockwork 042200
BLK-400 Series SPECIALIST BLOCK WALLING 042200
BLK-401 AAC Blockwork 042200
BLK-402 AAC Blockwork 042200
CLG CEILINGS
CLG-100 Series SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD MONOLITHIC SYSTEMS 092116
CLG-101 Plasterboard Ceiling 092116
CLG-200 Series GYPSUM BOARD TILE SYSTEM 092116
CLG-201 Lay-in Grid Plasterboard Ceiling Tile 092116
CLG-300 Series METAL CEILING SYSTEM 095133
CLG-301 Perforated Metal Ceiling System 095133
CLG-400 Series MINERAL FIBRE CEILING SYSTEM 095400
DRS DOORS
WOOD DOORS 081416
Exterior Solid-Core Door (Refer to Door Schedule) 081416
METAL DOORS 081100
Exterior Metal Hollow Door (Refer to Door Schedule) 081100
GLAZED DOORS 083200
Internal Swing Glass Door (Refer to Door Schedule) 083200
DRS-400 Series REVOLVING DOORS 084233
Revolving Entrance Glass Door 084233
DRS-500 Series ROLLER SHUTTER/ SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 083323
Overhead Roller Shutter Door 083233
EXJ EXPANSION JOINTS SYSTEMS
EXJ-100 Series EXPANSION JOINTS 079513
EXJ-101 Expansion Joint-Ceiling 079513
EXJ-102 Expansion Joint- Floor 079513
EXJ-103 Expansion Joint- Wall 079513
EWA EXTERNAL WALLING - APPLIED RENDER SYSTEMS
EWA-100 Series EXTERNAL SAND - CEMENT RENDER 092400
EWA-101 Sand Cement Render 092400
EWB EXTERNAL WALLING - BUILT-UP SYSTEMS
EWB-100 Series COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM CLADDING SYSTEM 074200
EWB-101 Insulated Metal Composite Panel 074200
EWB-200 Series ALUMINIUM CLADDING SYSTEM 084413
EWB-201 Glazed Curtain Wall Assembly 084413
EWC EXTERNAL WALLING - COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
EWC-100 Series PRECAST CONCRETE CLADDING 034500
EWC-101 UHPC Mashrabiya 034500
EWG-600 Series ALUMINIUM WINDOWS 085113
EWG-601 Aluminum Windows 085113
EWL EXTERNAL WALLING - LOUVER/ BRISE SOLEIL/ SCREEN SYSTEMS
EWL-100 Series LOUVER SYSTEMS 089000
EWL-101 External Louver for MEP Services 089000
EWL-300 Series SCREEN SYSTEMS 107113
EWL-301 Shading Screen 107113
FLH FLOOR FINISHES - HARD
FLH-100 Series CERAMIC/ PORCELAIN FLOOR TILING 093000
Tender Issue
17/09/2015 Page 1 of 4 AECOM MIDDLE EAST
T-Sheet Code
Reference
FLH-101 Ceramic Floor Tile 093000

FLH-102 Matt Ceramic Floor Tile 093000
FLH-103 Porcelain Floor Tile 093000
FLH-105 Pool Ceramic Floor Tile 093000
FLH-200 Series NATURAL STONE TILING 093033
FLH-201 Natural Stone Floor Tile 093033
FLH-500 Series RESIN FLOORING 096723
FLH-501 Polyurethane Flooring System 096723
FLH-502 Hygienic Industrial Resinous Flooring 096723
FLS FLOOR FINISHES - SOFT
FLS-100 Series VINYL FLOORING 096500
FLS-101 Vinyl Flooring 096500
FLS-200 Series RUBBER FLOORING 096500
FLS-201 Rubber Flooring 096500
FLS-400 Series CARPET FLOORING 096810
FLS-401 Broadloom Carpet 096810
FLS-402 Carpet Tile 096810
FLS-800 Series FLOOR MATTING 124816
FLS-801 Floor Mat and Grille 124816
FP FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
FP-100 Series GENERAL FIRE STOPPING 078413
Penetration Fire Stopping (General Description) 078413
FP-300 Series INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEMS 099646
FP-201 Intumescent Paint 099646
FXG FIXTURES/ FITTINGS/ EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
FXG-200 Series SHELVING 062023
FXG-201 Shelves 062023
FXG-300 Series LOCKERS 125000
FXG-301 Locker 125000
FXG-500 Series MIRRORS 088300
FXG-501 Mirror 088300
FXG-510 Parking Mirror 088300
FXG-600 Series FURNITURE - FITTED 125000
FXG-601 Reception Desk 125000
FXG-602 Vanity Unit 125000
GL GLAZED-IN PANELS
GL-100 Series SINGLE MONOLITHIC GLASS 088000
GL-101 Clear Glass 088000
GL-102 Clear and Frosted Glass 088000
GL-105 Tempered Glass 088000
GL-200 Series LAMINATED GLASS 088000
GL-201 Spandrel Laminated Glass 088000
GL-202 Laminated Glass 088000
GL-300 Series INSULATING GLASS 088000
GL-301 Insulated Glass 088000
GL-400 Series INSULATING LAMINATED GLASS 088000
GL-401 Insulated and Laminated Glass 088000
GL-500 Series FIRE RATED GLASS 088000
GL-501 Fire Rated Glazing 088000
INS INSULATION
INS-500 Series POLYSTYRENE (EPS) 072100
INS-501 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation 072100
HARDWARE
DOOR HARDWARE 087100
Arch/ ID to provide Door Hardware Schedule for complete specs reference 087100
IWS INTERNAL WALL SYSTEMS
Tender Issue
T-Sheet Code
Reference
IWS-100 Series GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS 092116

IWS-101 Plasterboard Wall Partition 092116
IWS-105 Moisture Resistant Wall Partition 092116
IWS-200 Series GYPSUM BOARD LININGS 092116
IWS-201 Plasterboard Wall Lining 092116
LIN LININGS TO WALLS/ CEILINGS
LIN-100 Series WOOD WALL LININGS 064200
LIN-101 Wooden Wall Panel 064200
LIN-600 Series PORCELAIN & CERAMIC WALL TILING 093000
LIN-601 Ceramic Wall Tile 093000
LIN-602 Matt Ceramic Wall Tile 093000
LIN-603 Porcelain Wall Tile 093000
LIN-604 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile 093000
LIN-605 Pool Ceramic Wall Tile 093000
PT PAINT FINISHES
PT-100 Series INTERNAL PAINT FINISHES 099100
PT-101 Epoxy Paint 099100
PT-102 Epoxy Coating System 099100
PT-103 Epoxy Coating System with Anti-slip Aggregates 099100
PT-104 Solvent Free Non-Toxic Epoxy Resin Coating 099100
PT-106 Off-White Satin Emusion Paint 099100
PT-107 Anti-Carbonation Paint 099100
PT-108 Alkyd Enamel System 099100
PT-109 Alkyd Enamel System 099100
PT-110 Masonry Paint 099100
PT-115 Plasterboard Paint 099100
PT-120 Anti-Bacterial Wall Paint 099100
PT-125 Wall Paint 099100
PT-130 Ceiling Paint 099100
PT-140 Elastomeric Anti-Carbonation Coating System 099100
PT-141 Vehicular Traffic Coat 071800
PT-200 Series EXTERNAL PAINT FINISHES 099100
PT-201 External Paint 099100
PAN PANELING/ CUBICLES
PAN-100 Series SOLID CORE LAMINATE 102100
PAN-101 FOH Toilet Cubicle 102100
PAN-102 BOH Toilet Cubicle 102100
RAF RAISED ACCESS FLOORS
RAF-100 Series FULLY ACCESSIBLE SYSTEMS 096900
RAF-101 Raised Access Flooring 096900
RFS ROOFING SYSTEMS
RFS-500 Series SPECIALIST SYSTEMS 077200
RFS-501 Roof Access Hatch 077200
SAN SANITARY APPLIANCES/ FITTINGS
SAN-100 Series 224000
Arch/ ID to provide Sanitaryware Schedule for complete specs reference 224000
SCR SCREEDS
SCR-200 Series UN-BONDED SCREEDS 035400
SCR-201 Un-bonded Screed 035400
SCR-300 Series FLOATING SCREEDS 035400
SCR-301 Floating Screed 035400
TRM UNFRAMED ISOLATED TRIMS/ SUNDRY ITEMS
TRM-400 Series WALL PROTECTION AND CORNER GUARDS 102613
TRM-401 Column Guard 102613
TRM-402 Wall Guard 102613
TRM-500 TRIMS 062023
TRM-501 Wooden Skirting 062023
TRM-505 Ceramic Skirting 093000
TRM-510 Polished Porcelain Skirting 093000
Tender Issue
T-Sheet Code
Reference
TRM-515 Natural Stone Skirting 093033

TRM-520 Resin Skirting 096723
TRM-525 Vinyl Skirting 096500
TRM-530 Rubber Skirting 096500
WPS WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS/ DPMs
WPS-100 Series FLEXIBLE SHEET TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING 071113
WPS-101 Sheet Waterproofing 071113
WPS-102 Modified Bituminous Deck-Paving Waterproofing Membrane 071326
WPS-200 Series LIQUID APPLIED TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING 071326
WPS-201 GRP Waterproof Lining 071450
WPS-400 Series SPECIALIST WATERPROOF SYSTEMS 071416
WPS-401 Polyurethane Waterproofing 071416
WPS-402 Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing 071600
Tender Issue
SECTION 034500 -- PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 4
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 4
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 4
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION 5
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA 5
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.4 MATERIALS 10
2.5 ACCESSORIES 14
2.6 FABRICATION 14
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 20
2.8 FINISHES 22
PART 3 EXECUTION 23
3.1 EXAMINATION 23
3.2 INSTALLATION 23
3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL 25
3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 26
3.5 PROTECTION 26

Tender Issue 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
17 September 2015
SECTION 034500 -- PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Work Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, Division 01 General
Requirements, Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B. Performance Specified Work
1. Refer to Contractor's Responsibilities in Division 01 General Requirements, Section 011000

Summary for specific requirements.
2. Supply, deliver, install and warrant the work in strict compliance with the materials and workmanship
requirements of the Specification.
3. Where required to prepare Shop Drawings, these shall be limited to final detailing of components,
systems and other required elements indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate
their safe installation.
4. Where products are offered by the Contractor for acceptance by the Engineer, provide full supporting
documentation in respect of the complete system or installation.
C. Work Section Includes
1. Ultra-high performance fiber-reinforced concrete (UHPC).
D. Related Work Sections and Documentation
1. Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2. Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
3. Structural Specification.
E. Drawing Description References: Reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained in the
Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on the Design
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 General Requirements, Section 013300 Submittal
Procedures and submit the following.
B. Tender Submittals
1. Drawings showing the full extent of the work.
2. Product data on proposed materials.
3. List of tests included.
4. Summary of deviations from the Specification.
5. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/ systems.
6. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
7. Preliminary Method Statement.
8. Preliminary Quality Plan.
9. Provide a condensation risk assessment with the Tender return based upon the psychometric
conditions specified, for review by the Engineer.

Tender Issue 034500 / 1 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
17 September 2015
C. Pre-contract Samples
1. 600mm x 600mm sample of all precast concrete types specified using proposed formwork and mix.
2. All fastening devices and anchors.
D. Post Contract Submittals
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product data on materials and components for use.
3. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of
the system.
4. Statement of manufacturer's review confirming suitability of specified materials.
E. Post Contract Samples
1. 600mm x 600mm sample of all finished precast concrete types.
2. All fastening devices and anchors.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 General Requirements, Section 017800 Closeout
Submittals and submit the following.
1. Warranties.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Qualifications
1. A specialist, who has at least 10 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
3. A precast concrete installer qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to install
Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load or S2 (Complex Structural Systems) for load-bearing
members.
4. A precast concrete installer who has retained a "PCI-Certified Site Auditor" to conduct a Site audit
of a project in the same category as this Project before installation of precast concrete and who can
produce an Installers' Post-Audit Declaration.
5. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast
concrete units in accordance with performance requirements. This responsibility includes the
preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.
a) Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for
Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load-Bearing Units or participates in APA's
"Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" and is
designated an APA-certified plant.
6. Operatives must have service or repair facilities not more than 2 hours from the Site.
B. Off-Site Testing
1. The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate that
the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification. The
information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
2. If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not available,
provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in accordance with the testing
criteria indicated in the Specification.
3. Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic results and
Agrément certificates.
4. Submit to the Engineer test certificates to confirm compatibility of the sealant used with all substrate
materials. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
5. Testing of Fastening:
a) As the panels are manufactured, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the primary brackets
and fastening to be carried out to selected panels to confirm compliance with the Specification
and the requirements of Local Building Regulations.
b) 1 in every 5 panels manufactured shall have their fastenings subjected to pull-out and shear
testing.
c) The primary fastenings shall be subjected to test loading of design load times a factor of 1.1
for both pull-out and shear. The direction of the test loads shall be consistent with the design
principles and shall allow for the most onerous design conditions.
d) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review proposals for these tests, which shall
be suitably modified to allow for the primary bracket design.
e) The Contractor shall arrange for Test Reports to be produced at appropriate intervals by the
Independent Testing Authority and submitted to the Engineer for review. If any of the fastenings
show a displacement of more than 0.1mm, this shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer
immediately.
f) Depending on the initial test results, the frequency of testing may be reviewed and modified
with prior agreement.
C. Results and Certificates
1. Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
2. Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests performed,
material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings and any other documentation to
substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by Subcontractors.
3. The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which they
refer and are retrievable.
4. The records shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and copies of records shall be given
to the Engineer upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be submitted to
the Engineer.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
E. Design Standards: In accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 "Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary"/ 318M "Metric Building Code Requirements for
Structural Concrete and Commentary" and design recommendations of Precast/ Prestressed Concrete
Institute (PCI) MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete," applicable to
types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.
F. Quality Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality control
recommendations and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, in accordance with PCI MNL
117S, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast and Prestressed
Concrete Products."
G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D.1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

17 September 2015
H. Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural precast concrete

units whose fire resistance has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/ TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method
for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies," or PCI MNL 124,
"Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
I. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
J. Mock-ups
1. To be confirmed by the Engineer.
K. Prototypes
1. Typical bay of the work including all interfaces.
L. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location to be agreed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units
temporarily on the ground.
B. Support units during shipment on non-staining shock-absorbing material.
C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent
staining and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible and units can be inspected.
E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive
stresses which would cause cracking or damage.
F. Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on the Shop Drawings.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: Install materials and components in weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such that a proper bond, seating
or fastening cannot be ensured.
B. Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
during installation when sizing construction and movement joints.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Loadings: Make allowance for differences between design loadings and loadings during construction
due to installation sequencing and floor loading conditions when sizing construction and movement joints.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions, as required, for installation.
B. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, flashing reglets, and
similar items to be used by the precast concrete cladding Installer for anchoring, supporting and flashing
of precast concrete cladding system. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installing
such items and deliver to Site in time for installation.
C. Time delivery and installation of precast cladding to avoid extended on Site storage and to coordinate
with work adjacent to precast cladding.

17 September 2015
D. Sequence cladding installation with other exterior work to minimize the possibility of damage and soiling
during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. Source of Supply: Obtain products for each item from a single manufacturer.
B. Type EWC-101 UHPC Mashrabiya
1. Description: External Ultra High Performance Concrete (UHPC) Mashrabiya which consists of mesh
and latticework themed design to provide a double skin to the structure, which also filters light and
helps regulate climatic variations, mechanically fastened to supports/ framing complete with all
necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: Lafarge or acceptable equivalent.
3. Product Reference: Ductal or acceptable equivalent.
4. Finish: Facing shall be smooth finish.
5. Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
6. Protective Coating: The panels are treated using a water repellant covering applied to all the visible
faces and edges; panels in areas open to the public shall have a covering which is resistant to
soiling and graffiti.
7. Size and Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
8. Thickness: The thickness of the UHPC elements, is determined by the Contractor and as accepted
by the Engineer, using a calculator note drawn up by the Structural engineer. This thickness is
calculated to resist the various loads applied to the wall panel, and to all the panel handling operations
(installation, shipment and replacement). It should be in minimal size in order to minimize the weight
and simplify handling.
a) As per the acceptance of the Engineer, the final profile of the elements made from UHPC will
be validated by the Engineerwhich would justify the dimensioning of the elements by means
of the construction calculation note.
9. Edges and Ridges: Treated by casting; the mould has the round fillets between the outer face and
sufficient edges to prevent scabbling.
10. Compressive Strength: Higher than 110 MPa. Ductile failure mode under flexural/ traction stress,
lower porosity (less than 12%) maintenance of the flexure resistance and of the young module after
accelerated ageing tests (HRT cycles).
11. Provide all hangers, supports and jointing as required.
12. All supports, brackets and fastenings shall be stainless steel grade 1.4401.
13. Refer to the Structural Specification for minimum distance of fastening brackets from edge of slab.
14. Joints between panels shall be open jointed.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The Work shall oversail the slab edge and be either fastened to the primary structure or secondary
support structure.
B. Visually open, recessed horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a
nominal width as indicated on the Design Drawings.
C. All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.

17 September 2015
D. Secondary Support
1. Support shall be configured as indicated on the Design Drawings, suitably fastened back to the
primary structure in methods acceptable to the Engineer. Where secondary support is required and
visible and not indicated as part of the Engineer's Design, provide details at Tender. Acceptance
from the Engineer is required in terms of appearance.
2. Mild steel secondary support members shall be fabricated and protected against corrosion in
accordance with the Structural Engineer's requirements:
a) If visible it shall be finished with a color and finish acceptable to the Engineer.
b) All joints, as necessary with regard to visual intent, shall be welded and ground smooth.
Protective coatings, where specified, and the associated finish to the joints shall be to the same
standard as the main assemblies.
E. Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the Design Intent. The Contractor shall maintain
these dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these shall be stated with
the Tender.
F. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade Grade 304 for internal use and grade Grade
316 for external use of suitable design and strength to suit application. Fastenings shall be concealed
or inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all supports for the precast concrete paneling.
For the design of the primary structure refer to the Structural Specification.
H. Provide all necessary waterproofing membranes at openings and interfaces with adjoining trades.
Membranes shall be compatible with adjoining trades. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate
Subcontractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
I. The Contractor shall undertake the Detailed Design and provide copings and cappings to parapets, to
nominal sizes and profiles as indicated on the Design Drawings.
J. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
Any discoloration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.
K. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Precast concrete assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation or other defects in construction.
2. Provide panel frames and connections to accommodate deflections and other building movements.
3. Provide panel frames that transfer window loads to building structure.
B. Structural Performance Requirements
1. Structural Movements and Tolerances: Refer to the Structural Specification.
2. Provide panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with ASTM E1592/
ASTM E330:
a) Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures.
1. Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Structural Specification.
2. Uniform pressure of 1436Pa, acting inward or outward.
3. Wind Loads:

17 September 2015
a) Wind loading shall be accommodated safely, without detriment to the overall design, structural
integrity and performance of the work.
b) Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the building,
taking into account the presence of significant openings, which might arise occasionally within
the building enclosure.
4. Specific Movements:
a) The work shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or combination
of loads without damage or reduction in performance.
b) Expansion and movement joints shall accommodate the appropriate range of movement.
5. Specific Dead Loads:
a) The work shall accommodate its own dead loading without causing deflections or movements
which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
b) Provide dead loading calculations for the installed system. This shall be expressed as the
weight in kN/ m², plus any other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.
6. Specific Live Loads:
a) The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specific live loads without any
reduction in performance:
1. Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of any component. The work shall sustain
safely, without reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to any
component, a static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on
any part of the framing.
2. A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants.
C. Thermal Movements
1. All components shall resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and minimum surface
temperature differentials occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
conditions envisaged for the work.
2. The work shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of its components
resulting from the varying surface temperatures without any reduction in the specified performance.
3. Thermal movements shall not result in audible noise.
4. Provide for thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 56°C.
D. Horizontal Building Movement (Interstory Drift): Allow for maximum horizontal building movement equal
to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400, to the acceptance of the
Structural Engineer.
E. Shrinkage and Creep for Concrete Frame Buildings Only: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of
building frame equal to 3mm in 3m.
F. Deflections
1. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the work
or adjacent structural or building elements.
2. All components, couplings and fastenings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
3. The work shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed by
adjacent structures.

17 September 2015
4. The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part of
the work, its support structure or finishes.
5. Deflection Limits:
a) Panel frames shall withstand design loads without lateral deflections greater than 1/ 240 of
wall span.
b) Provision for the following deflection of building structure:
1. Deflection due to weight of dimension stone cladding system: Allow for 6mm vertical
deflection in 6m span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system.
2. Live Load Deflection: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection in 6m span of structural members
supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on building's
structural frame after stone installation.
G. Provisions for Fabrication and Installation Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and installation tolerances of
building's structural system. Concrete fabrication and installation tolerances are specified in the Structural
Specification. Structural steel fabrication and installation tolerances are specified in the Structural
Specification.
H. Environmental Performance Requirements
1. Moisture Movement:
a) The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the
specified performance:
1. Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in
the moisture content of the air.
2. Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the panels.
2. Thermal Performance Requirements:
a) The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be 0.35W/ m²K or better.
b) Provide U-value calculations including condensation calculations to justify insulation and vapor
barrier design.
3. Solar Performance Requirements:
a) Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall not result in degradation of
appearance or performance.
4. Air Permeability/ Infiltration: The work shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage rates
and shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.
a) Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m² of wall area when
tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
5. Test-Pressure Difference: 75Pa.
6. Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces or within
the interstitial construction thickness of the work under the temperature and humidity conditions
listed in Division 01 General Requirements.
7. Capillarity: Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented to areas that are designed to
remain dry.
8. Weather and Water Penetration Resistance: The work, including flashings and junctions with
adjacent components, shall be fully weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full
allowance made for deflections and other movements.
a) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance
with ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:

17 September 2015
b) Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20% of inward-acting, wind-load
design pressure of not less than 300Pa and not more than 575Pa.
1. Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.
2. Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on the system's
normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water
controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage
adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
I. Fire Performance Requirements
1. Specific Fire Performance Requirements:
a) Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
spread characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
b) Surface spread of flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
2. Fire and Smoke Stopping:
a) Provide all cavity barriers to meet the requirements of the NFPA.
b) Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fastened in position in such a manner that they shall
not become dislodged in the event of a fire.
J. Local Factors
1. Accommodate local microclimatic conditions and grades of materials confirming their suitability and
durability.
2. An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors likely
to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the work contract. More appropriate materials
shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
K. Durability Performance Requirements
1. General:
a) The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated by the
Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
b) Metal sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions and other visual deformation or irregularity.
2. Impact and Abrasion Resistance:
a) Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects
without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The work shall resist abrasion from
cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface
appearance.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out on all work assemblies adjacent to pedestrian areas.
c) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer.
d) Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes in
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth, shoes) and any other
abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.

17 September 2015
e) Vehicular Impact Loads: Provide spandrel beams acting as vehicular barriers for passenger
cars to resist a single 26.7kN service load and 44.5kN ultimate load applied horizontally in any
direction to the spandrel beam, with anchorages or attachments capable of transferring this
load to the structure. Provide spandrel beams assuming the load to act at a height of 460mm
above the floor or ramp surface on an area not to exceed 0.93m².
3. Demountability:
a) Elements of the work shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/ or replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b) The removal of panels shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part
of the work.
L. Exceptional Loads
1. If specifically required by the Engineer, the system shall also be designed to withstand exceptional
loads such as blast pressures (e.g. terrorist bomb), high impact loads (e.g. vehicle impact) and
seismic loads (earthquakes). For such exceptional loads only, the system may be allowed to sustain
a degree of damage.
M. Seismic Performance: The work shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according
to ASCE/ SEI 7.
N. Window Washing System: Provide precast units supporting window washing system indicated to resist
pull-out and horizontal shear forces transmitted from window washing equipment.
O. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Mold Materials
1. Molds:
a) Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that shall provide
continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated,
nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that shall not bond
with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and shall not impair subsequent
surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
2. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated/ to match those
used for precast concrete design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended
liquid-release agent that shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces
and shall not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
3. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly-
placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
B. Reinforcing Materials
1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer
recycled content not less than 25% or 60%, as suitably required.
2. Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M, Grade 420, deformed.
3. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A706/ A706M, deformed.
4. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M Grade 420 or ASTM A706/
A706M, deformed bars, ASTM A767/ A767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized and chromate
wash treated after fabrication and bending.
5. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M, Grade 420 or ASTM A706/
A706M, deformed bars, ASTM A775/ A775M or ASTM A934/ A934M epoxy coated.

17 September 2015
6. Steel Bar Mats: In accordance with ASTM A184/ A184M, fabricated from ASTM A615/ A615M Grade
420 or ASTM A706/ A706M, deformed bars, assembled with clips.
7. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: In accordance with ASTM A1064, fabricated from as-drawn
or galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
8. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: In accordance with ASTM A1064/ A1064M, flat sheet.
9. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: In accordance with ASTM A884/ A884M, Class A coated, plain or
deformed, flat sheet, Type 1 bendable or Type 2 non-bendable coating.
10. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place according to PCI MNL 117S.
C. Prestressing Tendons
1. Prestressing Strand: In accordance with ASTM A416/ A416M Grade 1860, uncoated, 7-wire, low-
relaxation strand.
a) Coat un-bonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor in accordance with ASTM D1743
and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices and coupler
assemblies.
D. Concrete Materials
1. Portland Cement:
a) In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
b) For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type,
brand and mill source.
2. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C33, with coarse
aggregates in accordance with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of
exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for the Project.
a) Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable, free of material that reacts with
cement or causes staining, to match selected finish sample.
1. Gradation: Uniformly graded/ Gap graded.
b) Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as

coarse aggregate, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
3. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C330, with absorption less
than 11%.
4. Coloring Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments
or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable and nonfading.
5. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting or strength of
concrete and in accordance with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117S.
6. Air-Entraining Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other required admixtures.
7. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not
contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15% chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.
a) Water-Reducing Admixtures: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type A.
b) Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type B.
c) Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type D.
d) Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type E.

17 September 2015
e) High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type F.
f) High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/

C494M, Type G.
g) Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C1017/ C1017 M.
E. Steel Connection Materials
1. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
2. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold
finished, AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties
of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
3. Carbon-Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A283/ A283M.
4. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: In accordance with ASTM A572/ A572M.
5. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, Grade B.
6. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A496 or ASTM A706/ A706M.
7. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A325M, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563M and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM
F436M.
8. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non-galvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be
embedded in concrete, in accordance with requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead and
chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79/ SSPC-
Paint 25 in accordance with SSPC-PA 1.
9. Welding Electrodes: In accordance with AWS standards.
F. Stainless Steel Connection Materials
1. Stainless Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.
2. Stainless Steel Bolts and Studs: In accordance with ASTM F593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts
and studs, stainless steel nuts and flat, stainless steel washers.
a) Lubricate threaded parts of stainless steel bolts with an anti-seize thread lubricant during
assembly.
3. Stainless Steel Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A276, with minimum mechanical properties
of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
G. Bearing Pads
1. Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended
by precast fabricator for application:
a) Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100% polychloroprene (neoprene)

elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70,
in accordance with ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength 15.5MPa, ASTM D412.
b) Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented

synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, in accordance with
ASTM D2240, capable of supporting a compressive stress of 20.7MPa with no cracking,
splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of the pad. Test 1 No. specimen for every 200
pads used in the Project.
c) Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or

mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.
d) High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, non-leaching, plastic strip.

17 September 2015
H. Grout Materials
1. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, in accordance with ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural
sand, ASTM C144 or ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2½ parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
2. Non-metallic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout

containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, in accordance with ASTM C1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and
C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time.
3. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin, in accordance with ASTM C881/
C881M, of type, grade and class to suit installation requirements.
I. Concrete Mixtures
1. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
a) Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20% of Portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and
silica fume to 10% of Portland cement by weight.
2. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast
plant personnel at the architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
3. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI
318M or PCI MNL 117S when tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/ C1218M.
4. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face mixtures/ face and backup mixtures/ full-depth
mixture/ face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory
trial batch or Site test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on the Project,
to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
a) Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa minimum.
b) Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
5. Water Absorption: 6% by weight or 14% by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117S.
6. Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or Site
test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on the Project, to provide
lightweight concrete with the following properties:
a) Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa.
b) Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 1842kg/ m³, ±48kg/ m³, according to ASTM
C567.
7. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content in accordance with PCI MNL 117S.
8. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Metalwork General: All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set
out in the Specification.
K. Stainless Steel
1. Unless otherwise specified, use austenitic, non magnetic, 1.4401 (316) to suit the application.
2. Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant Work Sections of the
Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria specified
for the particular element or components.
3. Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 316.
4. Bar Stock: In accordance with ASTM A276, Type 316.

17 September 2015
5. Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A269, Type 316, seamless welded.
6. Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard
of flatness. Tension leveled.
7. Finish: In accordance with AISI No. 4 or 6 (satin finish).
8. Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel grade A2 or grade A4. Select the
property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements.
L. Corrosion-Resistant Coating
1. Cold-applied, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat.
2. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other
deleterious impurities.
M. Sealants
1. Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2. Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
a) Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the required
fire resistance requirement.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims and other accessories required to
install architectural precast concrete units.
B. Insulated Panel Accessories
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C578, with square edges or ship-
lap edges, as suitably required.
2. Wythe Connectors: Glass-fiber and vinyl-ester polymer connectors/ Polypropylene pin connectors/
Stainless steel pin connectors/ Bent galvanized reinforcing bars or galvanized welded wire trusses/
Cylindrical metal sleeve anchors manufactured to connect wythes of precast concrete panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General
1. The panel units shall be manufactured to sizes, patterns and profiles as indicated on the Design
Drawings and be within the specified tolerance deviations.
2. The panels shall be manufactured off-Site in a controlled factory environment in accordance with
Precast/ Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) MNL 117S.
3. Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of the molds immediately
before each reuse and of each unit as soon as possible after demolding. Make adjustments to molds
as necessary.
4. All hand forming details shall be carried out before the material has achieved its initial set, to ensure
complete bonding.
5. Curing methods shall be adopted to achieve sufficient strength for the demolding process.
B. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware
with sufficient anchorage and embedment in accordance with design requirements. Accurately position
for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage
hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.
1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to American Welding
Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

17 September 2015
C. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps,
hangers and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and
adjacent construction.
D. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated
on the Design Drawings.
E. Cast-in openings larger than 250mm in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand
without the Engineer's acceptance.
F. Reinforcement: In accordance with the recommendations in PCI MNL 117S for fabricating, placing and
supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy
the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in
ASTM A775/ A775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat
bar ends after cutting.
2. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-
placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure
on finished surfaces.
3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 19mm minimum coverage. Arrange, space and securely
tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie
ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 19mm minimum concrete cover.
Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 38mm when units are exposed to corrosive
environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports
to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished,
exposed concrete surfaces.
5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
G. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation and erection stresses.
H. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pre-tensioning or post-tensioning
methods in accordance with PCI MNL 117S.
1. Delay de-tensioning or post-tensioning of precast, prestressed architectural concrete units until

concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established
by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.
2. De-tension pre-tensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat- cutting
tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.
3. If concrete has been heat cured, de-tension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid
dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
4. Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich or epoxy paint to avoid corrosion
and possible rust spots.
I. Comply with the requirements in PCI MNL 117S and requirements in this Work Section for measuring,
mixing, transporting and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
J. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 25mm or 1.5 times the
maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.
K. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast
concrete units.
1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
L. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging
reinforcement and built-in items and minimize pour lines, honeycombing or entrapped air on surfaces.
Use equipment and procedures in accordance with PCI MNL 117S.

17 September 2015
1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for
the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/ Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
M. Comply with PCI MNL 117S for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
N. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent
markings, in accordance with markings indicated on the Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark
casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.
O. Cure concrete, in accordance with the requirements in PCI MNL 117S, by moisture retention without
heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on
performance or appearance of final product.
P. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that are not in accordance with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI
MNL 117S and the Engineer's acceptance.
Q. Mold Fabrication
1. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due
to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and de-tensioning
operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid
contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.
a) Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing
and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with
form-release agent.
2. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
a) Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
b) Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly radiused.
c) Tool joints to a slightly concave/ grapevine/ V-shape when pointing grout is thumbprint hard.
3. Clean faces and joints of brick facing.
4. Fill anchor holes with sealant filler and install anchors/ epoxy filler and install anchors with elastomeric
anchor sleeve at back surface of stone.
a) Install polyethylene sheet to prevent bond between back of stone facing and concrete substrate
and to ensure no passage of precast matrix to stone surface.
b) Install 3mm polyethylene-foam bond breaker to prevent bond between back of stone facing
and concrete substrate and to ensure no passage of precast matrix to stone surface. Maintain
minimum projection requirements of stone anchors into concrete substrate.
R. Fabrication Tolerances
1. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel is in accordance with PCI MNL 117S
product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.
2. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel is in accordance with the following
product tolerances:
a) Overall height and width of units, measured at the face exposed to view, as follows:
1. 3m or under, ±3mm.
2. 3m to 6m, to +3mm, -5mm.
3. 6m to 12m, ±6mm.

17 September 2015
4. Each additional 3m, ±1.5mm.
b) Overall height and width of units, measured at the face not exposed to view, as follows:
1. 3m or under, ±6mm.
2. 3m to 6m, +6mm, -10mm.
3. 6m to 12m, ±10mm.
4. Each additional 3m, ±3mm.
c) Total thickness or flange thickness: +6mm, -3mm.
d) Rib thickness: ±3mm.
e) Rib to edge of flange: ±3mm.
f) Distance between ribs: ±3mm.
g) Variation from square or designated skew (difference in length of the 2 diagonal

measurements): ±3mm per 1830mm or 13mm total, whichever is greater.
h) Length and width of block-outs and openings within 1 unit: ±6mm.
i) Location and dimension of block-outs hidden from view and used for HVAC and utility
penetrations: ±19mm.
j) Dimensions of haunches: ±6mm.
k) Haunch bearing surface deviation from specified plane: ±3mm.
l) Difference in relative position of adjacent haunch bearing surfaces from specified relative
position: ±6mm.
m) Bowing: ± L/ 360, maximum 25mm.
n) Local smoothness: ±6mm per 3m.
o) Warping: 1.5mm per 300mm of distance from nearest adjacent corner.
p) Tipping and flushness of plates: ±6mm.
q) Dimensions of Architectural features and rustications: ±3mm.
3. Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on the Shop
Drawings.
a) Weld plates: ±25mm.
b) Inserts: ±13mm.
c) Handling devices: ±75mm.
d) Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric: ±6mm where position has structural implications or
affects concrete cover; otherwise, ±13mm.
e) Reinforcing steel extending out of member: ±13mm of plan dimensions.
f) Tendons: ±6mm, vertical, ±25mm, horizontal.
g) Location of rustication joints: ±3mm.
h) Location of opening within panel: ±6mm.

17 September 2015
i) Location of flashing reglets: ±6mm.
j) Location of flashing reglets at edge of panel: ±3mm.
k) Reglets for glazing gaskets: ±3mm.
l) Electrical outlets, hose bibs: ±13mm.
m) Location of bearing surface from end of member: ±6mm.
n) Allowable rotation of plate, channel inserts and electrical boxes: 2% rotation or 6mm maximum
over the full dimension of unit.
o) Position of sleeve: ±13mm.
p) Location of window washer track or buttons: ±3mm.
4. Brick-Faced Architectural Precast Concrete Units: Restrict the following misalignments to 2% of

number of bricks in a unit.
a) Alignment of mortar joints:
1. Jog in alignment: 3mm.
2. Alignment with panel centerline: ±3mm.
b) Variation in width of exposed mortar joints: ±3mm.
c) Tipping of individual bricks from the panel plane of exposed brick surface: ±1.5mm, -6mm less
than or equal to depth of form liner joint.
d) Exposed brick surface parallel to primary control surface of panel: +6mm, -3mm.
e) Individual brick step in face from panel plane of exposed brick surface: +1.5mm, -6mm less
than or equal to depth of form liner joint.
5. Stone Veneer-Faced Architectural Precast Concrete Units:
a) Variation in cross-sectional dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated:

±6mm.
b) Variation in joint width: 3mm in 900mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
c) Variation in plane between adjacent stone units (Edging): 1.5mm difference between planes
of adjacent units.
S. Metalwork, General
1. The Detailed Design of sections, material thicknesses and the dimensions indicated on the Design
Drawings shall be maintained within specified tolerances.
2. Before and after making permanent connections in frames and other structural elements, which are
assembled before delivery to Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
3. Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with the Design Drawings and
the Specification.
4. Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fastened where
moisture may be present or occur.
5. Unless otherwise specified, concealed items shall be mill finished aluminum in internal conditions
only or hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M. Any cut edges shall be
treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
6. Finished components shall be rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises. Moving
parts shall move freely and without binding.

17 September 2015
7. Unless specified otherwise, miter corner junctions of identical sections.
8. Cold Formed Work: Use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight
arrises.
9. Adhesive Bonding:
a) Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or

chemically.
b) Use adhesives to the manufacturer's written recommendations.
c) Form bond under pressure.
10. Welding/ Brazing, General:
a) Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined.
b) Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary
attachment.
c) Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.
d) Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in
completed work.
e) Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
f) Metal arc welding shall be to American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other
methods subject to review by the Engineer.
g) Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
tungsten-arc welding and it shall be carried out by a procedure qualified and certified to AWS
D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding
Code - Aluminum."
1. Welds shall be continuous and of a material and technique suitable to the sections being
assembled.
2. Weld finish shall be smooth with all flux residues removed and no surface defects (e.g.
undercut, porosity and deep ridges).
h) Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces.
T. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
U. Mild Steel
1. Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum and local distortion
rendered negligible in the final fabrication. Corrections, if necessary, shall be undertaken by a method
which has been agreed to by the Engineer.
2. No welds other than those indicated on the Shop Drawings, even for temporary attachments or
repairs, shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the Engineer. If welded temporary
connections are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be in accordance
with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
3. External visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section steelwork
shall be positioned in the work so as to be non-visible.
V. Aluminum
1. All extruded aluminum alloy members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade of aluminum
alloy in accordance with the performance requirements.

17 September 2015
2. Aluminum panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same direction.
3. Aluminum extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not be
acceptable.
4. Aluminum sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
W. Stainless Steel
1. Unless otherwise specified, welds to visible areas of stainless steel shall be ground smooth to
achieve a seamless surface. Heat tints shall be removed using light abrasives, pickling paste, wire
brushing or similar to achieve continuity with the specified finish. Areas difficult to access shall be
manually finished if necessary.
2. All welds shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel". Distortion due to thermal movement shall be minimized using jigs or other
methods as appropriate during welding. Welding methods and consumables shall be chosen as
most appropriate to the type, thickness, shape and location of joints to meet the performance levels
required and have mechanical properties at least equal to the original base metal. In addition,
consumables shall have an equal or superior corrosion resistance to the base metal being welded.
All welding recommendations required to meet other relevant standards as specified shall also
apply. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall comply with AWS requirements.
3. Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication and
installation of stainless steel elements/ materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the simultaneous
presence of any of the following:
a) Tensile stresses.
b) Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
c) Aggressive local environmental conditions.
d) Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion cracking.
4. Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel: After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
X. Accuracy of Fabrication
1. Exact Site dimensions shall be taken as necessary before starting fabrication. Report any
discrepancies to the Engineer without delay and obtain instructions before proceeding.
2. Permissible deviations for panels:
a) Length: ±1.5mm.
b) Width: ±1.5mm.
c) Squareness: ±1.5mm in 1m (taking the longer of 2 sides at any corner as a baseline and
measuring the deviation of the shorter side from the baseline perpendicular).
d) Flatness (of panels with a core thickness of 12mm and over, as delivered to Site): ±1mm under
a 600mm straightedge.
3. Finished dimensions of components must be such that the required accuracy of the finished linings/
paneling and joints can be achieved.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Quality Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117S requirements.
2. Employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's quality
control and testing methods.

17 September 2015
a) Allow the testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment,
concrete placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with the testing agency and provide
samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and
evaluation.
3. Strength of precast concrete units shall be considered deficient if units fail in accordance with
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318M requirements for concrete strength.
4. Testing Requirements:
a) If there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not be
in accordance with ACI 318M requirements, the precaster shall employ an Independent Testing
Agency to obtain, prepare and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine
compressive strength according to ASTM C42/ C42M.
1. A minimum of 3 representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength from
locations directed by the Engineer.
2. Cores shall be tested in an air-dry condition.
3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores shall be considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85% of 28-day design compressive strength and
no single core is less than 75% of 28-day design compressive strength.
4. Test reports shall be furnished by the manufacturer in accordance with the Specification.
The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports independently verified for each type
and class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance
requirements of the Specification. Previously completed test reports shall be acceptable
if current and indicative of products used on this Project.
5. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units are in accordance
with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete
mixture that has no coarse aggregate and finish to match adjacent precast concrete
surfaces.
B. Air Permeability Tests
1. Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E283.
2. Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E283.
C. Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests
1. Tests shall be carried out adopting either the static or the dynamic procedures, as appropriate to
the system type and expected conditions, set out below:
a) Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
b) Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
2. Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
D. Wind Resistance Tests
1. Perform wind tunnel testing as specified in the 'Wind Tunnel Testing Specification' by the Structural
Engineer, to establish various governing wind pressures for the wall assembly.
2. Provide structural performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind-load design pressure when
tested according to ASTM E330.
3. Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures
when tested according to ASTM E330.
E. Structural Test Performance in accordance with ASTM E330 as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.

17 September 2015
2. When tested at 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of
main framing members exceeding 0.2% of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Off-Site Test Sequence
1. The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
2. No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the testing authority.
3. If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken. However, if any
modification is undertaken that, in the opinion of the independent testing authority or witness,
invalidates earlier test results, the sequence shall commence again at the first test. This requirement
is not applicable to glass breakage during the wind resistance safety test when replacement of a
pane of glass may be carried out without re-starting the whole sequence.
G. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended. Refer to Section
079200 Joint Sealants.
2.8 FINISHES
A. General
1. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain and other obvious defects. Corners, including false
joints, shall be uniform, straight and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast
concrete units to match approved sample panels and as follows:
a) PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers
indicated.
b) As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks and honeycombs.
c) Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners or inserts to provide surfaces free of pockets,
streaks and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture.
d) Bushhammer Finish: Use power or hand tools to remove matrix and fracture coarse aggregates.
e) Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and
washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces after
form removal.
f) Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning
procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
g) Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques and
cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect hardware,
connections and insulation from acid attach.
h) Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing
procedures.
i) Polished Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and
rubbing procedures.
j) Sand-Embedment Finish: Use selected stones placed in a sand bed in bottom of mold, with
sand removed after curing.
k) Finish exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
l) Finish exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel finish.
m) Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the structural openings, substrate,
adjacent construction and the conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and levels,
and surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing has attained
minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other structure is complete.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads and other accessories required for connecting architectural
precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
2. Install architectural precast concrete level, plumb and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment
as units are being permanently connected.
a) Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are
being installed. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
b) Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as installation
progresses.
c) Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with
surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
d) Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 19mm.
B. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting or as otherwise
indicated on the Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges and spacers as soon as practical
after connecting and grouting are completed.
C. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.
D. Welding: In accordance with applicable AWS D1.1/ D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes,
appearance, quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by Site welding or cutting
operations and provide non-combustible shields as required.
2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified
by AWS.
3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and apply a minimum
0.1mm thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A780.
4. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and reprime
damaged painted surfaces.
5. Remove, re-weld or repair incomplete and defective welds.
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding or other approved means to prevent loosening of
nuts after final adjustment.
1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections,
properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply
specified bolt torque and check 25% of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench.

17 September 2015
F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard
enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.
Place grout to finish smooth, level and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp
for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before
it affects finishes or hardens.
G. Provide isolating tape, plastic washers or other acceptable to prevent bimetallic corrosion between
dissimilar metals and between aluminum components and cementitious surfaces
H. Touch-up galvanizing to bolts, welds and burned or scratched surfaces.
I. Movement: Install movement joints. Keep joints clear of obstructions. Prevent friction between moving
surfaces to ensure unrestricted and noiseless movement.
J. Installed work shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,
waves or damage.
K. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
L. Fastening Directly to Structure
1. Provide and install all fastening devices, including framing, bearing brackets and movement
fastenings and carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting,
cutting for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast in, making good, including grouting-in of anchor bolts,
and fastening whatsoever necessary.
2. All fastenings shall be to the slab edge face condition, to be coordinated with the superstructure
design.
M. Installation Tolerances
1. Install architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without
exceeding the non-cumulative installation tolerances of PCI MNL 117S, Appendix I.
2. Install architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square and true, without exceeding the
following noncumulative installation tolerances:
a) Plan location from building grid datum: ±13mm.
b) Plan location from centerline of steel: ±13mm.
c) Top Elevation from nominal top elevation as follows:
1. Exposed Individual Panel: ±6mm.
2. Non-Exposed Individual Panel: ±13mm.
3. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6mm.
4. Non-Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 13mm.
d) Support Elevation from nominal support elevation as follows:
1. Maximum Low: 13mm.
2. Maximum High: 6mm.
e) Maximum plumb variation over the lesser of height of structure or 30m: 25mm.
f) Plumb in any 3m of element height: 6mm.
g) Maximum jog in alignment of matching edges: 6mm.
h) Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): ±6mm.
i) Maximum Joint Taper: 10mm.

17 September 2015
j) Joint Taper in 3m: 6mm.
k) Maximum jog in alignment of matching faces: 6mm.
l) Differential bowing or camber, between adjacent members of same design: 6mm.
m) Opening Height between Spandrels: ±6mm.
3. Submit a detailed list of tolerances to which the work will be installed for review by the Engineer.
As a minimum this shall include the following:
a) Position on plan.
b) Level.
c) Alignment.
d) Joints between.
e) Diagonal.
f) Eccentricity.
g) Inclination.
4. Sufficient analysis of the installation sequence and the overall Method Statement shall be performed
to ensure that the installation tolerances stated above are met.
5. The Shop Drawings show the dimensional and detailed provisions intended to accommodate the
construction tolerances of surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the work relate
satisfactorily to the Work as a whole.
N. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the Work.
2. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bimetallic corrosion between dissimilar metals and
to isolate aluminum components from cementitious surfaces.
with AWS requirements.
4. Vent holes in hollow sections shall be sealed in a manner that shall prevent the ingress of moisture.
The proposed method of achieving this requirement shall be submitted for review by the Engineer.
3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform installation inspections and prepare
reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
C. Site welds shall be subject to visual inspections and non-destructive testing in accordance with ASTM
E165 or ASTM E709. High-strength bolted connections shall be subject to inspections.
D. Testing Agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to the Contractor and the Engineer.
E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it is not in accordance with
specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine that
replaced or additional work is in accordance with specified requirements.

17 September 2015
G. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
witnessed by the Structural Engineer.
3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning
1. Remove debris and unused materials from Site upon completion and dispose of safely. Clean
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers and without
scratching surfaces. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials that will damage adjacent work.
2. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
3. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces
and adjacent materials immediately.
4. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after installation and completion of joint treatment
to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt and stains.
5. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's

recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff
fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage
due to cleaning operations.
6. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete
finishes or damage adjacent materials.
B. Adjusting
1. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Repair
or replace damaged or defective items to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Repair architectural precast concrete units to the acceptance of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves
the right to reject repaired units that are not in accordance with requirements.
3. Precast concrete manufacturer shall develop appropriate repair mixtures and techniques during the
production sample approval process.
4. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture and uniformity of
adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired
work when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 6m.
5. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM
A780.
6. Wire brush clean and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.
7. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs are not in
accordance with requirements.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General
1. Protect exposed surfaces during and after installation, with boards, coverings, low tack tapes and
adhesive film. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for inspection; remove immediately
before Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 035400 -- CAST UNDERLAYMENT 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 4
2.4 FABRICATION 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 6
3.1 EXAMINATION 6
3.2 PREPARATION 6
3.3 INSTALLATION 7
3.4 FINISHES 9
3.5 CURING 9
3.6 JOINT FILLING 10
3.9 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 035400 CAST UNDERLAYMENT
17 September 2015
SECTION 035400 -- CAST UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Requirements, the Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
1. Refer to the Contractor's Responsibilities in Division 01 General Requirements, Section 011000

1. Underlayment screeds.
1. Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
3. Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 035400 / 1 CAST UNDERLAYMENT
17 September 2015
1. Movement joints and edge restraints, minimum 300mm long.
1. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations and average depths of underlayment
screeds based on survey of substrate conditions.
2. Product data on materials and components for each type of underlayment screed proposed by the
Contractor.
the system.
8. Method Statement for movement control coordination.
9. Quality Plan.
10. Certified test data based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for underlayment screeds.
11. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment screed in addition to floor-covering

systems certifying that products are compatible.
12. Field quality control test reports.
1. Movement joints and edge restraints, minimum 300mm long.
1. Warranties.
A. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist who has at least 5 years' experience performing similar work, is
certified to BS EN ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agent qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM
E329 for testing indicated.
C. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
F. Quality Benchmark Installation

17 September 2015
1. First structural bay of each underlayment screed type in location to be agreed between the Contractor
and the Engineer.
G. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems are in accordance
with the specified performance requirements.
2. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels, indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components,
and application.
B. If a ready-mixed concrete shall be used, deliver directly to the point of use and handle and place in
accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code for concrete quality, mixing and
placing.
C. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature
and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting
underlayment screed performance.
1. Place underlayment screed only when ambient temperature and temperature of base slabs are
between 10°C and 35°C. For temperatures above 29°C, provide in accordance with ACI 305.1
regarding hot-weather application guidelines to ensure a successful installation.
B. For underlayment screed using ready-mixed concrete, maintain work in a damp condition for at least 7
days after placing. Control the rate of drying out after curing to minimize shrinkage. Cover work with
polythene sheeting to control evaporation; do not use a spray or roller applied curing agents.
C. Close areas to traffic during underlayment screed application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or accepted
equivalent:
1. Unimix.
2. Arabian Ready Mix.
3. Ready Mix Beton.
4. Dubai Ready Mix.
5. S.S. Lootah.
6. Conmix.
B. Type SCR-201 Un-bonded Screed
1. Description: Sand-cement screed over membrane to suitable substrate to locations as indicated on

the Design Drawings.
2. Product Reference: To be determined by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.

17 September 2015
3. Substrate: Concrete slab.
4. Separation Layer: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 125 micrometers thick; 500 gage.
5. Thickness: Nominal 25mm to 40mm laid to falls/ level.
6. The surface shall be troweled to receive bedding of applied floor finish.
C. Type SCR-301 Floating Screed
1. Description: Sand-cement screed laid over waterproofing membrane and insulation over suitable
substrate to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Product Reference: To be determined by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
3. Substrate: Concrete slab.
4. Thickness: Minimum 50mm laid to falls/ level.
5. DPM/ Separation Layer: As recommended by the manufacturer and as accepted by the Engineer.
6. Insulation board: Extruded polyethylene or acceptable equivalent.
7. The surface shall be troweled to receive bedding of applied floor finish.
A. Structural Movement
1. All underlayment screeds shall withstand all movements of the structure under all design loads or
combination of loads as specified in the Structural Specifications, without any damage, cracking or
breaking up of the screed.
2. All underlayment screeds shall accommodate all structural expansion joints and construction control
joints.
3. Weight of all underlayment screeds, including associated reinforcements shall be coordinated with
the structural design of the building to ensure that maximum weights, when wet, shall not be
exceeded.
4. Loads due to floor finishes over the underlayment screed shall be accommodated along with loads
imposed during normal service conditions and maintenance operations. All loads shall be confirmed
and accepted by the Engineer.
B. Physical Properties
1. Compressive Strength (at 28 Days): In accordance with ASTM C109.
2. Flexural Strength (at 28 Days): In accordance with ASTM C580.
3. Day Shrinkage: In accordance with ASTM C531.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Underlayment Screed: Underlayment screed shall be in accordance with the relevant parts specified in
the International Building Code.
B. Recycled Material Components:
1. Provide recycled aggregates that are in accordance with the requirements as stated in Dubai Green
Building Regulations and Specifications.
2. Provide materials sourced from the region that are in accordance with the requirements as stated
in Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
C. Curing Materials

17 September 2015
1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to

fresh concrete.
2. Absorptive Cover: Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 305g/ m²
when dry, in accordance with AASHTO M 182.
3. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet, in accordance with

ASTM C171.
4. Water: Potable.
5. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Type 1, Class B, 25% solids content
(minimum), in accordance with ASTM C309.
D. Related Materials
1. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: 2-component, semi-rigid, 100% solids, epoxy resin with a Type A Shore
durometer hardness of 80 or aromatic polyurea with a Type A Shore durometer hardness range of
90 to 95, in accordance with ASTM D2240.
2. Joint-Filler Strips: Asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in accordance with ASTM D1751 or cork or self-
expanding cork in accordance with ASTM D1751.
3. Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II.
4. Sand: Fine aggregate passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, in accordance with ASTM C404.
5. Water: Potable.
a) VOC Content: Adhesive products shall be in accordance with VOC limits as stated in Dubai
Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
6. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard product. Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation for
additional requirements.
a) The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapor.
b) The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or when poured-
in-place during the life of the Work.
c) Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have
a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than 5.
d) The selected insulation shall be in accordance with all relevant standards and be certified
accordingly.
E. Mixes: Comply with the proportions and procedures recommended by the manufacturer for the substrates
indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Reinforcement in underlayment screeds shall be in accordance with the International Building Code and
manufacturer's recommendations for the underlayment screed type to the acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Separating Layer for Un-bonded Concrete Screeds: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, provide
1000 gage polythene separating layer on the structural base and dress up the walls with a 6mm polythene
backer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Movement Joints: Coordinate movement joints in underlayment screeds with the movement joint layout
for the associated finish material covering the work of this Work Section in accordance with the layout
developed by the Subcontractor and with locations of movement joints in concrete slab substrate. The
Contractor shall determine depth of movement joint installation with all parties.
1. Control joints shall be movement joints recommended in writing by the manufacturer to

accommodate floor finishes as indicated on the Design Drawings and shall generally comprise the
following:

17 September 2015
a) Inserts, colors shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer.
b) Metal side plates shall be either aluminum or stainless steel as recommended by the
manufacturer to suit the service conditions. Finishes shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer.
c) Wire ties shall be situated in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Perimeter movement shall be allowed for at the edges of screeds against solid walls. A 6mm closed
cell compressible polyethylene strip shall be installed to suit the screed depth with a 2-part
polysulphide sealant to the acceptance of the Engineer. Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the substrate, adjacent construction
and conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions of supporting construction and
surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Verify that base concrete slabs are in accordance with scratch finish requirements specified in the
Structural Specification, Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for moisture-vapor emission as measured
by the anhydrous calcium chloride test kit based upon test method ASTM F1869 and for capillary moisture
by the plastic sheet method in accordance with ASTM D4263.
D. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete.
Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of 6mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to underlayment screed manufacturer's written
instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of floor
underlayment screed.
3. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 13mm and fill with
semi-rigid joint filler.
4. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab, mechanically remove a 100mm
wide and 0 to 25mm deep, tapered wedge of concrete and retexture surface.
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams, and other locations, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed surface, unless
otherwise indicated. Coordinate with finish floor surface application and Subcontractor's Work.
2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than 1 No. length is required,
lace or clip sections together.
C. Suitability of Bases
1. Floating Screeds Type:
a) Bases shall be flat to accommodate the specified levels and flatness of finished surfaces,
considering the permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of the underlayment screed.
b) Bases shall be clean and free from contamination, including but not limited to plaster, dirt, dust
and oil.
c) Bases shall be dry to accept the insulation and screed and so achieve the specified
requirements.

17 September 2015
d) Insulation shall be laid with tight butt joints and a polythene separating sheet with 50mm laps,
unless otherwise specified by the insulation manufacturer.
e) Mesh shall be laid with 50mm overlaps and tied securely with tying wire at 300mm.o.c. intervals
or as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Un-bonded Screeds:
a) Before starting work, bases shall be flat enough to permit specified levels and flatness of
finished surfaces, considering the permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of the
screed.
b) Bases shall be clean and free from plaster, dirt, dust and oil.
c) Bases shall be dry to accept the screed and to achieve the specified requirements.
D. Screed Preparation
1. Screeds shall be mixed in a force action mixer, of a type to be determined, laid semi-dry, comprising
3 parts sharp graded sand to 1 part 6mm aggregate to 1 part ordinary portland cement, accurately
batched by volume.
2. Screeds shall be cured using polythene sheeting or as specified by the manufacturer. Areas likely
to be subject to excessive wear before the floor covering is laid shall be protected to a suitable level.
3. Account shall be taken of high relative humidity levels that may be encountered on Site and
adjustment of the curing procedures adopted accordingly.
E. Proprietary Screed Preparation
1. Preparation and installation of proprietary screeds shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
2. The Work shall be laid by specialists who are trained and approved licensees of the proprietary
additive manufacturer.
3. Screeds shall be cured using polythene sheeting or as specified by the manufacturer. Areas likely
to be subject to excessive wear before the floor covering is laid shall be protected to a suitable level.
To this end the required standard of protection shall be ascertained.
4. Account shall be taken of high relative humidity levels that may be encountered on Site and
adjustment of the curing procedures adopted accordingly, with the manufacturer's recommendation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment screeds in accordance with the International Building Code.
1. Separating Layer Requirements:
a) A minimum of 100mm lap at joints between separating layer membranes shall be maintained.
Adhesive bond the lap joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
b) Do not allow the membranes to be damaged before or during the laying of screed.
2. Conduits under Floating Screeds:
a) Conduits shall be secured in position before commencing the Work.
b) Where floating screeds have been laid, they shall be isolated at all interfaces.
3. Pipe Ducts/ Trunking: Before laying screed, ensure that preformed access ducts are securely fixed
to the base and accurately leveled in relation to the finished floor surface.
4. Batching Requirements: It shall be ensured that proportions of mixes made with dense aggregates
are specified by weight and are batched by weight. Volume batching shall only be permitted on the
basis of the previously established weight: volume relationship(s) of the particular materials, using
accurate gauge boxes.

17 September 2015
5. Mixing Requirements:
a) Water content of mixes shall be the minimum necessary to achieve full compaction and low
enough to prevent excessive water being brought to the surface during compaction.
b) Materials shall be mixed thoroughly to a uniform consistency. Mixes other than non-fines shall
be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. A free fall type (drum) mixer shall not
be used.
c) Material shall be used while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
d) Use ready-mixed retarded screed mortar within working time and Site temperatures as
recommended by the manufacturer. Do not retemper.
6. Joint Requirements: Unless otherwise specified, screeds shall be cast continuously, as far as
possible without defined joints, using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays. The positions of bay
joints, as shown on the Shop Drawings, shall be confirmed and coordinated as follows:
a) Where the locations of bay joints are not shown on the Shop Drawings, acceptance shall be
obtained from the Engineer before starting work.
b) Forms, where applicable, shall be square edged with surfaces securely fixed. Wet material
shall be compacted thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping.
c) Alternatively, screeds shall be cast continuously, bay joints being formed with proprietary
dividing strips.
d) Fasten structural movement joints in accordance with the manufacturer's written

recommendations. Also, as follows:
1. Be responsible for the installation and performance of all floor interfaces and seek
confirmation of movement and loading requirements.
2. Structural movement joints shall be situated immediately over or cantilevered in relation

to the structural joints in the slab.
3. Joints shall be installed in lengths of 4000mm with the minimum length at the end of runs
being at least 1000mm. At joins, joint covers shall either be invisibly spliced or joint sections
staggered such that the joint is continuously linked.
4. The horizontal width of the movement joint shall be set at the time of installation, taking
account of thermal expansion at the time of installation.
5. Movement joint covers shall be affixed to the base (and upstands) by means of expanding
bolt anchors at centers recommended by the movement joint manufacturer. All anchor
bolts shall be zinc plated.
6. Movement joint covers shall be affixed such that the upper surface of the joint shall finish
flush with the top of adjacent floor finishes.
B. Installation Tolerances
1. Levels of Underlayment Screeds: The permissible deviation in level of surface of underlayment

screeds (allowing for thickness of coverings) from datum shall be ±5mm.
2. Flatness of Underlayment Screeds: Sudden irregularities shall not occur. When measured with a
slip gage, the variation in gap under a straightedge placed anywhere on the surface shall be not
more than the following:
a) Underlayment Screeds that shall receive sheet or tile finishes bedded in adhesive or mortar
as indicated within other Specification Work Sections:
1. 5mm under a 3000mm straightedge.
2. 2mm under a 1000mm straightedge.
3. Enclosed staircases: 2mm under a 1000mm straightedge.

17 September 2015
C. Underlayment Screed Application
1. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a) Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
b) Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and

intercoat adhesion.
c) At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue
through underlayment.
2. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
3. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. Cure underlayment according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
4. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by
underlayment manufacturer.
5. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas
that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4 FINISHES
A. Timing: All finishing operations shall be carried out at optimum times in relation to the setting and hardening
of the material. Surfaces shall not be wetted to assist surface working. Cement shall not be sprinkled
onto surface.
B. On-Site Finishes
1. Troweled finish to receive applied floor finishes:
a) Screed shall be floated to an even surface with no ridges or steps.
b) Screed shall be hand or power troweled to give a uniform smooth appearance, but not a
polished surface. It shall be free from trowel marks and other blemishes and shall be suitable
to receive the specified flooring material in accordance with the Specification.
c) The surface shall be adequately protected from construction traffic.
d) If the surface of the screed is not suitable to receive the specified flooring material, it shall be
made good by application of a smoothing compound.
2. Wood Floated Finish: Use a wood float to give an even slightly coarse texture with no ridges or steps.
3. Smooth Floated Finish: Use a hand float, skip float or power float to give an even surface with no
ridges or steps.
4. Tamped: The surface shall be tamped and adequately protected from construction traffic.
3.5 CURING
A. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to underlayment screed surfaces in hot, dry, or windy
conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions
after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor underlayment screed, but before float finishing.
B. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete underlayment screed. Cure by one or a combination
of the following methods, according to concrete underlayment screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with water, continuous
water-fog spray or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed
surfaces and edges with 300mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

17 September 2015
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 300mm, and sealed
by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in 2 No. coats in continuous operations by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3
hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.6 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semi-rigid joint filler, in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions, once underlayment screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of
joint clean and dry.
C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semi-rigid joint filler flush
with top of joint after hardening.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports in accordance with requirements in Division 01 General
Requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of concrete underlayment screeds
shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows.
1. Sample Sets: Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C109/ C109M for compliance with
compressive-strength requirements.
2. Concrete underlayment screeds shall be tested for delamination by dragging a steel chain over the
surface.
3. Concrete underlayment screeds shall be tested for compliance with surface flatness and levelness
tolerances.
C. Impact and Strength
1. The screeds shall be compacted and integral with the structure in order to support heavily trafficked
public access floors. Tests shall be carried out with the Engineer present.
2. Adhesion tests shall be carried out over the area of screeding Work.
3. Material shall pass a soundness test. The maximum depth of penetrations shall not exceed 3mm
indentation.
D. Remove and replace applications of underlayment screed where test results indicate that it is not in
accordance with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine that replaced
or additional work is in accordance with specified requirements.
A. Clean off cement splashes.
B. Replace work that is out of tolerance or that has been disturbed, cracked, curled, de-bonded or is otherwise
defective.
C. Make good areas to the acceptance of the Engineer.
D. Repair and patch defective underlayment screed areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete
substrate to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3.9 PROTECTION

17 September 2015
A. General: Protect the work from damage and contamination until it is covered by following work finish
material and floor covering installation.
B. Protect freshly placed underlayment screed from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
C. Protect underlayment screeds from concentrated and rolling loads until the subsequent Work begins.
Areas likely to be subject to excessive wear before the finish material floor covering installation is laid
shall be protected to a suitable level. To this end the required standard of protection shall be ascertained
to the acceptance of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 042200 -- CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTIES 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.3 MATERIALS 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 13
3.1 EXAMINATION 13
3.2 PREPARATION 13
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 14
3.4 TOLERANCES 14
3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 16
3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 16
3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 17
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 17
3.9 LINTELS 17
3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 17
3.12 PARGING 18
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING 18
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 19

Tender Issue 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
17 September 2015
SECTION 042200 -- CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Embedded flashing.
7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1. Section 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing.
4. Section 099100 Painting.
6. Fire Strategy Report.
7. Acoustic Report.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 042200 / 1 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product Data on materials and components for use.
the system.
9. Method Statement.
10. Quality Plan.
11. Certified test data.
1. 3 No. samples of each unit type.
F. Preconstruction Testing Reports
1. Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements.

17 September 2015
1. Warranties.
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes; and
cleaning frequency.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for testing indicated.
B. Contractor's Qualifications
1. A specialist who has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates an acceptable alternative quality system.
3. Operatives shall possess a National Vocational Qualification (NVQ) in Trowel Occupations or an

acceptable equivalent qualification.
C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or
a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from a single source manufacturer
for each product required.
D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color,
for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from a single
source or producer for each aggregate.
E. Masonry Standard: In accordance with ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
F. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
G. Mock-ups
1. Sample Panels: Prior to commencement of the work, a sample panel of each type of walling, with
all options of mortar specified, in panel sizes of nominally 1800mm x 1800mm shall be built on Site.
The sample panels shall be constructed in an agreed location using randomly selected masonry
units but rejecting any that are damaged. Acceptance from the Engineer shall be obtained prior to
commencement of construction for that type. If a panel is rejected, construct other sample panels
of each type until acceptance is obtained from the Engineer.
H. Prototypes
1. Not required.
I. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. First 10m² of each type in locations to be agreed incorporating anchorage, reinforcement and
accessories where required.
J. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail in accordance with specified
requirements shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
a) Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C140 for
compressive strength.
b) Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C109/ C109M
for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention and ASTM C91 for air content.
c) Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C1019.

17 September 2015
d) Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C1314.
K. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following.
1. Masonry Units:
a) Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b) For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive
strength of units.
2. Cementitious Materials: Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mixes: Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout Mixes: Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
L. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout, include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required in accordance with the Specification. Test according
to ASTM C109/ C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention and ASTM C91
for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required in accordance with
compressive strength requirement.
M. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar
type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and
resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/
ASCE 6/ TMS 602.
A. Deliver material to Site suitably packaged to prevent damage and contamination, clearly identified with
type, grade and date of manufacture. Do not remove labels or packaging until time for use. Inspect
materials before use and reject any that are cracked, damaged or contaminated.
B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location,
cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. Protect from adverse weather,
moisture, staining and contamination with earth and other foreign materials. Allow air to circulate around
units. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Sands shall be stored separately, according to type, on clean, hard, dry standings and shall be protected
from contamination.
E. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.
F. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing
silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and
in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
G. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
H. Handle block units to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Lift with wide-belt type slings
wherever possible; do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances that might cause
staining. If required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood slides.

17 September 2015
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof
sheeting at the end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600mm down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where 1 No. wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure
cover a minimum of 600mm down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days
after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral
finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing
mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Adverse Weather
1. The works shall be installed in accordance with hot and cold weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602.
2. Do not lay blocks when the air temperature is at or below 3°C unless mortar has a minimum
temperature of 4°C when laid and walling is protected.
3. All newly erected work shall be protected from precipitation and drying out too rapidly in hot/ dry
conditions by covering thoroughly at all times when work is not proceeding.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. General
1. Provide an approved warranty from Taking-Over for a warranty period of 5 years.
B. Warranty Conditions for Walls
1. The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of, or due to, the following:
a) Correct selection of fire-resistant, moisture-resistant and acoustic-rated systems.
b) Cracking or opening of joints.
c) Loose or dummy work.
d) Instability or deflection under applied loads.
e) Accessories and trims, including corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:

17 September 2015
1. Juma Al Majid.
2. Phoenix Block Factory.
3. Unimix Concrete Products.
4. Al Jazeera Factory.
B. Type BLK-101 Hollow Blockwork
1. Description: Common hollow cell concrete blockwork unit with mortar, grout, reinforcement, ties and
anchors to complete the works.
2. Type: Hollow blocks.
3. Size: 400mm x 200mm.
4. Unit Thickness: 100mm.
5. Minimum Average Net-Area Compressive Strength: 7.5N/ mm² .
6. Density: Approximately 1400kg/ m³.
7. Pattern and Texture: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
8. Color: Natural cement color.
9. Bond: Running.
10. Joints: Bucket handle.
C. Type BLK-102 Hollow Blockwork
1. Description: Common hollow cell concrete blockwork unit with mortar, grout, reinforcement, ties and
3. Size: 400mm x 200mm.
5. Minimum Average Net Area Compressive Strength: 12N/ mm².
8. Bond: Running.
9. Joints: Bucket handle.
D. Type BLK-103 Hollow Blockwork
1. Description: External hollow cell concrete blockwork unit with mortar, grout, reinforcement, ties and
2. Manufacturer: Locally available manufacturer who supplies products to meet specified requirements
and acceptable to the Engineer.
4. Size: 400mm x 200mm.

17 September 2015
6. Minimum Average Net Area Compressive Strength: 12N/ mm².
9. Bond: Running.
E. Type BLK-401 AAC Blockwork
1. Description: AAC blockwork unit, for service and utility areas, including all necessary fasteners and
accessories to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: Al Jazeera Factory or acceptable equivalent.
3. Product Reference: Thermalite or acceptable equivalent.
4. Size and Dimension: 250mm x 550mm.
5. Finish and Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
6. Thickness: 150mm Single skin.
7. Average Dry Density: 550-600kg/ m³.
8. Thermal Conductivity: 0.134-0.160 w/ mK.
9. Fire Resistance: 4 hours.
10. Vertical Joint: Thin bed mortar.
11. Joints with columns to be filled with compressible material (soft mortar); Ratio:1 cement:9 sand.
12. Expanded galvanized reinforcement mesh to be used in the first two courses and every other course
until the end of column.
13. Thin Bed mortar: 3mm applied to all the horizontal and vertical joints.
F. Type BLK-402 AAC Blockwork
1. Description: AAC blockwork unit, for service and utility areas, including all necessary fasteners and
2. Manufacturer: Al Jazeera Factory or acceptable equivalent.
3. Product Reference: Thermalite or acceptable equivalent.
4. Size and Dimension: 250mm x 550mm.
6. Thickness: 200mm Single skin.
7. Average Dry Density: 550-600kg/ m³.
8. Thermal Conductivity: 0.134-0.160 w/ mK.
9. Fire Resistance: 4 hours.
10. Vertical Joint: Thin bed mortar.
11. Joints with columns to be filled with compressible material (soft mortar); Ratio:1 cement:9 sand.
12. Expanded galvanized reinforcement mesh to be used in the first two courses and every other course
until the end of column.

17 September 2015
13. Thin Bed mortar: 3mm applied to all the horizontal and vertical joints.
A. Specific Movements and Deflections
1. Refer to the Structural Specification and Division 01 General Requirements.
2. The work shall be detailed and installed to allow for and withstand all deflections and tolerances of
the main structural elements under all design loads or combination of loads without damage or any
reduction in the performance of the work.
3. All fastenings shall be capable of providing the correct degree of movement required for the
circumstances involved, to suit deflections specified and to provide adequate stability for the work.
4. Movement joints shall be provided to accommodate all movements of the building structure.
5. Control joints shall be located at all junctions with adjoining work as indicated on the Design Drawings.
B. Loads: The work shall be detailed and installed to achieve adequate and satisfactory performance in
accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code.
C. Fire Requirements
1. All elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
3. The work shall achieve the specified fire ratings, including all visible and concealed support framing.
4. All requirements for fire resistance shall be in accordance with the provisions of the NFPA and the
Fire Strategy Report.
5. The work shall achieve the fire ratings as indicated on the Fire Strategy Report and tested for fire
resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
6. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
qualified testing agency.
7. Combustion Characteristics: In accordance with ASTM E136.
8. Furnish test certificates accordingly, as and when required by the Engineer.
D. Durability: The work shall be selected for durability in relation to conditions of use and shall meet the
minimum requirements in accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos in accordance with the requirements as
stated in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
B. Concrete Masonry Units, General
1. Consistency of Fair-Faced Work:
a) Agree with the manufacturer and the Engineer, methods for ensuring that the supply of concrete
masonry units to remain visible is of a consistent, even color/ texture range, batch to batch
and within batches.
b) Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous deliveries and with accepted
samples or reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive.
c) Mix units from different packs and deliveries, which vary in color to avoid undesirable variations,
patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks in the finished work.

17 September 2015
2. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
3. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units in accordance with requirements for fire-
resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E119, by equivalent
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Concrete Masonry Units:
a) Regional Materials: Refer to Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
b) Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units
and where indicated.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested
according to ASTM E514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-
repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show
no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
c) Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Engineer's
sample.
d) AAC Masonry Units: In accordance with BS EN 771-4:2001.
e) Precast AAC Masonry Units: In accordance with DMS 1 Part 3: 2004.
f) PAAC Wall Construction Units: In accordance with ASTM C1386-98.
g) CMUs: In accordance with ASTM C90.
h) Concrete Building Brick: In accordance with ASTM C55.
i) Concrete Facing Brick: In accordance with ASTM C1634.
5. Concrete and Masonry Lintels:
a) General, provide one of the following:
1. Concrete Lintels:
a) In accordance with ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area
compressive strength not less than CMUs.
b) Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels in accordance with the requirements in

Structural Specification, Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete, and with
reinforcing bars indicated.
C. Mortar and Grout Materials
1. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be extracted, harvested,
or recovered, as well as manufactured as indicated on the Dubai Green Building Regulations and
Specifications.
2. Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.
3. Masonry Cement: In accordance with ASTM C91.
4. Mortar Cement: In accordance with ASTM C1329.
5. Aggregate for Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C144.

17 September 2015
a) For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed
stone.
b) For joints less than 6mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100% passing the 1.18mm sieve.
c) White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
d) Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.
6. Aggregate for Grout: In accordance with ASTM C404.
7. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for
use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and accepted for such use by manufacturer
of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by the Engineer from
manufacturer's colors.
8. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive, accelerating admixture in accordance with

ASTM C494/ C494M, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
9. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs
containing integral water repellent by the same manufacturer.
10. Water: Potable.
D. Reinforcement
1. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M or ASTM A996/ A996M,
Grade 420.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: In accordance with ASTM A951/ A951M.
E. Ties and Anchors
1. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this Work Section that are made from materials in
accordance with the following unless otherwise indicated:
a) Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1
coating.
b) Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A153/ A153M, Class
B-2 coating.
c) Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc coating.
2. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through
veneer but with at least 16mm cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90° and extend
50mm parallel to face of veneer.
3. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
a) Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to
tie section; formed from 1.52mm thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
1. Galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
b) Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from hot-dip galvanized steel Mill-galvanized
wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
1. Galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
4. Partition Top Anchors: Metal plate with metal rod welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube
fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.

17 September 2015
5. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars with ends turned up with cross pins unless otherwise
indicated.
a) Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M.
F. Miscellaneous Anchors
1. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
2. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated
from galvanized steel sheet.
3. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F568M, Property Class
4.6; with ASTM A563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A153/ A153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
4. Post-installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
a) Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a Qualified Independent Testing
Agency.
b) Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated in accordance with ASTM
B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
c) Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A4 stainless
steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
G. Embedded Flashing Materials
1. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual and as follows:
a) Stainless Steel: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 304.
b) Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 2400mm long minimum, but not exceeding 3700mm.
Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
c) Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at
76mm intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.
d) Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to
receive counterflashing.
e) Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing
13mm out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30° and hemmed.
f) Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal
back on itself 19mm at exterior face of wall and down into joint 6mm to form a stop for retaining
sealant backer rod.
g) Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing
of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 76mm into wall with hemmed inner
edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal
so that completed seam will shed water.
h) Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76mm into wall and 13mm
out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30° and hemmed.
i) Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76mm into wall and out to
exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 19mm and down into
joint 6mm to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
2. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
a) Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

17 September 2015
b) Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing.
c) Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge.
d) Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.
3. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:
a) Solder for Stainless Steel: In accordance with ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer.
b) Elastomeric Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
4. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.
H. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories
1. Non-Polluting Materials: Provide non-polluting materials in accordance with the requirements as

2. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips in accordance with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35%; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or
PVC.
3. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, in accordance

with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, in accordance with ASTM D2287, Type
PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall;
size and configuration as indicated.
4. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt in accordance with ASTM D226, Type
I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
5. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit
cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 3.77mm steel wire, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
I. Masonry Cleaners
1. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/
grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring
or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
J. Mortar and Grout Mixes
1. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
a) Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
b) Use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
c) For exterior masonry, use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
d) For reinforced masonry, use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
e) Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
2. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure
quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before
delivering to Site.

17 September 2015
3. Mortar for Unit Masonry: In accordance with ASTM C270. Provide the following types of mortar for
applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive
strength of masonry.
a) For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M/ Type S.
b) For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
c) For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
d) For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
e) For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
4. Grout for Unit Masonry: In accordance with ASTM C476.
a) Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) in accordance
with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
b) Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-
day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 14MPa.
c) Provide grout with a slump of 203 to 279mm/ 254 to 279mm as measured in accordance with
ASTM C143/ C143M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with the requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by the Installer, listing conditions detrimental to the
performance of the work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that wind posts and restraints, membranes and waterproofing materials have been correctly
installed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations
of piping connections.
C. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates, anchor slots and inserts free of grout and extraneous material. Remove projections
detrimental to the installation of the dampproof course. Do not modify or alter adjacent work, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
B. Supports and Attachments: Install purpose made supports and attachments, including wind posts and
head restraints. Install proprietary items in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide bearing surfaces level. Install items with full contact of bearing surface by shimming and grouting.
Comply with the anchor manufacturer's instructions for edge distances and torque settings. Protect items
to receive intumescent paint from damage.
C. Setting Out
1. Be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work, the correctness of position, levels,
dimensions and alignment of all walling including openings.

17 September 2015
2. Before work begins on Site submit proposed methods for dimensional setting out and crosschecking
with other trades to satisfy the required accuracy.
3. All controlling dimensions, especially at interface with surrounding elements shall be observed. All
dimensions shall be checked on Site.
4. Setting-out dimensions shall be taken from grid lines as indicated on the Design Drawings.
5. Allow for all necessary formers to achieve required opening sizes and tolerances.
D. Site Dimensions: Take Site dimensions as necessary to ensure a proper fit between the masonry and
adjacent work and to achieve specified erection tolerances.
E. Putlog Scaffolding: Putlog scaffolding to facework shall not be permitted.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Accurately set out the work. Provide uniform spacing of bond pattern and joint widths. Correctly locate
openings and returns.
B. Materials shall be clean and built uniform and level within the tolerances specified.
C. Quoins and jambs shall be plumbed as the work proceeds. The head of all walls shall be laid level.
D. Damaged materials shall not be used.
E. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Work Sections.
F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment,
complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
G. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to
fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow
units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where
possible, cut edges concealed.
H. Maintain a clear gap at head of each wall or partition as specified for head restraints to accommodate
slab deflection.
I. Build in dampproof courses in walls and partitions.
J. Mixing plant, tools and banker boards shall be kept clean at all times.
K. Materials shall be measured accurately by volume using clean gauge boxes. Proportions of mixes shall
be for dry sand making allowance for bulking if it is damp.
L. Ingredients shall be mixed thoroughly to a consistency suitable for the work and free from lumps. Mortars
containing air-entraining admixtures shall be mixed by machine, but not overmixed.
M. Retarded mortar shall be used within the time recommended in writing by the manufacturer relative to
the extreme temperatures that may be experienced on Site. Mortar shall be retempered to restore
workability, but only within these time limits.
N. If pre-mixed mortars are used, the characteristics, product data, and testing criteria shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review.
O. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
P. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Installation tolerances generally shall not exceed:

17 September 2015
1. Position on plan, or vertical surface: +/- 5 mm.
2. Deviation in level (horizontal): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 5 mm).
3. Deviation in plumb (vertical): Not more than 1 in 1000 (maximum 5 mm).
4. Edge straightness overall: +/- 2 mm per metre length (maximum 5 mm).
B. Installation tolerances shall not be cumulative and shall not include base-structure or fabrication
tolerances.
C. Installation tolerances for masonry units:
1. Installation tolerances for masonry shall comply with the relevant Standards, except as follows:
a) Vertical alignment of facework perpends: +/- 3 mm.
b) Horizontal alignment of bed joints: +/- 2 mm in 3.0 m.
c) Variation in joint widths: +/- 1 mm.
d) Variation in control joint width: +/- 1 mm.
D. Installation tolerances for masonry shall comply with the relevant Standards, except as follows:
E. Dimensions and Locations of Elements
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than +12mm or -6mm.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than ±12mm.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than ±6mm in a story
height or 12mm total.
F. Lines and Levels
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 6mm in 3m or
12mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets and reveals do not vary from level
by more than 3mm in 3000mm, 6mm in 6000mm or 12mm maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 6mm in 3000mm, 9mm in
6000mm or 12mm maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as exterior corners, door jambs, reveals and expansion and
control joints do not vary from plumb by more than 3mm in 3000mm, 6mm in 6000mm or 12mm
maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 6mm in 3000mm, 9mm in 6000mm
or 12mm maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints do not vary from plumb by more than 6mm in 3000mm
or 12mm maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1.5mm
except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
G. Joints
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than ±3mm, with a maximum thickness
limited to 12mm.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 3mm.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than +9mm or -6mm.

17 September 2015
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than ±3mm. Do not vary
from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 3mm.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more
than 1.5mm from 1 No. masonry unit to the next.
3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses
and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-
than-½-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond
pattern indicated on the Design Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 100mm horizontal
face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than
50mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal
100mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in the course
below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove
loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Work Sections. Fill
in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath,
wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 600mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items
unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure
above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs
solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 13mm clearance
between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 1200mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal.
Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above in
accordance with Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness

17 September 2015
C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)
3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 16mm on exterior
side of walls, 13mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150mm.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 406mm o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 203mm o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 203mm above and below wall openings and extending 305mm
beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not
allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition
movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant
core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head
joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete
for application of sealant.
C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible
filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants,
but not less than 10mm.
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete lintels where indicated and where openings of more than 305mm for 610mm for block-
size units are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 200mm at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie and support forms
to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to
carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

17 September 2015
B. Placing Reinforcement: In accordance with requirements in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength
to resist grout pressure.
1. In accordance with requirements in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 1520mm.
A. Testing and Inspecting: The Employer shall engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests
and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail in accordance with specified requirements shall be done
at the Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 or Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of Site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,
and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of Site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: 1 No. set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: 1 No. set of tests for each 464m² of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive
strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
3.12 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 No. uniform coats to a total
thickness of 19mm. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to
subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of
3mm per 300mm. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed
to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform
appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows.

17 September 2015
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of
masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to the manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of
stain on exposed surfaces.
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property.
At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated
sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 100mm in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste.
Fill material is specified in the Structural Specification.
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 450mm of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described
above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Employer's property.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 050513 -- SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.5 WARRANTIES 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2
2.2 MATERIALS 3
2.3 FABRICATION 4
2.4 FINISHING 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 PREPARATION 9
3.2 INSTALLATION 9
3.5 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 050513 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
17 September 2015
SECTION 050513 -- SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

systems as indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate their safe installation.
1. Shop applied coatings for metal.
1. As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Color control limits of anodizing shall be submitted as samples with the Tender for review and
comment by the Engineer. The specified finishes shall be within these limits agreed and held by
the Engineer.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.

Tender Issue 050513 / 1 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METAL
17 September 2015
B. Certifications
1. Finishes:
a) Provide a certificate of assurance that each batch of anodizing has been properly carried out.
b) Satisfactory independent evidence and samples shall be required to prove that alternative
coloring processes to those specified shall provide an equal or superior standard of
performance and life expectancy.
D. Mock-ups
E. Prototypes
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Finishes: Guarantees: Make available to the Engineer, fully documented and signed copies of the finish
coating guarantees. The duration of these guarantees shall be 25 years or as otherwise advised at the
time of Tender, appropriate to the environmental conditions prevailing on Site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Anodizing: Visible surfaces shall be free from coating or metallurgical defects when viewed from 1m.
B. All PVDF coatings applied to aluminum shall be in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 2605
including.
1. Gloss Retention: The residual gloss shall be at least 50%, after 10 years' exposure in Florida, in
accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.4.
2. Color Retention: A maximum color change of Delta E5, after 10 years' exposure in Florida, in
accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.2.
3. Exterior Exposure: When viewed from a distance of 3m, no visible blisters, scratches, flow lines,
streaks or other visual defects shall be allowed, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 4.2.
4. Impact Resistance: There shall be no removal of film, when measured in accordance with AAMA
2605, Clause 7.5.
5. Adhesion: There shall be no removal of film or blistering, when measured in accordance with AAMA
2605, Clause 7.4.
6. Dry Film Hardness: A minimum pencil hardness of grade F (Berol Eagle Turquoise Pencil) shall be
obtained when the coating is tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.3.

17 September 2015
7. Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60° Gardiner head shall read 19% or less
for 'low gloss', 20-79% for 'medium gloss' and 80% and over for 'high gloss', in accordance with
AAMA 2605, Clause 7.2.
C. Polyester Powder Coatings (PPC)
1. Following the testing requirements specified herein the coating shall show no checking, cracking
or flaking and any change in color shall not exceed one step in hue, value or chroma in the Munsell
atlas from the original color.
2. Film Thickness: The minimum film thickness at any point shall be 40 microns for aluminum and 60
microns for galvanized steel. (Note 1 - Where hazardous environments are involved, the minimum
shall be increased to 60 microns and 80 microns respectively.) (Note 2 - Some colors also require
the minimum film thickness to be increased to 60 microns to develop the correct intensity of color.)
No seeding or double coating of work shall be accepted.
3. Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60° Gardiner head, shall read: -25% ±5%
for matts, 70% ±5% for satins and 85% ±5% for gloss.
D. Plastisol Finishes
1. Specular gloss (60°) shall be 10-20% in accordance with ASTM D523.
2. Scratch Resistance: There shall be no penetration to substrate using a 1mm diameter tungsten ball
of 3500g weight in accordance with BS EN ISO 1520.
3. Abrasion resistance shall be 10-12mg in accordance with ASTM D4060, Taber Resistance Test,
loss at 250 revs, 1000g load with CS 10 wheels.
4. Impact Resistance: There shall be no cracking or detachment with an impact of 18J as tested to
ASTM D2794.
5. Minimum Bend Diameter: Twice substrate thickness at 0°C when tested to BS EN ISO 1519.
6. Salt Spray Resistance: There shall be no blistering, softening or detachment of coating when tested
for 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B117.
7. Humidity Resistance: No effect to coating shall occur after 1000 hours tested to BS 3900: Part F2.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Anodizing
1. Aluminum anodizing shall be in accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, AA-M12C22A34, AA-
M12C22A41 and AA-M12C22A44, unless specified otherwise.
2. All aluminum alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all components
is identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063, or acceptable equivalent, and for sheet
material grade J57S, or acceptable equivalent, and a certificate shall be obtained from the material
supplier stating the grade of material supplied.
3. Base metal batching shall be controlled in order that areas match. Critical visible areas shall be
from a single batch. Agree base metal batching with the Engineer in advance of production.
B. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coatings: The selected PVDF coating system is required to achieve a
high quality durable finish in accordance with the requirements identified herein. The formulation mix
shall be not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoropolymer resin with the remaining percentage made up
of acrylics.
C. Powder Coatings
1. Powder coatings shall be in accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.04mm.
2. In accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and
applying and baking finish.

17 September 2015
3. Plastisol Finishes: Color consistency: Color consistency shall be assured from batch to batch for
the project as accepted by the Engineer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Anodizing: Fabricated pieces shall meet the requirements of AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, AA-
M12C22A34, AA-M12C22A41 and AA-M12C22A44.
B. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coatings
1. When metallic colors are to be used, the top and bottom limits of color variation and appearance
shall be accepted by the Engineer prior to coating commencement. The grain on PVDF coated
materials shall be identified in order to ensure that they are fastened in the same direction in their
finished position.
2. The PVDF coating minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not
vary by more than 20%. Submitted samples shall confirm compliance.
3. The PVDF coating finish shall be identical in all respects subject to the criterion specified, on all
components similarly finished, and hung in the same direction.
4. Film Thickness: The minimum dry film thickness shall be 30 microns for solid colors and 40 microns
for metallic colors, when measured in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 4.3. The minimum local
dry film thickness shall be increased to be consistent with color selection and type of coating as
recommended by the coating manufacturer. Additionally, the local dry film thickness shall be
increased consistent with durability requirements and environmental conditions, as recommended
by the coating manufacturer.
C. Powder Coatings
1. The minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not vary by more than
20%. If this is not achievable, submit samples to the Engineer for review showing the maximum
variation in coating thickness.
2. The powder coating shall be consistent throughout in all respects within the upper and lower levels
agreed which shall be based on samples provided and agreed with the Engineer.
3. In addition to the requirements of AAMA 2603 the pretreatment shall use a chromate process.
2.4 FINISHING
A. In accordance with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Metalwork Finishes, General
1. Applying Coatings:
a) Apply after fabrication is complete and all fastening holes have been drilled, unless otherwise
specified.
b) Before applying coating remove all paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises.
c) Make good all defects that would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
2. All finishes shall be stable, fade resistant and not affected by ultraviolet light.
3. All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and color and be resilient to all known and/ or specified
environmental and pollution effects. This shall include scratching and cigarette smoke and burns.
Submit data and samples for review by the Engineer.
4. All finishes shall be within the limits of the agreed samples and without irregularities or distortions.
Fastenings and stiffeners that are not intended to be visible shall be treated so that there is no
discontinuity in the finished surface appearance.
5. Z11/ 5 chromium plating shall be in accordance with ASTM B851.

17 September 2015
only, or hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M. Any cut edges shall be
7. Galvanizing General: In accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M and ASTM A123/ A123M.
8. Coating thicknesses shall be in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M and ASTM A123/ A123M to
suit the requirements of the Specification.
9. Where galvanizing is visible, the final finish shall be smooth, continuous, consistent and free from
flux staining and other forms of staining. Coating weight shall be consistent maintaining a uniform
appearance throughout the service life of the work.
10. Distortion: Ensure that no distortion of fabricated elements occurs during galvanizing. Advise the
Engineer on the possibility for distortion of the steelwork elements during the galvanizing process
to enable design modifications of components to be made before fabrication of these components.
11. Refer to the recommendations of the Zinc Development Association for galvanizing and zinc metal-
spraying.
12. Immersion Process: This shall be discussed and agreed with the Engineer and submitted for formal
comment. This is to ensure that during the galvanizing process drips are not allowed to run off fair-
faced surfaces and thus disfigure them. Fair-faced surfaces are all those surfaces that will be visible
in the completed work. Agree location of all fair-faced surfaces with the Engineer before application.
13. Breathing Holes: Locate in unobtrusive places. Agree the location of these holes with the Engineer
and mark clearly on the Shop Drawings.
14. Galvanized Self Finish Surfaces:
a) Galvanizing: The steelwork shall be supplied to the galvanizer in a suitable condition to be

acid pickled in dilute hydrochloric acid, passivated and then hot dip galvanized in accordance
with the provisions of ASTM A153/ A153M and ASTM A123/ A123M.
b) Uniformity: The galvanizing shall be carried out in such a way as to maximize the smoothness
and uniformity of the deposited coating. Only use double dipping where no alternative exists.
15. Galvanized Surfaces to be Over Painted: ASTM A153/ A153M and ASTM A123/ A123M.
16. Aluminum Finishes:
a) Finish designations prefixed by AA in accordance with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
b) Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matt; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating
0.010mm or thicker) in accordance with AAMA 611.
c) Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated;

Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matt; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018mm or thicker) in accordance with AAMA 611.
d) Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/ A34 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matt; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010mm or thicker) in accordance
with AAMA 611.
e) Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/ A44 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matt; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018mm or thicker) in accordance
with AAMA 611.
f) Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals;

Chemical Finish: Acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: As
specified below). Apply baked enamel in accordance with paint manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

17 September 2015
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic or polyester enamel primer/ topcoat

system in accordance with AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04
mm, medium gloss.
g) High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish:

Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion coating; Organic Coating:
Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces in
accordance with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
h) High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish:

cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion coatings; Organic Coating:
Manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated
inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color
coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight).
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces in accordance with AAMA 2605
and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Anodizing: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, AA-M12C22A34, AA-M12C22A41 and AA-M12C22A44.
D. Steel Finishes
1. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
a) Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer in

accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
2. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.3 for
performance and acceptance criteria.
E. Stainless Steel Finishes
1. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces
to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run
grain with long dimension of each piece.
a) Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
b) Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.
c) Mirror Reflective, Non-directional Polish: No. 8.
2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and
leave surfaces chemically clean.
F. PVDF Coatings
1. Color: The color shall be selected by the Engineer from the RAL ranges unless otherwise specified.
2. Color Consistency: Color consistency shall be maintained between batches.
G. Powder Coatings
1. Color: The color shall be selected by the Engineer from the RAL ranges.
2. Color Consistency: Color consistency shall be assured from batch to batch for the work.
3. Color Uniformity: Limits for acceptable color variations in production shall be established and
accepted by the Engineer from samples provided by the Contractor prior to production. When
metallic colors are used, top and bottom limits of color variation and appearance shall be established
and agreed prior to coating commencement. All color samples shall be submitted and accepted by
the Engineer before coating commences.

17 September 2015
4. The minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not vary by more than
20%. If this is not achievable, submit samples to the Engineer for review showing the maximum
variation in coating thickness.
A. Anodizing
1. Abrasion Resistance: In the event of a dispute, perform tests in accordance with ASTM D4060.
2. Sealing Value of Anodizing: In the event of a dispute, perform tests in accordance with ASTM B680.
3. Film Thickness: In the event of a dispute, perform tests in accordance with ASTM B244. The minimum
local film thickness shall be 20 microns with a maximum of 35 microns.
4. The temperatures of the anodizing bath and chemical content shall be set and maintained to achieve
good quality control of the finished product.
5. A quality control system for cleaning extrusion dies shall be adopted such that no lines appear on
the face of the extrusions. As a minimum check every fifth extrusion.
6. Rejected anodized extrusions shall only be reprocessed once.
B. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coatings
1. Abrasion Test: The coating shall demonstrate a minimum value of 40 for the abrasion coefficient,
when tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.6.2.
2. Salt Spray Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause 7.8.2 after
an exposure period of 4000 hours.
3. Humidity Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause 7.8.1 after
an exposure period of 4000 hours.
4. Mortar Resistance: Easy removal of mortar shall be obtained after 24 hours when tested in
accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.2. In addition, there shall be no loss of film adhesion or
visual change in appearance.
5. Muriatic Acid Resistance: The coating shall show no signs of attack when tested in accordance with
AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.1.
6. Product Tests:
a) Product tests shall meet all the requirements of the Specification.
b) Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated

aluminum. Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat coated/ significant
surface (as defined in BS EN ISO 2064) on which to conduct instrumental measurements. The
Engineer shall indicate exposed/ significant surfaces.
c) Tests shall be performed on exposed/ significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 and
shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2605.
d) Production Test Reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the
Engineer. These reports shall include:
1. Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
2. Identification of the PVDF coating/ system tested, including product supplier, color
reference, product code and batch reference.
3. Statement indicating that the PVDF coating/ system tested passed all tests, or failed one
or more.
4. In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
5. Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.

17 September 2015
6. Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
C. Polyester Powder Coatings (PPC)
1. Demonstrate compliance with the following test requirements:
a) Artificial Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D4214 when tested in accordance with BS 6496,
Clause 4.10 (a) or BS EN 13438.
b) Natural Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D4214 when tested for 3 years in accordance with
BS 6496, Clause 4.10 (b) or BS EN 13438.
2. Cupping Test: There shall be no sign of detachment when measured in accordance with BS 6496,
Clause 4.5.
3. Scratch Test: There shall be no penetration to the substrate when tested in accordance with BS
6496, Clause 4.6.
4. Adhesion: The coating shall have a classification of Class 0 and there shall be no removal of the
coating when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.4.
5. Flexibility: There shall be no cracking, flaking or film deformation above 6mm when tested in
accordance with BS EN ISO 6860.
6. Salt Spray Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the coating shall occur when tested
for 1000 hours on aluminum to BS 6496, Clause 4.9 or for 500 hours on galvanized steel to BS EN
13438.
7. Humidity Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the film shall occur when tested in
accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.11.
8. Permeability: The coating, when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.13, shall show no
blistering of the coating, except within 3mm of any edge.
9. Mortar Resistance: There shall be no blistering, softening or detachment of the coating when tested
in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.8.
10. Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated aluminum.
Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat coated/ significant surface, as
defined in BS EN ISO 2064, on which to conduct instrumental measurements. The Shop Drawings
shall indicate exposed/ significant surfaces.
11. Tests shall be performed on exposed/ significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 as indicated,
and shall meet the requirements of BS 6496 or BS EN 13438.
12. Production Test Reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the Engineer.
These reports shall include:
a) Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
b) Identification of the coating system tested, including product supplier, color reference, product
code and batch reference.
c) Statement indicating that the coating system tested passed all tests, or failed one or more.
d) In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
e) Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.
f) Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
D. Plastisol Finishes Adhesion: Test in accordance with BS EN ISO 2409 with no detachment of film from
the substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
17 September 2015
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation of Steelwork
1. Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a surface
equivalent in cleanliness to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. In general this shall
be achieved by acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil, grease, welding slag renders
this ineffective, and in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally blast-cleaned to Sa 2.5 quality of
Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Metalwork Finishes
1. Anodizing: Lines produced at the location of die connection points shall only occur on non-visible
surfaces in the installed work. The contact marks on sections resulting from electrical connection
shall not be on visible surfaces of the installed work.
2. Applicator Requirements:
a) The PVDF coating application and stoving shall be carried out in accordance with AAMA 2605.
The applicator shall agree to work to this standard and be accepted by the coating supplier.
Only 1 No. coating plant shall be used along with only 1 No. batch of paint, unless otherwise
accepted by the Engineer.
b) Powder coating: Only 1 No. coating plant shall be used for the work along with 1 No. batch of
powder, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
B. Plastisol Finishes
1. A specialist, certified by the manufacturer, shall apply the coating.
2. The coating thickness shall be 200 micrometers (nominal thickness) on galvanized steel panels, to
BS EN ISO 2808.
A. Site Inspections
1. Carry out a Site inspection since, due to damage of finishes or non-supply of the Production Test
Reports, the Engineer shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fastened
units.
2. For the purpose of this inspection each section in the window curtain wall or other fabrication shall
be taken as an individual component in assessing the overall batch number to allow the acceptance
inspection laboratory to certify that the work is in accordance with the Specification.
3. The acceptance inspection laboratory shall be accepted by the Engineer and instructed by the
commissioning authority to submit all reports simultaneously to the Contractor and the Engineer.
4. These reports shall cover factory production materials and Site-fastened units.
B. Certificates of Taking-Over or any other document of authority accepting responsibility may not be signed
by the Engineer until he has received these reports.
C. Variation of final surface finish shall be limited to tolerances agreed with the Engineer prior to
commencement. If such variations do occur then such components that, in the opinion of the Engineer,
fail to achieve a uniform final surface finish shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
A. Cleaning Frequency for Anodizing: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall
be not less than 18 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
B. Cleaning Frequency for Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coatings: The normal cleaning frequency
associated with the guarantees shall be not less than 12 months, unless advised otherwise at the time
of Tender.

17 September 2015
C. Cleaning Frequency for Polyester Powder Coatings (PPC): The normal cleaning frequency associated
with the guarantees shall be not less than 12 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
D. Adjusting, General
1. Minor scratches and blemishes to finishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer's
recommended products and system, matching original finish for color, texture and gloss. Repair
coatings shall be visually acceptable to the Engineer. Confirmation shall be provided that the repair
to the damaged finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification. Guarantee
in writing that the damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed remedial paint
system. Employ an independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection and any necessary
tests and supply a full report to the Engineer.
E. Adjusting Galvanized Coatings
1. Touching-up shall not be allowed unless agreement is given by the Engineer.
2. Where acceptance is given, use the Zilt-Stick system in accordance with the manufacturer's current
recommendations. Zilt-Stick is a self-fluxing and galvanizing system, which is applied by hand. The
stick is made up of a galvanizing compound, which has a "foil" wrapping, and is rubbed over the
affected area until completely covered. The black flux residue can be removed using a damp cloth.
3. The maximum size of an area of touch-up shall be determined by locating the point on the damaged
surface that is furthest from an intact galvanized coating. If the distance from this point to the
galvanizing is in excess of 10mm, then the member shall be re-galvanized or rejected.
4. Galvafroid or paint applied finishes shall not be permitted under any circumstances.
F. Adjusting Anodized Finishes
1. Repair of damage: Surface areas likely to be damaged during handling, fastening or by other building
trades shall be fully protected until completion of all other work in the area of the installation. If during
fastening or glazing any damage does occur, this shall be rectified immediately and not left until the
end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be carried out with the Engineer's
acceptance and shall carry a 25 year guarantee for color retention, avoidance of discoloration and
corrosion resistance.
G. Adjusting Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) and Polyester Powder Coatings (PPC)
1. Repair of Damage: If during installation, or later, damage occurs, this shall be rectified immediately
and not left to the end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be carried out with
the Engineer's acceptance and shall carry a guarantee for color retention, gloss retention and
adhesion for the remaining period of the original guarantee.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) and Polyester Powder Coatings (PPC)
1. Protective Tapes/ Films: When adhesive/ protective tapes/ films are proposed to protect finished
products, tapes/ films of a low tack nature shall be used. They shall be applied at room temperature,
after the coating is fully stoved, and remain in contact with the surface for a maximum period of 6
months. Should longer periods be required, then the tape/ film shall be removed and replaced. Care
shall be taken when removing adhesive/ protective tapes/ films. No sharp instruments or abrasive
materials shall be used to remove the tape/ film. No solvents or cleaning solutions shall be used to
remove residues, without the prior permission of the Engineer. Where adhesive/ protective tapes/
films are used, then the color shall be white or lighter in tone than the finish it is protecting.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 050523 -- METAL FASTENINGS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2
2.3 MATERIALS 2
PART 3 EXECUTION 4
3.1 EXAMINATION 4
3.2 INSTALLATION 4

Tender Issue 050523 METAL FASTENINGS
17 September 2015
SECTION 050523 -- METAL FASTENINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Metal fastenings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.

Tender Issue 050523 / 1 METAL FASTENINGS
17 September 2015
B. QA/ QC procedures for inspection of fastenings to the Engineer to include, but not be limited to, checking
each fastening for correct torques, depth of mortises and alignment.
D. Mock-ups
E. Prototypes
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Standard Fabrications.
2. Precision Metal Works.
3. Fitwell Metal Industries.
A. Durability: Fastenings shall be selected such that adequate protection against any corrosion likely to
occur in their position of use is provided for the service life specified.
B. Rigidity: Fastenings shall be used which are suited to the likely stresses, movements and vibrations in use.
C. Appearance: Unless otherwise specified, fastenings shall not be visible; where fastenings are visible
these shall match or suit the items being fixed or be in accordance with the Design Drawings.
D. Use fastenings that are suitable for their intended purpose and adequate to be in accordance with the
requirements stated in the Specification.
E. All bolts, screws, nuts, anchors and other fastenings shall be of adequate strength for their designed
purpose and shall, unless specified otherwise, be manufactured from the most appropriate grade of
austenitic stainless steel or other materials as specified. Where specified, structural steel fastenings shall
be in accordance with the grades specified.
F. Supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners, fastenings, bearings and brackets necessary for the
safe and proper installation, plus associated flashings and closures.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. All fastenings shall be of sufficient strength, appropriate to their location, and provided at adequate
positions so as to ensure the performance of the elements being attached. The fastenings shall be
suitable and used solely for the purposes intended by the manufacturer, in order to satisfy the requirements
of the Specification.

17 September 2015
1. Unless otherwise indicated in the applicable Work Sections, provide Type 316 stainless steel
fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating in accordance with ASTM B633 or
ASTM F1941/ F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
a) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
b) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
c) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
d) Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A/ ASTM F568M, Property
Class 4.6; with hex nuts, ASTM A563/ A563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
3. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325, Type 3/ A325M, Type 3; with hex
nuts, ASTM A563, Grade C3/ ASTM A563M, Class 8S3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
4. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Comply with the requirements of ASTM F836M and ISO 3506; and,
where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2 (A4).
5. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where
indicated, flat washers.
a) Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened
is indicated to be galvanized.
6. Frame Anchors: ASTM A879/ A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
a) For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M or
ASTM A1011/ A1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B.
7. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/ A153M.
8. Machine Screws: In accordance with ASME B18.6.3 and ASME B18.6.7M.
9. Powder Actuated Fastening Systems:
a) Tools shall be in accordance with ASTM E1190.
b) Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices
for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
c) Do not use powder actuated fastening systems without acceptance.
d) Fasteners, accessories and consumables shall be types recommended by the tool

manufacturer.
10. Screw Fastenings: Washers and screw cups, where specified, shall be of the same material as the
screw.
11. Packings, General:
a) Provide suitable, tight packings at fastening points to take up tolerances and prevent distortion.
b) Use non-compressible, rot-proof, non-corrodible materials positioned adjacent to fastening

points.
12. Masonry Nails: Do not use without acceptance from the Engineer.
13. Plugs, General: Use proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and
conditions expected in use.
14. Eyebolts: In accordance with ASTM A489.

17 September 2015
15. Lag Screws: In accordance with ASME B18.2.3.8M.
16. Wood Screws: Flat head, in accordance with ASME B18.6.1.
17. Plain Washers: Round, in accordance with ASME B18.22M.
18. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, in accordance with ASME B18.21.2M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
adjacent construction and the conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and levels,
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting for anchor
bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor bolts and fastenings
where necessary.
B. The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fastened or anything receiving fastenings.
C. Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Engineer.
D. Fasteners shall be installed with a coordinated purpose design tooling system that incorporates a
mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates perpendicular installation.
The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site instruction in the use of the fastener
installation tooling system.
E. Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
F. Generally, fastenings within aluminum framing components shall not be visible, with the exception of
capping pieces fastened to vertical mullions.
G. Visible fastenings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support steelwork, using
round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
H. Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanized and effectively weatherproofed to avoid exposure
to the external environment.
I. Provide cast-in channel fastenings in concrete and fastenings directly made to structural steelwork.
J. Powder Actuated Fastening
1. Operatives shall be trained and certified as competent by the Contractor.
2. Ensure that operatives take full precautions against injury to themselves and others.
3. Remove all unspent cartridges from the Site when no longer required.
4. Apply zinc rich primer to heads of fasteners used externally in external walls or in other locations
subject to dampness.
5. Use top hat section plastic washers to isolate cartridge-fired nails from stainless steel components
fastened externally, in external walls or in other locations subject to dampness.
K. Screw Fastenings
1. All screws shall have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gage or more and all screws into hardwood shall
have pilot holes approximately half the diameter of the shank.
2. Before using brass, aluminum or other soft metal wood screws, pre-cut the thread with a matching
steel wood screw.

17 September 2015
3. Do not hammer screws unless specifically designed to be hammered.
4. Countersink screw heads not less than 2mm below wood surfaces that will be visible in the completed
work, unless specified otherwise.
L. Packings, General: Ensure that packings do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with sealants.
M. Nail Fastening
1. In joints, use not less than 2 No. nails and opposed skew nailing unless specified otherwise.
2. Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fastened.
3. Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
N. Plugs, General: Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 055200 -- METAL RAILINGS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 7
2.5 FABRICATION 9
2.6 FINISHES 12
PART 3 EXECUTION 12
3.1 EXAMINATION 12
3.2 PREPARATION 12
3.3 INSTALLATION 13
3.6 PROTECTION 16

Tender Issue 055200 METAL RAILINGS
17 September 2015
SECTION 055200 -- METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

3. Where required to prepare the Shop Drawings, these shall be limited to final detailing of components,
1. Metal railing and balustrade
2. Glass railing and balustrade.
1. Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
7. Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specification.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
2. "Die Drawings" for metalwork to the Engineer for review. These shall be considered as Shop
Drawings. The "Die Drawings" shall indicate polished surfaces and shape.

Tender Issue 055200 / 1 METAL RAILINGS
17 September 2015
1. 1000mm length of each type of balustrade and handrail in specified finish.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 1000mm length of each type of balustrade and handrail in specified finish.
2. All fastenings.
1. Warranties.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with the manufacturer's
reference numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes;
and cleaning frequency.
A. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist, who has at least 10 years' successful experience in performing
similar work, or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer. Welders shall be certified.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following.
1. American Welding Code (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

17 September 2015
2. American Welding Code (AWS) D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. An area determined by the Engineer of each element of the work fully installed, completed and to
the acceptance of the Engineer.
1. Provide independently certified test literature for each type of accessory. The test result data shall
meet the requirements of the Specification.
2. Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show compliance
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
H. Results and Certificates
materials including aluminum, finishes, glass, glass coatings, gaskets, setting blocks and backing
rods. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Welding certificates.
3. Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
4. Submit certificates relating to the materials used in the work as confirmation of tests carried out in
accordance with the relevant Standards, and/ or other national standards as appropriate.
5. Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests performed,
material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings, and any other documentation to
substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by the Subcontractors.
6. The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which they
refer and are retrievable.
7. The records shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and copies of records shall be given
to the Engineer upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be submitted to
the Engineer.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to Site ready for use in largest sections feasible. Identify deliveries in
accordance with submittals. Protect materials from damage during fabrication and delivery. Deliver
materials to Site as close to installation time as possible.
B. Storage: Store materials and component parts under cover in dry and clean conditions, clear of the
ground. Protect materials from damage or marring of exposed surfaces and coatings. Retain protection
for as long as possible after installation.
C. Handling: Handle materials using methods and equipment without damage to members or coatings.
Inspect components before installation. Replace damaged items or work which cannot be satisfactorily
re-finished on Site to the acceptance of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
D. Provide protective coatings or coverings to protect the work during shipment and construction, without
affecting finishes, imparting residue, affecting adhesion of sealants, or causing deleterious effects in the
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Standard Fabricators.
2. Precision Metal Works.
3. Fitwell Metal Industries.
B. Type BAL-201 Metal Balustrade and Railing
1. Description: Metal post, balustrade and handrail system including all necessary fastenings and
accessories, as indicated on the Design Drawings comprising:
a) Handrail
1. Material: Galvanized Iron (GI) pipe.
2. Size: 50mm.
3. Thickness: 6mm.
4. Finish: Painted finish.
5. Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b) Balustrades
1. Material: Galvanized Iron (GI) rectangular tubular.
2. Size: 38mm x 50mm.
3. Thickness: 6mm.
5. Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
c) Vertical Support
1. Material: Galvanized Iron (GI).
2. Size: 50mm.
3. Thickness: 4mm.

17 September 2015
5. Color: To be selected by the Engineer.
d) Exposed metal surfaces shall have the same painted finish of the handrail system.
e) Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
C. Type BAL-205 Glass Balustrade and Railing
1. Description: External post, balustrade and handrail system including all necessary fastenings and
accessories, as indicated on the Design Drawings comprising:
a) Handrail
1. System: Bespoke glass top rail.
2. Cover cap of pipe end fixing plate.
3. Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings
4. Glass edges shall be polished and chamfered.
5. Glass thickness shall maintain performance and visual requirements to the acceptance
of the Engineer.
6. Glass shall include applied finish/ manifestation.
b) Balustrade
1. Type GL-202 Laminated Glass. Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
c) U-Channel: Bottom support with silicon sealant mounted on the slab edge through anchor bolt
fixing as indicated on the Design Drawings.
d) Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of construction, fabrication, detailing and installation
in accordance with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing requirements relating
to the building structure and other systems are accommodated in accordance with the Structural
Engineer's details, and that interfaces with any external envelope elements are fully weathertight.
B. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel Type 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
C. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
D. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
A. Specific Movements
1. The work shall be fabricated and installed to withstand all movements of the building structure under
all specified design loads or combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the
2. All fastenings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment with the minimal use of packing
shims, which shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
3. All necessary movement joints shall be designed to accommodate the maximum movements that
can be derived from the specified and determined design loads and movements. Under maximum
movements the joints shall meet the requirements of the Specification.

17 September 2015
4. The work shall resist all specified static and dynamic design loads likely to be encountered without
causing permanent deformation of components or the failure of members or seals and shall transmit
such loads safely to the points of support.
5. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any elements of the work
6. The work shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
reduction in the specified performance.
a) Deflection under design loads.
b) The effects of internal/ external wind and pressure loadings.
c) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements, including
settlement, creep, twisting and racking.
d) Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
e) Thermal movements.
B. Specific Dead Loads
1. The work shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any reduction in
performance:
a) The work's own dead load shall be accommodated locally and without causing deflections or
movements, which adversely affect the performance or appearance of the system components.
b) The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the work.
C. Specific Live Loads
1. Occupancy class shall be Residential as stated in the International Building Code.
2. The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specified live loads without any reduction
in performance:
a) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and support structure.
b) A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants and vehicles.
c) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the work, without
deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
d) Loads imposed during replacement.
D. Deflections
1. The maximum allowable deflection of any element of the work, when carrying full design loads,
shall not exceed 15mm or 1/ 175 of their clear span in a direction normal to the plane of that element,
whichever is the lesser value.
2. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of itself or
adjacent structural or building elements.
the work, their support structure or internal finishes.
E. Structural Integrity

17 September 2015
1. Balustrades and handrails indicated on the Design Drawings and described in the Specification
shall be in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935, unless stated otherwise.
2. Construction of barriers shall be in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935, to the acceptance
of the Structural Engineer.
F. Specific Fire Performance Requirements
1. Refer to the Fire Strategy Report and the NFPA.
G. Demountability
1. Elements of the work shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/ or replacement of glazed and solid units in the event of breakage or damage.
2. The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part of the
work.
H. Thermal Movement: The work shall withstand expansion and contraction forces, including differential
rates of movement between different materials, components and color finishes, resulting from temperature
changes.
I. Durability
1. The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout the life of the building
without failure when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program. Failure
shall be defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following defects arising from deficiencies
in design, material selection or workmanship.
a) Collapse, damage or excessive deflection resulting from the application of specified loads.
b) Distortion, displacement or other damage to a woven metal fabric that renders it unserviceable
or unattractive.
c) Atmospheric corrosion, stress corrosion, bimetallic/ electro-chemical corrosion or other

premature deterioration of a material.
d) Degradation of protective coatings causing galvanized items to suffer corrosion during their
life and painted items to suffer coating breakdown in the period up to first maintenance.
e) Component parts that may suffer damage under design safety loading shall permit easy
replacement with the minimum amount of disturbance to the building users.
J. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
1. The work shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard
(including glass coatings) to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2. The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Details shall be submitted to the Engineer.
3. Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes in
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth and shoes) and any other
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Steel and Iron
1. Zinc-Coated or Galvanized Iron and Zinc-Iron alloy coated (Galvannealed) by Hot-dip process:
ASTM A653/ A653M.
2. Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, cold formed.
3. Pipe: In accordance with ASTM A53/ A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule
40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

17 September 2015
a) Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated on the Shop Drawings.
4. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
5. Expanded Metal: In accordance with ASTM F1267.
6. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M, or hot-rolled
steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A1011/ A1011M.
7. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z275 coating,
commercial steel Type B.
8. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, woven-wire mesh in accordance with ASTM A510M.
B. Glass
1. Clear laminated safety of thickness designed to suit the specified performance requirements. Refer
to Section 088000 Glazing.
2. Exposed edges of glass to be polished and chamfered.
3. Include glazing accessories.
4. Provide glass in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
C. Fastenings/ Fasteners
1. Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for interior and Type 316 for
exterior use.
3. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners in
accordance with ASTM A153M or ASTM F2329 for zinc coating.
4. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
5. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
a) Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to
other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method
for railings indicated in the Specification.
b) Provide Phillips or hex socket, as selected by the Engineer, flat-head machine screws for
exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
6. Post-Installed Anchors: Unless otherwise specified in the Structural Specification provide torque-
controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
a) Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM
B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
b) Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A4 stainless
steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
7. Fastening components shall be in accordance with all statutory requirements (and be to the
acceptance of the Dubai Municipality and/ or Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and
shall be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements.
8. All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the work.

17 September 2015
9. Visible fastenings shall match approved samples.
10. Unless otherwise specified, the following basic requirements shall be adhered to:
a) Rigidity: Only fastenings that are suited to the likely stresses, movements and vibrations in
use without allowing any wobble, creaks or deflection of any fixtures or fittings shall be used.
b) Removability: Items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with bolts.
D. Inserts: Stainless steel Type 304 or Type 316 of suitable design and strength to suit application.
E. Shims: Horseshoe type made from stainless or suitably coated steel where concealed. Use sleeve type
spacers of stainless steel for visible shims.
F. Isolating Materials: Self-adhesive PVC tape, polyester powder coat or 2-pack epoxy paint as
recommended by the manufacturer to suit application.
G. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
H. Gaskets
1. Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone.
2. All visible glazing gaskets shall have factory-formed corners. All other gaskets shall have overlapping
joints with appropriate sealant in between.
3. The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and molded elements. These shall perform and
appear as a single element.
4. All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and select all
gaskets in order to:
a) Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
b) Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid
materials and/ or structural silicone.
c) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Works.
5. Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs are
wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the Works and are compatible with all other
materials and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other materials/
components.
6. The color of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.
7. Gaskets shall not shrink nor warp and shall not deteriorate between the periods stated in the
Contractor's stated times for replacement.
8. Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.
I. The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation performance.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General
1. End caps shall be provided to exposed stop ends of metal handrails.
2. Systems shall include fastenings, bracketry, support framing and all other components/ accessories
necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Specification and as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
3. Tubular handrails shall be fixed to sleeves in balustrades with concealed fastenings. All handrails
shall feature concealed internal sleeved joints.

17 September 2015
4. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
5. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
6. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
7. Wall mounting brackets shall be minimum 10mm mild steel plates with adjustable wall mounting
angles, shaped to match the diameter of the handrail and to profiles indicated on the Design
Drawings.
8. Wall mounting brackets shall be 2-part, with the connection plate fixed to either structural concrete
walls, or concealed mild steel members with suitable countersunk fastenings prior to commencement
of plasterboard dry lining.
9. The handrail corners shall be radiused or mitered, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
10. Balustrade infills shall be to profiles positioned horizontally at centers indicated on the Design
Drawings, and in accordance with Municipality requirements. Where necessary, rods shall be factory
bent to suit balustrade layout.
11. Fastenings shall be stainless steel of suitable grade.
12. Fabricate rails in the longest practicable lengths, with smooth bends and welded joints, complete
with sleeves, spigots, brackets and other attachments.
13. Expanded-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from expanded metal made from same metal
as railings in which they are installed, unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
14. Toe Boards: Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated on the Design Drawings.
15. Metals used in exposed work shall have smooth surfaces, free of blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, waves, striations, tool and die marks. Profiles shall be true to angle or curvature
as required with sharp edges and corners.
16. Fabricate metal items free of stress corrosion or cracking.
17. Carefully fit and match components and pre?assemble the work as far as possible in the shop. Do
not weld joints designed to be bolt fixed. Provide hairline joints on contact surfaces.
18. Select materials and methods of fabrication to achieve accuracy and fit.
19. Fabricate members and components straight, free of distortion and to the specified tolerances.
Heat-treat components to relieve residual stresses.
20. Visible surfaces to be true to line and level, free from imperfection, with sharp angles and straight
corners.
21. Provide rebates, lugs and brackets required to assemble and install the work.
22. Incorporate dowels and spigots into joints to accurately align components.
23. Drill and tap components to allow their rigid assembly and attachment to other work with concealed
fasteners, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Where visible fasteners are permitted set
out in an orderly pattern using countersunk head type. Miter visible corners, unless otherwise
indicated on the Shop Drawings.
24. Isolate dissimilar materials to prevent galvanic action.
25. Clearly mark items for proper assembly and installation, using methods that will not mar protective
finishes.
26. Paint finished components shall have fully welded connections, unless otherwise accepted by the
Engineer, to protect unprotected joint faces from corrosion.
B. Cutting

17 September 2015
1. Saw-cut or shear metal edges square and sharp without causing distortion or discoloration to
surfaces. Do not use flame-cutting equipment.
2. Grind cut edges to remove burrs, saw marks and blemishes from exposed edges, or alternatively
by welding and grinding.
3. Dress meeting faces of joints to produce a proper fit. Grind Site splices smooth, flush and square.
4. Machine drill or mill holes and similar cut-outs.
C. Bending: Bend sheet metal to the required shape. Bent items shall be free of grain separation, oil canning
or other distortion. Back-cut sheets to attain maximum square bend possible.
1. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross
section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of components.
D. Welding/ Brazing, General
1. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined.
2. Weld or mechanically fix joints in accordance with the design and performance requirements. Allow
for dismantling, for handling and delivery.
3. Weld in accordance with the relevant standards to produce connections as strong and rigid as
adjacent sections.
4. Weld joints continuously along entire line of contact to produce a regular and even contour, free
from undercutting, porosity, discontinuities or other defects.
5. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth without fillets to maintain the line of the welded members.
6. All visible cut ends shall be polished smooth with no crude machine cut visible.
7. Welds on mechanical finished surfaces to match and blend with adjoining surfaces and be
imperceptible.
8. Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity
or cracks.
9. Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in completed
work.
10. Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
11. Metal arc welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"
and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other methods subject to review
by the Engineer.
12. Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
tungsten-arc welding and it shall be carried out by a procedure qualified and certified to AWS D1.1/
D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code -
Aluminum".
a) Welds shall be continuous and of a material and technique suitable to the sections being
assembled.
b) Weld finish shall be smooth with all flux residues removed and no surface defects (e.g. undercut,
porosity and deep ridges).
13. Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and flush
with adjacent surfaces.
E. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
F. Fabrication Tolerances: Non-cumulative

17 September 2015
1. Deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimension tolerances shall not exceed ±1mm.
2. Straightness: L/ 1000 or 2mm, whichever is the lesser.
3. Squareness of Cut Profiles: Depth of profile/ 1000.
4. Squareness of Fabricated Items: Maximum 2mm difference between diagonals.
5. Flatness of Fabricated Items: Maximum 2mm difference between one corner and another.
6. Plumbness: ±2 to 1mm/ m.
7. Level: ±1mm/ m.
8. The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the panel to be more than 0.5mm out of plane.
The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the structural frame to be more than 2mm out
of plane.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General
1. Carry out welding, cutting and machining before applying protective coating and finishes.
2. Prime visible surfaces of non-ferrous metals. Prime all surfaces, including joint faces, of ferrous
metal fabrications. Do not paint surfaces within 50mm of Site welds; prepare and finish after
connections are completed.
3. Apply finishes to visible surfaces of non-ferrous and ferrous metals in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's instructions.
4. Prime paint items to receive Site-applied paint in accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
B. Site-Applied Paint: In accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
C. Factory-Applied Finishes: In accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
D. Steel and Iron Finishes
1. Galvanized Railings:
a) In accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
b) In accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the areas and the conditions in
which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and alignments, and surfaces to receive the work of
this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fastening to Adjacent Construction
1. Coordinate the delivery and accurate placing of inserts, anchors and brackets for building into or
for attachment to adjacent construction with minimal delay.
2. Provide templates or setting out drawings for forming and locating holes.
3. Do not cut, drill or otherwise modify the work of others without the acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Separate materials identified as reactive in PD 6484 to prevent electro-chemical corrosion.

17 September 2015
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install work accurately in location, alignment and elevation; plumb, level, true and free of rack.
2. Acceptance shall be received from the Engineer before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where indicated on the Shop Drawings.
3. Cut and abrade items only with the consent of the fabricator. Carry out modifications and refinishing
of items at the shop, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
4. The work shall be square, regular to line, level and plane, with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
5. Do not install items that are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced to such
extent as to impair strength or appearance.
6. Isolating tape, plastic washers, or other suitable means to prevent bimetallic corrosion shall be
provided between dissimilar metals, or between preservation treated wood and metal.
7. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
a) Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished
after fabrication and that are intended for Site connection by mechanical or other means without
further cutting or fitting.
b) Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with
rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5mm in 3000mm.
c) Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
8. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
B. Assembly and Fitting
1. Assemble and fit the work.
2. Securely anchor work to supporting structure. Use expansion bolts for concrete and masonry,
machine screws or bolts for metal, and screws for wood.
3. Attach handrail brackets to walls with screws. Exposed cast-in inserts in fair-faced concrete surfaces
are not permitted.
4. Do not exceed the limitations imposed on the spacing and edge distances of expansion anchors
by the manufacturer nor exceed accepted shimming thicknesses.
5. Bolt connections tight, with threads entirely concealed; cut off exposed threads flush with adjoining
surface. Make allowance for re-torque of stainless steel bolts following the relaxation in stress
experienced by such fastenings.
6. Set fasteners with heads parallel to the surface; set countersunk heads flush.
7. Grind joints smooth and make good finishes as necessary. Secure exposed connections accurately
together with tight hairline joints.
8. Use only shop-drilled holes for the assembly of the work. Site drilling for fasteners shall not be
permitted unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Locate as instructed.
9. Welding:
a) Weld connections only when permitted; do not weld galvanized materials or connections
intended for bolting.

17 September 2015
b) Weld only those items that can be ground and finished to match the appearance of the adjacent
surfaces.
c) Weld continuously along joints without causing distortion, discoloration or other imperfections
in the finished work.
d) Grind welds smooth and imperceptible in the finished work.
10. Anchoring Posts:
a) Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, non-
metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed in accordance with anchoring material
b) Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this
purpose.
2. For stainless steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
c) Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
C. Tension mesh infill panels to remain within the specified deflection limits without causing distortion in the
weave.
D. Fastening Directly to Structure
design.
E. Installation Tolerances
1. The work shall be erected in proper alignment in relation to established lines and grids indicated
2. Joints: The width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more than ±1mm. Any
variation shall be equally distributed with no sudden changes. The work shall be erected such that
no joint is more than 1.5mm from a vertical plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations
on any vertical plane shall not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane of the work shall be within
±1.5mm of the theoretical position.
3. Alignment: Adjacent elements of balustrades shall not deviate from either their intended horizontal
or vertical alignment by more than ±2mm.
4. Level of Horizontal/ Raking Members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
5. Plumb of Vertical Members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
6. Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the lesser of
±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimension.
7. Bow: The center section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or 0.075%
of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of the element.
8. Straightness: Any surface of edge shall not deviate by more than ±2mm from a 2000mm straightedge
placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.

17 September 2015
9. Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than ±2mm from a 2000mm straightedge placed
against it in any direction.
10. Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at either end of
the element.
11. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
12. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the work are such that, within any planning
grid area, the allowable tolerances are to be equally distributed to ensure that:
a) The balustrades are vertical.
b) The vertical joints are of equal size and at equal centers.
c) The support mullions are vertical and at even centers.
d) The supports have straight lines and flat planes.
e) The horizontal joints are of equal size and in line between adjacent panels.
f) The gap between the panels and structure posts is constant.
F. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the Works.
repairs, shall be acceptable unless accepted in advance by the Engineer.
G. Railing Connections
1. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to
match finish of railings.
2. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
3. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required
to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50mm beyond joint
on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 150mm of post.
H. Attaching Railings
1. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing
ends or connected to railing ends using non-welded connections.
2. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing
ends or connected to railing ends using non-welded connections.
3. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with
suitable clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated
or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
A. Site Tests and Inspections: Perform the specified tests and inspections using a suitably experienced
quality manager.

17 September 2015
B. Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the manufacturer to do Site
visits for 1 full day at the start of the installation, and twice weekly as the work progresses. Technical
representative to provide surveillance of the materials installation, and monitor and report installation
procedures and unacceptable conditions.
C. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
A. Cleaning
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers, and without
2. If stainless steel has not been protected by adhesive film, thoroughly clean prior to presentation to
the Engineer for acceptance.
B. Adjusting
1. Adjust operating parts to provide smooth unbinding operation. Make good adjacent surfaces marred
during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Repair or replace damaged or defective items
to acceptance of the Engineer.
C. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean Site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting in accordance
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean Site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
in accordance with ASTM A780.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect exposed surfaces during and after installation, with boards, coverings, low tack tapes and
adhesive film. Remove and replace protection as instructed by the Engineer, for inspection; remove
immediately before Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 060573 -- WOOD TREATMENT 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2
2.2 MATERIALS 2
PART 3 EXECUTION 4
3.1 PREPARATION 4
3.2 INSTALLATION 4
3.3 PROTECTION 5

Tender Issue 060573 WOOD TREATMENT
17 September 2015
SECTION 060573 -- WOOD TREATMENT

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Division 01 General Requirements,
the Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.

systems, etc. indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate their safe installation.
C. Section Includes
1. Wood treatment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Warranties.
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes, and
cleaning frequency.

Tender Issue 060573 / 1 WOOD TREATMENT
17 September 2015
1. A specialist with at least 10 years successful experience in performing similar work.
B. For each batch of wood a certificate of assurance shall be provided to show that treatment has been
carried out as specified.
C. Provide mock-ups, testing and inspections in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section
014000 Quality Requirements.
D. Mock-ups
E. Prototypes
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, provide materials in accordance with American Wood Protection
Association (AWPA) Publication Standards.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hazardous Materials Elimination Requirements
1. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) Treatment: Provide materials that do not contain CCA-treated
wood to comply with the requirements as stated in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and
Specifications.
B. Preservative Pressure Treatment
1. Toxicity/ IEQ: Products containing chromium will not be permitted. Products containing arsenic will
not be permitted.
2. Waterborne Wood Preservatives:
a) Wood products shall be treated with waterborne wood preservatives conforming to AWPA
Standard P5, excluding those which contain arsenic and/ or chromium.
b) Pressure treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA Standards
U1 and T1.
c) Retention of preservatives:
1. Moderate service conditions (weather exposure): 0.25 pounds per cubic foot (oxide basis).
2. Severe conditions (constant contact with ground or water): 0.40 pounds per cubic foot
(oxide basis).
3. Borate-based preservative:
a) Impregnate lumber with preservative treatment conforming to AWPA Standard P18.

17 September 2015
C. Fire Retardant Treatment
1. Fire retardant treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and
formaldehyde.
2. Fire Retardant Formulations:
a) Fire retardant treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA Standard
U1, Commodity Specification section 6.H and AWPA Standard T1, Special Requirements by
Commodity section 8.H.
D. Wood Preservative Treated Materials
1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: In accordance with AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for
interior construction not in contact with the ground; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction
not in contact with the ground; and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground, unless
indicated otherwise.
a) Kiln-dry wood lumber and kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of
19% and 15% respectively.
b) For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations
that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
c) Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
d) Mark wood with treatment-quality mark of an approved inspection agency.
e) For exposed wood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, either mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency to the acceptance of the Engineer.
f) Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.
g) For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece.
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials
1. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and that comply with requirements in this Article and with fire-test-
response characteristics specified.
a) Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking
standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
b) Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely

affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.
c) Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance

requirements of AWPA Standard U1. Use one of the following treatment types.
1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. Provide in
accordance with ASTM D2898.
2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. Treated materials shall have a moisture content of
28% or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92% relative humidity. Use where exterior
type is not indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Use treatment type that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or
other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

17 September 2015
5. Only if the Engineer deems this process acceptable and the manufacturer has confirmed that the
wood species and treatment process specified are approved for this process, Contractor is permitted
to mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-
response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency.
6. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Organic Solvent Preservative Treatment
1. The moisture content of wood at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the component at
the time of delivery. After treatment, the wood shall be surface dry before use.
2. Applied using double vacuum/ low pressure.
B. Water Based Micro-emulsion Preservative Treatment
1. Based on copper and organic biocides.
2. The moisture content of the wood at the time of treatment shall be not more than 28%. Allow wood
to dry for at least 14 days before use and until dry.
C. Boron Compound Preservative Treatment
1. Based on boron compounds.
2. The moisture content of the wood at the time of treatment shall be not more than 28%. Allow wood
to dry for at least 14 days before use and until dry.
D. Fire Retardant Treatment
1. The moisture content at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the wood at the time of fixing.
After treatment, wood shall be dried slowly at temperatures not exceeding 65°C to minimize
degradation and distortion.
2. Applied using vacuum/ hydraulic and low pressure.
E. Leach Resistant Fire Retardant Treatment
1. The moisture content at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the wood at the time of fixing
or:
a) 22% for woods up to 50mm thick.
b) 25% for thicker woods.
2. Applied using vacuum/ hydraulic and low pressure.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Application shall be carried out after cutting and machining, but before assembly, by a processor licensed
by the treatment solution manufacturer for the specified treatment.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible
flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed
to view.

17 September 2015
D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces and other concealed cavities as indicated on the
Design Drawings and other applicable Work Sections.
E. Where field treatment for cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber is necessary comply with AWPA
Standard M4.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect any wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection
provided, the inorganic boron becomes wet, apply an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)-registered
borate treatment. Apply the borate solution by spraying in accordance with the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA)-registered label.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 062023 -- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 6
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 7
2.6 FABRICATION 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 8
3.2 PREPARATION 8
3.3 INSTALLATION 9
3.4 FINISHING 10
3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION 11

Tender Issue 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
17 September 2015
SECTION 062023 -- INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Wooden Skirting.
2. Shelves.
3. Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
5. Fire Strategy Report
E. Drawing Description References: The reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained in
the Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on the
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 062023 / 1 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each surface and finish.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
4. Statement of the manufacturer's review confirming suitability of specified materials.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Warranties.
reference numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes
1. A specialist, who has at least 10 years' successful experience performing similar work.
3. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
4. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

17 September 2015
B. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
E. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. Each item installed in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
F. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
A. Delivery: Do not deliver finish carpentry until conditions of temperature and humidity are similar to those
in the finished building. Protect finish carpentry from wetting or damage during transportation.
B. Storage: Store materials on flat bases to prevent racking. Protect material from humidity and direct
sunlight. Provide adequate ventilation of storage spaces.
C. Handling: Handle finish carpentry carefully to avoid distorting and damage to edges, corners and finished
surfaces.
A. Do not install work until the building is enclosed, wet work is complete and the HVAC system is operating,
and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels, for the remainder of the
construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
D. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FXG-201 Shelves
1. Description: Wooden shelves including all necessary fasteners and accessories to complete the
installation, configured as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer .
3. Wood Species: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4. Framework: Softwood frames and battens.

17 September 2015
5. Size, Profile and Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6. Finish: Plain sliced, transparent stained.
7. Hardware: Selected from the manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
B. Type TRM-501 Wooden Skirting
1. Description: Solid wood applied as trim and crown molding as indicated on the Design Drawings
fastened to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
3. Wood Species: To be confirmed by the Engineer
4. Height: 150mm.
5. Finish: To match floor tile.
6. Substrate: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. Wood products shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited
certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest
Stewardship".
2. Composite wood products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers".
3. Wood
a) No damaged, rotten or discolored materials shall be used.
b) Materials shall be relatively knot free, free from distortion, cracks or other blemishes.
c) All wood shall be selected for its final use (of particular importance for dry structural wood):
1. For internal use, wood shall be graded and stamped DRY or KD (kiln dried) and shall
have a moisture content of 20% or less.
d) Moisture content at the time of erection shall not be more than 20% internally in continuously
heated spaces.
4. Plywood
a) Plywood durability must have moisture content frequently above 20% unless otherwise agreed.
b) Dimensional tolerances must satisfy any additional requirements of the Specification.
c) Finish shall be suitable for its location, sanded where finished or unsanded where not visible.
5. Stress Grading of Wood
a) Stress grading of wood shall only be carried out by companies that are currently registered
under a third party quality assurance scheme operated by any of the approved certification
bodies.
b) Wood with a basic thickness of less than 150mm and not specified for wet exposure shall be
stress graded at a moisture content not exceeding 20%, and clearly marked 'Dry' or 'KD'(kiln
dried).

17 September 2015
c) Structural wood members, which are cut from larger graded sections, shall be regarded for
acceptance and then appropriately marked according to the new grade.
6. Graded Softwood
a) Softwood shall be graded according to appearance grades of lumber association grading rules
and be marked accordingly as follows:
1. Species and origin shall be as proposed by the supplier to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Strength class shall be suitable for applications.
7. Ungraded Softwood
a) Softwood shall be free from decay, insect attack and with no knots wider than half the width
of the section.
8. Fastenings
a) Ensure that fastenings do not protrude above surface of board. Fastenings shall be of a type
recommended for the purpose by the fastenings manufacturer.
A. The work shall meet the appropriate performance requirements when tested in accordance with the
procedures prescribed in the relevant standards. Provide serviceable and durable items that will perform
throughout their life without failure resulting from defects in materials or workmanship.
B. Dead and Live Loadings
1. The work shall withstand without detriment its own dead load and the various loadings imposed by
other trades, including fittings that are fastened to, pass through or are connected to the work.
Strengthening and support work, including fastening rails, shall be provided as required, to the
acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Loads on Shelving:
a) Domestic: Strength category 4.
C. Movements: The work shall be fabricated and installed to withstand all movement of the building structure
without damage or detriment.
D. Moisture Resistance
1. All materials, core materials and preservative requirements shall be selected to satisfy the design
life requirements for the environmental conditions.
2. All facings, adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the boarding shall have moisture
resistant properties to match core materials.
3. All wood shall be subjected to controlled drying to ensure that the moisture content, if not otherwise
specified, is suitable for the situation of the finished interior finish carpentry. When fastened it shall
remain stable and free from expansion, contraction or other movements detracting from the required
performance or appearance.
4. Adequate storage shall be provided for all finish carpentry components to maintain them free from
damage and in conditions suitable for their required moisture content. Do not deliver interior finish
carpentry to Site until components can be immediately unloaded into adequate storage or fastened
in position.
5. Moisture content of wood and wood based boards shall be maintained during storage and installation
within the range specified for the component.
E. Rigidity/ Strength
1. The construction of the work shall be such that it remains rigid, free from play and permanent
deformation caused by the normal use to which it is subjected.

17 September 2015
2. Details of assembly and construction methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
3. The work shall withstand all vibration to which it is subjected either directly or indirectly or any other
such shocks, strains, stresses and movements that may be imposed by the users, and these shall
not cause fracture or deterioration of any element, particularly to any movable or openable element
of the work. Suitable devices for absorbing or damping any such vibration shall be included.
F. Fire
1. Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
2. Materials used in work shall be classified as 'materials of limited combustibility'.
3. The work shall be fire resistant in accordance with the NFPA.
4. The work shall be tested to ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials.
5. Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
6. Supply test certificates to verify that all materials meet this requirement.
7. Ensure that all work is in accordance with all Statutory Authorities and Civil Defence requests/
recommendations.
G. Serviceability: The work shall provide serviceable elements that shall withstand the specified loads and
usage without damage, deformation or wear affecting function.
H. Durability: The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout its Design Life,
when maintained in accordance with an acceptable program, without loss of serviceability, rot or insect
attack, shrinkage, warping, splitting, delamination of veneers or the development of defects in applied
finishes.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)
1. In accordance with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde
resin.
2. Provide MR (moisture resistant) MDF MR10/ MR30/ MR50 as indicated on the Design Drawings.
B. Particleboard
1. In accordance with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2/ Grade M-2-Exterior Glue/ Grade M-2, made with
binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
C. Plywood
1. Softwood Plywood: In accordance with U.S. Department of Commerce (DOC) PS 1 standard.
2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): In accordance with Hardwood Plywood &
Veneer Association (HPVA) ANSI/ HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde.
D. Hardboard: In accordance with American Hardboard Association (AHA) ANSI/ AHA A135.4.
E. Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish)
1. Softwood Moldings: Provide in accordance with Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(WMMPA) WM 4, N-grade wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
2. Hardwood Moldings: Provide in accordance with Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(WMMPA) HWM 2, N-grade wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 12.
F. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish)

17 September 2015
1. Softwood Moldings: Provide in accordance with Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(WMMPA) WM 4, P-grade wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
2. Hardwood Moldings: Provide in accordance with Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
(WMMPA) HWM 2, P-grade wood moldings. Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
G. Wood Preservative Treated Materials: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
H. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
I. Mild Steel, General
1. All mild steel shall be in accordance with the Engineer's requirements where applicable, unless
stated otherwise.
2. Protective Coating: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, hot-dip galvanized.
3. Galvanizing, Surface Preparation: Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
5. Steel Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing.
6. Steel Pipe: In accordance with ASTM A53/ A53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) in accordance with MFMA-4.
J. Stainless Steel, General
1. Stainless steel shall be made of corrosion resistant nickel chromium steel for solid bar and for tube.
Bead blasted finish.
2. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666,
Type 304 for general use and Type 316L for corrosive environments.
3. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: In accordance with ASTM A276, Type 304 for general use and
Type 316L for corrosive environments.
4. All fastenings shall be of sufficient strength for their purpose. Refer to Section 050523 Metal
Fastenings.
K. Opaque Finishing: Refer to Section 099100 Painting.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material,
and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by the manufacturer for
general carpentry use.
1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30g/ L or less when calculated in accordance with 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/ L or less when calculated in accordance with 40 CFR
C. Paneling Adhesive: In accordance with the paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for
adhesives.
D. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation in accordance with ASTM D3498 that is recommended
for indicated use by the adhesive manufacturer.

17 September 2015
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Cut and form materials in accordance with accepted submittals.
2. Make allowance for cutting and trimming of work on Site prior to application of final finishes.
3. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work:
a) Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.
b) Wood-board paneling.
4. Ease edges of wood less than 25mm in nominal thickness to 1.5mm radius and edges of wood
25mm or more in nominal thickness to 3mm radius.
B. Treatment of Wood: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment for preservative treatments.
C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
D. Assembly
1. Fabricate items using materials and methods to achieve the required appearance and performance.
2. Provide joints suitable for their location and purpose.
3. Use tenons, dowels, biscuits or other reinforcement as necessary to ensure accurate alignment
and strength.
4. Shop assemble to greatest extent possible; disassemble only to the extent necessary for shipment.
5. Cut openings to the maximum extent possible to receive equipment, fixtures and fittings, using
templates.
6. Sand surfaces and edges of wood or unfinished boards in contact with the user to remove roughness.
Seal cut outs to prevent moisture absorption.
E. Hardware: Machine items to receive hardware as required in the fabrication shop, using templates and
cutting tools provided by the manufacturer. Identify hardware associated with each item for re-fastening
after finishing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Prior to commencing installation, examine the areas and the conditions under which the work will
be installed. Verify dimensions, levels and alignments, and surfaces to receive the work of this Work
Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
2. Examine substrates, with the Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances.
B. Examine interior finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION

17 September 2015
A. Inspection: Areas scheduled shall be checked before receiving the work for correct dimensions,
plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect the installation of mounting brackets.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
C. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation
areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes,
or patterns.
2. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
a) Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by the manufacturer.
b) Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless
otherwise indicated.
c) Install to tolerance of 3mm in 2438mm for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish
carpentry with 0.8mm maximum offset for flush installation and 1.5mm maximum offset for
reveal installation.
d) Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cut-outs for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.
B. On-Site Dimensions
1. All dimensions to be checked on Site.
2. The work shall accommodate all specified tolerances and differences between actual Site
dimensions and dimensions indicated on the Shop Drawings.
C. Fastening: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
1. Fastening and jointing methods and types, sizes, quantities and spacings of fastenings shall be
suitable, in accordance with the recommendations of manufacturers of fastenings components,
products or materials being fastened and fastened to.
2. The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fastened or anything receiving fastenings.
D. Adhesives
1. Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound and free from dust, grease and any other contamination
likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and materials recommended
by the adhesive manufacturer.
2. Surfaces shall be sufficiently smooth and even to suit the gap-filling and bonding characteristics of
the adhesive. Prepare as necessary.
3. Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers' and statutory requirements for storage and safe
usage of adhesives.
4. No adhesives shall be used in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the manufacturer's

recommended maximum shelf life or open-pot time periods.
5. Adhesives shall be applied by recommended spreaders/ applicators to ensure correct coverage.

Bring surfaces together within the recommended time period and apply pressure evenly over the
full area of contact surfaces to ensure full bonding.

17 September 2015
6. Surplus adhesive shall be removed using methods and materials recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer and without damage to affected surfaces.
E. Standing and Running Trim Installation
1. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
wood available. Do not use pieces less than 610mm long, except where necessary and to the
acceptance of the Engineer. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Either
cope or miter at returns as indicated on the Shop Drawings, miter at outside corners, and cope at
inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use
scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints
where necessary for alignment.
a) Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints.
b) Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed.
c) Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting.
Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry
work and fill holes.
F. Shelving and Clothes Rod Installation
1. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 13mm less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends
smooth unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face
and filled. Space fasteners not more than 400mm o.c. In general, use 2 No. fasteners at each
framing member or fastener location for cleats 89mm actual in width and wider.
a) Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf cleats before installing.
Remove adhesive that is squeezed out after fastening shelf cleats in place.
3. Install shelf brackets according to the manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than
800mm o.c. or 900mm o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle
bolts or hollow wall anchors.
4. Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
Space fasteners not more than 300mm o.c.
5. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to the manufacturer's written instructions,
spaced not more than 900mm o.c. and within 150mm of end of shelves. Fasten to framing members,
blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
6. Cut shelves to fit openings neatly with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and
reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
a) Fasten shelves to cleats with finish nails or trim screws, set flush.
b) Fasten shelves to brackets in accordance with the bracket manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal
backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges.
3.4 FINISHING
A. All wood surfaces shall be sanded to give smooth, flat surfaces suitable to receive specified finishes.
Arrises shall be eased unless specified otherwise.
B. Before fastening, all end grains and cuts shall be sealed with primer to suit service conditions and Site
applied decoration.
C. All general finishes shall be compatible with the finishes specified for adjacent materials.
D. For opaque finishing requirements, refer to Section 099100 Painting and the finish schedule and finish
notes as indicated on the Design Drawings.

17 September 2015
3.5 CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely. Clean
the work of dirt, splashes and excess material. Make good adjacent surfaces marred by the execution
of the work, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled
areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
B. Adjusting
1. Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the Engineer. Return items to
the shop that cannot be satisfactorily repaired on Site for refinishing or replacement.
2. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or is not in accordance with the requirements.
Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows
no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust finish carpentry for uniform appearance.
C. Protection
1. Complete items shall be protected against damage, dirt, moisture and other deleterious substances.
2. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as directed for
inspection and remove completely at Taking-Over.
3. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
a) Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
b) Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 064200 -- WOOD PANELING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 6
2.5 FABRICATION 9
2.6 FINISHES 10
PART 3 EXECUTION 11
3.1 EXAMINATION 11
3.2 PREPARATION 11
3.3 INSTALLATION 11

Tender Issue 064200 WOOD PANELING
17 September 2015
SECTION 064200 -- WOOD PANELING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Wood wall panels.
4. Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies.
5. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 064200 / 1 WOOD PANELING
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of wood paneling.
2. Sample of demountable support system.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Samples as specified forming the acceptable control samples for each paneling type.
2. All fastenings and demountable supports.
1. Warranties.
A. Fabricator/ Installer's Qualifications: A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing
similar work.
2. Applicators of chemical preservatives or fire retardant treatments shall be licensed by the product
manufacturer. Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.

17 September 2015
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. A 5000mm run full height of each type.
1. First area of each type of paneling in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
A. Delivery: Do not deliver wood paneling until conditions of temperature and humidity are similar to those
in the finished building. Protect wood paneling from moisture or damage during transportation.
B. Storage
1. Store materials in protected locations away from direct sunlight. Ensure adequate ventilation of
storage spaces.
2. Stack boards and panels flat on bearers and separated by spacers where necessary to prevent
damage to or from projections.
C. Handling: Handle wood paneling carefully to avoid distorting and overstressing joints. Protect corners
and finished surfaces from damage. Place paneling temporarily on flat bases to prevent racking.
A. Do not commence installation until the building is enclosed, wet work is complete and dry, and the HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type LIN-101 Wooden Wall Panel
1. Description: Wood panel wall lining comprising stained veneer panels and wood trim and base
configured as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary fastenings and accessories
required to complete the installation.
3. Panel, Wood Trim and Base: Wooden Veneer.
4. Wood Species: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
5. Finish: Stained.

17 September 2015
6. Minimum Veneer Thickness: 0.6mm.
8. Mounting: Panels shall be installed flush, side by side, in accordance with the manufacturer's
guidelines and as accepted by the Engineer.
9. Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Wood
1. No damaged, rotten or discolored materials shall be used.
2. Unsound, dead and loose knots shall not be present on any visible face. Arris, splay, margin and
branched knots shall not be acceptable.
3. Resin pockets shall not be acceptable in any event on any exposed surface. No making good shall
be allowed.
4. Neither discolored sapwood nor exposed pith shall be acceptable.
5. Grain: All elements shall be cut from quarter sawn wood. Crown cut shall not be acceptable.
6. All wood shall be selected for its final use (of particular importance for dry structural wood).
a) For internal use, wood shall be graded and stamped 'Dry' or 'KD' (kiln dried) and shall have a
moisture content of 20% or less.
B. Graded Softwood
1. Softwood shall be graded according to appearance grades of lumber association grading rules and
be marked accordingly as follows:
a) Species and origin shall be as proposed by the supplier to the acceptance of the Engineer.
b) Strength class shall be suitable for applications.
C. Ungraded Softwood
1. Softwood shall be free from decay, insect attack and with no knots wider than half the width of the
section.
D. Hardwood
1. All hardwoods shall be fully compliant with the sustainability criteria stipulated in Division 01 General
Requirements. Notwithstanding the obligations on such sustainable wood procurement, the
Contractor shall ensure that he is able to provide, on demand, full certification and Chain of Custody
Tracking on this material, in the event that it is sought by environmental pressure groups or other
project stakeholders.
2. Unsound, dead and loose knots shall not be present on any visible face. Arris, splay, margin and
branched knots are not acceptable.
3. Resin pockets are not acceptable in any event on any exposed surface. No making good shall be
allowed.
4. Neither discolored sapwood nor exposed pith shall be acceptable.
5. All elements shall be cut from quarter sawn wood, Crown cut shall not be acceptable. wood shall
be end matched
E. Wood Veneer Panels

17 September 2015
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the veneer supplier has sufficient stocks of the selected batches
reserved.
2. Veneers shall be Grade 1 Architectural grade, unless otherwise indicated, and from sources which
operate the principle of sustained yield management.
3. Veneers shall be applied to both faces of panels. Core material and veneers shall be conditioned
before bonding.
4. Apply veneers with edges tight butted, with no gaps or other open defects. Set out veneers so that
they are aligned in regular uniform symmetry unless otherwise specified.
5. Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions, glue
spill, staining and other defects.
6. Sand to a fine, smooth finish, free from sanding marks.
7. Ensure that the veneer is thoroughly bonded to the backing including taking precautions to prevent
telegraphing.
8. Veneers shall receive clear satin lacquer with standard sheen unless otherwise indicated.
F. Plywood
1. Ensure that fastenings do not protrude above surface of board. Fastenings shall be of a type
2. Finish shall be suitable for its location, sanded where finished or unsanded where not visible.
A. Movements: Paneling shall accommodate all movement in backing wall structure as relevant to the
paneling type and the nature of the supporting walls. Refer to the Structural Specification.
B. Dead Loads
1. All fastenings and support systems shall be sufficiently strong to support the dead loads for paneling
without damage to paneling or to backing wall support.
2. Special care shall be taken to ensure adequate backing support for any fixtures/ fittings and grab
rails, which require to be fastened to the paneling.
C. Live Loads
1. The paneling, including the demountable supports and any studwork supports, shall be capable of
accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in performance:
a) Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of any component. The work shall sustain
safely, without reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to any component,
a static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on any part of the
framing.
b) All anticipated loads associated with cleaning and maintenance of the work.
1. All core materials for paneling shall be moisture resistant to satisfy the design life requirements for
the environmental conditions specified in Division 01 General Requirements.
2. All facings, adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the paneling shall have moisture
resistant properties to match core materials.
3. All wood shall be subjected to controlled drying to ensure that the moisture content is appropriate
for the situation of the finished work. Wood shall remain stable and free from expansion, contraction
or other movements that may lead to degradation, loss of appearance or performance.

17 September 2015
4. Ensure that the moisture content of all materials is appropriate to the conditions of use and that the
components withstand the prevailing levels of relative humidity both in construction and use.
5. Ensure that all materials including supports, brackets and all fastenings are adequately corrosion
protected to meet the specified environmental conditions.
E. Acoustics
1. Refer to the Acoustic Report.
2. The work shall not produce buzzing, ringing or other extraneous noise. Extraneous noise arising
from local response to paneling or loose fit resonant elements shall be avoided by means of careful
quality control in assembly and installation.
F. Fire
characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
3. The work shall be fire resistant in accordance with the NFPA.
4. The work shall be tested to ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials.
7. Ensure that all work is in accordance with all statutory authorities and Civil Defense requests/
recommendations.
G. Durability: The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout its design life, when
maintained in accordance with an acceptable program, without loss of serviceability, rot or insect attack,
shrinkage, warping, splitting, delamination of veneers or the development of defects in applied finishes.
H. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
1. General: Surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects without
any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The work shall resist abrasion from cleaning
methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface appearance.
2. Impact tests shall be carried out to all work adjacent to pedestrian areas.
I. Appearance Changes: Opening of joints, discontinuities in monolithic finishes, color changes or yellowing
of coatings, or the development of defects specified in the Architectural Woodwork Institute's Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards shall not be permitted for wood paneling fabrication and installation.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that are in accordance with the requirements of AWI's or WI's quality standard
for quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Reused or Certified Wood Materials: Provide materials containing reused or certified wood in accordance
with the requirements as stated in Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.

17 September 2015
C. Legally Sourced Wood Materials: Provide legally sourced materials and documentation stating that the
wood materials used for the Project use are not on the Convention on International Trade in Endangered
Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES) list of endangered species to comply with the requirements
as stated in Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
D. Certified Wood: Wood paneling where indicated shall be produced from wood obtained from forests
certified by a Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)-accredited certification body in accordance with FSC
STD-01-001, 'FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship'.
E. Wood Products: In accordance with the following.
1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Post-consumer recycled

content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than the required percentage as
stated in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specification.
2. Hardboard: In accordance with American Hardboard Association (AHA) ANSI/ AHA A135.4.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
5. Softwood Plywood: In accordance with U.S. Department of Commerce (DOC) PS 1 Medium Density
Overlay.
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): In accordance with Hardwood Plywood &
formaldehyde.
F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required

by woodwork quality standard.
1. The substrate for decorative laminate bonded board shall be one of the following:
a) Particleboard.
b) Plywood.
c) MDF.
d) Hardboard.
2. Determine the final thickness of bonded panels in order to provide the required structural strength,
dimensional stability and impact resistance.
3. Ensure that the laminate is thoroughly bonded to the backing panel.
4. All edges of the laminated plywood panels shall be smooth cut and of the same color and material
as the flat surfaces, except that the laminate shall be solid core. Edges shall be applied first, followed
by the top surface and chamfered 45° along all edges.
5. All fastening holes shall be oversized to allow laminate shrinkage.
G. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
1. VOC Content: Adhesive products shall be in accordance with VOC limits as stated in Dubai Green
H. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives in accordance with the
required limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Wood Glues: 30g/ L.
2. Panel Adhesives: 50g/ L.
3. Contact Adhesive: 80g/ L.

17 September 2015
4. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive: A contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine covered
board, metal, unsupported vinyl, rubber or wood veneer less than 1.6mm thick to any surface: 250g/
L.
I. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
J. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
K. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels in accordance with the following requirements, made from softwood
particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-
spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
1. For panels 19mm thick and less, in accordance with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the
following minimum properties: Modulus of rupture, 11MPa; modulus of elasticity, 270MPa; internal
bond, 550kPa; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 1110N and 1000N, respectively.
2. For panels 20mm to 32mm thick, in accordance with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the
following minimum properties: Modulus of rupture, 9MPa; modulus of elasticity, 1720MPa; linear
expansion, 0.50%; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 1110N and 780N, respectively.
L. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels in accordance with ANSI A208.2, made
from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel
manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less in
accordance with ASTM E84.
M. Installation Materials
1. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than
15% moisture content.
2. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15% moisture content.
3. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves
for drilled-in-place anchors.
N. Mild Steel, General
1. All mild steel shall be designed in accordance with the Engineer's requirements where applicable,
unless stated otherwise.
indicated.
O. Stainless Steel, General
1. Stainless steel shall be made of corrosion resistant nickel chromium steel.

17 September 2015
Fastenings.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate work in temperature and humidity conditions similar to the finished building. Shop
fabricate and pre-fit components complete before finishing; minimize Site fabrication.
B. Treatment of Wood: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
1. Treat non-durable wood in potentially damp or humid conditions with preservative, to preservative
manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise accepted. Wood shall be dried to specified levels of
moisture content prior to cutting and assembly.
2. Solid Stock Framing: Cut and plane on all 4 sides prior to chemical treatment application where
indicated. Fabricate framing assemblies strong and rigid.
C. Paneling Grade: Provide grade paneling in accordance with referenced quality standard.
D. Shop fabricate board paneling in lengths to provide pieces that are uninterrupted by joints./ Shop fabricate
board paneling from boards of standard random lengths, in accordance with applicable grading rules.
Machine edges and ends of boards to provide joint profiles indicated on the Design Drawings.Machine
edges and ends of boards to provide joint profiles indicated on the Design Drawings.
E. Preassemble board paneling into largest units that can be delivered into installation areas using
permanent or temporary backing members. To maximum extent possible, fabricate units in sizes
determined by Site measurements of existing conditions and that shall avoid fitting in the Site, make
provision for separate scribing pieces to be fitted to adjoining finished surfaces. Provide shop-prepared
detachable pieces for forming joints with other units at Site and with other types of architectural woodwork.
F. Arrange paneling in shop or other suitable space in proposed sequence for examination by the Engineer.
Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout.
1. Lay out 1 No. elevation at a time if approved by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the date and time when layout will be available for viewing.
3. Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout, unless otherwise
approved by Engineer.
4. Rearrange paneling as directed by Engineer until layout is approved.
5. Do not trim end units and other non-modular size units to less than modular size until after the
Engineer's approval of layout. Indicate trimming by masking edges of units with non-marking
material.
6. Obtain the Engineer's approval of layout before start of assembly. Mark units and Shop Drawings
with assembly sequence numbers based on approved layout.
G. Concealed Framing and Bases to Support Panels: Shop fabricate items, treated as specified, from solid
stock framing unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
H. Provide paneling of thickness specified. Assemble by gluing and concealed fastening.
I. Apply concealed hardwood lipping to exposed panel edges finished with decorative veneers.
J. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
K. Use joints suitable for their location and purpose with dowels or suitable reinforcement; provide for
accurate alignment and strength. Provide for joints with adjoining construction without the use of visible
brackets or visible fastenings.
L. Machine items to accept flush mounted skirting, fixtures, accessories and built-in items, to the maximum
extent possible; use templates provided by the manufacturers.
M. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cut-outs to remove splinters and burrs.

17 September 2015
N. Steel Framing
1. Steel framing members shall be fabricated using only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses
to provide full structural compliance. The wall thickness of steel sections shall be sufficient to ensure
rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
a) Corrosion protection, hot-dip galvanising.
b) Use only continuous profiles free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves or any other damage.
O. Wood Framing
1. Regularized treated softwood studs, free from decay and active insect attack, and with no knots
wider than half the width of the section.
a) Size: Minimum 75mm x 50mm unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Moisture content at time of fastening: Not exceeding 18%.
c) Spacing: Maximum 600mm or to suit paneling in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
P. Accuracy of Fabrication
1. Exact Site dimensions shall be taken before commencing fabrication. Any discrepancies shall be
reported to the Engineer without delay and instructions obtained before proceeding.
2. Panels shall be fabricated within the following tolerances:
a) Length: ±1.5mm.
b) Width: ±1.5mm.
c) Squareness: ±1.5mm in 1m (taking the longer of 2 sides at any corner as a baseline and
measuring the deviation of the shorter side from perpendicular).
d) Flatness: ±1mm under 600mm straightedges.
3. Finished dimensions of components shall be such that the required accuracy of the finished linings/
Q. Completion of Fabrication
1. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible, before
shipment to Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at Site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
a) Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be
complete.
b) Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install
dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial
fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against
Sited measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
2. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Shop Finishes
1. General: Apply finishes in controlled, dust-free conditions. Site finishing shall not be permitted.
2. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as paneling to be finished.

17 September 2015
3. Preparation:
a) Prepare surfaces to receive an applied finish: Remove surface marks, roughness, open grain
or contamination.
b) Apply initial coat of finish or sealer to surfaces, including board edges, cut-outs and recesses,
immediately after preparation.
c) In accordance with referenced quality standards for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners,
sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing paneling, as applicable to
each unit of work.
4. Staining: Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint
stains. Apply stains continuously without overlaps to uniform color across each surface.
5. Painting and Lacquering: Mix and spray apply to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Lightly sand between coats to a uniform flat surface. Apply coatings to the
specified dry film thickness, with uniform sheen and texture, and without runs or defects.
6. Decorative Laminates: Factory apply laminates to panels in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Pressure bond 1 piece of plastic laminate to both sides of the material to achieve a
properly balanced construction free of voids, blisters or other defects. Minimize visible black line at
edges. Slightly ease edges.
7. Decorative Veneers: Pressure-bond the veneer to both sides of the material after the application of
the matching lipping to achieve a properly balanced construction free of blisters, gaps or visible
glue-lines. Arrange the flitches of veneer to obtain the required design on the visible faces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
adjacent construction and conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions of supporting
construction, and surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspection
1. Areas scheduled shall be checked before receiving the work for correct dimensions, plumbness of
walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.
B. Do not install the work before the building is weathertight, wet trades have finished their work and the
building is well dried out.
C. All cutting, chasing, plugging and making good required in the adjacent structure shall be completed.
D. All loose material shall be removed by thoroughly brushing the base and adjacent wall structure.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished surfaces except where shown on the Shop Drawings or
otherwise agreed with the Engineer. Where cutting is permitted, lightly sand cut edges of boards to
remove roughness.
2. Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
3. Paneling shall be set out accurately, true to line and level, free from undulations, with lines and
joints aligned, straight and parallel unless specified otherwise.
4. Panels shall be fastened securely, with concealed fastenings adequate to prevent pulling away,
bowing or other movement during use and without causing stress or distortion to panels.

17 September 2015
5. Allowance for future moisture and temperature movement of panels shall be made.
6. Complete finishing work specified in this Work Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish
coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/ prime coats
are applied in shop.
7. Methods of fastening and fastenings shall be as recommended in writing by the manufacturer and
suitable for the application of the material.
8. Trims shall be fastened in unjointed lengths between angles or ends of runs. Where running joints
are unavoidable, obtain acceptance for location and method of jointing from the Engineer. Angle
joints shall be mitred unless specified otherwise.
specified, is suitable for the situation of the finished wood paneling. When fastened it shall remain
stable and free from expansion, contraction or other movements detracting from the required
performance or appearance.
10. Adequate storage shall be provided for all components to maintain them free from damage and in
conditions suitable for their required moisture content. Do not deliver to Site until components can
be immediately unloaded into adequate storage or fastened in position.
11. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design. Joints in
exposed metal work shall be accurately fitted and rigidly secured with hairline contacts. Exposed
joints in flat surfaces shall be flush, unless otherwise indicated. End joints shall have sleeves of the
same outline as the exposed shapes to assure good alignments.
12. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the work to avoid it being scratched or otherwise
defaced during the course of installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall
be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
13. Do not install units that have members that are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged
or defaced. Remove and replace such members as directed.
B. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain
character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 6mm gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom,
and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space
fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
3. Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports. Fasten to supports with nails of type and at
spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching
groove color.
C. Hardboard Paneling: Install according to the manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 6mm gap
to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. Use
fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color.
1. Wood Stud or Furring Substrate: Install with 25mm annular-ring shank hardboard nails.
2. Plaster or Gypsum-Board Substrate: Install with 41mm annular-ring shank hardboard nails.
3. Nailing: Space nails 100mm o.c. at panel perimeter and 200mm o.c. at intermediate supports unless
otherwise required by the manufacturer.
D. Board Paneling: Install according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random-width
pattern suggested by the manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width.
1. Install in full lengths without end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall.
a) Tongue-and-Groove Pattern: Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-
and-groove) joints within each field of paneling.

17 September 2015
b) Other Patterns: Install with uniform end joints. Locate end joints only over furring or blocking.
3. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and
color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards.
4. Fastening:
a) Fasten paneling by face nailing, setting nails, and filling over nail heads.
b) Fasten paneling with trim screws, set below face and filled.
c) Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues.
d) Fasten paneling with paneling system manufacturer's concealed clips.
e) Fasten paneling to gypsum wallboard with panel adhesive.
E. Construction of Metal Studs: Refer to Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1. Studs at wall junctions and floor/ soffit shall be fastened securely at 600mm centers, maintaining
sequence across openings and providing additional studs as necessary to ensure support to all
vertical edges of boards. Vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions shall be staggered.
2. Provide blocking, noggings and bearers, which are accurately positioned and securely fastened
within the wall construction and act as fastening points for attachment of wood paneling. After
fastening the panels and linings over the gypsum board assembly, the positions of blockings and
bearers shall be marked, for following trades and for wood paneling installation.
3. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Adhesives
usage of adhesives.

5. Adhesives shall be applied using recommended spreaders/ applicators to ensure correct coverage.
G. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
H. Tolerances
1. On-Site Dimensions:
a) All dimensions shall be checked on Site prior to commencement of the installation.
2. The work shall accommodate any given tolerance as well as differences between actual Site
dimensions and dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings.
3. Installation Tolerances: The work shall be installed within the following tolerances:

17 September 2015
a) Level within ±1.5mm.
b) Flatness criterion of 1:1000 gradient.
c) Total creep shall be less than 1:2500.
A. Cleaning
the work of dirt and materials affecting appearance.
B. Adjusting
1. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Adjust
the installation to ensure correct alignment of components and smooth unbinding operation of
moving parts. Make good fastening holes and minor damage, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
C. Protection
1. Keep components of the paneling systems clean and dry, and adequately protect from physical
damage until Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071352 -- MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 5
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
3.6 PROTECTION 7

Tender Issue 071352 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
SECTION 071352 -- MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

3. Where required to prepare the Shop Drawings, these shall be limited to final detailing of components
and systems and other required elements indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to
demonstrate their safe installation.
1. Modified bituminous deck-paving waterproofing membrane.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 071352 / 1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
1. Tanking/ membrane sample.
2. Venting membrane.
3. Jointing tape.
4. Sealant material.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
3. Jointing tape.
Submittals, and submit the following.
1. Warranties.
A. Manufacturer and Installer's Qualifications
1. Manufacturer: A specialist, who has at least 5 years' experience manufacturing sheet waterproofing
similar in material and design as those specified in this Work Section.
2. Installer: A firm experienced in applying sheet waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful
in-service performance, and employs workers trained and accepted by the manufacturer.

17 September 2015
3. Certification to ISO 9001 or operate a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Mock-ups: Not required.
D. Prototypes: Not required.
1. First structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems comply with the
specified performance requirements.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name
and qualifying information.
B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store materials
away from excessive heat. Do not exceed the allowable structural capacity of the storage area. Observe
manufacturer's recommended temperature limits.
C. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are
damaged, contaminated or otherwise unfit for use. Do not open packaging or remove labels until just
prior to installation.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which the manufacturer

agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Taking-Over.
B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Work Section, for
warranty period of 2 years.
1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation,
pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply

17 September 2015
1. Obtain products from manufacturers having at least 10 years' experience of producing similar
materials. Materials and components shall be obtained from or under the direction of the membrane
manufacturer.
2. Obtain waterproofing materials from a single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Type WPS-102 Modified Bituminous Deck-Paving Waterproofing Membrane
1. Description: Modified bituminous deck-paving sheet waterproofing system including all necessary
fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: BASF or acceptable equivalent.
3. Product Reference: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
4. System: Modified styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) water proofing membrane with 200g/m²

polyester.
5. Thickness: 4mm.
6. Surface Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Application: Torch-applied.
8. Jointing must be carried out by overlapping the edges of the membranes, for at least 8cm in the
case of side joints and 12cm for head joints.
9. Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
10. Reinforcement: 200g/ m² Polyester.
A. Movements
1. The installation shall accommodate movements in the substrate/ background due to thermal
expansion and contraction or due to changes in moisture content.
B. Fire Performance
1. Combustion: The works shall incorporate materials of limited combustibility that do not give off toxic
fumes.
3. Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
C. Physical Properties
1. Modified Bituminous Deck-Paving Sheet Waterproofing:
a) Tensile Strength, Membrane: 8.75kN/ m minimum in accordance with ASTM D882.
b) Pliability: Unaffected when bent 180 over a 6.4mm mandrel at -26°C in accordance with ASTM
D146.
c) Puncture Resistance, Mesh: 180N minimum in accordance with ASTM E154.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Modified Bituminous Deck Paving Sheet Waterproofing Membrane
1. Modified Bituminous Deck-Paving Sheet: Torch-applied sheets to be overlaid with concrete paving;
consisting of rubberized-asphalt membrane with woven or non-woven fabric reinforcement
laminated to one surface or embedded within the membrane, and with release liner on adhesive side.

17 September 2015
B. Auxiliary Materials
1. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
a) VOC Content: Adhesive products shall comply with Dubai Green Building Regulations and
Specifications.
b) Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material

manufacturer.
3. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-
waterproofing material manufacturer.
4. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low
viscosity.
5. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.
6. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, predrilled at centers.
7. Protection Course:
a) In accordance with ASTM D6506, semi-rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic

core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners.
1. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for

protection course type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by the
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by the
manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.
3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, sound, and ready to receive waterproofing sheet.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other
construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and
other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks
in accordance with ASTM D4258.

17 September 2015
1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and center over treated
construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1.6mm or 3mm for modified
bituminous deck-paving waterproofing.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints
with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first
and overlap to substrate.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners in accordance with ASTM D6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install fillets of liquid membrane on
horizontal inside corners and as follows:
a) At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction from corner or install
membrane strip centered over corner.
b) At plaza-deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips onto deck

waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions in accordance with ASTM D6135.
I. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect adjoining surfaces from damage or soiling during the execution
of the work.
J. Setting Out: Accurately set out the work, particularly in relation to interfaces with other adjacent or related
work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Torch-Applied Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing Membrane
1. Surface should be primed with manufacturer recommended bituminous primer.
2. Membrane is unrolled and in aligned position.
3. Each roll should overlap the next by 10cm side laps and 15cm staggered end laps.
4. Membrane shall be re-rolled about half of its length without changing its orientation.
5. Using a propane gas torch, the membrane is un-rolled again slowly while applying the flame to the
entire exposed lower face (for fully bonded system)-until the plastic cover film bums off and the
bituminous mass starts melting and creating a heat weld between the membrane and the substrate.
6. Torching of the seams takes place by heating the contact line at side and end laps by torch from
above, pressing the upper membrane on the lower one using a trowel, the torch has to be carefully
used avoiding to keep the flame on the same point for too long.
7. For sloping roofs, Lay the membrane from the lower edge with longitudinal direction of rolls
perpendicular to slope direction, side lap of next roll to be placed above the first one.
A. Engage a Site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate

conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components,
and to furnish daily reports to the Engineer.
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, in accordance with recommendations in ASTM D5957,
after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment
assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
1. Flood to an average depth of 64mm with a minimum depth of 25mm and not exceeding a depth of
100mm. Maintain 51mm of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
2. Flood each area for a minimum of 24 hours and a maximum of 72 hours.

17 September 2015
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing
installation is watertight.
C. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and
terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris, wastes and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
Clean surfaces soiled resulting from installation.
2. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
B. All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates,
reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
D. A representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of any
defects. All defects shall be corrected.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071353 -- ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 6
3.1 EXAMINATION 6
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
3.6 PROTECTION 8

Tender Issue 071353 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
SECTION 071353 -- ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Requirements, the Design Drawings, Preliminaries and the Contract Conditions.

1. PVC sheet waterproofing.
2. MEP Specification.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
C. Pre-Contract Samples

Tender Issue 071353 / 1 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
3. Jointing tape.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
3. Jointing tape.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. Manufacturer: A specialist, who has at least 5 years' experience manufacturing elastomeric sheet
waterproofing similar in material and design as those specified in this Work Section.
2. Installer: A firm experienced in applying elastomeric sheet waterproofing similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record
of successful in-service performance, and employs workers trained by the manufacturer.

17 September 2015
C. Mock-ups: Not required.
D. Prototypes: Not required.
G. Source Quality Control
1. General:
a) Carry out tests in accordance with the following test methods and values and submit to the
Engineer for review or provide existing certified data as required.
b) Moisture Vapour Transmission Rate: ASTM E96.
c) Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154.
d) Adhesion to Self (selvedge): ASTM D1000.
e) Adhesion to Primed Concrete: ASTM D1000.
f) Resistance to Hydrostatic Head: ASTM D5385.
g) Crack Bridging Capability: D.O.T. test for the approval of waterproofing systems for concrete
decks method C(iv).
2. Waterproofing and Watertightness:
a) Details of the system and a proposed method statement shall be submitted for acceptance by
the Engineer at least 1 month prior to the proposed testing on Site.
b) Prior to testing, ensure that the work has been completed to a stage where the integrity of the
membrane can be tested, that obvious defects have been made good.
c) Testing shall be carried out when all work to the areas is complete, including that of all associated
and interfacing trades.
3. Performance Under Testing:
a) There shall be no leakage through the work at any time during the test.
b) If leaks occur the membrane installation shall be repaired and re-tested. Any part of the work
that is adversely affected shall be replaced or repaired.
c) At completion of the test there shall be no water in locations intended to remain dry. Certify
the waterproof integrity of the membrane.
d) All tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer.

17 September 2015
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name
B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store materials
away from excessive heat. Do not exceed the allowable structural capacity of the storage area. Observe
the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits.
C. Handling: Handle in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are
recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet
substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which manufacturer agrees

to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements
or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from the date of Taking-Over.
B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Work Section, for
1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation,
pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply
manufacturer.
2. Obtain waterproofing materials from a single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Type WPS-101 Sheet Waterproofing
1. Description: PVC sheet waterproofing system including all necessary fastenings and accessories
to complete the installation.
3. Product Reference: MasterSeal 703RE System or acceptable equivalent.
4. PVC Sheet: 1 layer of 1.5mm thick synthetic PVC geo-membrane.
5. Surface Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Application: As recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Auxiliary Materials:

17 September 2015
a) Concealed sheet flashing, Bonding adhesives, Containment strips and Separation layer.
A. Movements
B. Fire Performance
1. Combustion: The work shall incorporate materials of limited combustibility that do not give off toxic
fumes.
2. Surface Spread of Flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. PVC Sheet: The PVC membrane should meet the following physical properties:
1. Tensile Strength: > 9.0 N/mm2 : UNI EN 12311–2
2. Elongation at Break: > 200% : UNI EN 12311–2.
3. Seam Strength: 90 percent minimum of tensile strength: ASTM D 638.
4. Tear Resistance: > 135 N : UNI EN 12310–2.
5. Puncture resistance: >800mm : DIN 16726-5.12.
6. Low-Temperature Bend: Pass at minus 25°C; UNI EN 495 – 5.
7. Hydrostatic pressure resistance (6 hours at 5 bar); Waterproof; UNI EN 1928 method B
8. Dimensional Stability (%) after 6 hours at 80C: < +0.1% UNI EN 1107 – 2
9. Resistance to artificial weathering; no cracking : UNI EN 1297.
1. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
a) Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials in accordance with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Concealed Sheet Flashing: Same material, construction, and thickness as sheet waterproofing
unless otherwise specified.
3. Exposed Sheet Flashing: EPDM, cured or uncured, as required by manufacturer.
4. Bonding Adhesives: For bonding waterproofing sheets and sheet flashings to substrates and
projections.
5. Containment Strip: Manufacturer's standard 1.5mm thick, PVC strip; reinforced with non-woven
fiberglass; 300 mm wide.
6. Geotextile Leveling Layer (Protection Course): Non-woven, needle-punched, polypropylene

geotextile minimum 370g/ m.
7. Waterproofing and Sheet-Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone and vent
flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets, and other accessories
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.
8. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, pre-punched, with fasteners.

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by
manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method in accordance with ASTM D4263.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other
construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and
other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks
in accordance with ASTM D4258.
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.
G. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect adjoining surfaces from damage or soiling during the execution
of the work.
H. Setting Out: Accurately set out the work, particularly in relation to interfaces with other adjacent or related
work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fully Adhered Sheet Installation
1. Install fully adhered sheets over entire area to receive waterproofing in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D5843.
2. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required.
Stagger end laps.
3. Apply bonding adhesive to substrates at required rate and allow it to partially dry.
4. Apply bonding adhesive to sheets and firmly adhere sheets to substrates. Do not apply bonding
adhesive to splice area of sheet.
5. Install fully adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproofing.
6. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing that do not comply with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending beyond repaired areas
in all directions.
7. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.
a) Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheet waterproofing
in place with clamping ring.

17 September 2015
8. Firmly adhere sheets to substrate. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet.
9. Install partially adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproofing.
10. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing that do not comply with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending beyond repaired areas
in all directions.
B. Sheet Flashing Installation
1. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Extend deck sheet waterproofing to form wall flashings.
a) Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with uncured sheet flashing.
b) Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight installation. Apply lap sealant and seal edges of sheet-flashing
terminations.
3. Cover expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints by extending deck
sheet waterproofing over joints.
4. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.
C. Protection Course Installation
1. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written

instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of
membrane.
a) Molded-sheet drainage panels, Insulation drainage panels or board insulation may be used in
place of a separate protection course for vertical applications when accepted by waterproofing
manufacturer.
D. Bonded Joints: The work shall be bonded with the structural movement joints, within the construction,
to form a watertight joint.
E. Dressing: The work shall be terminated with the concrete. They shall be dressed into a 20mm x 20mm
rebate formed within the concrete. The rebate shall be sealed, using a gun-grade sealant, supplied by
the waterproofing manufacturer.
F. Penetrations
1. Particular attention shall be given to the workmanship around penetrations such as columns and
drainage pipes. The following steps shall be carried out when the membrane is dressed around
circular columns, drainage pipes, drainage channels and joints in accordance with the Engineer's
details.
2. Form: 50mm x 50mm minimum angle fillets shall be formed at intersections between horizontal and
vertical surfaces, using the membrane manufacturer's recommended putty.
3. 300mm wide reinforcing strips (minimum) shall be applied at all changes of direction and transitions
between horizontal and vertical planes.
4. A star-cut panel of waterproofing membrane of the appropriate width shall be placed around the
base of the column ensuring the star-cut edges are securely wrapped around the column, to achieve
a minimum lap of 150mm.
5. A 30mm x 30mm minimum angle fillet shall then be formed around the star-cut panel of the
waterproofing membrane.
6. The final 300mm minimum wide ring of waterproofing membrane shall be wrapped around the
circumference of the column and chased into a 20mm x 20mm rebate sealed in accordance with
the Specification.
G. Primer(s)

17 September 2015
1. The type(s) shall be as recommended for the purpose by the sheet manufacturer. The primer shall
be applied according to the manufacturer's instructions to achieve an even and full cover of the
surface. It shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before covering.
H. Jointing Tape
1. The jointing of adjacent sheets of DPM, DPM to DPC, DPC to DPC and DPM to protection board
shall be as below, to the manufacturer's recommended jointing system(s):
a) Double-sided jointing tape: A double-sided adhesive strip that forms a tenacious bond between
sheets.
b) Girth jointing tape: A self-adhesive pressure sensitive tape used in conjunction with double-
sided jointing tape.
A. Engage a Site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate

conditions, surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components,
and to furnish daily reports to the Engineer.
after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment
2. Flood each area for a minimum of 24 hours and a maximum of 72 hours.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris, wastes and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
B. All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates,
reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
D. A representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of any
defects. All defects shall be corrected.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed board insulation and insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.

17 September 2015
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071416 -- COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS 7
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT 7
3.5 INSTALLATION 8
3.7 CURING, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING 11
3.8 PROTECTION 11

Tender Issue 071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
SECTION 071416 -- COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Two-component polyurethane waterproofing.
2. Insulation.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 071416 / 1 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
1. Not required..
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm membrane.
2. 300mm x 300mm protection board.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. Manufacturer: A specialist who has at least 5 years' experience manufacturing cold fluid-applied
2. Installer: A firm experienced in applying cold fluid-applied waterproofing similar in material, design,
of successful in-service performance, and employs workers trained and approved by the
manufacturer.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes

17 September 2015
1. Not required.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's
name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing
with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within
the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
E. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate,
when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or when temperatures are less than 3°C above dew point.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during
application and curing period.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer

and Installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails
to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated
according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1.6mm in
width.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Work Section, for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type WPS-401 Polyurethane Waterproofing

17 September 2015
1. Description: Two-component, polyurea hybrid, pigmented, spray applied waterproofing membrane

applied to areas indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC.
3. Product Reference: MasterSeal M 811 or acceptable equivalent.
4. Primer: Manufacturer's two-component, solvent free epoxy surface sealer and primer.
a) Product Reference: MasterTop P 650 or acceptable equivalent.
5. Top Coat
a) Product Reference: MasterSeal TC 258 or acceptable equivalent.
6. Joint Sealant: One-part polyurethane joint sealant, compatible with waterproofing; conforms to ISO
11600 Class F25M on anodized aluminum and mortar. Conforms to ASTM C920 Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, use NT and M. Conforms to DIN 18540; and as recommended by manufacturer for
substrate and joint conditions.
a) Product Reference: MasterSeal NP 472 or acceptable equivalent.
7. Thickness: As per manufacturer's recommendation and as accepted by the Engineer.
8. Finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
9. Surface Preparation: As per manufacturer's recommendation and as accepted by the Engineer.
10. Application: Two-coat application as recommended by the manufacturer.
11. Brush, broom or spray applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
A. The waterproofing membrane should meet the following physical properties:
1. Chemical Base: Polyurea hybrid.
2. Mixing Ratio:
a) 100:100 by volume.
b) 100:106 by weight.
3. Solid Content: 48%.
4. Reaction time (sprayed): 10-15 secs.
5. Fully cured (23 degrees): 2 days.
6. Substrate and ambient temperatures
a) Minimum: 5 degrees C.
b) Maximum: 35 degrees C.
7. Permissible Relative Humidity: Maximum 85%.
8. Technical Data after Curing
a) Technical Strength: 16N/ mm² in accordance with DIN 53504.
b) Elongation: 485% in accordance with DIN 53504.
c) Tear Strength: 34N/ mm² in accordance with DIN 53504.

17 September 2015
d) Water Vapour Permeability (1.5mm, 25 degrees C/ 75% R.H.): 19g/(m²d).
B. Watertightness
1. The work shall provide a waterproof layer being suitable for the locations indicated on the Design
Drawings and the service conditions.
2. The works shall prevent moisture egress/ ingress through the concrete slabs and walls or as required
by this Specification.
C. Integrity
1. The work shall be capable of withstanding any pressures to which it may be subjected.
2. The work shall be capable of bridging shrinkage cracks of up to 3mm wide.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
1. All components shall be covered by a single source warranty, fully guaranteed by the supplier.
2. All products incorporated in the work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's current technical
data sheet.
3. Prior to ordering, samples shall be submitted of all materials to be used, together with current
technical data sheets and copies of relevant test certificates.
B. Waterproofing
1. Two-Component Polyurethane Waterproofing: In accordance with ASTM C836.
C. Protection Course
1. Semi-rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between

two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners in accordance with ASTM D6506.
2. Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one or both side(s) with
plastic film, nominal thickness of 6mm, with compressive strength not less than 55kPa in accordance
with ASTM D1621 and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6% in accordance with ASTM
C272.
3. Unfaced, fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; nominal thickness of 6mm with
compressive strength of not less than 55kPa in accordance with ASTM D1621.
4. Fan folded, with a core of molded-polystyrene board insulation faced both sides with plastic film,
with compressive strength not less than 83kPa in accordance with ASTM D1621 and water
absorption by volume of less than 1% in accordance with ASTM C272.
5. Unfaced, extruded-polystyrene board insulation in accordance with ASTM C578.
6. Molded-polystyrene board insulation in accordance with ASTM C578.
D. Penetration Treatment
1. Penetrations through the synthetic rubber liquid waterproof membranes shall be sealed using a
proprietary two component elastomeric liquid applied detailing compound that is compatible with
the membrane and applied in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All horizontal and vertical pipe and duct penetrations shall be sealed with proprietary hydrophilic
strips at junctions using a suitable sealing compound.
E. Sealant Compound

17 September 2015
1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, in accordance

with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for
deck applications; use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint
conditions.
2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
3. Filler boards, bond breaker tape and primer to be used in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
F. Auxiliary Materials
1. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one

another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing
and field experience.
2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, two-component, solvent free epoxy surface sealer and primer.
3. Top Coat: Single component elastomeric pigmented polyurethane coating designed for application
in heavily trafficked areas.
4. Joint Sealant: One-part polyurethane joint sealant, compatible with waterproofing; confirms to ISO
11600 Class F25M on anodized aluminum and mortar.
5. Sheet Flashing: 1.3mm minimum, non-staining, uncured sheet neoprene.
6. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
7. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
A. In order to ascertain an acceptable performance level, the liquid membrane shall be tested in accordance
with the following test methods and values submitted to the Engineer for review.
1. Resistance to hydrostatic pressure over 3mm post formed crack: ASTM D5385.
2. Peel adhesion to concrete: ASTM D903.
3. Peel adhesion to self: ASTM D903.
4. Elongation: ASTM D412.
5. Pliability: ASTM D1970.
B. Adhesion Testing
1. Before commencement of full application, carry out a trial coating to determine priming requirements
and/ or system suitability.
2. Make arrangements with the Engineer and coating manufacturer for inspection of test areas. Obtain
acceptance before proceeding with full application.
C. Watertightness Testing
1. Employ an independent testing authority to test the watertightness of the work, using a proprietary
electronic integrity test such as Leaktector QA or acceptable equivalent.
2. Prior to testing, ensure that the work has been completed to a stage where the integrity of the
installation can be tested, that obvious defects have been made good and that the substrate has
been cleared of all materials, debris and dust.
3. Watertightness tests shall be carried out when the substrate areas are complete, including all
associated and interfacing trades.
4. On completion of testing, certify the waterproof integrity to the acceptance of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet
method in accordance with ASTM D4263.
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-
free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other
construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate in
accordance with ASTM D4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus.
Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and
clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
F. All preliminary work including formation of upstands, curbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases, pipe
sleeves, expansion joints and fastening of battens, fillets, anchoring plugs/ strips shall be complete and
satisfactory.
of the work.
work.
3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at
expansion joints, drains, and sleeves in accordance with ASTM C898/ ASTM C1471 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Apply waterproofing in 2 No. separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first
preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt joints when
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate in accordance with ASTM C898/ ASTM C1471
and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, in
accordance with ASTM D4258, before coating surfaces.
1. Joint sealant application shall be in accordance with ASTM C1193.

17 September 2015
2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.
3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 75mm
along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint
reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required in accordance
with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate in
accordance with ASTM C898.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All holes, cracks, defective joints and other defects in surfaces shall be made good, including
removing dirt, laitance, grease, rust and loose material.
2. Adjacent surfaces, exposed to view, shall be protected.
3. Primer shall be brushed well in, ensuring complete coverage and allowed to dry thoroughly before
applying coating.
4. Coatings shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, in dry atmospheric conditions, to give a uniform,
continuous film over all surfaces including angles, recesses, edges, joints and intersections and
shall not be allowed to pool in hollows.
5. The finished coating shall firmly adhere to background and be free from pinholes, blisters,
enbrittlement, foreign matter and other defects likely to permit the passage of water.
6. Unless specified otherwise, the installation of the liquid applied tanking shall be carried out by
specialist sub-contractors who shall be an accepted installer for the chosen system using methods
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
7. Final covering shall be applied as soon as possible after coating has hardened to prevent damage.
8. The liquid applied product shall be formulated to suit local climatic conditions.
9. Use suitable tools as recommended by the manufacturer.
10. Do not overmix. Mix in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Coatings
1. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before applying the next.
2. Each coat shall be applied at right angles to the previous coat.
3. Coatings shall not be thinned unless recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
4. If modified polyurethane coating is used:
a) All surfaces shall be ready and inspected before mixing the two part materials.
b) Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures or to surfaces at or below the minimum

recommended by the coating manufacturer and shall not be allowed to get damp until fully cured.
5. Primer, minimum of 1 No. coat, at a maximum coverage 10m²/ L.
6. Coverage per coat (maximum) to be 2m²/ kg, with the first coat blue and second black in color.
7. Cured coatings to be stable and waterproof with walkable surfaces compatible with all substrates
and sealants used and shall not crack or break when tested in accordance with ASTM D412, ASTM
D1970 or other equivalent internationally recognized standard.

17 September 2015
8. Provide temporary and permanent protection for all tanking systems.
9. Adhere to the manufacturer's installation recommendations in all respects, including:
a) Open pot life.
b) Storage conditions.
c) Mixing proportions.
d) Mixing methods.
e) Coverage rates.
f) Atmospheric conditions and temperatures at the time of installation.
g) Curing times.
10. Health and Safety measures/ provision. Refer to the Contract Documentation.
C. Waterproofing Application
1. Apply waterproofing in accordance with ASTM C898/ ASTM C1471 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
3. Apply primer over prepared substrate.
4. Un-reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller,
notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.
a) Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped
gases, with an average dry film thickness of 1.5mm and a minimum dry film thickness of 1.3mm
at any point.
b) Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
c) Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 9.3m².
5. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched
squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method.
a) Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat
of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced
membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film total thickness as recommended
by the manufacturer.
b) Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
6. Bituminous Emulsion: The emulsion shall not be applied at temperatures, or to surfaces, below 5°
C nor if there is a risk of rain or frost or other precipitation.
7. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
D. Insulation Installation
1. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness/ insulation drainage
panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 19mm of projections and penetrations.
2. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer.

17 September 2015
3. On horizontal surfaces, place insulation units unadhered according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
E. Reinforcement
1. Glass fabric shall be laid into the first coat while wet, with edges overlapped at least 75mm. Brush
well in, smoothing out all wrinkles while wet.
2. Allow liquid applied coating to dry before applying reinforcement strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
F. Junctions with DPCs
1. Before applying coating, the edges of DPCs to which coating is joined shall be fully exposed and
free from mortar, debris, dust and other contaminants.
2. Full contact of coating with DPC shall occur, applying liberally to adjacent surfaces and extending
50mm beyond.
G. Blind Coatings
1. Coating shall be applied while still tacky.
2. Surplus material shall be carefully brushed away when coatings are completely dry.
H. Protection of External Vertical Tanking
1. The tanking shall be covered against backfill material as agreed with the Engineer.
2. Support shall be provided as necessary to ensure protection remains fully in contact with tanking
and does not move during backfilling operations.
I. Structural Movement Joints: Carefully dress the membrane to the line of all structural movement joints,
to form a watertight joint.
J. Penetrations
1. Attention shall be given to the workmanship around penetrations such as fastenings and drainage
pipes.
2. Fastenings shall be installed after the waterproof system has been applied and retouched around
fastenings prior to installation of the cladding system with a 1 No. coat system.
3. For any pipe penetrations apply 150mm self-adhesive bituminous tape around the pipe and structure
to form a watertight seal.
K. Fastenings/ Adhesives
1. Apply primers by mopping, brushing or spraying to achieve an even and full cover.
2. Allow primer to dry thoroughly prior to covering.
3. Heat and lay roof covering bonding compounds at a temperature sufficient to ensure full bonding
over the whole surface. Do not overheat.
4. Bond heat sensitive insulation materials with cold bituminous adhesive as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Use mechanical fasteners, adhesive or tape as recommended by the manufacturer.
A. Engage a full time Site representative qualified by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect
substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of the membrane, flashings, protection, and
drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to the Engineer.

17 September 2015
after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment
2. Flood each area for 72 hours.
3.7 CURING, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Curing
1. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent

contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
2. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove debris, waste and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
2. Roof areas shall be left clean with all outlets clear.
C. Adjusting
1. All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
2. Defects shall be repaired without delay, to minimize damage and nuisance.
3. A representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of
any defects. All defects shall be corrected.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Do not allow petroleum-based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to come into contact with
the roof surface.
C. Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary roof is provided over
the working areas.
D. Protect installed board insulation/ insulation drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide temporary
coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071450 -- GRP LINING WATERPROOFING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.1 SYSTEMS/ PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT 7
3.5 INSTALLATION 8
3.8 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 071450 GRP LINING WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
SECTION 071450 -- GRP LINING WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Refer to the Contractor's Responsibilities in Division 01 General Requirements for specific

requirements.
1. GRP lining waterproofing.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 General Requirements and submit the following.
1. To be confirmed with the Engineer.
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.

Tender Issue 071450 / 1 GRP LINING WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm membrane applied to hard board.
2. 300mm x 300mm protection board.
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 General Requirements and submit the following.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. Manufacturer: A specialist who has at least 5 years' experience manufacturing fluid-applied

2. Installer: A firm experienced in applying cold fluid-applied waterproofing similar in material, design,
of successful in-service performance, and employs workers trained and approved by the
manufacturer.
with Division 01 General Requirements.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
A. Delivery
1. Deliver liquid materials to Site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's
name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and
mixing with other components.
B. Storage
1. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and
within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
3. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
C. Handling
1. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are damaged,
contaminated or otherwise unfit for use. Do not open packaging or remove labels until just prior to
installation.
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate,
when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or when temperatures are less than 3°C above dew point.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during
application and curing period.
1.7 WARRANTY

width.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Work Section, for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS/ PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply
manufacturer.
2. Products visible in the finished work shall be from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
B. Type WPS-201 GRP Lining Waterproofing

17 September 2015
1. Description: Glass fiber reinforced plastic (GRP) lining waterproofing system including all
accessories required to achieve the performance requirements.
2. Manufacturer: Emirates Hickson or acceptable equivalent.
3. Provide surface conditioner primer to substrate, as recommended by the waterproofing system

manufacturer.
4. GRP Lining:
a) 4mm thick lining to all internal surfaces plus 2 coats flexible cementitious slurry mixed with
bonding agent anti-fungus and anti-bacterial.
b) Waterproofing shall be applied in sufficient thickness and number of coats to achieve the
performance requirements.
c) Color shall be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
d) Provide suitable fabric reinforcement layer, laid and bonded between base and finishing layers.
5. Physical Properties:
a) Viscosity: 800-900 cps; ISO 2555.
b) Specific Gravity: 1.13 g/cc.; ISO 2811-1.
c) Acid Value: 23-28 Mg KOH/ gm.; ISO 2114.
d) Flash Point: 34°C; ASTM D3278.
e) Gel Time: 15-20 Minutes.; ISO 2535.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. System build-ups and all required components shall suit the service conditions.
2. The works shall include movement joints as required, which shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Tanking systems shall include primers, bonding compounds, adhesives, fixings, sealants,
ventilators, fillets and all other components/ accessories necessary to complete the works as
supplied/ recommended by the manufacturer to suit the service conditions.
B. Tanking Systems
1. Systems shall include all junctions and interfaces at perimeters to other building elements and
provide full continuity with damp proof courses and other waterproofing/ damp proofing systems.
2. Where materials overlap, or are used in conjunction with other waterproofing/ damp proofing
products, they shall be compatible.
3. Upstands and perimeters of the membrane shall be detailed and finished in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations to maintain the performance requirements.
C. Services/ Penetrations
1. Systems shall accommodate services and other penetrations, as indicated in the Services Engineer's
documentation.
2. Penetrations shall be sealed in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations

to maintain the performance requirements.

17 September 2015
A. Watertightness
1. The work shall prevent the passage of water under hydrostatic pressure and shall comply with the
physical requirements specified as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing
agency of manufacturer's current waterproofing formulation.
B. Integrity
1. The work shall be capable of withstanding any pressures to which it may be subjected.
C. Movements
D. Fire Performance
1. Fire and smoke performance shall be as indicated on the Fire Strategy Report.
E. Durability
1. Systems, components and materials shall be sufficiently durable to achieve the requirements of the
Specification for the service life of the works, provided that appropriate maintenance has been
carried out.
2. The works shall perform throughout the service life without failure resulting from defects in design,
materials or workmanship. Failure shall be defined as evidence of water/ moisture penetration onto
any surfaces intended to remain dry.
3. Electro-chemical corrosion or staining resulting from water running from one material to another
shall be prevented.
F. GRP Waterproofing
1. Mechanical and Physical Properties in cured state (reinforced):
a) Tensile Strength: 93N/ mm².
b) Tensile Modulus: 6000N/ mm².
c) Elongation: 2.0%.
d) Flexural Strength: 141N/ mm².
e) Flexural Modulus: 6000N/ mm².
f) Heat Distortion Temp: 75 ± 5°C.
g) Barcol Hardness: 45.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. General
data sheet.
B. GRP Waterproofing

17 September 2015
1. Resin: Unsaturated orthophthalic resin, thixotropic and has built-in accelerator system giving long
time gel time and rapid curing for shorter demoulding time. Impregnates the fiberglass quickly and
the laminate produces a smooth tack-free surface due to presence of wax.
2. Chopped strand mat made of evenly distributed strands chopped from continuous E glass fibers
into 50mm length and bonded with emulsion binder. Conforms to ASTM D578, with the following
characteristics:
a) Moisture Content: 0.20%.
b) Strand Length: 50mm.
c) Strand Tex: 32mm.
d) Filament Diameter: 11 microns.
C. Accessory Materials
1. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals,
and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content
complying with limits of statutory authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties and

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable
for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular
traffic); compatible with substrate and other materials indicated, and VOC content complying with
limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
4. Sand: ASTM C144.
5. Water: Potable.
A. In order to ascertain an acceptable performance level, the liquid membrane shall be tested in accordance
with the following test methods and values submitted to the Engineer for review.
1. Resistance to hydrostatic pressure over 3mm post formed crack: ASTM D5385.
2. Peel adhesion to concrete: ASTM D903.
3. Peel adhesion to self: ASTM D903.
B. Adhesion Testing
C. Watertightness Testing
2. Prior to testing, ensure that the work has been completed to a stage where the integrity of the

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
manufacturer.
construction.
C. Close off drains and other penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate in
accordance with ASTM D4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus.
Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and
clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
F. All preliminary work including formation of upstands, curbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases, pipe
sleeves, expansion joints and fastening of battens, fillets, anchoring plugs/ strips shall be complete and
satisfactory.
of the work.
work.
expansion joints, drains, and sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Apply waterproofing in 2 No. separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first
preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of floor-to-wall butt joints when
3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate in accordance with the waterproofing
manufacturer's recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, in accordance with ASTM
D4258, before coating surfaces.
1. Joint sealant application shall be in accordance with ASTM C1193.

17 September 2015
2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.
3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 75mm
along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint
reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.
B. Install sheet flashing and bond to floor and wall substrates where indicated or required in accordance
with waterproofing manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate in
accordance with ASTM C898.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All holes, cracks, defective joints and other defects in surfaces shall be made good, including
removing dirt, laitance, grease, rust and loose material.
2. Adjacent surfaces, exposed to view, shall be protected.
3. Primer shall be brushed well in, ensuring complete coverage and allowed to dry thoroughly before
applying coating.
4. Coatings shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, in dry atmospheric conditions, to give a uniform,
continuous film over all surfaces including angles, recesses, edges, joints and intersections and
shall not be allowed to pool in hollows.
5. The finished coating shall firmly adhere to background and be free from pinholes, blisters,
enbrittlement, foreign matter and other defects likely to permit the passage of water.
6. Unless specified otherwise, the installation of the liquid applied tanking shall be carried out by
specialist sub-contractors who shall be an accepted installer for the chosen system using methods
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
7. Final covering shall be applied as soon as possible after coating has hardened to prevent damage.
8. The liquid applied product shall be formulated to suit local climatic conditions.
9. Use suitable tools as recommended by the manufacturer.
10. Do not overmix. Mix in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Coatings
1. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before applying the next.
2. Each coat shall be applied at right angles to the previous coat.
3. Coatings shall not be thinned unless recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
4. Primer, minimum of 1 No. coat, at a maximum coverage 10m²/ L.
5. Coverage per coat (maximum) to be 2m²/ kg, with the first coat blue and second black in color.
6. Cured coatings to be stable and waterproof with walkable surfaces compatible with all substrates
and sealants used and shall not crack or break when tested in accordance with international
recognized standard.
7. Provide temporary and permanent protection for all tanking systems.
8. Adhere to the manufacturer's installation recommendations in all respects, including:
a) Open pot life.
b) Storage conditions.

17 September 2015
c) Mixing proportions.
d) Mixing methods.
e) Coverage rates.
f) Atmospheric conditions and temperatures at the time of installation.
g) Curing times.
9. Health and Safety measures/ provision. Refer to the Contract Documentation.
C. Waterproofing Application
1. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
3. Apply primer over prepared substrate.
4. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched
squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method.
a) Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat
of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced
membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film total thickness as recommended
b) Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
D. Reinforcement
1. Glass fabric shall be laid into the first coat while wet, with edges overlapped at least 75mm. Brush
well in, smoothing out all wrinkles while wet.
2. Allow liquid applied coating to dry before applying reinforcement strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
E. Penetrations
1. Attention shall be given to the workmanship around penetrations such as fastenings and drainage
pipes.
2. Fastenings shall be installed after the waterproof system has been applied and retouched around
fastenings prior to installation of the cladding system with a 1 No. coat system.
3. For any pipe penetrations apply 150mm self-adhesive bituminous tape around the pipe and structure
to form a watertight seal.
drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to the Engineer.
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each area for leaks, in accordance with recommendations in ASTM D5957,
after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment

17 September 2015
C. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of floors and
A. Curing
1. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent

B. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris, waste and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
C. Adjusting
1. All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
2. Defects shall be repaired without delay, to minimize damage and nuisance.
3. A representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of
3.8 PROTECTION
B. Do not allow petroleum-based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to come into contact with
the roof surface.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071600 -- CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3
1.8 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 6
3.1 EXAMINATION 6
3.4 APPLICATION 7
3.7 PROTECTION 9

Tender Issue 071600 CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
SECTION 071600 -- CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

C. Section Includes
1. Polymer-modified cement waterproofing to concrete.
1. Section 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry.
3. Section 092400 Cement Plastering.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Sample of each type of cementitious waterproofing in selected color.

Tender Issue 071600 / 1 CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING
17 September 2015
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each type of cementitious waterproofing in selected color.
Submittals, and submit the following:
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. Manufacturer: A specialist, who has at least 5 years' experience manufacturing cementitious and
reactive waterproofing similar in material and design as those specified in this Section.
2. Installer: A firm experienced in applying cementitious and reactive waterproofing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a
record of successful in-service performance, and employs workers trained and approved by
manufacturer.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Provide prototype of typical horizontal or vertical surfaces, size as agreed with the Engineer.
1. First structural bay of each type in location to be agreed.

17 September 2015
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name,
product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with
other components.
B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the
temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
E. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit cementitious and reactive waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at 4.4°C or above
during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free of water.
A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other
projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only after substrate
defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free
of forming materials, including reveal inserts.
1.8 WARRANTY

width.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply
manufacturer.

17 September 2015
2. Products visible in the finished work shall be from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
B. Type WPS-402 Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing
1. Description: Polymer modified cement based waterproof coating to waterproof and protect concrete
and masonry surfaces suitable for vertical and horizontal applications below or above grade.
3. Product Reference: Masterseal 588 or acceptable equivalent.
5. Application: 2 coat application as recommended by the manufacturer to satisfy the requirement.
6. Final Coat Finish: Smooth troweled.
7. Accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. The work shall withstand all movements of the building structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the performance of the work.
2. All necessary movement joints shall accommodate the maximum movements that can be derived
from the specified and design loads and movements. Under maximum movements the joints shall
meet all the requirements of the Specification.
reduction in the specified performance:
b) The effects of repeated wind loadings.
c) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements.
f) Moisture movements.
B. Watertightness
1. The work shall provide a waterproof layer being suitable for the locations indicated on the Design
Drawings and the service conditions.
2. The work shall prevent moisture egress and ingress through the concrete slabs and walls or as
required by the Specification.
C. Integrity
1. The work shall be capable of withstanding any pressures to which they may be subjected.
2. The work shall be capable of bridging shrinkage cracks of up to 3mm wide.
D. Vapor Permeability: The vapor permeability of the system shall be not less than that of the construction
to which it is applied.
E. Serviceability: The work shall provide a smooth, flat, closed and unblemished surface suitable to receive
an applied decorative finish without de-bonding, cracking, crazing or other material deterioration resulting
in its unsuitability as a substrate for decorative finishes.

17 September 2015
F. Fire
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to
those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a) Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
G. Durability: The work shall retain its original appearance and performance characteristics throughout its
Design Life, when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program. Installed surfaces
shall remain free of efflorescence, saponification or other leaching of substrate material, corrosion of lath
or other metal components resulting in staining or discoloration, or other unacceptable changes.
H. Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing Physical Properties
1. Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing:
a) Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 9m tested according to CE CRD-C 48.
b) Compressive Strength: Minimum 27.6MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/
C109M.
c) Flexural Strength: Minimum 4.8MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C348.
d) Bond Strength: Minimum 1.5MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C321.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
data sheet.
1. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one

another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing
and field experience.
2. Patching Compound: Factory premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals,
and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content
complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties and

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable
for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular
traffic); compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with
limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I.
5. Slurry-Coat and Protective-Topping Sand: In accordance with ASTM C144.
6. Trowel-Coat Sand: In accordance with ASTM C33, fine aggregate.
7. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture designed to
improve adhesion to prepared substrates and to not create a vapor barrier.

17 September 2015
8. Water: Potable.
C. Mixes
1. Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing:
a) Field-Mixed, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add polymer admixture to Portland

cement and sand according to manufacturer's written instructions. Blend together with
mechanical mixer to required consistency.
b) Prepackaged, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to

mixing liquid according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical
mixer or by hand to required consistency.
c) Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix Portland cement and sand in the proportion of
1:3 and water gauged with a polymer admixture. Blend together with mechanical mixer to
required consistency.
A. Adhesion Testing
B. Watertightness Testing
2. Prior to testing, ensure that the work have been completed to a stage where the integrity of the
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
manufacturer.
4. Notify Engineer in writing of active leaks or defects that shall affect system performance.
construction.

17 September 2015
C. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annular spaces intended
for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.
D. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that
waterproofing bonds to surfaces.
1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D4258.
a) Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10% muriatic (hydrochloric) acid solution
according to ASTM D4260.
b) Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading or abrasive-

blast cleaning according to ASTM D4259.
2. Clean concrete unit masonry surfaces according to ASTM D4261.
a) Lightweight Concrete Unit Masonry: Etch with 10% muriatic (hydrochloric) acid solution or
abrade surface by wire brushing. Remove acid residue until pH readings of water after rinse
are not more than 1.0pH lower or 2.0pH higher than pH of water before rinse.
b) Medium and Normal Weight Concrete Unit Masonry: Sandblast or bushhammer to a depth of
1.6mm.
3. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
G. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect adjoining surfaces from damage or soiling during the execution
of the work.
I. Setting Out: Accurately set out the work, particularly in relation to interfaces with other adjacent or related
work.
expansion joints, drains and sleeves in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation
coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt joints when
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application and curing.
1. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application with water and maintain damp
condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.
2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Number of Coats: 2 coats to suit the required performance.
a) Coating Thickness: Maximum application thickness of 1.2mm per coat for total thickness as
required for specified water permeability.

17 September 2015
b) Apply first coat as a slurry with brush or roller, and apply subsequent coats with brush, roller,
spray, or trowel.
c) Vigorously work first coat onto the substrate, forcing the material into surface voids. Apply
each subsequent coat into full contact with previous coat.
d) Allow manufacturer's recommended time between coats. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Final Coat: Apply final coat in smooth troweled as specified.
C. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:
1. Onto columns integral with treated walls.
2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of 600mm for cast-
in-place concrete and 1200mm for masonry.
3. Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a height of 300mm, where floors,
but not walls, are treated.
4. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe trenches, pipe chases, pits,
sumps and similar offsets and features.
D. Protective Floor Topping: Apply 25.4mm thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.
drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Engineer.
after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary
containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
2. ASTM D5957 sets 24 hours as minimum and 72 hours as maximum duration for flood testing.
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent

B. Cleaning: Upon completion remove debris, waste and unused materials from the Site and dispose of
safely. Clean surfaces soiled resulting from installation.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
D. All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
E. Defects shall be repaired without delay, to minimize damage and nuisance.
F. A representative of the waterproofing manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of

17 September 2015
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary roof is provided over
the working areas.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 071800 -- TRAFFIC COATINGS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 5
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
3.6 PROTECTION 8

Tender Issue 071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
17 September 2015
SECTION 071800 -- TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Vehicular traffic coating.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 071800 / 1 TRAFFIC COATINGS
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each type to specified substrate.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each type to specified substrate.
1. Warranties.
1. A specialist who has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing work of a similar scope
and quality and is an approved/ licensed installer of the coating manufacturer.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Traffic coating shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
1. First 9m² of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
F. Pre-construction Testing/ Reports

17 September 2015
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations fully identified with
name and other qualifying information.
B. Storage: In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Handling: Handle in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not open packaging or
remove labels until just prior to installation.
A. General: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended
in writing by manufacturer. Do not proceed with the work during inclement weather, when the temperature
is below 5°C, or when the weather forecasts are unfavourable, unless suitable procedures have been
agreed with the manufacturer.
B. Surfaces to receive the coating shall be completely dry and free of entrapped moisture detrimental to
the installation.
C. Do not apply traffic coatings in rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during
the application and curing period.
D. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.
E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum
ambient or surface temperature of 4.4°C for oil-based materials/ 10°C for water-based materials, and
not exceeding 35°C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source Limitations
1. Obtain traffic coatings from single source from a single manufacturer.
2. Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from the traffic-coating manufacturer.
Obtain accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate
repair materials of types and from sources recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.
3. Obtain pavement-marking paint from single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Type PT-141 Vehicular Traffic Coat
1. Description: Traffic Coating System for On-grade Covered Parking Areas. Solvent free, multi
component, epoxy resin traffic coating system~.
2. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or
accepted equivalent:
a) Flowcrete.
b) BASF.
c) Sika.
4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer recommended for substrate and condition.
5. Sealer coat: Multi-component solvent free epoxy resin.
6. Anti-slip aggregate: graded high quality quartz aggregate with the particle size in the range of 0.3 -
0.9 mm.
7. Top coat: Multi-component solvent free epoxy resin.

17 September 2015
8. Thickness: As recommended in writing by the manufacturer for substrate and service conditions
indicated.
9. Color and Finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
A. Elongation at Break: Greater than 35 percent per ASTM D412.
B. Tensile Strength: 567psi (3.9 MPa) per ASTM D412
C. Water-Vapor Permeance: 2.1 dry perms per ASTM D1653.
D. Coverage Rates: Textured 2.5 to 4 sqm / ltr/ coat; apply 2 coats minimum.
E. Anti-carbonation Air Equivalent: R value >300mtr (Taywood Engg Test).
F. The Work shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance.
1. Vertically applied loads acting on the surface of the component. The Work shall sustain safely,
without reduction in performance and without permanent deformation the burden imposed by the
equipment.
2. Vertical loads applied in the form of vehicular traffic.
3. Vertical loads applied in the form of adult foot traffic.
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic-coating materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products in accordance with test method below for deck
type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Refer to Fire Strategy Report
2. Combustion, Fire Resistance: The Work shall be composed of materials of limited combustibility
that do not give off toxic fumes.
H. Energy Performance
1. Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 78 when calculated
according to ASTM E1980 based on the testing of identical products by a qualified testing agency/
0.70 and emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2. Provide traffic coating that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product
List" for low-slope roof products.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements: Generally the components of the Work shall be covered by a single source
warranty. Therefore, approval shall be obtained from the coating manufacturer for all materials to be used.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base coat, intermediate coat, and topcoat; and accessory
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and Site experience.
C. Traffic Coating: In accordance with ASTM C957.
1. VOC Content: Traffic coating shall have a VOC content of 150g/ L or less when calculated in
accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Sealants and Joint Fillers: In accordance with ASTM C920. Refer also to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
1. VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in Dubai Green Building
Regulations and Specifications.

17 September 2015
E. Accessories
1. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by the traffic-coating manufacturer.
F. Pavement Markings: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting
performance of traffic-coating work.
B. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
1. Test for moisture in accordance with ASTM D4263.
2. Test for moisture content by measuring with an electronic moisture meter/ method recommended
in writing by the traffic-coating manufacturer.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by the Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of traffic-
coating work.
D. Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed
and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete-curing and concrete-drying period
recommended in writing by the traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after substrates are dry.
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Keying to Existing Base: Apply primer recommended in writing by the manufacturer as directed.
B. Substrates:
1. All surfaces shall be clean, dry, smooth, and free of depressions, voids, protrusions, unacceptable
curing compounds, release agents and other surface contaminants.
2. Substrate Cleaning:
a) The substrate shall be thoroughly swept to receive the Work.
b) The substrate shall be blown clean using an air compressor to remove any remaining loose
debris.
c) Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any, as recommended in writing by the traffic-
coating manufacturer.
3. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade surface to a uniform profile acceptable to the

manufacturer, in accordance with ASTM D4259. Do not acid etch.
a) Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
b) Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
c) Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release

agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
d) Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces in accordance
with ASTM D4258.
C. Setting Out:

17 September 2015
1. The Work shall be set out accurately, especially in relation to interfaces with other products.
2. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking, and
migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck substrate penetrations
and clogging weep holes and drains.
3. Acquaintance with all the Design Drawings and/ or Shop Drawings of other interface packages is
required.
D. Inspection:
1. All surfaces to receive the Work shall be examined and deemed acceptable and proper for the
application. The following shall be verified:
a) Structural limitations of deck.
b) Proper deck falls.
c) Proper drains and other flashing details.
d) Structural movement joints.
E. Terminations and Penetrations:
1. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings
and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves in accordance with ASTM C1127 and the manufacturer's
2. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and non-reinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints.
3. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.
4. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall
substrates according to the manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Joint and Crack Treatment:
1. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates in accordance with ASTM C1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks in accordance with ASTM D4258.
2. Comply with the recommendations in ASTM C1193 for joint-sealant installation.
3. Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Application of Traffic Coating:
1. Apply traffic coating in accordance with ASTM C1127 and the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply number of coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at locations as
indicated on Design Drawings.
3. Start traffic-coating application in presence of the manufacturer's technical representative.
4. Verify that wet film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 9m².
5. Uniformly broadcast aggregate on coats specified to receive aggregate. Embed aggregate according
to manufacturer's written instructions. After coat dries, sweep away excess aggregate.
6. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated; omit
aggregate on vertical surfaces.
7. Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages.

17 September 2015
B. Pavement Markings:
1. Do not apply pavement-marking paint for striping and other markings until layout, colors, and
placement have been verified with Engineer and traffic coating has cured.
2. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
3. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions

indicated with uniform straight edges. Apply at the manufacturer's recommended rates for a 0.4mm,
wet film thickness.
a) Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to
surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application
beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil.
b) Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement-marking paint at a rate of 0.72kg/ L.
A. A qualified testing agency must be engaged to perform the following Site tests and inspections:
1. Materials Testing:
a) Samples of material delivered to Site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence
of the Contractor and Employer.
b) Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced
testing procedures.
c) Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic-coating application for each 56m²
of installed traffic coating or part thereof.
2. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing:
a) Testing agency shall test each deck area/ each deck area indicated for testing on Design
Drawings for leaks using an electronic leak-detection method that locates discontinuities in
the traffic-coating membrane.
b) Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas as necessary to
cover entire test area.
c) Testing agency shall create a conductive electronic field over the area of traffic coating to be
tested and electronically determine locations of discontinuities or leaks, if any, in the traffic
coating.
d) Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of discontinuities, if any.
3. If test results show traffic coating does not comply with requirements, remove and replace or repair
the membrane as recommended in writing by the traffic-coating manufacturer and make further
repairs after retesting until traffic-coating installation passes.
B. Final Traffic-Coating Inspection: Arrange for the traffic-coating manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect membrane installation on completion.
1. Notify the Engineer or the Employer 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by the manufacturer of affected construction.
B. Upon completion remove debris, waste and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.

17 September 2015
C. Replace damaged, defaced or defective materials to the acceptance of the Engineer.
D. Perform repairs in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the work during subsequent construction operations from deterioration or damage until Taking-
Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 072100 -- THERMAL INSULATION 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2
2.3 MATERIALS 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 5
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 5
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION 5
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION 6
3.7 PROTECTION 6

Tender Issue 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
17 September 2015
SECTION 072100 -- THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Polystyrene insulation.
2. Vapor retarders.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 072100 / 1 THERMAL INSULATION
17 September 2015
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
C. Mock-ups
D. Prototypes
F. Surface-Burning Characteristics
1. As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages fully identified with name,
type and grade. Do not remove packaging until time for use.
B. Store materials in a protected dry location in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. All components shall be stored on Site such that they are not damaged, distorted or weathered unevenly.
D. Handling: Do not allow insulating materials sensitive to moisture to become wet or soiled. Protect plastic
materials from excessive exposure to temperature or sunlight.
A. Do not proceed with the work in exposed locations, during inclement weather, except when permitted
by and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Roof Care.
2. Isoboard.

17 September 2015
3. Dow Roofmate SL-X.
B. Type INS-501 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation
1. Description: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) rigid foam thermal insulation boards to suitable substrate
including all necessary accessories and fasteners to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings
2. Composition: Extruded polystyrene panel with scaled cells. Resistant to diffusion of water vapor,
resistance to water absorption, uniform density distribution, dimensional stability and very high
compressive strength.
3. Thickness: 50 and 75mm.
4. Density: 35-40kg/m³.
5. Flame Spread Index: Maximum 25 when tested to ASTM E84.
6. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum 0 when tested to ASTM E84.
7. Thermal Conductivity: 0.025W/ mK.
A. Fire: Insulation materials inside the building to be non-combustible when tested in accordance with NFPA
101, and shall not emit toxic fumes in a fire.
B. Vapor Barriers
1. The work shall effectively prevent the passage of water vapor into the system.
2. Vapor barriers shall be installed as a fully sealed and airtight assembly without holes or tears.
3. Vapor barrier membranes, vapor barrier facings and encapsulating membranes to have fire
propagation rating and a fire spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 101
requirements.
C. Breather Membranes
1. Breather membranes shall comply with the conditions specified in the International Building Code
(IBC) and municipality codes.
2. The work shall provide an effective air permeable membrane.
3. The breather membrane shall permit the passage of air through the system without giving rise to
risk of interstitial condensation.
D. Thermal Movement
temperature differentials occurring. The Design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
E. Thermal Performance
1. The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be as specified in the applicable
Work Section.
2. Provide U-value calculations including condensation calculations to justify insulation and vapor
barrier design.
F. Vapor Permeability

17 September 2015
1. Insulating materials used inside the building to prevent the occurrence of interstitial condensation.
2. Unless otherwise specified, design vapor barrier materials with water vapor resistance and water
vapor transmission values as recommended in the International Building Code (IBC) and municipality
codes.
G. Fiber Release: Insulating materials used inside the building shall not release harmful fiber or dust particles
into the atmosphere when subject to air movements of up to 20m/ s.
H. Durability: Insulating materials to maintain their performance throughout the Design Life of the building,
without becoming dislodged, compressed or saturated.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. VOC Content: Adhesive products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
B. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos to comply with the requirements as stated
in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
C. Non-Polluting Materials: Provide non-polluting materials that comply with the requirements as stated in
the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
D. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation
1. Extruded-Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Molded-Polystyrene or Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in accordance with ASTM
E84.
3. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely
to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
E. Insulation Fasteners
1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding
insulation securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.
2. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle;

capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking
washer in place.
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from galvanized-steel sheet, with

beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not
less than 38mm² or in diameter.
a) Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
1. Where indicated.
2. Ceiling plenums.
4. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of
insulation anchor to maintain air space between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor
is attached.
5. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
F. Accessories
1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type as recommended by the insulation manufacturer to suit the
application.

17 September 2015
2. Supports and Anchors for Insulation: Provide mechanical or adhesive attachment devices as
recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements.
3. Joint Tape for Insulation Facings: Soft aluminum foil backing with transparent synthetic rubber
adhesive, minimum 0.05mm thick, width to suit the application, type as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer.
4. Sealant for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Non-sag urethane type, with demonstrated capability
to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates, and as recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer.
5. Adhesive Tape for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Type as recommended by the vapor barrier
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor barrier.
6. Fastenings for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Purpose made to suit the application, type as
recommended by the vapor barrier manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Do not commence installation when moisture content of wood substrates is above 20%.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders (including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders), or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to sand, rain,
or mud at any time.
C. Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal and acoustical protection to building elements and
spaces. Provide full thickness over entire area to be covered, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut and fit or form insulation tightly around obstructions and penetrations, without gaps and voids.
E. Leave eaves ventilation and spaces below water cistern platforms unobstructed.
F. Keep insulation clear of heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures and metal chimneys, as
required by applicable regulations.
G. Do not cover electrical cables, unless they have been sized accordingly.
H. Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.
I. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
J. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers
are otherwise indicated or required to make up total thickness.
K. Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected by the Engineer.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

17 September 2015
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation
with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, install in accordance with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on the Design Drawings according
to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames,
spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely
in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between
insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation from
bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.
A. Upon completion, remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely. Clean surfaces
soiled resulting from installation.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. Comply
with the manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to the Site before
installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of
construction.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 074200 -- WALL PANELS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.8 COORDINATION 4
1.9 WARRANTY 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.4 MATERIALS 9
2.5 FABRICATION 11
2.6 FINISHING 14
PART 3 EXECUTION 14
3.1 EXAMINATION 14
3.2 PREPARATION 15
3.3 INSTALLATION 15
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 18

Tender Issue 074200 WALL PANELS
17 September 2015
SECTION 074200 -- WALL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Insulated Metal Composite Panel.
4. Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping
7. Acoustic Report.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 074200 / 1 WALL PANELS
17 September 2015
1. Sample of metal wall panel system (600mm x 600mm) including both vertical and horizontal joints
and all gaskets.
2. Various color samples of all finish types 300mm x 300mm minimum size.
3. Various extrusions a minimum of 300mm in length.
4. Framing members.
5. All fastenings.
1. Shop Drawings showing the full extent of the work.
the system.
1. Sample of metal wall panel system (600mm x 600mm) including joint between panels.
2. Framing members.
3. All fastenings.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
1. Manufacturer: A specialist with at least 10 years successful experience in manufacturing similar

work as those specified in this Work Section.
2. Contractor: A firm experienced in installing metal panels similar in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and employs
workers trained by the manufacturer.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a Qualified Testing Agency. Identify products
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Typical bay demonstrating interfaces/ demountability and relocatability for all types.
1. First installed structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
G. Preconstruction Testing
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification for the following:
a) Load testing.
b) Deflection testing.
c) Wind loads.
d) Thermal performance.
e) Air permeability.
f) Capillarity.
g) Weather and water resistance.
h) Acoustic performance.
i) Electrical continuity testing.
2. Off-Site testing:
a) The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate
that the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the
Specification. The information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
b) The provision of testing data or the carrying out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his

17 September 2015
c) If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not available,
provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in accordance with the
testing criteria indicated in the Specification.
d) Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic results, and
certificates.
3. On-Site testing: The Contractor shall include for all on-Site testing specified herein.
A. Deliver and protect materials and components to prevent damage, staining or corrosion in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Package wall panels for protection during transportation and
handling. Do not deliver to Site until components can be immediately unloaded into adequate storage
or fixed in position.
B. Deliver and crate assemblies to withstand applicable wind and dead load forces during transportation
and handling without distortion or adverse effects from differential structural and thermal movements.
C. Storage
1. Store materials in a dry, protected location off the ground in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. All elements of framework and associated beads and strips shall be stored on Site such that they
shall not be damaged, distorted or weathered unevenly.
3. Stack wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water.
Do not store wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.
4. All finished components shall be carefully packed in pallet or crates such that they are suitably
separated and protected to prevent scratching, scuffing or other surface damage.
5. All panels, sealants and gaskets shall be stored on Site in accordance with the manufacturer's
written recommendations
6. Retain strippable protective covering on wall panels for period of panel installation.
D. Handling
1. Handle materials using methods and equipment without damage to members or coatings. Inspect
components before installation.
2. Replace items and materials that are scratched or otherwise damaged and unsuitable for installation,
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit assembly of wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements. Do not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such that
a proper bond, seating or fastening cannot be ensured.
B. Site Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by site
measurements before wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on the Shop Drawings.
C. Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
A. Loadings: Make allowance for differences between design loadings and loadings during construction
due to erection sequencing, and floor loading conditions when sizing construction and movement joints.
1.8 COORDINATION

17 September 2015
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and
other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a) Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b) Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a) Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b) Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c) Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Taking-Over.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Alucobond.
2. Reynobond.
B. Source of Supply
1. Obtain from a single manufacturer having at least 10 years experience of producing similar products.
2. Products visible in the finished work shall be produced from a single production run to ensure
uniformity.
C. Type EWB-101 Insulated Metal Composite Panel
1. Description: Insulated metal composite panel consisting of two aluminum cover sheets and infill
insulation including all necessary fastenings and accessories as required.
2. System:
a) Composite Panel:
1. Material: Aluminum sheet facings.
2. Product Reference: Alucobond ACP as accepted by the Engineer.
3. Finish: PVDF.

17 September 2015
5. Facing sheet to provide flat or profiled and rigid panels to tolerances specified.
6. Thickness: 4mm.
7. Weight: 7.6kg/m².
8. Thermal Resistance: 0.009 m²K/W.
9. Thermal Conductivity: 0.44 W/mK.
10. Heat Transmission Coefficient: 5.58 W/m²K.
b) Insulation: Type INS-501 Polystyrene Insulation. Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
3. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard flange attachment and as accepted by the Engineer.
4. Joints: Sealed flush with silicone sealant.
5. Panels shall be designed to span between supports and secured in a concealed manner.
6. Corners and edges shall be rounded for safety.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of construction, fabrication, detailing and installation
to comply with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing requirements relating to
the building structure and other systems are accommodated in accordance with the Structural Engineer's
details, and that interfaces with any external envelope elements are fully weathertight.
B. Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips, spacers,
isolators, gaskets and all other accessories/ components necessary to complete the installation.
C. All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
D. Cladding Support System: Provide a structural steel cladding support system, as suitably required, having
due regard for any requirements in excess of primary structure indicated on the Structural Engineer's
drawings and also any requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The support system shall comply
with the Structural Specification, including protective coatings.
E. The work shall comply with the visual requirements indicated on the Design Drawings and provide a
consistent finish to all surfaces.
F. Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that all structural
and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of aluminum extrusions
shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
G. Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant sections of the Specification or,
where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria specified for the particular
element or components.
H. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel Type 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
I. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
J. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
A. General
1. Wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Structural Performance

17 September 2015
1. Provide wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with ASTM E1592/
ASTM E330:
a) Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
1. Uniform pressure of 1436Pa, acting inward or outward.
b) Deflection Limits:
1. Metal wall panel: Assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no
greater than 1/ 180 of the span.
2. Metal faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/ 175 of the span at the perimeter and 1/ 60 of the span
anywhere in the panel.
2. Movements:
a) The work shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or combination
of loads without damage or reduction in performance. Refer to Structural Specification.
b) Expansion and movement joints shall accommodate the appropriate range of movement.
3. Live Loads:
a) The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specific live loads without any
C. Thermal Movements
temperature differentials occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
4. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a) Temperature Change (Range): 67°C/ 100°C.
D. Moisture Movement
1. The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the specified
performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
b) Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture.
c) Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the panels.
E. Environmental Performance

17 September 2015
1. Thermal Performance Requirements: The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work
shall be 0.35W/ m²K or better.
2. Solar Performance Requirements: Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall not
result in degradation of appearance or performance.
3. Air Permeability/ Infiltration: The work shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage rates
and shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.
a) Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m² of wall area when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
4. Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces, or within
the interstitial construction thickness of the work under the temperature and humidity conditions
listed in Division 01 General Requirements.
5. Capillarity: Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented to areas that are designed to
remain dry.
6. Weather and Water Penetration Resistance: The work, including flashings and junctions with
adjacent components, shall be fully weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full
allowance made for deflections and other movements.
a) Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance
with ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:
b) Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20% of inward-acting, wind-load
design pressure of not less than 300Pa and not more than 575Pa.
1. Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.
2. Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on system's

normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water
controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage
adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
F. Acoustic Performance
1. Sound Insulation:
a) The Work shall provide the sound insulation levels specified, which shall be achieved on Site
for each type, inclusive of all services penetrations and interfaces with other elements.
b) Refer to the Acoustic Report.
G. Fire Performance
1. Specific Fire Performance Requirements:
a) Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
b) Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
c) Surface Spread of Flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
2. Fire and smoke stopping:
a) Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
b) Provide all cavity barriers to meet the requirements of the NFPA.

17 September 2015
c) Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they will not
become dislodged in the event of a fire.
H. Durability
1. General:
a) The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated by the
b) Metal sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions and other visual deformation or irregularity.
a) Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects
without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The work shall resist abrasion from
cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface
appearance.
b) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
3. Demountability:
maintenance and/ or replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b) The removal of panels shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part
of the work.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Regional Material Components: Provide materials sourced from the region that comply with the
requirements as stated in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
B. Panel Materials
1. Aluminum Sheet:
a) Coil-coated sheet, in accordance with ASTM B209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with
temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
b) Sheet: Tension levelled.
c) Tubes: Continuously welded, seamless after final finishing.
d) Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel Type 403 or Type 316. Select
the property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements.
C. Site-Installed Thermal Insulation
1. Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
2. The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by moisture,
extreme temperatures or water vapor.
3. The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or in situ during the
life of the work.
4. Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than 5.
5. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C578, Type IV, 26kg/ m³, with
maximum flame-spread index of 75 and smoke-developed index of 450.
D. Miscellaneous Materials

17 September 2015
1. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2. Metal Framing:
a) Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: In accordance with ASTM C645, cold-formed metallic-
coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/ A653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized/ G60 (Z180) hot-dip
galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.
b) Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members
to substrates.
c) Aluminum Extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B221/ ASTM B221M, alloy and temper
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish as indicated.
3. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim,
copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items. Match material and finish of wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
a) Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels.
b) Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
c) Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25mm thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-
molded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary
to ensure weathertight construction.
4. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.46mm minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not
limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet
caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal
wall panels.
5. Panel Sealants:
a) VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
b) Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
c) Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100% solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape
13mm wide and 3mm thick.
d) Joint Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or

silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal
wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
e) Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C1311.
6. Welding Electrodes: Alloy and type required for strength and compatibility of metals welded.
7. Gasket Extrusions: Provide neoprene gasket extrusions or acceptable equivalent as a sustainable

option to uPVC to the acceptance of the Engineer.
a) Non-Polluting Materials: Provide non-polluting materials that comply with the requirements as
8. Inserts: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) of suitable design and strength to suit application.

17 September 2015
9. Shims: Horseshoe type made from stainless or suitably coated steel where concealed. Use sleeve
type spacers of stainless steel for visible shims.
10. Breather Membrane Material: Spun bonded polypropylene or similar to meet the performance
requirements.
11. Profile Fillers: Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet profile and perforated
ventilation and drainage of condensation at centers of crowns/ troughs as appropriate.
12. Fire Resisting Profile Fillers: Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet profile.
13. Vapor Control Layer Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected
both sides by rigid facings/ linings to give a Class spread of flame to meet the performance criteria
specified.
14. Isolating Tape: A type recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer. Apply to those surfaces
of supports that would otherwise be in contact with work or accessories after fastening.
E. Fastenings
1. Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be site assembled by lapping.
3. All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the work.
4. Direct contact between aluminum or aluminum alloys and treated timber shall be avoided, unless
with the prior acceptance of the Engineer.
5. Visible fastenings shall match accepted samples.
7. Fasteners: Type and alloy as required for proper strength and to prevent galvanic action with
materials fastened. Exposed fasteners shall have countersunk Phillips head with finish to match
adjacent surface.
F. Supports
1. Aluminum split battens on softwood packing pieces to take panelling out to the designed wall
thickness; fixed to partitions or solid wall. Fastenings to suit metal stud or solid partitions as
appropriate.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
2. Fabricate wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with
joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
3. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of
panel.
4. Fabricate wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a
tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within
panel assembly.

17 September 2015
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be
fabricated on site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and
warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels
1. Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives/ batch process by laminating
each sheet using glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets
with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.
2. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.
3. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core
material.
4. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back
of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
5. Dimensional Tolerances:
a) Panel Bow: Maximum 0.08% of panel length or width.
b) Squareness: Maximum 5mm.
D. Cladding Support System
1. Provide a structural steel cladding support system, as necessary, having due regard for any
requirements in excess of primary structure indicated on the Structural Engineer's drawings and
also any requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The support system shall comply with the
Structural Specification, including protective coatings.
E. Tolerances for Manufacture
1. Design tolerances shall be adhered to.
2. The provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances of the surrounding elements
shall be shown on the Shop Drawings and further information shall be obtained from the Engineer
as necessary when completing the Shop Drawings.
3. Specific tolerances shall be adhered to. A very high degree of accuracy is required in the tolerance
of work, as set out below:
a) Level of Horizontal Members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
b) Plumb of Vertical Members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
4. The detailed list of tolerances to which the work components shall be fabricated within the
requirements of the Specification and overall geometric requirements shall be submitted with the
tenders. All tolerances shall be submitted for review by the Engineer.
5. As a minimum, the statement of tolerances shall include the following:
a) Thickness.
b) Out-of-plan.
c) Straightness normal to plane.
d) Longitudinal.
e) Horizontal.
f) Vertical.
g) Diagonal.

17 September 2015
h) Eccentricity.
6. All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities.
a) Twist: ±1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
b) Line of Panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
F. Lightning Protection
1. Bonding is required between individual sections of the work to ensure continuity between adjacent
sections, both vertically and horizontally over the whole façade.
2. Bonding between the work and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals as indicated on
the Design Drawings. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at the highest
floor level of each part of the building.
3. Provide studs/ bolts on the cladding for subsequent connection.
4. All straps/ connections shall be concealed.
5. No straps shall be fixed along copings.
G. Sheet Metal Accessories
1. Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
2. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
3. Aluminum flashings shall be at least 1.6mm thick. Aluminum sheet for copings, panels and visible
closers shall be sufficiently thick to provide a visually flat surface and to eliminate excessive distortion
and permanent deformation caused by solar radiation.
4. Flashings to receive polyester powder coat finish or PVDF finish to match the relevant adjacent
metal cladding. Exact type of finish and color shall be agreed.
5. Longitudinal joints shall have lapped or interconnecting joints, which shall be fully weather sealed.
Simple butt joints and butt straps shall not be acceptable. Joints and sealants shall be designed to
be capable of accommodating thermal movements of all flashings.
6. Electrical continuity shall be achieved between conductive parts. Provision shall be made for lightning
protection integration requirements.
7. Aluminum flashings shall be treated with anti-drumming insulation on the hidden face.
8. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate non-moving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
9. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate non-moving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams.
Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
10. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards.
11. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
on faces of accessories exposed to view.
12. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
H. Cutting
1. Saw-cut or shear metal edges square and sharp without causing distortion or discoloration to
surfaces. Do not use flame-cutting equipment.

17 September 2015
2. Grind cut edges to remove burrs, saw marks and blemishes from exposed edges, or alternatively
by welding and grinding.
3. Dress meeting faces of joints to produce a proper fit. Grind site splices smooth, flush and square.
4. Machine drill or mill holes and similar cut-outs.
I. Bending: Bend sheet metal to the required shape. Bent items shall be free of grain separation, oil canning
2.6 FINISHING
A. General
1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
3. Prime visible surfaces of non-ferrous metals. Prime all surfaces, including joint faces, of ferrous
6. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within ½ of the range of accepted samples. Noticeable variations in the same
piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are
within the range of accepted samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
7. Shop Applied Finishes: In accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metals.
8. Site Applied Paint: In accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
9. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine substrates, adjacent construction

surfaces to receive the work of this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support
members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
C. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that
installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
D. Verify that weather resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to
prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Contractor, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
F. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations
of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.
G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

17 September 2015
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
B. Setting out shall be such that all panels are installed in the correct position, within tolerance, and in the
correct relationship to the building structure.
C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel
support members and anchorages in accordance with ASTM C754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's
written recommendations.
1. Soffit Framing: Wire-tie for clip furring channels to supports as required to comply with requirements
for assemblies indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All works shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, which shall be free from marks, defects,
flaws, steps, waves, or damage of any nature.
2. All panels shall be mounted so that they are all correctly and consistently orientated.
3. All fastening bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
4. Materials shall be dry until fixed.
5. Acceptance shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where shown on the Shop Drawings.
6. Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between
dissimilar metals shall be used.
7. Bars shall be set out at evenly spaced centers, straight, parallel and truly aligned with other features,
where shown on the Shop Drawings.
8. The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane, with a satisfactory fit at all
junctions.
9. Assembly of Panels:
a) The panels shall be profiled or flat (1:1000) and assembled in order to achieve true straight
lines, both horizontally and vertically for the full width and height of the building.
b) Panels shall have sharp corners to create 90° corners with joints occurring as indicated on the
Design Drawings. Panels to be hermetically sealed with facing enclosing insulation with no
possibility of delamination taking place.
c) All corners shall be flat, flush and true.
d) Opening panels shall be secret without visible means of opening.
10. Corners: All corner conditions shall appear identical at each level or as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
11. Cradle Fastenings: Cradle fastenings shall appear as an integral part of the system.
12. Movement Joints: The requirement for any movement/ expansion joints within the works shall be
ascertained in order to accommodate all movements stated herein. Maintenance of the joints shall
be by visual inspection.
13. Fastenings:
a) Securely anchor work to supporting structure. Use expansion bolts for concrete and masonry,
machine screws or bolts for metal, and screws for timber.

17 September 2015
b) Shim bearing surfaces, or provide spacing items, for a proper installation.
c) Use only shop-drilled holes for the assembling items, unless otherwise accepted. When
acceptable Site drill holes in accepted locations.
d) Set fasteners with heads parallel to the surface; set countersunk heads flush.
e) Use countersunk fastenings where in physical contact with the body, to prevent injury.
f) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bimetallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminum components from cementitious surfaces.
g) Visible fastenings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support

steelwork, using round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
h) Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanized and effectively weatherproofed to avoid
exposure to the external environment.
i) Provide cast-in channel fastenings in concrete and fastenings directly made to structural
steelwork.
j) Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting
for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor
bolts and fastenings where necessary.
k) The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fastenings.
l) Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Engineer.
m) Fasteners shall be installed with a coordinated purpose design tooling system that incorporates
a mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates perpendicular
installation. The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site instruction in the
use of the fastener installation tooling system.
n) Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
14. Adhesives:
a) Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and
materials recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
b) Surfaces shall be sufficiently smooth and even to suit the gap-filling and bonding characteristics
of the adhesive. Prepare as necessary.
c) Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers' and statutory requirements for storage and
safe usage of adhesives.
d) No adhesives shall be used in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the

manufacturer's recommended maximum shelf life or open-pot time periods.
e) Adhesives shall be applied using recommended spreaders/ applicators to ensure correct

coverage. Bring surfaces together within the recommended time period and apply pressure
evenly over the full area of contact surfaces to ensure full bonding.
f) Surplus adhesive shall be removed using methods and materials recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer and without damage to affected surfaces.
B. Fire Protection: Install fire protective materials in accordance with Section 078413 Penetration
Firestopping, to achieve the required fire performance.
C. Thermal Insulation Installation
1. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire wall. Comply with
installation requirements in Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.

17 September 2015
a) Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches
or 610mm o.c. Attach furring members to substrate with screws spaced 610mm o.c.
b) Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within panels, spaced
at intervals according to insulation manufacturer's instructions. Maintain cavity width between
insulation and metal liner panel of dimension indicated.
D. Metal Wall Panel Installation
1. General:
a) Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes,
and locations indicated on Design Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Commence metal wall panel installation and install minimum of 27.8m² in presence of
factory-authorized representative.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
3. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed
by metal wall panels are installed.
4. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
6. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
8. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
9. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
10. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
2. Fasteners:
a) Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
exterior; use aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
3. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
4. Joint Sealers:
a) Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight
performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants
indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
b) Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal
side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
c) Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 Joint
Sealants.
5. Attachment System Installation:
a) General:

17 September 2015
1. Install attachment system required to support metal-faced composite wall panels and to
provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions,
tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
a) Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
b) Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed
by composite panels are installed.
6. Clip Installation:
a) Attach panel clips to supports at each metal-faced composite wall panel joint at locations,
spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned
flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and
sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section
E. Accessory Installation
1. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
a) Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
a) Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that shall be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
b) Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-
resistant performance.
c) Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 3000mm with no joints allowed within 605mm of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not
less than 25mm deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Account shall be taken of the installation tolerance requirements of the works.
B. The works shall be erected plumb and true in proper alignment and relation to established lines and
grades as shown on the Shop Drawings. The erected system shall present true and accurate lines and
flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be limited to long wave formations of
minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum
amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from an optical or laser reference line.
C. Joints between panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more
than ±1mm of the joint width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally distributed with no
sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 1mm.
D. Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of 6mm in 6000mm,
non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 3mm offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
E. Level: The works shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the same
locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.

17 September 2015
F. Plumbness: The works shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 1mm from its
theoretical vertical plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel shall not exceed
1 in 1000. The vertical plane of the works shall be within ±1mm of the theoretical plan position.
G. A method statement shall be submitted with the Tender detailing proposals for achieving the specified
tolerances. This shall demonstrate that a clear understanding of the construction programme, the effects
of the building structure and construction method and the fabrication method of the panels is possessed.
H. A detailed list of tolerances to which the works shall be installed, within the requirements of the
Specification for the overall geometric requirements, shall be submitted with the Tender. All tolerances
shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. As a minimum, the statement of tolerances shall include
the following.
1. Thickness.
2. Position on plan.
3. Level.
4. Alignment.
5. Joints between panels.
6. Diagonal.
7. Eccentricity.
8. Inclination.
I. Allowance for sufficient analysis of the erection sequence shall be made, thus ensuring and satisfying
the Engineer that the installation tolerances stated above shall be met.
J. The dimensional and detailed provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances of
surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the works relate satisfactorily to the works
as a whole shall be stated and shown on the Shop Drawings.
K. All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with the
Engineer.
L. A very high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication and installation of the works and their support
structure.
M. A full understanding of the behaviour of the building structure, its movements and its effects on the works
is required. Full knowledge of the works construction sequence, its predicted building behavior during
construction and its relationship with the works construction is also necessary.
N. At the time of handover the visual requirements of the works are as follows.
1. The cladding panels shall be horizontal/ vertical and geometrically shaped as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
2. All joints shall be of equal size and at equal centers, unless indicated otherwise on the Design
Drawings.
3. The works shall present true and accurate straight lines and flat panels within the plane of the
elevations and geometry.
O. Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and
crosschecking with adjacent trades and elements, to satisfy the accuracy requirements, shall be submitted
to the Engineer. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the Engineer, or his representative,
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness thereof.
P. Alternative Tolerances: Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the Engineer's
discretion, provided they are agreed in advance of the manufacture of components.
Q. The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in the assembly of the works in order to
accommodate manufacturing tolerances of other interfacing elements.

17 September 2015
R. Work shall be within the tolerances stated herein and no revisions to the tolerances to cater for inadequate
control shall be permitted.
S. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of the proposed methods for achieving and
constantly monitoring the installation tolerances during all stages of the work. Detailed records of the
constant control and tolerances achieved shall be submitted to the Engineer.
T. Personnel, equipment and instruments necessary to effectively control tolerances shall be provided. For
recording purposes a reference temperature for measurements shall be established, preferably the mean
value over a period of time.
U. The works, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting, shall be strictly rigid, firm, free from
vibration, knocking, rattles, squeaks and other noises when subject to the worst combination of
environmental conditions and wind loads.
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing and inspecting agency shall be engaged to perform site
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.
C. Wind Resistance Testing
1. Test pressure: The peak test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design wind pressure (150%) and
applied for a minimum of 10 seconds.
2. At both positive and negative applications of the peak test pressure, there shall be no permanent
damage to supports or cladding panels or anchors. Framing members shall not buckle, panels shall
remain securely held and gaskets/ seals shall not be displaced.
D. Waterproofing and Weathertightness Testing
1. Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23m by-2-story minimum area of metal wall
panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area
directed by the Engineer.
2. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance with system
performance requirements in accordance with ASTM E1105 at minimum differential pressure of
20% of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by SEI/ ASCE 7, but not less than 300Pa.
3. Test the weathertightness of the works using a suitable testing method as accepted by the Engineer.
4. Details of the test and a proposed method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance at least 1 month prior to the proposed testing on Site.
5. All tests shall comply with the rules and standards laid down by the appropriate testing authorities.
E. Site Tests and Inspections
1. Manufacturer's Site Service:
a) Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect and test completed metal wall
panel installation, including accessories.
F. Thermal Performance Testing: Thermography testing shall be carried out to ensure that insulation is
continuous using a suitable thermal imaging method to be proposed by the Contractor. Testing method
to be subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
G. Air Leakage Testing: Air leakage testing shall be undertaken using a suitable method.
H. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
I. Wall panels shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

17 September 2015
J. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements
A. Cleaning
1. Remove debris and excess materials from Site and dispose of safely. Clean soiled or stained
surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Leave the work clean and fit for
immediate use.
2. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as wall panels are installed,
until completion, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by wall panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
3. After wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
B. Adusting
1. Replace wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
C. Protection
1. Provide protection of panels against damage until Taking-Over.
2. Remove protective coverings upon completion, when instructed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 077200 -- ROOF ACCESSORIES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 5
2.4 FINISH REQUIREMENTS 6
2.5 FABRICATION 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 9
3.2 PREPARATION 9
3.3 INSTALLATION 9

Tender Issue 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
17 September 2015
SECTION 077200 -- ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Roof hatches.
2. Section 087100 Door Hardware.
3. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 077200 / 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES
17 September 2015
1. Sample of each type of roof accessory in specified finish.
2. Frame minimum 300mm of each type.
3. Samples of fire and smoke seals.
4. Samples of acoustic seals.
5. All visible fastenings.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Sample of each type of roof accessory in specified finish.
2. Frame minimum 300mm of each type.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
1. A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
C. Mock-ups
1. To be confirmed by theEngineer.
D. Prototypes
1. An area determined by the Engineer of each element of the works fully installed, completed and to
A. Delivery
1. Do not deliver materials and fabricated items to Site until conditions of temperature and humidity
are similar to those in the finished building. Protect items from wetting, temperature and humidity
changes or damage during transportation. Do not install projecting hardware prior to shipment,
unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
2. Protection of Components: Do not deliver to Site components which cannot be put immediately into
suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to prevent
damage by and to projecting hardware and beads.
B. Storage: Store items on flat bases clear of the ground and protected from rain, direct sunlight, construction
and causes of damage. Ensure adequate ventilation of storage spaces.
C. Handling: Handle items carefully to avoid distortion or other damage. Protect corners and finished surfaces
from damage.
A. Install assemblies and materials in the temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the
manufacturer. Do not install materials or assembly on surfaces that are wet, dirty or contaminated, or
when proper bond, seating or fastening cannot be obtained.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a) Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b) Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.

17 September 2015
c) Cracking, checking, peeling or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Taking-Over.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type RFS-501 Roof Access Hatch
1. Description: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant and integrally formed deck-mounting flange
at perimeter bottom.
2. Type: Single-leaf lid.
3. Hatch Material: Aluminum panel.
a) Finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
b) Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
4. Construction: Insulation, hatch lid, curb liner, flanges and accessories shall be as per manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet the required performance.
a) Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb
height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket
on side that obstructs water flow.
5. Hardware: Stainless steel spring latch with turn handles, butt-type or pintle-type hinge system, and
padlock hasps inside and outside.
6. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Ladder Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder.
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced
movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. General: When calculating loads the worst combinations shall be considered, taking account of the
fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than 1 design criterion.
2. Deflection: The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to dead and live
loads shall not exceed 1/ 500 of the span or 3mm, whichever is the lesser.
3. Wind Loads: The work shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation, the effects
of wind loads. The work shall not depart from fastenings under the design wind loads.
4. Inertial Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/ deceleration of moving sections including opening lights, doors and vents of the building
or enclosure. Consult the Engineer regarding the motion requirements for such elements.
C. Hygrothermal Performance
1. All materials, core materials, lippings, facing materials and adhesives and associated work shall be
selected to satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in
Division 01 General Requirements.

17 September 2015
2. All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the work shall have moisture resistant
properties to match core materials.
D. Acoustic Performance
2. Where no specific value is stated, the assembly shall achieve as a minimum, the level of acoustic
performance in accordance with the Acoustic Report.
3. Acoustic seals to suit acoustic ratings as scheduled shall be included.
4. Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-rated hatches.
E. Fire Performance
1. Fire assemblies, including the installation method within openings shall comply with the Local Civil
Defense, applicable local codes, NFPA standard no. 80, and the fire performance requirements
stipulated hereunder. In the event of confliction, the more onerous requirement shall prevail.
3. Fire assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated in conjunction with the Fire Strategy Report.
4. Fire assemblies shall be marked with a label or plug to confirm conformance to UAE third party
certifying bodies, or regional and nationally recognized organization or acceptable to the Engineer.
5. Assemblies which, by nature of their size, design or configuration fall outside of the manufacturer's
test coverage shall require independently conducted testing or at worst, a dedicated technical
assessment carried out by a nationally recognized authority.
6. Intumescent fire and smoke seals to suit fire and smoke ratings as scheduled shall be included.
7. All fire hatches shall be self-latching with approved latching devices with suitable latch bolt length,
refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
8. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, doors at fire rated openings shall be arranged to remain in
the normally closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic approved closing device.
Refer also to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
F. Durability
1. The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or unacceptable
changes in appearance as follows:
a) Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
anticipated abuse including:
1. Breakage of components and assemblies.
2. Loss of rigidity or loosening up of joints.
3. Cracking or splitting of timber and veneer.
4. Indentation.
5. Improper functioning of hardware resulting in impaired hatch operation.
2. Distortion arising from moisture changes, temperature changes and applied forces including
cupping, bowing or twisting beyond the minimum required set limits or which prevents the ability of
the hatch to comply with the fire, smoke and sound requirements.
3. Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints;
excessive surface indentations; color changes or yellowing of coatings.
2.3 MATERIALS

17 September 2015
A. Aluminum Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B209M, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required,
with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: In accordance with ASTM B221M, manufacturer's standard alloy and
temper for type of use.
C. Miscellaneous Materials
1. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
2. Underlayment:
a) Felt: In accordance with ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, non-
perforated.
b) Polyethylene Sheet: In accordance with ASTM D4397.
c) Slip Sheet: Building paper, 0.16-kg/ m² minimum, rosin sized.
3. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide non-removable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless
otherwise indicated:
a) Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
b) Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use.
4. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone
or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
5. Elastomeric Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended
by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
6. Butyl Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber
sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
2.4 FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. General
2. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Aluminum Sheet
1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.
2. Factory Prime Coating: Where Site painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-
colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.005mm.
3. Clear Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611.
4. Color Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611.
5. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces in
accordance with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a) 2-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: In accordance with AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70% PVDF resin by weight.

17 September 2015
6. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.04mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
7. Concealed Finish: Pre-treat with the manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.013mm.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Metalwork, General
3. Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fixed where moisture
may be present or occur.

chemically.
attachment.
porosity or cracks.
completed work.
f) At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
g) Metal arc welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other methods subject
to review by the Engineer.
h) Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
tungsten-arc welding and it shall be carried out by a procedure qualified and certified in
accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M,
"Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
7. Frames:
a) The frames shall be unaffected by micro-organisms, mildew, insects, vermin and/ or rats, nor
provide harborage for same.
b) The frames shall be securely held and sealed.

17 September 2015
c) Frames shall be provided to the profiles indicated, fabricated from 1.6mm zinc annealed steel,
or an acceptable alternative.
d) The method of installation of frames to sub-frames, partitions or blockwork shall provide a seal
to achieve the air infiltration and weatherproofing.
e) The frames shall be reinforced at hinges, fastenings, strikes and shall provide all cut-outs
required for the installation of security items.
f) Suitable cut-outs shall be provided in the frames for all mortice hardware. Metal reinforcements
shall be provided for attaching all hardware.
g) Where indicated on the Design Drawings, mild steel support angles shall be provided in order
to secure the frames to supporting walls. Such angles shall be screwed firmly back to the
support structure using 50mm screws into rawlplugs.
h) Anchors of fire frames shall be located immediately above or below the hinge reinforcements
on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb. All anchors must be welded to the
jambs.
i) All the frames shall have at least 3 pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the frame
of each hatch.
8. Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting behind
lipping. Size as recommended by the manufacturer to achieve required performance.
9. Fasteners: Types and sizes necessary for secure assembly and installation of the work, suitable
for each application. Fasteners in exterior or wet locations shall be stainless steel or brass. Use
fasteners in treated timber compatible with treatment type.
10. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
11. A high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication and installation of the work.
12. Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
13. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all exposed surfaces and edges
true and free from irregularities and defects, using techniques that will not impair the strength of
materials used.
14. The work elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
15. Wireways must be allowed for connection to equipment within the framing system, back to the
building power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Works Contractor) and Building
Management System (BMS). Coordinate provisions for electrical services and sensing devices and
final connections. Connect all parts of equipment with insulated wiring as required for operation.
16. Hatches shall be factory pre-machined, and reinforced as necessary, for all specified hardware,
prior to the application of factory finishes. Ensure that the manufacturer is in receipt of specimen
furniture at the earliest opportunity after order placement to enable configurations of machinery.
B. Source Quality Control
1. Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all doors installed requiring to be sound
rated meet the performance criteria as specified, and that values achieved in laboratory conditions
are exceeded by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site.
2. Industry recognized independent third party certification is required indicating compliance of

individual hatches with the specified performance.
3. Provide a single copy of the manufacturer's certification for each hatch and frame, which is indicated
for a fire rated opening and is larger than the size limitations established by NFPA and UL for labeling.
Certificate shall state that hatch and frame unit has been constructed in accordance with all the
applicable requirements for labeled construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
17 September 2015
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Contractor present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Only materials meeting the Specification requirements and stored under appropriate conditions shall be
used for installation.
1. Take responsibility for all dimensions and for checking dimensions on Site prior to manufacture.
2. Ensure that the Detailed Design accommodates any given tolerances and differences between
actual Site dimensions and dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings.
C. Installation of fire assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members of a nationally
recognized quality assurance scheme, and ideally the same scheme to which the manufacturer
subscribes.
D. For openings in masonry or in concrete, provide 2 No. anchors for each jamb up to 1500mm and an
additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 600mm-1800mm of height or fraction thereof. This
is the minimum requirement unless otherwise noted.
E. For openings in stud partitions, 1 No. additional anchor shall be provided for each jamb over the number
of anchors required for masonry openings of equivalent height.
F. Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a surface equivalent
in cleanliness to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. In general this shall be achieved by
acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil, grease, welding slag renders this ineffective, and
in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally blast-cleaned to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS
05-59-00.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment,
excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. The work shall be securely fixed and sealed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, not compromising the performance and certification of the doorset.
3. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
4. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
5. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening
of fasteners and seals.
B. Hatches and Frames
1. Set frames centrally in openings. Shim with continuous timber packing strips to correct alignment.
2. Bed frames on continuous beads of intumescent sealant to prevent air leakage.
3. Screw fasten frames securely to fastening blocks provided in partitions. Locate screw fastenings
behind planted stops wherever possible, at centers recommended by the manufacturer, but not
exceeding 450mm.

17 September 2015
4. Observe requirements for rated assemblies on test certificates or certified assessments.
5. Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact
with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum/ stainless steel roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install
a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof
accessories for waterproof performance.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.
E. Roof Hatch Installation
1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.
2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and
hardware.
3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
4. Attach ladder assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Hardware: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish supplied
by the hardware manufacturer. Prevent damage to hardware and adjacent surfaces. At completion check,
adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
H. Fastenings
1. Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting for
anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor bolts and
fastenings where necessary.
2. The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fastenings.
3. Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Engineer.
4. Fasteners shall be installed with a coordinated purpose design tooling system that incorporates a
5. Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
6. Generally, fastenings within aluminum framing components shall not be visible, with the exception
of capping pieces fixed to vertical mullions.
7. Visible fastenings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support steelwork,
using round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
8. Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanized and effectively weatherproofed to avoid
I. All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using other
materials shall not be acceptable. The gaskets shall perform and appear as a single continuous material.
J. Installation Tolerances

17 September 2015
1. The maximum variation from plumb shall be ±1.5mm.
2. Cut-outs for interfacing work shall be to the dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings ±1mm.
3. Horizontal Plan Position: For any element at any level whose position is defined in relation to a
primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the Design Dimension to that reference
grid is ±2mm.
4. Where a series of elements are arranged in an array of 2 or more, the maximum allowed deviation
of the horizontal distance between any 2 adjacent elements is ±2mm from the corresponding Design
Dimension.
5. Planarity: Any element or group of elements whose position is defined from a reference plane shall
not deviate from the Design Dimension of the reference plane by more than ±2mm measuring
perpendicular to the defined plane.
6. The width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more than ±1mm of the joint width.
Any variation shall be equally distributed with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints
shall not exceed 1mm.
7. Line and level shall be within ±2mm of the specified level.
8. The work shall be erected such that no point on any part is more than 1mm from its theoretical plane.
9. The dimensional and detailed provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances of
surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the work relate satisfactorily to the work
10. All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
the Engineer.
11. Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and cross-checking
with adjacent trades and elements, to satisfy the accuracy requirements, shall be submitted to the
Engineer. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the Engineer, or his representative,
12. Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the Engineer's discretion, provided
they are agreed in advance of the manufacture of components.
A. Acoustic Testing: If required by the Engineer, Site sound transmission loss tests shall be carried out.
Provide a test report demonstrating that doors installed within sound rated partitions meet the performance
criteria specified.
B. Carry out a Site inspection if there is damage or non-supply of the production test reports. The Engineer
shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units.
1. Tests and inspection results shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately they are available.
2. Submit certificates relating to the materials and systems used in the work as confirmation of tests
carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standards and/ or other National Standards as
appropriate.
A. Cleaning
1. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean Site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A780.

17 September 2015
3. Clean exposed surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Clean off excess sealants.
B. Adjusting
1. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
2. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for Site painting in accordance with
Section 099100 Painting.
C. Protection
1. Ensure that hatches and frames arrive on Site with adequate surface protection. Material used for
surface protection shall be of low flammability.
2. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as instructed,
for inspection; remove at Taking-Over.
3. Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or damage
from other activities or conditions on Site.
4. Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
5. Protection of Components after Installation: Ensure that all exposed components have protective
coverings during storage and after installation to protect factory applied finishes. Exposed finishes
shall also be protected during on-Site operations.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 078413 -- PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 4
2.4 MIXING 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 6
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
3.4 IDENTIFICATION 7
3.7 PROTECTION 9

Tender Issue 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
17 September 2015
SECTION 078413 -- PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 078413 / 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Penetration firestopping on 300mm x 300mm specified substrate.
3. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install THE
manufacturer's products in accordance with the specified requirements. The manufacturer's
willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to the Contractor or to the Installer engaged
by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
4. A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop
Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor
Program Requirements.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes

17 September 2015
1. First of each type installed in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements.
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested in accordance with the testing standard
referenced in the Specification. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a) Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
b) Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the

following:
1. UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2. Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3. FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
A. Delivery: Deliver materials manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name
and other qualifying information. Do not remove packaging until time for use.
B. Storage: Store materials prior to installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not open packaging or remove labels until time for installation. Replace items and materials that are
defective and unsuitable for use.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because
of rain, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply: Obtain penetration firestopping materials from single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined

in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 2.49Pa.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined in

accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 2.49Pa.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined in accordance
with UL 1479.
E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested in
accordance with UL 1479.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by the penetration
firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping
indicated.

17 September 2015
A. Installed stoppings to be durable fire-resisting, air-tight, smoke-tight and sound reducing, capable of
accommodating specified movements.
B. Fire Resistance: Stopping shall achieve the required fire rating and prevent the passage of smoke, gases
and flame when tested in accordance with the International Building Code and/ or the NFPA, as required
by the Dubai Civil Defense. Stopping shall not release excessive smoke or toxic fumes under fire
conditions.
C. Air Resistance: Stopping shall prevent the passage of air and smoke under ambient temperature
conditions when tested in accordance with the principles described in the NFPA, using the respective
air pressure.
D. Weather Resistance: Stopping shall match the performance of the construction sealed.
E. Movement: Stopping shall accommodate specified movement without exceeding the elastomeric values
published by the material manufacturer.
F. Durability: Stopping shall maintain its performance and, where necessary, its appearance throughout
the design life of the building when maintained in accordance with an agreed regime. Failure shall include
but not necessarily be limited to the following.
1. Loss or reduction in fire, air, sound or weather resistance.
2. Loss, displacement or compression resulting in gaps or other discontinuities.
3. Staining or chemical attack of adjacent surfaces due to migration of constituent materials.
4. Material breakdown or other deterioration due to exposure to water or humidity either during
construction or occurring in the finished buildings.
5. Release of harmful fibers, dust particles or solvents into the building's atmosphere under normal
conditions.
6. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealants.
7. Slumping, folding or crazing of sealants.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos to comply with the requirements as stated
B. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. VOC Content
1. Adhesive and sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
2. Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC
content when calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
a) Sealants: 250g/ L.
b) Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250g/ L.
c) Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775g/ L.
D. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and
consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached
to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
E. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent
material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

17 September 2015
F. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded
to galvanized steel sheet.
G. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic

fibers, or silicone compounds.
H. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one
side.
I. Gun Grade Sealants: 1 part non-sag materials.
1. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade

indicated below:
a) Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation with 50% movement capability for openings in floors
and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped
surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Acrylic sealant, for general use in non-moving joints.
J. Spraying Grade Sealant: Water-based elastomeric coating with good adhesion to most construction
materials.
K. Plaster: Gypsum-based compound of lightweight aggregates and binders, pouring or trowel grade
material, minimum 1300kg/ m³ density when mixed with water.
L. Mortars: Cement-based compound of lightweight aggregates and binders, pouring grade material,
minimum 1600kg/ m³ density when mixed with water.
M. Pillows/ Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/ bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where
exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/ bags from being easily
removed.
N. Silicone Foams: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure
in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
O. Fire Insulation Encapsulating Membrane: Synthetic rubber type. Use either of the following materials to
suit application. Provide adhesives and primers as recommended by the material manufacturer for
bonding to substrate indicated.
1. Neoprene: Self-curing neoprene. Minimum sheet thickness 1.6mm.
2. EPDM: Vulcanized EPDM reinforced with synthetic fibers. Minimum sheet thickness 1mm.
P. Metal Accessories
1. Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M.
2. Steel Framing: Galvanized steel sections in accordance with ASTM A1003/ A1003M.
3. Steel Reinforcing: Welded steel mesh or bar.
4. Anchors: Galvanized steel expansion anchors.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of
mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or
procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for
application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

17 September 2015
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the
work. Verify dimensions and levels, penetrations through substrates, and surfaces to receive the work
of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Ensure that the construction which defines the openings and penetrating items are installed
prior to the installation of any stopping materials.
B. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements.
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items any foreign materials and
deleterious substances that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of
developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from
cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
C. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that the manufacturer's
recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and
migration onto exposed surfaces. Do not apply stopping to surfaces previously painted, sealed or treated
with curing compounds unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces
that will remain exposed on completion of the work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as
possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
E. Mixing: Mix materials strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and use within the time
limits stipulated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with the manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve
fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials
and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results.
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items
as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
D. Intumescent Sealants
1. Apply intumescent sealants in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and criteria
specified herein.
2. Seal around all services where they pass through partitions and fire resistant elements of structure.
3. Work shall be carried out to the manufacturer's recommendations.

17 September 2015
4. Pipe sleeves shall be installed where required. Sleeves shall extend for the full thickness of the fire
resisting element. Sleeves shall be accurately positioned to give a minimum clearance around the
service of 20mm or diameter of service, whichever is the least. Sleeves shall be bedded solid. Space
between sleeve and service shall be filled with a proprietary product suitable for the purpose.
5. Completely fill the space leaving no gaps and finish neatly to acceptance by the Engineer.
6. Manufacturers to provide certified proof of suitability of their materials for the particular installation.
E. Pipe Penetrations
1. Floors Where Loadbearing is Required:
a) Service pipes and cable trays shall be sealed all round where they pass through floors with
an accepted material made for the purpose and tested.
b) Completely fill the space to a minimum depth of 100mm introducing mild steel support brackets
and mesh. Leave no gaps and finish neatly. The manufacturer shall provide certified proof of
suitability of all materials used.
2. Floors Where Loadbearing is Not Required:
a) Service pipes shall be sealed all round where they pass through floors with an accepted material
made for the purpose.
b) The space shall be completely filled leaving no gaps and finished neatly. The manufacturer
shall provide certified proof of suitability of all materials used.
F. Sealing Services
1. Pipe Sleeves:
a) Sleeves shall extend through full thickness of wall/ floor and shall be accurately positioned to
give a minimum clearance around service of 20mm or diameter of service, whichever is the
lesser.
b) Sleeves shall be made for the purpose to suit pipe material and piping size and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
c) Sleeves, whether built in or installed in preformed holes shall be bedded solid.
d) The annular space between service and sleeve shall be sealed with fire stop compound.
e) Where exposed to view, the bedding and sealing shall be finished neatly, to the acceptance
of the Engineer.
2. Sealing Around Smaller Pipes:
a) Fire stop putty shall be used following the manufacturer's recommendations.
b) Where exposed to view, bedding and sealing shall be finished neatly, to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
3. Sealing in Walls:
a) Service pipes and cable trays that pass through walls shall be sealed all round with an accepted
material made for the purpose.
b) The space shall be completely filled leaving no gaps and finished neatly. Provide certified proof
of suitability of all materials used.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION

17 September 2015
A. Identify penetration firestopping with pressure sensitive, self-adhesive, pre-printed vinyl labels, when
required by authorities having jurisdiction. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within
150mm of firestopping edge so labels shall be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or
firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on
labels.
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of
Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
A. The Employer will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Do not permit fire stopping work to be concealed by other construction until inspected by the third party
certification body, and specified identifications have been accepted.
C. Examine seals for proper installation, adhesion and curing as appropriate for respective seal materials.
D. Testing Requirements
1. Test 10% of penetration seals but not less than 1 of each type.
2. Measure the installed thickness of the fire stop material.
3. Re-examine the penetration seals immediately prior to concealment by other construction to ensure
that no damage has occurred since the initial inspection.
4. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing,
repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
5. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports
are issued and installations comply with requirements.
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage
materials in which openings occur.
B. Adjusting/ Remedial Work
1. Identify damaged or re-entered seals requiring repair or modification.
2. If penetrating items are to be added, remove enough material to permit penetration by new elements,
being careful not to damage balance of seal.
3. Repair holes, cracks and damage in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to ensure a
complete smoke seal.
4. Use only materials accepted by the manufacturer of the original seal as suitable for repair.
5. Replace insulating materials that have become displaced.
6. Make Good:

17 September 2015
a) Damage to fireproofing caused by other trades before final inspection of this work and prior to
enclosure by other components.
b) Areas where average thickness of material if less than the minimum indicated in the design
and locations where individual thickness is deficient by more than 25% of the required thickness.
c) Areas where inspection cuts and tests have been made.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as instructed for
inspection; remove completely at Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 079200 -- JOINT SEALANTS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.6 WARRANTY 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 9
3.1 EXAMINATION 9
3.2 PREPARATION 9
3.3 INSTALLATION 10
3.5 CLEANING 12
3.6 PROTECTION 12
3.7 MAINTENANCE 12

Tender Issue 079200 JOINT SEALANTS
17 September 2015
SECTION 079200 -- JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Polysulfide joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
5. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.
6. Preformed joint sealants.
7. Acoustical joint sealants.
2. Section 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
3. Section 088000 Glazing.
5. Section 093000 Tiling.
7. Acoustic Report.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 079200 / 1 JOINT SEALANTS
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
the components and products.
9. Quality Plan.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates an acceptable alternative quality system.

17 September 2015
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location to be agreed with and
1. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
a) Use either ASTM C1087 or the manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether
priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
b) Submit not fewer than 8 pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint
sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
c) Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the work.
d) For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures including use of specially formulated primers.
e) Testing shall not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that
are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to,
and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
2. Preconstruction Site-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, Site test their adhesion to Project
joint substrates as follows:
a) Locate test joints where indicated on the Project or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer.
b) Conduct Site tests for each application indicated below:
1. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
c) Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
d) Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.
1. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand
Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.
a) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along 1 side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
e) Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on
pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
f) Evaluation of Preconstruction Site-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive

failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, shall
be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during
testing.

17 September 2015
A. General: Install sealants under environmental conditions as recommended in the manufacturer's printed
instructions. Observe requirements the manufacturer has regarding materials, preparation, application
techniques particular to the work, and record in writing. Submit records on request from the Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions.
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 5°C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which the Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer

agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Work Section within specified warranty period.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the
following.
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or

construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written
specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Dow Corning.
2. BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC.
3. GE Construction Sealants.
4. Tremco.
B. Source of Supply: Use the same type of product for each item of work and obtain from a single
manufacturer with at least 10 years' experience of producing similar products. Products visible in the
finished work shall be produced from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
A. General

17 September 2015
1. General: Comply with the performance requirements specified in Division 01 General Requirements.
2. Sealed joints shall withstand exposure to environmental conditions to which they will be subjected
whilst accommodating anticipated joint movement.
a) Temperature Change (Range): -5°C to 60°C.
3. Compatibility: Sealants, joint fillers, backer rods and primers in contact with one another shall be
compatible and not cause staining of joint surfaces.
4. Adhesion: Sealants and joint fillers shall firmly bond to the joint surfaces and resist anticipated
imposed loads and joint movements without displacement. Elastometric sealants shall attain a
minimum 66.8N peel strength in tension.
5. Durability and Appearance: Sealants and joint fillers to be serviceable and maintain their performance
for the duration of their service life without the following failures or defects.
a) Adhesive or cohesive failure.
b) Spalling of joint edges.
c) Slumping or folding of surface.
d) Extrusion beyond surfaces adjacent to joint.
e) Inclusions.
f) Crazing of surface greater than 0.1mm in depth.
g) Staining of adjacent surfaces.
h) Blistering of the surface.
i) Puncture of surface.
j) Chalking or color change.
k) Change in 'Shore A' durometer hardness of more than 15% of 7-day value.
l) Displacement.
m) Chemical attack.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by joint sealant manufacturer, based on testing and Site experience.
2. VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
3. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a) Architectural Sealants: 250g/ L.
b) Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250g/ L.
c) Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775g/ L.

17 September 2015
4. Low Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers".
5. Liquid Applied Joint Sealants: In accordance with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
a) Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will
be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according
to ASTM C1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for the Project.
7. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated
contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
8. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range and
indicated within the applicable Work Sections.
B. Silicone Joint Sealants
1. Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 100/ 50, for Use NT.
NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
4. Single-Component, Non-sag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT.
5. Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
6. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade P, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
7. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 50, for Use NT.
8. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade P, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
9. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
10. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
C. Urethane Joint Sealants
1. Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/
50, for Use NT.
2. Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50,
for Use NT.
3. Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
4. Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, for Use T.

17 September 2015
5. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
P, Class 25, for Use T.
6. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for
Use NT.
7. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for
Use NT.
8. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 50, for Use T.
9. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use T.
10. Immersible, Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
11. Immersible, Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
S, Grade P, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
12. Immersible Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
13. Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.
D. Polysulfide Joint Sealants
1. Single-Component, Non-sag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
2. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
3. Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
NS, Class 25, for Use T.
4. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
P, Class 25, for Use T.
5. Immersible, Multicomponent Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and Use I.
E. Latex Joint Sealants
1. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.
F. Solvent-Release-Curing Joint Sealants
1. Acrylic-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C1311.
2. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C1311.
G. Preformed Joint Sealants
1. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured low-
modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing
silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
2. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell

foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160kg/ m³ and impregnated
with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick
form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered
with protective wrapping.
H. Acoustical Joint Sealants

17 September 2015
1. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant in
accordance with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E90.
I. Joint Sealant Backing
1. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on Site experience and laboratory testing.
2. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, provide Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated
within the applicable Work Sections and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
3. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
J. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant
to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and
Site tests.
2. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
3. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
A. Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance
1. General:
a) Comply with the requirements of the Specification with respect to the testing of the structural
silicone application.
b) Provide the Engineer with documentary evidence that the selection of sealant takes into account
any relevant recommendations by the sealant manufacturer as to the use of the sealant.
2. Submit to the Engineer adhesion test data of production samples as tested in accordance with
ASTM C794. These shall establish adhesion performance over the temperatures specified in the
Specification.
a) Where the structural silicone bonds glass to the cladding framework, the weakest element in
the line of stress shall have a minimum strength of 600kPa or 6 times the design strength,
whichever is the greater, in accordance with ETAG 01/ 015 or ETAG 002 documents which
set out the requirements for use of structural silicone. This criterion shall be proven with a
statistical confidence of 99%. For each combination of substrate and design conditions, provide
a report from the sealant manufacturer for the tests performed in the following manner:
1. Assemble and fully cure under production conditions (not laboratory conditions) a
minimum of 12 No. samples. Each sample shall be a minimum of 150mm long. The sample
shall be made of actual substrate material, including but not limited to, glass with actual
coating (low E and/ or fritting) and aluminum sections with finishes. The joint geometry
shall be as accepted by the Engineer.
2. Double-sided tape or other spacer material shall be installed such that it does not add to
the silicone joint strength.
3. Weather seals shall not be installed on the samples.

17 September 2015
4. After full cure the samples shall be totally immersed in tap water at room temperature for
7 days.
5. Samples shall be tested in a tensometer 25 hours after removal from the water immersion
tank.
6. Each sample shall be subjected to a tensile load test. The crosshead speed shall be
50mm/ min. Continue testing until failure occurs or until 830kPa or 6 times the design
load, whichever is the greater, is applied to the samples. Report the maximum stress and
mode of failure including percentage area of cohesive failure and any area of voids in the
sealant for each sample. Adhesive failure area or void cross section area parallel to the
substrate face greater than 20% is unacceptable.
7. A statistical analysis of results shall indicate a design stress of not less than 600kPa or
6 times the design stress of the sealant, whichever is the greater, with a confidence of
99% over the temperature range as described in the Specification.
8. If the sample set does not meet the requirements of the above criteria, the design of the
failed element shall be revised and subjected to a re-test. This procedure shall continue
until the above requirements have been met.
9. Prepare a report of the above testing. No fabrication shall commence until the results
have been accepted by the Engineer.
10. Retain all test results with regard to the structural silicone glazing for a minimum period
of 15 years from project completion. These shall be made available to the Engineer on
request.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021
to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified
by reference to ASTM C920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel,
and indentation hardness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant
performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants in accordance
with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant,
including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant
adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,
water repellents, water and surface dirt.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination
of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with
joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a) Concrete.
b) Masonry.
c) Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

17 September 2015
d) Exterior insulation and finish systems.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Grind surfaces to remove old joint sealers,
water repellents and other contamination; provide a smooth surface.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous
joint substrates include the following:
a) Metal.
b) Glass.
c) Porcelain enamel.
d) Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
5. Protective Oils: Remove with the sealant manufacturer's joint cleaning solvent or seek advice from
the component supplier.
6. Lacquers and Paints: Check adhesion of coatings to substrate and their compatibility with sealant.
Perform tests for durability and adhesion. Remove unsuitable coatings and apply new system as
necessary to maintain corrosion protection.
7. Plastics: Check procedures with the component manufacturer before using solvents.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or as indicated
by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer in accordance with joint
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing
joint seal.
D. Mixing: Mix sealants strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and use materials
within the time limits stipulated by the manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: In accordance with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required
to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed.
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

17 September 2015
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile in accordance with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated in accordance with Figure 8B in ASTM C1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated in accordance with
Figure 8C in ASTM C1193.
a) Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements.
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed
silicone sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less
than 10mm. Hold edge of sealant bead 6mm inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and
substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant
and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap
vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and
intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance
with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction
at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.
A. Site-Adhesion Testing: Site test joint sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows.
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a) Perform 10 No. tests for the first 300m of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b) Perform 1 No. test for each 300m of joint length thereafter or 1 No. test each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab,
in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.
a) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut
along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a) Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

17 September 2015
b) Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c) Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates
or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint
substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's Site-
adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a Site-adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts
original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Site-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements shall be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that
fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or in accordance with other requirements. Retest failed
applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved in writing by the manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in
which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration
or damage at time of Taking-Over. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
B. Coatings: Do not permit paint or other coatings to be applied near joint surfaces until sealants are nominally
cured.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Structural Silicone Maintenance
1. Document an on-going inspection/ maintenance program for the structural silicone and employ
accepted testing authorities to carry out these inspections which shall include the following:
a) Cleaning: Specify acceptable detergents and methods to be used.
b) Inspection: Provide forms to be filled out periodically, each pre-dated with the inspection date
and an adequate quantity for the design life of the building. The form shall state the full procedure
for the inspection.
c) Sample Cut-out: Provide forms for periodic cut-out of structural seals and weather seals to
check Shore hardness and tensile properties of the seal.
d) Each of the procedures shall clearly state pass/ fail criteria and indicate action required when
a failure is obtained as a result. The testing authority shall be required to produce a report
based on its findings and recommendations for any remedial work to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 079513 -- EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: 2
1.6 COORDINATION 3
1.9 WARRANTY 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 7
2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 9
3.1 EXAMINATION 9
3.2 PREPARATION 9
3.3 INSTALLATION 9
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 9
3.6 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 079513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
17 September 2015
SECTION 079513 -- EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

C. Section Includes
1. Ceiling expansion joint cover.
2. Floor expansion joint cover.
3. Wall expansion cover.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
a) Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
b) Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.

Tender Issue 079513 / 1 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
17 September 2015
1. 150mm length of each type of item in specified finish and color.
2. All fastenings.
1. Shop Drawings.
a) Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
b) Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 150mm length of each type of item in specified finish and color.
2. All fastenings.
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements, etc.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:
Submittals and submit the following:
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
A. Qualification Data
1. Manufacturer with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. An area determined by the Engineer of each element of the work fully installed, completed and
A. Site Measurements: Verify actual locations of floors, walls and other construction contiguous with
expansion joints by site measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible
with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Site in time for installation.

17 September 2015
affecting finishes, imparting residue, affecting adhesion of sealants, or causing deleterious effects in the
work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty for the work of this Section undertaking to repair or replace defective work for a period
of 12 years. Include in the warranty confirmation that the installation has been inspected and completed
in accordance with the warranty requirements. Include for performing repairs at the convenience of the
Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type EXJ-101 Expansion Joint-Ceiling
1. Description: Ceiling expansion joint cover comprising of metal setting beads and PVC rubber flexible
joint, including all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
3. Product Reference: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4. Joint Width: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
6. Movement Capacity: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
7. Exposed Metal Cover: Aluminum plate.
8. Finish: Mill Finish.
9. Attachment Method: As per the recommendation of the manufacturer.
10. Fire Resistant Rating: Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
11. Accessories: As per manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
B. Type EXJ-102 Expansion Joint-Floor
1. Description: Interior floor metal expansion joint cover including all necessary fastenings and
7. Load Capacity: Heavy duty to withstand AASHTO HS-20

17 September 2015
10. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
12. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Type EXJ-103 Expansion Joint-Wall
1. Description: Interior wall metal expansion joint cover including all necessary fastenings and
9. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
shims, which shall be agreed with the Engineer.
3. The work shall resist all specified static and dynamic loads likely to be encountered without causing
permanent deformation of components or the failure of members or seals and shall transmit such
loads safely to the points of support.
b) The effects of internal/ external wind and pressure loadings.
c) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements, including

17 September 2015
B. Specific Live Loads
in performance:
b) A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants and vehicles, in accordance
with the International Building Code (IBC) and Structural Engineer's requirements.
c) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the work, without
C. Deflections
1. The maximum allowable deflection of any element of the work, when carrying full design loads,
shall not exceed 15mm or 1/ 175 of their clear span in a direction normal to the plane of that element,
whichever is the lesser value.
2. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of themselves
the work, their support structure or internal finishes.
D. Structural Integrity
1. The work indicated on the Shop Drawings and described in the Specification shall be in accordance
with the conditions specified in the IBC, unless stated otherwise.
E. Specific Fire Performance Requirements
1. Refer to the Fire Strategy Report and the NFPA.
F. Seismic Performance
1. Expansion control systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according
to ASCE/ SEI 7.
a) Component Importance Factor is 1.5/ 1.0.
G. Demountability
maintenance and/ or replacement of solid units in the event of breakage or damage.
work.
H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior expansion joint covers by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 67°C, ambient; 100°C, material surfaces.

17 September 2015
I. Durability
without failure when maintained in accordance with an agreed maintenance program. Failure shall
be defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following defects arising from deficiencies in
design, material selection or workmanship.
b) Atmospheric corrosion, stress corrosion, bi-metallic/ electro-chemical corrosion or other

c) Degradation of protective coatings causing galvanised items to suffer corrosion during their
d) Component parts that may suffer damage under design safety loading shall permit easy
J. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist
all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2. Aluminum
a) Aluminum panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same direction.
b) Aluminum extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not
be acceptable.
c) Aluminum sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling,
warp, abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
B. Non-Ferrous Metals in accordance with the following:
1. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/ C1107M, factory-packaged, non-metallic

aggregate grout, non-corrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application
and a 30-minute working time.
D. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other
accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.
E. Fasteners in accordance with the following:
1. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 (for internal use) or Type 316 (for external
use) stainless steel fasteners and zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or
ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
a) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
b) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

17 September 2015
c) Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
2. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex
nuts, ASTM A563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
3. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325M, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM
A563M, Class 8S3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
4. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F738M;
with hex nuts, ASTM F836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group A1/ Group A4.
5. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where
indicated, flat washers.
a) Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened
is indicated to be galvanized.
6. Eyebolts: ASTM A489.
7. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
8. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
9. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
10. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
11. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
12. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;
galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/ A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/ A27M cast steel.
Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329.
13. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
a) Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated in accordance with ASTM
B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
b) Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A1/ Group
A4 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
14. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all
zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633, Class Fe/ Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General
1. Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
2. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
3. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding
surface.
4. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of accepted

17 September 2015
B. Aluminum Finishes
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
2. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces where expansion joint cover assemblies shall be installed for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion joint cover
assemblies. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide
for secure attachment of expansion joint covers.
C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary to secure
joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion
shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide
fasteners of metal, type and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment
of joint cover assemblies.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing expansion joint cover assemblies unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces.
C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.
A. Site Tests and Inspections: Perform the specified tests and inspections using a suitably experienced
quality manager.
B. Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the manufacturer to do Site
visits for one full day at the start of the installation, and once a week as the work progresses. Technical
C. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning, General
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the manufacturer, and without scratching
surfaces. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials that will damage adjacent work.

17 September 2015
B. Adjusting, General
1. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Repair
or replace damaged or defective items to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Touchup Painting: Immediately after installation, clean bolted connections, and abraded areas.
Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting in accordance
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a) Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05mm dry film thickness.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective
covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy
construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over
expansion joint cover assemblies. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Taking-Over of the Work.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 081100 -- METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.6 COORDINATION 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 9
2.5 FABRICATION 11
PART 3 EXECUTION 15
3.1 EXAMINATION 15
3.2 PREPARATION 15
3.3 INSTALLATION 15
3.6 PROTECTION 20

Tender Issue 081100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
17 September 2015
SECTION 081100 -- METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Exterior metal steel doors and frames.
2. Stainless steel doors and frames.
3. Aluminum frames.
4. Interior door louvers.
8. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 081100 / 1 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
17 September 2015
2. Product data on proposed materials. Include construction details, material descriptions, core
descriptions, fire-resistance rating and finishes.
5. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/ assemblies.
C. Post Contract Submittals
1. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
a) Elevations of each door design.
b) Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
c) Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
d) Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
e) Details of each different wall opening condition.
f) Details of anchorages, joints, Site splices and connections.
g) Details of accessories.
h) Details of moldings, removable stops and glazing.
i) Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal and control systems.
2. Product data on materials and components for use. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating and finishes.
3. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Design Drawings. Coordinate
with door hardware schedule.
the assembly.
D. Post Contract Samples: For the following items, provide samples to demonstrate compliance with
requirements for quality of materials and construction.
1. Doors, minimum 300mm x 300mm sample for each door type.
a) Show vertical-edge, top and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other
applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.
2. Door Frame: 300mm sample of each frame type.

17 September 2015
a) Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section
showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable.
5. Glazing Materials: Minimum 300mm x 300mm sample for each glazing type. Refer to Section 088000
Glazing.
6. Finishes: Provide factory-applied color finishes color chart for the Engineer's Initial Selection. Provide
finish sample of final selection not less than 75mm x 125mm for the Engineer's acceptance.
1. Warranties.
1. A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work, and is certified to a quality system
acceptable to the Engineer. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically
treated material.
B. Installer Qualifications (Sliding Metal Fire Doors): An entity that employs installers and supervisors who
are trained and approved by the manufacturer.
C. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency accredited as an acoustical laboratory

according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program of NIST.
D. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
E. Mock-ups
F. Prototypes
1. All specified door types including interface with surrounding walling including all specified seals and
associated features and hardware.
G. Quality Benchmark Installation
H. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Provide certification to demonstrate that doors and frames have been previously tested to meet the
2. Test certificates shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the performance
and service life requirements of the doors and frames.
3. If test certificates are not made available, include for the testing of the door assemblies and/ or
doorsets.

17 September 2015
4. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
A. Delivery
are similar to those in the finished building.
2. Protect items from wetting, temperature and humidity changes or damage during transportation.
3. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and on-
Site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
4. Do not install projecting hardware prior to shipment, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor.
a) Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
6. Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with 2 No. removable spreader bars across bottom of
frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
from damage.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts and items with
integral anchors. Deliver such items to Site in time for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. For the complete list of Metal Doors and Frames as described below, Refer to the Door Schedule.
B. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or accepted
equivalent:
1. Republic Builders products.
2. Curries/ Essex.
3. Ceco Door.
4. Metalco.
C. Metal Doors, General: Provide doors not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces,
without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
D. Exterior Hollow Metal Door
1. Description: Exterior hollow steel door with hollow steel frame.
2. Door Material: Metal sheet.
3. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.

17 September 2015
a) Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
4. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 1.0mm thick, end closures or channels of
same material as face sheets.
7. Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
8. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, with manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish.
Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
a) Door Finish Color and Gloss: Refer to the Finishes Schedule.
9. Door Thickness: Refer to Door Schedule.
10. Door Frame: Hollow metal.
a) Width: Refer to the Design Drawings.
b) Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer.
c) Color and Gloss: Refer to the Finishes Schedule.
d) Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 1.0mm thick with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 50mm wide by
250mm long; or wire anchors not less than 4.5mm thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 1.0mm
thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 9.5mm

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
e) Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, as follows:
1. For Hollow Metal Frames: Not less than 1.0mm thick.
2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with 2 No. holes to receive fasteners.
3. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 50mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
11. Hollow Metal Door and Frame Accessories:
a) Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
b) Ceiling Struts: Minimum 6.4mm thick by 25.4mm wide steel.
c) Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.4mm thick.
E. Interior Stainless Steel Door
1. Description: Interior stainless steel door with stainless steel frame.
2. Door Material: Stainless steel sheet.
3. Core Construction: Fire-rated core; Refer to Fire Strategy Report for fire rating requirements.

17 September 2015
4. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
6. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, metallic-coated steel. Either spot
welded to both face sheets or securely fastened using adhesive.
7. Face sheets fabricated from stainless steel sheet.
8. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.
9. Door Thickness: Refer to Door Schedule.
10. Door Frame: Stainless Steel.
a) Width: Refer to the Design Drawings.
b) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.
c) Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 1.2mm
thick stainless steel.
d) Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, as follows:
1. For Stainless steel Frames: Not less than 1.9mm thick.
2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
3. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 50mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
F. Aluminum Door Frame
1. Description: Extruded aluminum, not less than 1.6mm thick.
2. Frame Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
3. Frame Finish: Refer to the Finishes Schedule.
4. Width: Refer to the Design Drawings.
5. For door frames, provide extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes and closers.
a) For 90-minute Fire-Protection Rating: Provide aluminum frame assemblies with a cold-formed,
primed, interior steel liner.
6. Accessories:
a) Provide fasteners that are aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal
fasteners compatible with frames, stops, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors and other
items being fastened.
b) Provide manufacturer's standard door silencers, either continuous mohair, wool pile or vinyl
seals.
G. Metal Door Louvers
1. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0.5mm thick,
cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.8mm thick steel frame.
a) Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.
b) Lightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with baffles to prevent light from passing
from one side to the other, any angle.

17 September 2015
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Source Limitations
1. Obtain metal steel work from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2. Alternatively, the frames may be manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door
leaf manufacturer.
3. Obtain sound-control door assemblies, including doors, frames, sound-control seals, hinges (when
integral for sound control), thresholds, and other items essential for sound control, from single source
from single manufacturer.
B. Door hardware shall be as in the Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Door Hardware of the
Specification. The doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the
certification of the work.
1. Refer to the MEP Specification requirements with regard to door operations, security and additional
devices.
2. All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
C. The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the work as specified incorporates all
necessary seals, sealants, fasteners, accessories and ancillary items are supplied as required in
accordance with and to achieve the requirements of the Specification.
D. Unless stated otherwise all door assemblies referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in
which door hardware apertures, seals, slots and vision panels are factory formed prior to prefinishing.
E. Unless stated otherwise, all door assemblies shall be factory prefinished.
F. The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, the Design Drawings and the
Acoustic Report to convey the following, specific information.
1. Configuration, including but not limited to:
a) Single leaf.
b) Double leaf (equal pair).
c) Leaf and half (unequal pair).
d) Single swing.
e) Double swing.
f) Door reference.
g) Dimensions.
h) Fire performance rating.
i) Acoustic performance rating (where a value is known).
j) Facing type, general.
k) Vision panels.
G. Performance, as indicated on the associated Door Schedule, of the doorset/ assembly type shall vary
dependent on location. The Contractor shall use the applicable manufacturer's details of the required
visual range to achieve the stated performance.
H. UL labels shall be permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size limitations
established by NFPA and UL for labeling.

17 September 2015
I. Ensure that all doorsets are clearly marked on the hinge edge, with their door number and performance,
enabling them to be reconciled with their intended location.
J. Sound Rating: Provide sound-control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-
retardant units by an acoustical testing agency.
A. Strength of Doors and Frames
1. Ensure that the work, including door hardware, meets, unless otherwise stated, the 'heavy duty'
category as defined within ANSI/ SDI A250.8.
B. Metal Steel Finishes
1. Shop Primer Finish: In accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
2. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: In accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance
criteria.
C. Aluminum Finish Requirements
1. In accordance with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers' (NAAMM) "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Standard Metal Doors
1. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with not less than the
required thermal resistance value (R-value) when tested according to ASTM C1363.
2. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with Steel Door Institute (SDI) 111C.
E. Hygrothermal Performance
1. All materials, core materials, edgings, facing materials and adhesives and associated work shall
be selected to satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in
F. Acoustics
1. Refer to the Acoustic Report and the Door Schedule for specific acoustic values.
2. STC Rating shall be provided as indicated and as determined by ASTM E413 when tested in an
operable condition according to ASTM E90.
3. Sound-rated doors shall be provided with frames as specified. The frames shall be sealed into the
partition opening, such that there is no noise leakage around the frame.
5. Sound-rated doors shall be supplied complete with perimeter (including threshold) seals and door
hardware to ensure that the seals operate effectively. No light shall be visible on either side of the
doorset when viewed in darkness with a light source on the other side.
6. Doors shall close quietly without 'slamming noise'.
G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies

17 September 2015
1. Provide assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA
252 and UL 10C.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 250°C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test
exposure.
3. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: In accordance with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
4. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
H. Disabled Requirements: Opening Pressures: Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to
open fire-rated or non-fire-rated doors on disabled access routes are in accordance with the requirements
of the IBC.
I. Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or unacceptable
changes in appearance as follows.
1. Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
anticipated abuse, including:
a) Breakage of components and assemblies.
b) Loss of rigidity or loosening up of joints.
c) Cracking or splitting of wood and veneer.
d) Indentation.
e) Improper functioning of hardware resulting in impaired door operation.
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door in accordance with the fire, smoke
and sound requirements.
3. Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints,
excessive surface indentations, color changes or yellowing of coatings.
J. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
K. Hardware: Provide hardware in accordance with Section 087100 Door Hardware.
2.4 MATERIALS
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1011/ A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum ZF120 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
E. Stainless Steel Door
1. Stainless Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304
or 316 as indicated.
2. Steel Sheet, for reinforcement and anchors: In accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M or ASTM
A1011/ A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

17 September 2015
3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet, for reinforcement and anchors: In accordance with ASTM A653/
A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum Z180 or ZF180 metallic coating.
F. Frame Materials
1. Frame Anchors: Stainless steel sheet. Same type as door face.
2. Frame Anchors: Steel sheet or Metallic-coated steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B.
3. Inserts, Bolts and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless steel components in accordance with ASTM F738M
and ASTM F836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4 for bolts and nuts.
4. Inserts, Bolts and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153/ A
153M or ASTM F2329.
G. Aluminum, Clear Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010mm or
thicker.
H. Aluminum, Color Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/ A34, Class II, 0.010mm
or thicker.
I. Aluminum, Powder Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 0.025mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating,
and applying and baking finish.
J. Door and Frame Stops and Moldings
1. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.8mm thick, fabricated from same material as door
face sheet in which they are installed.
2. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 16mm high unless
3. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.8mm thick, fabricated from same material as
frames in which they are installed.
4. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 152mm above finish
floor with a 45°/ 90° angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening
in extension of frame with welded steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.
K. Frame Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A879/ A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, provide either steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A1008/
A1008M or ASTM A1011/ A1011M, or after fabrication, hot-dip galvanized units according to ASTM
A153/ A153M, Class B.
L. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: For items to be built into exterior walls, provide hot-dip galvanized units
according to ASTM A153/ A153M.
M. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow
metal frames of type indicated. The Contractor shall confirm with the Structural Engineer, these type of
fasteners are permitted for Project implementation.
N. Mineral Fiber Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 96 to 192kg/ m³ density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for
combustion characteristics.
O. For Grouted Frames: Provide grout in accordance with ASTM C476, with a slump of not more than
102mm as measured according to ASTM C143/ C143M. Provide corrosion-resistant coating, for fire-
rated frames verify with manufacturer coating does not diminish intended fire rating.
1. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Provide cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4mm dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.

17 September 2015
P. Paint: Provide as indicated in the Finishes Schedule and the Design Drawings. For factory-finished items,
refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal. For Site-applied finish coat color selection,
refer to Section 099100 Painting.
Q. VOC Content: Adhesive and sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
R. Hollow Metal Panels
1. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction and finish as specified for adjoining
hollow metal work.
S. Sound-Control Hardware
1. Provide manufacturer's standard sound-control system, including head and jamb seals, door
bottoms, cam-lift hinges, and thresholds, as required by testing to achieve STC rating indicated.
a) Compression Seals: 1-piece units; consisting of closed-cell sponge neoprene seal held in place
by metal retainer; with retainer cover of same material as door frame; attached to door frame
with concealed screws.
b) Magnetic Seals: 1-piece units; consisting of closed-cell sponge neoprene seal and resiliently
mounted magnet held in place by metal retainer; with retainer cover of same material as door
frame; attached to door frame with concealed screws.
c) Automatic Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket, held in place by metal housing, that
automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with
screws.
1. Mounting: Provide either mortised or semi-mortised into bottom of door or surface mounted
on face of door as required by testing to achieve STC rating indicated.
d) Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket held in place by metal housing; mortised into bottom
edge of door.
e) Cam-Lift Hinges: Full-mortise template type that raises door 13mm when door is fully open;
with hardened pin; fabricated from stainless steel.
f) Thresholds: Flat, smooth, unfluted type as recommended by manufacturer; fabricated from

aluminum, stainless steel or solid wood matching wood door faces.
2. In accordance with the requirements in Section 087100 Door Hardware.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Site Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by Site measurements before fabrication.
B. Standards: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/ SDI A250.8.
1. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in Steel Door Institute (SDI) 117.
C. General
1. Fabricate metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp or buckle.
2. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal.
3. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
5. To ensure proper assembly at Site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
6. Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with the Design and the
Specification.

17 September 2015
D. Steel Doors
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Vision Panels: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on 1 leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for
fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 19mm beyond edge of door on which
astragal is mounted.
4. Exterior and Interior Doors: Provide doors in accordance with requirements indicated below by
complying with ANSI/ SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/ SDI A250.4 for physical performance
level:
a) Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty).
b) Model 1 Full Flush.
E. Standard Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. General: Comply with ANSI/ SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
a) Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
b) Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
indicated.
c) Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
d) Fabricate frames as either face welded or full profile welded to the acceptance of the Engineer
e) Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.
f) Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 1.3mm thick steel sheet.
g) Frames for Wood Doors: 1.3mm thick steel sheet.
h) Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress and make smooth, flush and
invisible.
F. Frames, General Conditions
1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless
2. Factory prepare all interior frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts,
reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and
templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 Door Hardware. Locate hardware as required
by fire-rated label for assembly.
3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least 4 No. spot welds per
anchor.
4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

17 September 2015
a) Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 457mm from top and bottom of frame. Space
anchors not more than 813mm o.c. and as follows:
1. 2 No. anchors per jamb up to 1524mm high.
2. 3 No. anchors per jamb from 1524mm to 2286mm high.
4. 4 No. anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 610mm or fraction
thereof above 3048mm high.
b) Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 457mm from top and bottom of frame. Space
anchors not more than 813mm o.c. and as follows:
1. 3 No. anchors per jamb up to 1524mm high.
4. 5 No. anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 610mm or fraction
thereof above 2438mm high.
5. 2 No. anchors per head for frames above 1066mm wide and mounted in metal-stud
partitions.
c) Compression Type: Not less than 2 No. anchors in each jamb.
d) Post-Installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 152mm from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 660mm o.c.
5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows.
Keep holes clear during construction.
a) Single Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive 3 No. door silencers.
b) Double Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive 2 No. door silencers.
G. Aluminum Frames
1. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at
butted or mitered connections.
2. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
H. Stainless Steel Door Fabrication: Stainless steel doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal.
1. Seamed Edge Construction: Both vertical door edges joined by visible, continuous interlocking seam
(lock seam) full height of door.
2. Seamless Edge Construction: Door face sheets joined at vertical edges by continuous weld
extending full height of door; with edges ground and polished, providing smooth, flush surfaces with
no visible seams.
3. Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration. Provide weep-hole
openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
4. Stops and Moldings: Factory cut openings in doors. Provide stops and moldings around vision
panels, on secure side of door provide fixed stops and moldings. Form corners of stops and moldings
with butted or mitered hairline joints.
5. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware
Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
6. Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in ANSI/ NAAMM-HMMA 866.

17 September 2015
I. Stainless Steel Frame Fabrication: Fabricate stainless steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp
or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of
metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at
Site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Where
frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates
or angles at each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames.
2. Mullions/ Rails/ and/ Transom Bars: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or
joints. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding according to joint designs in
HMMA 820.
3. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises and mounting holes in frames
to be grouted.
4. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in ANSI/ NAAMM-HMMA 866.
J. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled
steel sheet.
K. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare metal steel work to receive templated mortised hardware; include
cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and
templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 Door Hardware.
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. For hardware reinforcement, fabricate in accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates
from same material as door face sheets.
4. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/ SDI A250.6 and ANSI/ DHI A115 Series specifications
for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
5. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with MEP Specification,
Division 26 Work Sections.
L. Adhesive Bonding
1. Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or

chemically.
2. Use adhesives to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3. Form bond under pressure.
M. Metal Steel Finishes
1. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
a) Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer in

accordance with ANSI/ SDI 250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer
for substrate; compatible with substrate and Site-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
2. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard in accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.3 for
performance and acceptance criteria.
N. Stainless Steel Door and Frame Finishes
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
a) Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

17 September 2015
b) When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
c) Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
d) Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
e) Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8.
A. Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all doors installed requiring sound ratings
meet the performance criteria as specified, and that values achieved in laboratory conditions are exceeded
by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site. Refer to Acoustic Report.
B. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to Engineer
for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
C. Verify that headers are level with finished floor to within ±1.6mm tolerance over the length of opening.
D. Door Frames: Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size
indicated.
E. Verification of Conditions: Verify dimensions and levels, and surfaces to receive the work of this Work
Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling,
and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
C. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded all types of metal frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances, as required by ANSI/ NAAMM-HMMA 861.
1. Squareness: ±1.6mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90°from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: ±1.6mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: ±1.6mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to
plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: ±1.6mm, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
E. Installation of fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members
of a nationally recognized quality assurance scheme, and ideally the same scheme to which the door
manufacturer subscribes.
3.3 INSTALLATION

17 September 2015
A. General: Install all metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place using
concealed fasteners where possible; comply with the Design Drawings and the manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. The work shall be securely fixed and sealed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
2. Recess exposed fastenings and conceal with wood pellets; touch up pellets with finish to match the
adjacent surface.
3. Cutting, trimming or machining of finished surfaces is not permitted.
B. Environmental Conditions: Do not commence installation until the building is enclosed, wet work is
complete and dry, and the HVAC system operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
are at occupancy levels.
C. Metal Frames: Install metal frames of size and profile indicated. In accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.11
for hollow metal steel frames. In accordance with ANSI/ NAAMM-HMMA 866 for stainless steel frames.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
a) At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames in accordance with NFPA 80.
b) Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, Site splice
at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c) Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d) Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e) Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set
and secured.
f) Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary in accordance with installation tolerances.
g) Bed frames on continuous beads of intumescent sealant to prevent air leakage.
h) For stainless steel frames, apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of grout-filled frames.
i) For sound-control frames, apply corrosion-resistant coatings coating to backs of frames to be

filled with mortar, grout and plaster.
j) Set thresholds in full bed of sealant in accordance with Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
k) Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure
with post-installed expansion anchors.
a) Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion
anchors if so indicated and approved on the Shop Drawings.
3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion
anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush and invisible on exposed faces.
4. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors
through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush and
invisible on exposed faces.
5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports
or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at
each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide
adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

17 September 2015
6. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take precautions,
including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust all types of metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
plumb to the following tolerances:
a) Squareness: ±1.6mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90° from jamb perpendicular to frame
head.
b) Alignment: ±1.6mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c) Twist: ±1.6mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular
to plane of wall.
d) Plumbness: ±1.6mm, measured at jambs at floor.
D. Metal Doors, General: Fit all types of metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors/ Stainless Steel Doors:
a) Jambs and Head: 3mm ±1.6mm.
b) Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 3mm ±1.6mm.
c) Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 9.5mm.
d) Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No threshold): Maximum 19mm.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
4. Non-Fire-Rated Sound-Control Doors: Fit doors accurately in frames with the following clearances:
a) Jambs: 3mm.
b) Head with Butt Hinges: 3mm.
c) Head with Cam-Lift Hinges: As required by manufacturer, but not more than 9.5mm.
d) Sill: Manufacturer's standard.
e) Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 3mm.
5. Door Hardware: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish
supplied by the door hardware manufacturer. Prevent damage to door hardware and adjacent
surfaces. At Taking-Over check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
6. Post fitting of signage shall be undertaken by methods that do not compromise the performance
and integrity of the doorsets.
E. Aluminum Frame Installation
1. Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned and securely anchored to substrates.
a) At fire-protection-rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to NFPA 80 and

NFPA 105.
3. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 1830mm long must be
1 piece.

17 September 2015
a) If frames are supported by suspended ceiling, fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum
1220mm centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by the frame
manufacturer.
b) Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.
c) Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members.
d) Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
F. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
1. Sealant Joints: Sealants for door frames shall be silicone where required, as detailed on the Design
Drawings.
G. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2. For door hardware fastening refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
H. All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using other
I. Installation Tolerances
1. Gaps to head and jambs of doors to frames shall be 3mm all round.
2. Thresholds shall have a 7mm gap where located above a carpeted floor.
4. Cut-outs for interfacing work shall be to the dimensions indicated on the Shop Drawings ±1mm.
grid is ±2mm.
Dimension.
as a whole shall be stated and indicated on the Shop Drawings.
the Engineer.

17 September 2015
A. Acoustic Testing: Provide a test report demonstrating that doors installed within sound rated partitions
meet the performance criteria specified.
B. Test Results and Certificates
carried out in accordance with the relevant UL, NFPA, ANSI or ASTM Standards.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections after radiology
equipment has been installed and placed in operating condition.
1. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection reports indicate
does not comply with specified requirements.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris and unused materials from the Site, and dispose of safely.
2. Clean the work of dirt and splashes.
3. Remove grout and other bonding material from all types of metal work immediately after installation.
4. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Stainless Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless steel
and polish to match undamaged finish.
7. Aluminum Frames:
a) Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods
recommended by frame manufacturer and according to American Architectural Manufacturers
Association's AAMA 609 & 610.
b) Touchup marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 1220mm. Remove
and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
8. Clean grout off sound-control door frames immediately after installation.
B. Adjusting
1. Adjust the installation to ensure correct alignment of components and smooth unbinding operation
of doors and door hardware.
2. Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Final Adjustments

17 September 2015
1. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection, including seals,
door bottoms and other sound-control hardware items.
2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3. Remove and replace defective work, including any metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
4. Adjust gaskets, gasket retainers and retainer covers to provide contact required to achieve STC
rating.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. General
1. Ensure that door leaves and associated panels arrive on Site with adequate surface protection.
2. Material used for surface protection shall be of low flammability.
3. Protect the work from damage during construction.
4. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for inspection; remove at Taking-Over.
B. Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or damage from
other activities or conditions on Site.
C. Protective Tapes and Films: When adhesive/ protective tapes/ films are proposed to protect finished
products, tapes/ films of a low tack nature shall be used. Care shall be taken when removing adhesive/
protective tapes/ films. No sharp instruments or abrasive materials shall be used to remove the tape/
film. No solvents or cleaning solutions shall be used to remove residues, without the prior permission of
the Engineer. Where adhesive/ protective tapes/ films are used, then the color shall be white or lighter
in tone than the finish it is protecting.
D. Protection of Components after Installation: Ensure that all exposed components have protective
coverings during storage and after installation to protect factory applied finishes. Exposed finishes shall
also be protected during on-Site operations.
E. Protection shall be provided until Taking-Over to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 081416 -- FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.4 MATERIALS 10
2.5 FABRICATION 11
2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES 14
2.7 FINISHING 15
PART 3 EXECUTION 16
3.1 EXAMINATION 16
3.2 PREPARATION 16
3.3 INSTALLATION 16
3.5 PROTECTION 18

Tender Issue 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
17 September 2015
SECTION 081416 -- FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

5. Ensure that all interfaces are fully coordinated prior to commencement.
1. Solid-core wood doors.
2. Hollow-core wood doors.
2. Section 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry.
3. Section 064200 Wood Paneling.
8. Door Schedule.
9. Hardware Schedule.
11. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 081416 / 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm samples of factory finishes applied to actual door face materials for each material
and finish.
a) For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of 3 No. samples showing typical
range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
2. Plastic laminate, 150mm square, for each color, texture and pattern selected.
3. Corner sections of doors, 300mm x 300mm, with door faces and edges representing actual materials
to be used.
a) Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
4. Louver blade and frame sections, 150mm long, for each material and finish specified.
5. Frames for light openings, 150mm long, for each material, type and finish required.
8. Samples of glazing materials.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking and other
pertinent data.
a) Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
b) Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
c) Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
d) Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
e) Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
2. Product data on materials and components for use for each type of door indicated. Include details
of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings.
the system.

17 September 2015
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm samples of factory finishes applied to actual door face materials for each material
and finish.
a) For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of 3 No. samples showing typical
range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
2. Plastic laminate, 150mm square, for each color, texture and pattern selected.
3. Corner sections of doors, 300mm x 300mm, with door faces and edges representing actual materials
to be used.
a) Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
4. Louver blade and frame sections, 150mm long, for each material and finish specified.
5. Frames for light openings, 150mm long, for each material, type and finish required.
1. Warranties.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and associated wood paneling from single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with Wood and Door Manufacturers
Association (WDMA) I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
C. Contractor's Qualifications: A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work, and is
certified to a quality system acceptable to the Engineer. Use applicators licensed by the product
manufacturer for chemically treated material.

17 September 2015
E. Mock-ups
F. Prototypes
1. All door types including interface with surrounding walling including all specified seals and associated
features and ironmongery.
H. Provide independently certified evidence that all specified variants of components comply with specified
I. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Provide certification to demonstrate that doors have been previously tested to meet the requirements
of the Specification.
and service life requirements of the wood doors.
A. Delivery
1. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Deliver flush wood doors palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Site
storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor.
a) Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
b) Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
6. Deliver welded frames with 2 No. removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
7. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
from damage.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient
temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

17 September 2015
B. All wood shall be subjected to controlled drying to ensure that the moisture content, if not otherwise
specified, is suitable for the situation of the finished joinery. When fastened it shall remain stable and
free from expansion, contraction or other movements detracting from the required performance or
appearance.
C. During delivery, storage, fastening and thereafter to Taking-Over maintain conditions of temperature and
humidity to suit the specified moisture content(s) of wood components. When instructed by the Engineer,
test components with accepted electrical moisture meter used in accordance with the manufacturer's
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. For the complete list of all the Wooden doors as described below, Refer to the Door Schedule.
B. Manufacturer: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or accepted
equivalent.
1. Khansaheb.
2. ETA.
3. Ajman Korea.
C. General: Provide applicable hardware products as installation templates for use to enable shop/ factory
machining and fitting, such as but not limited to lock cases, strikes, hinges and closers, to the door and
frame manufacturers for all door types and frames.
D. Exterior Solid-Core Doors
1. Description: Veneered-faced doors for transparent finish.
2. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces/ Custom (Grade A faces).
3. Species: Refer to Door Schedule.
4. Cut: Refer to Door Schedule.
5. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book/ Slip match.
6. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
7. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces.
9. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
10. Construction: 5 or 7 No. plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering.
11. Adhesives: Type I in accordance with WDMA TM-6.
12. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
13. Finish: Refer to the Design Drawings and the Door Schedule for the transparent finish selection.
a) Factory Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium/ Custom.
2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.

17 September 2015
4. Sheen: Satin/ Semi-gloss.
E. Interior Solid-Core Doors
8. Room Match for Premium Grade: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.
Corridor-door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 6m or more.
9. Transom (Overpanel) Match: Continuous match.
10. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as adjacent
wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with
requirements in Section 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry and Section 064200 Wood Paneling.
12. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
13. Construction: 5 or 7 No. plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering.
14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
15. Finish: Refer to the Design Drawings and the Door Schedule for the transparent finish selection.
F. Interior Hollow-Core Doors

17 September 2015
9. Construction: 7 No. plies.
10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
11. Finish: Refer to the Door Schedule.
4. Effect: Open-grain finish/ Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat
to partially fill the wood pores.
G. Wood Door Frames
1. General: Provide wood door frames in profiles and widths indicated, refer to the Door Schedule and
2. Interior Wood Frames and Jambs:
a) Transparent Finish.
b) Grade: Premium/ Custom.
c) Wood Species and Cut: Refer to Door Schedule.
d) For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
e) Fire-Rated Type: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant medium-

density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and rated and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based
on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
3. Interior Wood Frames and Jambs:
a) Opaque Finish.
b) Grade: Refer to Door Schedule.
c) Wood Species: Refer to Door Schedule.
4. Finish: Refer to Finishes Schedule for the opaque finish selection.
a) Factory Opaque Finish:
1. Finish: WDMA OP-4 conversion varnish or OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2. Color: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
3. Sheen: Refer to Door Schedule.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All door leaves and door frames shall be by the same manufacturer. Alternatively, the frames may be
manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door leaf manufacturer.

17 September 2015
B. All doorsets shall be pre-hung and to be certified to achieve the performance criteria.
C. Door hardware shall be as the Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Door Hardware of the
Specification. The doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the
1. Refer to the MEP Specification with regard to door operations, security and additional devices.
D. All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
E. The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the work as specified incorporates all
necessary seals, sealants, fastenings, accessories and ancillary items are supplied as required in
F. Provide vision panels where indicated on the Door Schedule and the Design Drawings.
G. Unless stated otherwise all door systems referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in which
door hardware apertures, seals, slots and vision panels are factory formed prior to prefinishing.
H. Unless stated otherwise, all door systems shall be factory prefinished.
I. The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, Fire Strategy Report, Design
Drawings and Acoustic Report to convey the following, specific information.
1. Configuration, including, but not limited to:
a) Single leaf.
c) Leaf and half (unequal pair).
d) Single swing.
e) Double swing.
f) Door reference.
g) Dimensions.
h) Fire performance rating.
i) Acoustic performance rating (where a value is known).
j) Facing type, general.
k) Vision panels.
J. Performance, as indicated on the associated Door Schedule, of the doorset/ assembly type shall vary
K. UL labels shall be permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size limitations
L. Ensure that all doorsets are clearly marked on the hinge edge, with their door number and performance,
A. Strength of Doors and Frames
1. Ensure that the work, including door hardware, meets, unless otherwise stated, the 'heavy duty'
category as defined within Window & Door Manufacturers Association Standard WDMA IS-1A,
'Architectural Wood Flush Doors'.

17 September 2015
B. Door Facing Performance
1. Hardboard Faces: In accordance with American Hardboard Association AHA A135.4, Class 1
(tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
2. MDF Faces: In accordance with ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
1. All materials, core materials, lippings, facing materials and adhesives and associated work shall be
selected to satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in
D. Acoustics
1. Refer to the Acoustic Report and the Door Schedule for specific acoustic values.
doorset when viewed in darkness with a light source on the other side.
5. Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-rated doorsets.
6. Doors shall close quietly without 'slamming noise'.
E. Fire-Rated Wooden Doors
1. Provide doors in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency,
for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with NFPA
252 and UL 10C.
a) Ensure doors and frames are fabricated in accordance with NFPA 80.
b) Ensure fire seals and all associated materials are installed in accordance with NFPA 80.
2. Fire-Rated door assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Door Schedule read in
conjunction with Fire Strategy Report.
3. Ensure door assembly installation is in accordance with Dubai Civil Defense requirements.
4. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements
for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
5. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 250°C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test
exposure.
6. Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
7. Provide all cavity barriers as required.
8. Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they will not become
dislodged in the event of a fire.
9. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control assemblies are
required, provide assemblies that meet requirements when tested according to UL 1784 and installed
in compliance with NFPA 105. Provide certification illustrating such compliance.

17 September 2015
F. Accessibility Requirements: For wood door assemblies in an accessible route, comply with ICC/ ANSI
A117.1 and Dubai Civil Defense requirements.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 22.2N.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening force requirements:
a) Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2N applied perpendicular to door.
b) Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2N applied parallel to door at latch.
c) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or unacceptable
d) Indentation.
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door to comply with the fire, smoke and
sound requirements.
3. Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints,
excessive surface indentations, color changes or yellowing of coatings.
H. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Sealants.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI)
and Woodwork Institute's (WI) quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified,
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Refer to Door Schedule.
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
D. Wood Products: In accordance with the following.
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,
except for density.
5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing
no urea formaldehyde.

17 September 2015
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials
1. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-
response characteristics specified.
a) Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking
standard or that are warped, discolored or otherwise defective.
b) Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely

affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.
c) Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance

requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type:
a) Exterior Type, suitable for both exterior and interior applications: Organic-resin-based
formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
b) Interior Type A, suitable for only for interior applications: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
c) Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks
or other causes, marring and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.
d) Upon acceptance from the Engineer, mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood
removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant
certified by testing and inspecting agency.
e) Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
3. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less in accordance
with ASTM E84.
4. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium density fiberboard panels in accordance with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of
panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200
or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
G. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Furring, Blocking, Shims and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than
15% moisture content.
2. Furring, Blocking, Shims and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15% moisture content.
3. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves
for drilled-in-place anchors.
4. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all exposed surfaces and edges true
and free from irregularities and defects, using techniques that will not impair the strength of materials used.

17 September 2015
C. The work elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
D. Door Construction, General
1. Window and Door Manufacturers Association WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
a) Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Particleboard-Core Doors:
a) Particleboard: In accordance with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
b) Provide doors with either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
3. Structural Composite Lumber Core Doors:
a) Structural Composite Lumber: In accordance with WDMA I.S.10.
1. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N.
2. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N.
4. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-
protection rating indicated.
a) Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
b) Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without
formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply
with specified requirements for exposed edges.
c) Pairs: Provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.
1. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors.
2. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).
5. Hollow-Core Doors:
a) Construction: Standard hollow core.
b) Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:
1. 125mm x 460mm lock blocks at both stiles.
2. 125mm top rail blocking.
3. 250mm bottom rail blocking.
4. 64mm midrail blocking.
E. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. In accordance with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
F. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware in accordance with
Door Hardware Institute (DHI)-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory
machining.

17 September 2015
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-
rated doors.
G. Wood Transom and Wood Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges
of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full width, solid lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide
factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.
H. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Vision Panel Openings: Refer to Door Schedule.
a) Bedding: Acoustic glazing compound or proprietary glazing channel dependent upon the
method on which the manufacturer's performance certification is based.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
I. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after fabrication has been completed but
before shop priming factory finishing.
1. Flash top of outswinging exterior doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).
J. Interior Doors
1. Intumescent seals with integral smoke brush seal shall be incorporated into edges of doors/ frames
as indicated on the Design Drawings to comply with third party accredited fire certificate.
a) Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting
behind door edging. Size as recommended by manufacturer to achieve required performance.
b) Intumescent seals shall also be incorporated to back of frame as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
2. Fire impregnation treatment as required to satisfy the fire rating requirements.
K. Wood Frames
1. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
2. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated.
3. Fabricate wood frames carefully machining wood to accurate lengths and profiles; free from twisting
and bowing. After machining, surfaces shall be smooth and free from tearing, woolliness, chip
bruising and other machining defects.
4. Assemble with tight, close fitting joints to produce components free from distortion.
5. Pack any gaps between door frame and wall with mineral wool or similar.
6. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to the Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at Site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
7. All wood frames shall have at least 3 pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the frame of
each door.
L. Fire and Smoke Seals: Fire, smoke and acoustic seals shall be those on which the manufacturer's
performance certification is based, with any visual variance being selected by the Engineer during the
sample submission process.
M. Laminate Sheet: Ensure that the laminate is afforded a period of atmospheric conditioning not less than
48 hours before being applied to the substrate.

17 September 2015
N. Veneers
1. Veneers shall be applied to both faces of the door leaf. Core material and veneers shall be conditioned
before bonding.
2. Apply veneers with edges tight butted, with no gaps or other open defects. Set out veneers so that
veneers are aligned in regular uniform symmetry unless otherwise specified.
3. Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions, glue
spill, staining and other defects. Sand to a fine, smooth finish, free from sanding marks.
O. Fasteners: Types and sizes necessary for secure assembly and installation of the work, suitable for each
application. Fasteners in exterior or wet locations shall be stainless steel or brass. Use fasteners in
treated wood compatible with treatment type. Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
1. Fire-Rated Door Anchors: Anchors shall be located immediately above or below the hinge
reinforcements on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb. All anchors must be
welded to the jambs.
P. Wireways must be allowed for connection to equipment within the framing system, back to the building
power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Works Contractor) and Building Management System
(BMS). Coordinate provisions for electrical services, sensing devices and final connections. Connect all
parts of equipment with insulated wiring as required for operation.
2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Tolerances for Manufacture
1. The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
a) Length/ Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and 3.0mm
above 3000mm of design dimension.
b) Thickness/ Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
B. Tolerances for Component Assembly
1. Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly allowed
for in the Detailed Design of the corresponding sub-elements.
2. Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
c) Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the lesser
of ±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimension.
d) Bow: The center section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of the
element.
e) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than ±1.5mm from a 2000mm
straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
f) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than ±1.5mm from a 2000mm straightedge
placed against it in any direction.
g) Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at either end
of the element.

17 September 2015
2.7 FINISHING
A. General Finishing Preparation
1. Prepare wood surfaces to receive applied finishes in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Remove surface marks, roughness, open grain or contamination. Apply initial
finish coats immediately after preparation.
B. General Staining
1. Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint stains. Apply
stains continuously without overlaps to uniform color across each surface.
C. General Painting and Lacquering
1. Mix and spray apply coatings to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
in a dust free environment. Lightly sand between coats to a uniform flat surface. Apply coatings to
the specified dry film thicknesses, with uniform sheens and textures without runs or other defects.
D. Shop/ Factory Finishing
1. Shop Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
2. Shop Finishing, General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Work
Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning and polishing until after installation.
3. Shop Finishing, General: Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at
fabrication shop as specified in this Work Section. Refer to Section 099100 Painting for finishing
opaque finished architectural woodwork.
4. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent finished
items specified to be Site finished. Refer to Section 099100 Painting for material and application
requirements.
a) Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with 1 No. coat of wood primer specified in Section
099100 Painting. Seal all 4 edges, edges of cutouts and mortises with primer.
b) Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required
pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099100 Painting. Seal all 4 edges,
edges of cutouts and mortises with first coat of finish.
5. Preparation for Shop Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
a) Backpriming: Apply 1 No. coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply 2 No. coats to end-grain surfaces.
6. Factory Finishing General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface
applied, before finishing.
a) Finish faces, all 4 edges, edges of cutouts and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on
bottom edges, edges of cutouts and mortises.
7. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Site finish doors indicated to
receive opaque finish.
by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site.
B. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Prior to commencing installation, examine the structural openings, substrate, adjacent construction
and conditions in which the work will be installed.
2. Verify dimensions of supporting construction, and surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section.
Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
C. Before installation, condition wood doors and wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. On-Site Dimensions
actual Site dimensions and dimensions shown on the Design Drawings.
B. Installation of fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install work plumb, true and without distortion, using concealed fasteners where possible.
Cutting, trimming or machining of finished surfaces is not permitted.
B. The work shall be securely fastened and sealed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
C. Doors and Frames Assembly
1. Set frames centrally in openings. Shim with continuous wooden packing strips to correct alignment.
2. Bed frames on continuous beads of intumescent sealant to prevent air leakage.
4. Ironmongery: Install ironmongery in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
D. Door Hardware
1. For installation, refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
2. Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish supplied by the
door hardware manufacturer.
3. Prevent damage to door hardware and adjacent surfaces.
4. At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

17 September 2015
E. Post fitting of signage shall be undertaken by methods that do not compromise the performance and
integrity of the doorsets.
F. Sealant Joints: Sealants for door frames shall be silicone where required, as detailed on the Design
Drawings.
G. Fastenings
1. Fastening Centers for Door Frames: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fastenings
150mm from each end of jamb, adjacent to each hanging point and at 600mm maximum centers.
H. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with the manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
I. Installation Tolerances
4. Cut-outs for interfacing work shall be to the dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings ±1mm.
grid is ±2mm.
Dimension.
the Engineer.
J. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below;
do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by the manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and
machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 3mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3mm from bottom
of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is
shown or scheduled, provide 6mm from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

17 September 2015
a) In accordance with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 3° at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 3° at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
K. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
L. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at the Site.
M. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with
chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install
woodwork.
N. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing
nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching
final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
O. Touch up finishing work specified in this Work Section after installation of wood doors and wood frames.
Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris and unused materials from the Site, and dispose of safely.
3. Clean wood doors and wood frames.
B. Adjusting
1. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
of doors and hardware.
3. Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
5. Door Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
6. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair
or refinishing.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect the work from damage during construction.
1. Ensure that door leaves and associated panels arrive on Site with adequate surface protection.
Material used for surface protection shall be of low flammability.
B. Protection of Components
1. Do not deliver to Site components, which cannot be put immediately into suitable dry, covered
storage with a dry floor.
2. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage by and to projecting door hardware
and beads.

17 September 2015
C. Protection of Components after Installation
1. Ensure that all exposed components have protective coverings during storage and after installation
to protect factory applied finishes.
2. Exposed finishes shall also be protected during on-Site operations.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 083200 -- GLASS DOORS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.6 ENVIROMENTAL CONDITIONS 4
1.7 WARRANTIES 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.4 MATERIALS 10
2.5 FABRICATION 11
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 13
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES 14
PART 3 EXECUTION 14
3.1 EXAMINATION 14
3.2 PREPARATION 14
3.3 INSTALLATION 14
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 16
3.6 PROTECTION 16

Tender Issue 083200 GLASS DOORS
17 September 2015
SECTION 083200 -- GLASS DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Metal framed swing glass doors.
2. Metal framed sliding glass doors.
3. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Procedures and submit the following:
2. Product data on proposed materials. Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication
methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating
instructions.

Tender Issue 083200 / 1 GLASS DOORS
17 September 2015
5. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/ assemblies.
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,
operational clearances, and the following:
a) Mullion details for fenestration combinations including reinforcement and stiffeners.
b) Joinery details.
c) Expansion provisions.
d) Flashing and drainage details.
e) Weather stripping details.
f) Thermal break details.
g) Glazing details.
h) Accessories.
2. Product data on materials and components for use. Include construction details, material
descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware,
finishes and operating instructions.
the assembly.
5. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer/ manufacturer/ professional engineer/ and testing agency.
6. Product Test Reports/ Certifications.
7. Site quality control reports.
13. Quality Plan.
1. Glazing: 300mm x 300mm sample of each glass type used.

17 September 2015
2. Main Framing Member: 300mm long section with weather stripping glazing bead and factory-applied
color finish.
3. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish.
4. Fire and smoke seals.
5. Acoustic seals.
1. Warranties.
reference numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes,
weather stripping, operable panels, operating hardware and cleaning frequency.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain glass doors from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Fenestration Standard: In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, "Standard/ Specification
for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights", for minimum standards of performance, materials, components,
accessories and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.
C. Glazing Publications: In accordance with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating glass doors that meet or exceed
performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
labels, test reports and calculations.
F. Contractor's Qualifications
1. A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work. Use applicators licensed by the
product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
G. Product Options: Drawings indicate nominal size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of glass doors
and are based on Design.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Engineer, except with the Engineer's
acceptance. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to the Engineer
for review.
a) Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last 4 years by a Qualified
Testing Agency, for each class, grade, and size of sliding aluminum-framed glass door. Test
results based on use of downsized test doors shall not be accepted.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or and service life requirements
of the glass doors and frames.

17 September 2015
doorsets.
I. Certifications
1. Provide certification to demonstrate that glass doors and frames have been previously tested to
doorsets.
J. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
K. Mock-ups: Not required.
L. Prototypes
1. Each glass door type including interface with surrounding walling including all specified seals and
M. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. An area determined by the Engineer of each element of the Work fully installed, completed and to
A. Delivery: Do not deliver materials and fabricated items to Site until conditions of temperature and humidity
B. Protection of Components: Do not deliver to the Site components, which cannot be put immediately into
suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage
by and to projecting door hardware and beads.
C. Storage: Store items on flat bases clear of the ground and protected from rain, direct sunlight, construction
D. Handling: Handle items carefully to avoid distortion or other damage. Protect corners and finished surfaces
from damage.
1.6 ENVIROMENTAL CONDITIONS
system operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity are at occupancy levels.
1.7 WARRANTIES
components of glass doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Failure to meet performance requirements.
b) Structural failures including excessive deflection.
c) Water leakage, condensation or air infiltration.

17 September 2015
d) Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
e) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
f) Deterioration of insulating glass and laminated glass as defined in Section 088000 Glazing.
2. Warranty Period: Provide a warranty jointly with the door and frame manufacturer for the work of
this Work Section.
a) Sliding Door: 5 years from date of Taking-Over.
b) Glazing: 20 years from date of Taking-Over.
c) Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Taking-Over.
3. Include in the warranty confirmation that the installation has been inspected and completed in
accordance with their warranty requirements. Include for performing repairs at the convenience of
the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Internal Swing Glass Doors
1. Description: Metal framed internal swing glass doors as indicated on the Design Drawings and Door
Schedule.
2. Framing: Extruded aluminum profile framing.
a) Finish: Powder coated finish in accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for
Metal.
b) Color: As selected by the Engineer.
3. Glazing: Single glazed clear safety glass panels as indicated on the Design Drawings / Door
Schedule.
4. Provide rubber gasket weather stripping to door head and side frames that shall prevent fingers
being trapped. Equip door bottom frame with an automatic drop seal.
B. External Aluminum Framed Swing Glass Doors (For Curtain Walling)
1. Description: External aluminum framed swing glass doors for glazed curtain walling system as
indicated on the Design Drawings and Door Schedule.
2. Glazed doors within the curtain walling system shall be robust 'heavy-duty' grade doors, with frames
designed to prevent the ingress of water and tested as specified for water penetration and air
permeability.
3. Framing: Prefabricated, unitized aluminum framing fabricated in thermally broken or separated

aluminum extrusions.
Metal.
4. Glass shall be double glazed insulated clear safety glass panel units as indicated on the Design
Drawings/ Door Schedule. Refer also to Section 088000 Glazing.
5. Doors shall be rebated and hung on Type 316 stainless steel hinges and fully weather stripped at
head, jambs and sills with compression seals.
6. The doors shall comprise manually operated, side hung opening outer leaves with concealed
restrictor stays at top and bottom and be installed into the Work in lieu of the fixed light glazing.

17 September 2015
7. Allow for all framing members for the leaf of the doors to comprise 2 No. separate standard aluminum
profiles in accordance with all structural and surface requirements. The aluminum extrusions shall
be assembled to composite framing profiles with a proven continuous thermal break material. The
thermal break system shall minimize the thermal transmittance noise transfer and shall inhibit
condensation on any of the internal surfaces of the framing members.
8. The aluminum extrusions for the framing of the leaf for the doors shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous sealing gaskets, vapor, air seals and gaskets within the glazing
rebates as well as connections for thermal break strips and provision for seals, corner cleats and
clip-in aluminum profiles.
9. All hardware shall be satin stainless steel, to be agreed with the Engineer.
C. External Aluminum Framed Sliding Glass Doors (For Curtain Walling)
1. Description: External aluminum framed sliding glass doors for glazed curtain walling system as
indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Sliding glass doors shall have electromechanical, self-contained, concealed overhead operating
units, with power opening and closing mechanism, checking in both opening and closing cycles.
Equip with safety-release clutch for obstructed closing and manual operation of door in the event
of a power failure.
3. The sliding doors shall be power assisted comprising double glazed, glass units with metal framework
to both door and housing. The overall size of door and housing shall be as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
4. Framing: Prefabricated, unitized aluminum framing fabricated in thermally broken or separated

aluminum extrusions.
Metal.
5. Glass shall be double glazed insulated clear safety glass panel units as indicated on the Design
Drawings/ Door Schedule. Refer also to Section 088000 Glazing.
a) Manifestation shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and/ or required by statue.
6. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-
resistant material compatible with aluminum and designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and
securely lock sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with
other metals. Where exposed, provide nonmagnetic stainless steel.
7. The sliding door gear shall include all necessary fastenings, tracks and bearings.
a) Lock: Install manufacturer's keyed cylinder lock and locking device on each movable panel,
lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the
panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated.
8. Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with adjustable-height roller assemblies, consisting of
self-lubricating, dual tandem manufacturer's standard nylon or steel ball-bearing rollers; with 2 No.
roller assemblies per panel.
9. The system shall be designed in a manner whereby the door is able to operate without constituting
a risk of finger trapping.
10. The door operation equipment shall be appropriate to the loading imposed by the door panel.
11. The system shall provide a smooth running, effortless operation which prevents the door panels
from clashing during travel.
12. Threshold and Sill Cap/ Track: Provide extruded aluminum threshold and track of thickness,
dimensions, and profile indicated; designed in accordance with performance requirements indicated;
with manufacturer's standard finish.

17 September 2015
13. Infrared Scanner Presence Detector: Self-contained scanner detector consisting of an infrared
presence-sensing device to activate door operator. Sensing device shall be adjustable to provide
detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for control mats. Provide metal or
plastic housing with black finish for sensing device.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door leaf manufacturer. All doorsets shall be
pre-hung and to be certified to achieve the performance criteria.
B. Door hardware shall be as per the Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Hardware of the
Specification. Doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the certification
of the Work.
1. Refer to the MEP Specification with regard to door operations, security and additional devices.
C. Where doorsets are described as being automatically operated and/ or linked to the Building Management
System (BMS), the wireways and automation equipment shall be concealed, acceptable to the Engineer.
D. Concealed wireways must be allowed within the structure for connection to equipment within the external
wall and internal wall systems, back to the building power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical
Works Contractor) and BMS. Coordinate provisions for electrical services, devices and final connections.
Connect all parts of equipment with insulated wiring as required for operation.
E. All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
F. The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the Work as specified incorporate all
G. Unless stated otherwise all door systems referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in which
door hardware apertures, seals, slots and vision panels are factory formed prior to prefinishing.
I. The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, Design Drawings and the Acoustic
Report to convey the following, specific information.
1. Configuration, i.e:
a) Single leaf.
c) Door reference.
d) Dimensions.
e) Fire performance rating.
f) Acoustic performance rating (where a value is known).
g) Facing type, general.
J. Performance, as indicated on the associated Door Schedule, of the doorset/ assembly type shall vary
K. Ensure that all doorsets are clearly marked on the hinge edge, with their door number and performance,
L. All exterior doors shall be fully weatherstripped.
M. Doorsets/ assemblies shall be supplied and installed as complete integrated systems with all fastenings,
framing, bracketing, seals, sealants, gaskets, hardware and other components/ accessories
recommended by the manufacturer to suit the Project conditions.

17 September 2015
N. Acoustics
2. Include acoustic seals to suit acoustic ratings as scheduled.
3. Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-rated doorsets.
O. Fire
1. Fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Door Schedule
read in conjunction with the Fire Strategy Report and Design Drawings.
2. Doorsets / door assemblies which, by nature of their size, design or configuration fall outside of the
manufacturer's test coverage shall require independently conducted testing or at worst, a dedicated
technical assessment carried out by a nationally recognized authority.
Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they will not become
dislodged in the event of a fire.
4. All fire doors shall be self-latching with approved latching devices with suitable latch bolt length,
refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
5. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, doors at fire rated openings shall be arranged to remain in
the normally closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic approved closing device.
Refer also to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
6. All fire door shall have steel hinge with ball bearing type except spring type hinges, all in accordance
with applicable code and NFPA requirements.
7. All fire doors swinging in pairs requiring astragals shall have at least one overlapping astragal.
8. All fire doors shall be equipped with approved closing device and those with astragal must have a
coordinator to allow the inactive leaf to close before the active leaf. A steel astragal shall overlap
the inactive leaf by a minimum of 19mm.
9. Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
P. Gaskets
1. The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.
2. Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to accommodate fully
the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the design, fabrication and
installation of the Work. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their elastic
qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and chemical attack, sufficient to maintain
the full acoustic performance of the Work.
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky
heat loss.
B. Assembly Deflection/ Safety
1. Ensure deflection of the assembly that shall not:
a) Exceed 1/ 200 or 15mm, whichever is the lesser, on vertical framing members supporting
glazing (measured at right angles to the span of the member).
b) Exceed 1/ 900 or 5mm, whichever is the lesser, on horizontal framing members supporting
glazing, measured parallel to the span of the member.

17 September 2015
c) Have more restrictive values to prevent the edge clearance or bite on the glass dropping below
75% of that required.
d) Cause movement in sealant joints to exceed 75% of the material manufacturer's stated values.
e) Cause loadbearing members to transfer loads to the cladding.
2. Safety:
a) The work shall withstand the specified loads without failure or damage as specified, unless it
can be demonstrated that it is easily repairable, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Glazing
shall remain in place when broken, without penetration.
b) When subject to a blast load of the magnitude described it shall protect the building's occupants
from the effects of the pressure wave and from any severe injuries caused by flying fragments
of glass.
1. All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the Work shall have moisture resistant
E. Fire Performance
1. Fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies, including the installation method within door openings shall
comply with the Dubai Civil Defence, applicable local codes, NFPA 80, and the fire performance
requirements stipulated hereunder. In the event of conflict, the more onerous requirement shall
prevail.
2. Comply with the label requirements of NFPA and applicable local codes. Fabricate doors and frames
in accordance with requirements of AIA pamphlet No.80, NFPA 80 and UL Subject 63 for the class
of door opening indicated or scheduled.
3. Fire doors and frames including fire seals and all associated materials and installation shall comply
with the requirements of NFPA 80.
4. Smoke Passage and Air Leakage: The doorsets and/ or door assemblies shall have certification
illustrating conformance with the NFPA.
F. Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or unacceptable
changes in appearance as follows.
d) Indentation.
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door in accordance with the fire, smoke
and sound requirements.
3. Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints;
excessive surface indentations; color changes or yellowing of coatings.
G. Sliding Door Performance

17 September 2015
1. AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA Performance Requirements: Complying with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/
A440.
2. Performance Class: AW.
3. Thermal Transmittance: Determined in accordance with ASTM E 1423.
4. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Determined in accordance with NFRC 200.
5. Acoustical Performance: Achieve an STC rating of 29 when tested according to and determined
by ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.
6. Air Leakage Resistance: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, Air Leakage Resistance Test.
a) Maximum Rate: 1.5L/ sec x m² of area at an inward test pressure of 300Pa test pressure is
22m/ sec.
7. Water Penetration Resistance: No water leakage as defined in the AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA referenced
test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, Water Penetration Resistance Test.
a) Test Pressure: 20% of positive design pressure, but not more than 580Pa.
8. Forced Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested according
to ASTM F842.
9. Life Cycle Testing: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
10. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
11. Sliding Door Hardware: In accordance with AAMA 907.
a) Roller Assemblies: In accordance with AAMA 906.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions
1. Provide alloy and temper recommended by glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish.
2. In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
B. Aluminum General: Unless specified otherwise, aluminum sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick.
Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that all structural
and finishing requirements of the Specification are met.
C. Stainless Steel General: Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant Work
Sections of the Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria
specified for the particular element or components.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by
the manufacturer to be non-corrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and compatible with members,
trim, hardware, anchors and other components of glass doors. In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA
101/ I.S.2/ A440.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as
appropriate.
2. Fasteners in exterior or wet locations shall be stainless steel or brass.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 (for internal use)/ Type 316 (for external use) stainless
steel fasteners.

17 September 2015
E. Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic
stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron for glass doors, in accordance with ASTM B456 or ASTM
B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
F. Reinforcing Members: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/ chrome-plated steel
reinforcing members that are non-corrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and in accordance with
AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
G. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently
resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when glass door is closed.
1. Weather Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials in accordance with
AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
H. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon
pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.
1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene
sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 702.
I. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated doors, provide glass door manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
1. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
J. Gaskets: All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and select
all gaskets in order to
1. Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
2. Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid materials
and/ or structural silicone.
3. Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Work.
5. The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation performance.
6. Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting behind
door edging. Size as recommended by manufacturer to achieve required performance.
K. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
L. Fire and Smoke Seals: Fire, smoke and acoustic seals shall be those on which the manufacturer's
M. Door Glass and Glazing System: Comply with Section 088000 Glazing for safety glass, insulating glass
units, laminated glass and glazing requirements applicable to glass doors.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and
anchoring doors.
B. Fabricate glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing.
C. Metalwork, General

17 September 2015
Specification.

chemically.
attachment.
porosity or cracks.
completed work.
f) Site or Shop Welding:
assembled.
g) Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
D. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
E. Aluminum
acceptable.
F. Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.
G. Metal Door Frames
1. The door frames shall include integral door stops that are within the frame profile.
2. The doors and frames shall be unaffected by micro-organisms, mildew, insects, vermin and/ or rats,
nor provide harborage for same.
3. The door frames shall be securely held and sealed.
4. The tops of doors shall align with that of the panel sub-frames.

17 September 2015
5. Frames shall be provided to the profiles indicated, fabricated from 1.6mm zinc annealed steel, or
an acceptable alternative.
6. The method of installation of door frames to sub-frames, partitions or blockwork shall provide a seal
7. The door frames shall be reinforced at hinges, fastenings, strikes and door closer locations and
shall provide all cut-outs required for the installation of security items.
8. Suitable cut-outs shall be provided in the frames for all mortise door hardware. Metal reinforcements
shall be provided for attaching all door hardware.
9. Where indicated on the Design Drawings, mild steel support angles shall be provided in order to
secure the frames to supporting walls. Such angles shall be screwed firmly back to the support
structure using 50mm screws into rawlplugs.
10. Anchors of fire door frames shall be located immediately above or below the hinge reinforcements
on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb. All anchors must be welded to the jambs.
11. All the frames shall have at least 3 No. pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the frame
of each door.
H. A high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication and installation of the work.
I. Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
J. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all exposed surfaces and edges true
K. The Work elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
L. Wireways must be allowed for connection to equipment within the framing system, back to the building
power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Work Contractor) and Building Management System
M. Doorsets shall be factory pre-machined, and reinforced as necessary, for all specified door hardware,
prior to the application of factory finishes. Ensure that the doorset manufacturer is in receipt of specimen
furniture at the earliest opportunity after order placement to enable configurations of machinery.
N. Weather Stripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weather stripping in horizontal
rails and single or double-row weather stripping in meeting or jamb stiles. Provide compression-type
weather stripping at the perimeter of each movable panel where sliding-type weather stripping is not
appropriate.
1. Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames.
O. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
P. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze glass doors in the factory where practical and possible for applications
indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 Glazing and with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.
S.2/ A440.
Q. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Section 088000 Glazing and with glazing
system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match panel frames.
B. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

17 September 2015
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.04mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, adjacent construction and Site conditions,
with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.
2. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion and welding slag; without sharp
edges or offsets at joints.
B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, surfaces and operational clearances.
C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to
ensure a coordinated, weathertight glass door installation.
D. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
C. Installation of fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members
D. Installation of fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall be in accordance with the recommendations of
the (National Fire Protection Agency) NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
E. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the Design Drawings, Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's written instructions for installing
doors, hardware, accessories, and other components.

17 September 2015
B. Install glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, warp or rack of frames and panels,
or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation
to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/ weather barriers, and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction.
D. Set frames centrally in openings. Shim with continuous wood packing strips to correct alignment.
E. Observe requirements for rated assemblies on test certificates or certified assessments.
F. Door Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
G. Door Hardware: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish supplied
by the door hardware manufacturer. Prevent damage to door hardware and adjacent surfaces. For
fastening requirements refer to Section 087100 Hardware.
H. Generally, fastenings within aluminum framing components shall not be visible, with the exception of
capping pieces fixed to vertical mullions.
exposure of the external environment.
I. Post fitting of signage shall be undertaken by methods that do not compromise the performance and
integrity of the doorsets.
J. Install glass doors and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within doors to the exterior.
K. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
of contact with other materials according to ASTME 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar Materials".
L. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the Work relate satisfactorily to the Work
3. Gaps to head and jambs of doors to frames shall be 3mm all around.
6. Cut-outs for interfacing Work shall be to the dimensions indicated on the Shop Drawings ±1mm.

17 September 2015
10. When a series of elements are arranged in an array of 2 or more, the maximum allowed deviation
Dimension.
grid is ±2mm.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of glass doors for air penetration resistance and water resistance
shall be performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method A, by applying same test pressures required
to determine compliance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
2. Testing Extent: 3 No. glass doors as selected by the Engineer and a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency. Doors shall be tested immediately after installation.
C. Glass doors shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports according to AAMA 502. Testing agency will interpret test results
and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Ensure that glass doors arrive on Site with adequate surface protection. Material used for surface
protection shall be of low flammability.
B. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for
smooth operation, without binding and a weathertight closure.
C. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation and
proper latching without unnecessary force or excessive clearance. Make good fastening holes and minor
damage to adjacent surfaces marred during installation to the acceptance of the Engineer.
D. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing glass doors. Comply with the manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes.
Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
E. Clean glass immediately after installing glass doors. Comply with the manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
F. Upon completion of work remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely. Clean
the work of dirt and splashes prior to adding protection.
G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period. Refinish or replace glass doors with damaged finishes. Replace damaged
components.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the work from damage during construction to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements and
ensure that all exposed components have protective coverings during Site storage and after installation.
Remove and replace protection as instructed, for inspection by the Engineer and remove completely at
Taking-Over.

17 September 2015
B. Protect glass door surfaces and sealants during the curing process from contact with contaminating
substances resulting from construction operations and Site conditions. During construction, monitor glass
door surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact glass door
surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 083323 -- OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 6
2.4 FABRICATION 6
2.5 FINISHES 11
2.6 TOLERANCES 11
PART 3 EXECUTION 12
3.1 EXAMINATION 12
3.2 PREPARATION 12
3.3 INSTALLATION 13
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE 14
3.7 DEMONSTRATION 14
3.8 PROTECTION 14

Tender Issue 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
17 September 2015
SECTION 083323 -- OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Overhead Roller Shutter Door.
3. Section 055000 Metal Fabrications.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 083323 / 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
17 September 2015
C. Pre-contract Samples: Not required.
1. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
the manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
a) Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field connection.
b) For fire-rated doors, show locations of replaceable fusible links.
c) Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal and control wiring.
2. Product data on materials and components for use. For each type and size of overhead coiling door
and accessory. Include the following:
a) Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for

slats and finishes.
b) Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics and furnished

accessories.
c) For fire-rated doors, description of fire-release system including testing and resetting
instructions.
d) Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of the system.
4. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
5. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories and components, from
the manufacturer.
6. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that exceed
size limitations of labeled assemblies.
E. Post Contract Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below.
1. Curtain Slats: 350mm long.
2. Bottom Bar: 50mm long, with sensor edge for electric door operators.
3. Guides: 150mm long.
4. Brackets: 150mm².
5. Hood: 150mm².
6. Laminate-Clad Counter Panel Product: 150mm²; for each type, color, pattern and surface finish;
laminated to core.
7. Open-Curtain Grille: 450mm² assembly with full-size components consisting of rods, spacers and
links as required for each assembly, including glazed inserts.

17 September 2015
8. Closed-Curtain Grille: 450mm² assembly with full-size components consisting of ribs and infill
material as required for each assembly.
1. Warranties.
and cleaning frequency for overhead coiling doors.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar
work.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
E. Mock-ups: Not required.
F. Prototypes
1. Overhead coiling door/ grille including interface with surrounding walling including all specified seals
and associated features and controls.
A. Delivery
1. Do not deliver materials and fabricated items to the Site until conditions of temperature and humidity
are similar to those in the finished building. Protect items from wetting, temperature and humidity
changes or damage during transportation.
2. Protection of Components: Do not deliver to the Site components, which cannot be put immediately
into suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to
prevent damage to components.

17 September 2015
from damage.
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not commence installation until the building is enclosed, wet work is
complete and dry, and the HVAC system operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
are at occupancy levels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or accepted equivalent.
1. Al Kuhaimi.
2. Ceco.
3. Ali Bakhit Door Co. L.L.C.
4. Bin Dasmal Doors.
B. Overhead Roller Shutter Door
1. Description: Fire rated overhead metal roller shutter formed with curtain of interlocking non-
perforated metal slats as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Product Reference: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
3. Slats: Galvanized steel slats 100mm high and 1mm gauge. Cast steel end clips fitted at every
alternate slat.
4. Drum assembly: Manufactured from mild steel tubes. The drum houses bearings counter balancing
helical torsion springs, capable of producing sufficient torque to ensure ease of operation of the
curtain from any position. With 1.0mm or 1.2mm steel slats with cast windlock clips every slat.
5. Hood Enclosure: Hood cover shall be galvanized steel internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and
shape.
6. Heavy Duty Guide Assembly: Galvanized steel channel guide and formed lock rail running full length
of guide to secure wind lock clips.
7. Bottom Rail: Nominally 50mm x 50mm galvanized steel dual angle bars fitted to both sides of the
bottom slat.
8. Brackets: Mild steel brackets.
9. Locking: Self-locking gear motor positively locks the door in the fully closed position.
10. Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
11. Operation: Electric operation by a single phase (max 28 m²) or 3 phase (max 36 m²) motor. This
shall include emergency chain operation in the event of power failure.
12. Fire Performance: Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
13. Automatic closure in event of fire is actuated by fusible link (fuses at 74 °C). Where interfacing with
a smoke detector or fire alarm system is required, the fusible link can also incorporate a hold – open
magnet. Provision of the interfacing work is by the fire control subcontractor. When the daylight
opening exceeds 4000mm in width, an additional fusible link shall be provided, located at the other
end and connected via a cable to the fusible link on the operator side.
14. Finish: Powder coated in accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
15. Color: As selected by the Engineer.

17 September 2015
16. Safety features: Safety edge kit to detect obstructions and prevent door from closing.
17. Refer to the MEP documents for interfacing with Building Automation Systems.
A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads,
the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/ SEI 7 'Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures'.
1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 960Pa, acting inward and outward.
a) Basic Wind Speed: 38m/ sec/ 40m/ sec/ 44m/ sec/ 49m/ sec.
b) Importance Factor: Refer to Structural Specification.
c) Exposure Category: A/ B/ C/ D.
2. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing
permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.
B. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/ SEI 7 'Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures'.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit shall remain in place without separation of any parts from the
device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the emergency-egress-door component
shall be fully operational after the seismic event.
2. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as
possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
1. Provide copies of test certificates prior to manufacture to the Engineer.
2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements
for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
3. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways,
provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250°C
above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
4. Smoke Control: Where indicated and in corridors and smoke barriers, provide doors that are listed
and labeled with the letter "S" on the fire-rating label by a qualified testing agency for smoke- and
draft-control based on testing according to UBC Standard 7-2 and UL 1784; with maximum air-
leakage rate of 0.01524 m³/ sec x m² of door opening at 24.9Pa for both ambient and elevated
temperature tests. Install and use in accordance with NFPA 105.
5. Assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Door Schedule read in conjunction with
6. Assemblies shall be marked with a label or plug to confirm conformance to the NFPA.
D. Sound-Control Doors for acoustically rated door requirements: Assemblies that have been fabricated
and tested to control the passage of sound and have minimum certified STC rating in accordance with
ASTM E413.
1. Refer to the Door Schedule and Acoustic Report for specific acoustic values.
3. Where no specific value is stated, the assembly shall achieve as a minimum, the level of acoustic
performance in accordance with the Acoustic Report.

17 September 2015
5. Sound-control doors shall be supplied complete with perimeter (including threshold) seals and
overhead coiling door when viewed in darkness with a light source on the other side.
6. Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-control doors.
E. Gaskets and Seals
installation of the work. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their elastic
the full performance of the work.
F. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories for Motorized Operator: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA
70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24V, ac or dc.
G. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with applicable provisions in ICC/ ANSI A117.1.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Integral Frame, Hood and Fascia for Counter Door
1. Galvanized Steel: Provide nominal 1.63mm thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with Z275 zinc
coating, in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M.
B. Hood, General
1. Galvanized Steel: Provide nominal 0.71mm thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275)
zinc coating, in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Door Curtains, General
1. Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind
loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Provide slats of thickness
and mechanical properties recommended by the door manufacturer for performance, size, and type
of door indicated.
2. Endlocks and Windlocks for exterior doors for Service Doors: Malleable iron casings galvanized
after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high strength nylon. Provide locks
on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
3. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 No. angles fabricated from manufacturer's standard
hot-dip galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.
4. Endlocks for Counter Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain
slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
5. Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape,
fabricated from the manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum
extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.
6. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous,
compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.
7. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles with sufficient depth
and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly and to withstand loading. Slot
bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain,
and if required a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

17 September 2015
a) Removable Posts and Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard.
8. Pass Door: Door and frame assembly constructed integrally with the coiling door assembly and
bearing the same fire rating. Complying with egress and accessibility requirements of authorities
a) Door Frame and Integral Jamb Guide: Fabricate of angles or channels and angles with sufficient
depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand
loading.
b) Hinged Frame: Provide hinged pass door and frame that swings out of the way, as a unit, to
allow use of the full coiling door opening width. 1 No. jamb of the pass door frame is hinged
and the other jamb includes a guide for the lower, narrower part of the coiling door curtain.
c) Rigid Frame: Rigid pass door and frame that are built into the rigid, lower part of the door
curtain and that raise with the curtain.
d) Locking Hardware:
1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying
system.
2. Keys: Provide 3 No. for each cylinder.
e) Thresholds: Equip pass doors with integral thresholds that comply with egress and accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Integral Frame, Hood and Fascia for Counter Door: Fabricate welded sheet metal assembly from
sheet material as indicated.
10. Integral Metal Sill for Counter Door: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of Type 304
stainless steel in manufacturer's standard thickness with No. 4 finish.
11. Fire-Rated, Laminate Counter: Provide fire door manufacturer's high-pressure decorative laminate-
covered countertop, UL or ITS tested and labeled for 1-½-hour fire rating for approved use with fire
door assembly.
B. Open Curtain and Closed Curtain Grilles, General
1. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at ends of rods; locking and retaining grille
curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining grille curtain alignment and preventing
lateral movement.
2. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, finished to match grille.
a) Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible
gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber or neoprene as a cushion bumper.
b) Provide motor operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge.
3. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with return lips
or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact
and to minimize operational noise with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
C. Curtain Accessories
1. Smoke Seals: Equip each fire-rated door with smoke seal perimeter gaskets for smoke and draft
control as required for door listing and labeling by a qualified testing agency.
2. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weatherstripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of
door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.
a) At door head, use 3mm thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
b) At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 3mm thick seals of flexible
vinyl, rubber or neoprene.

17 September 2015
3. Push/ Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles
on each side of door, finished to match door.
a) Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 2130mm high.
4. Automatic Closing Device for Fire-Rated Doors: Equip each fire-rated door with an automatic closing
device that is inoperative during normal door operations and that has a governor unit complying
with NFPA 80 and an easily tested and reset release mechanism designed to be activated by the
following:
a) Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 74°C interconnected and
mounted on both sides of door opening, mounted on one side only fusible-link ceiling unit for
use with suspended ceilings.
b) Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled smoke detector and door-holder-release devices.
c) Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled heat detector and door-holder-release devices.
d) Building fire-detection and fire-alarm systems and manufacturer's standard door-holder-

release devices.
D. Hood, General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at
opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom
edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-
jamb mounting which projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as
required to prevent sagging.
E. Hood, Doors
1. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or flame.
2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a perimeter sealant-
joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.
F. Hood, Grilles
1. Removable Metal Soffit: Formed or extruded from same metal and with same finish as curtain if
hood is mounted above ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting Frame: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support grille; factory
fabricated from ASTM A36/ A36M structural steel tubes or shapes, hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123/ A123M; fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be built into wall construction;
and complete with anchors, connections and fasteners.
G. Locking Devices, General
1. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,
located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
2. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle,
cam plate and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
a) Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying
system.
b) Keys: Provide 3 No. for each cylinder.
3. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
4. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power
supply when door is locked.
H. Counterbalancing Mechanism, General: Counterbalance doors/ grilles by means of manufacturer's

standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft
and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings
or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

17 September 2015
1. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural

quality, welded or seamless carbon steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support
rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 2.5mm/ m
of span under full load.
2. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs
to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure
ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast steel barrel plugs.
3. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized
to hold fastened spring ends and carry torsional load.
4. Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel
plate.
I. Manual Door/ Grille Operators
1. Equip door/ grille with manufacturer's recommended manual door/ grille operator unless another
type of door operator is indicated.
2. Push-up Door/ Grille Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so the required lift or pull for
door/ grille operation does not exceed 111N.
3. Crank Operator: Consisting of crank and crank gearbox, steel crank drive shaft and gear reduction
unit, of type indicated. Size gears to require not more than 111N force to turn crank. Fabricate
gearbox to be oil tight and to completely enclose operating mechanism. Provide manufacturer's
standard crank-locking device.
J. Grille Operators
1. General: Electric door/ grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided
by door/ grille manufacturer for door/ grille and operation cycles requirement specified, with electric
motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake,
clutch, remote control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door/ grille, and
accessories required for proper operation.
2. Usage Classification: Provide electric operator and components capable of operating for not less
than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door/ grille.
3. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door/ grille.
a) Top-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door/ grille head plate with the
operator on top of the door hood/ grille hood assembly and connected to the door/ grille drive
shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Headroom is required for this type of mounting.
b) Front-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door/ grille head plate with the
operator on coil side of the door hood/ grille hood assembly and connected to the door/ grille
drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Front clearance is required for this type of mounting.
c) Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door/ grille
and connected to door/ grille drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required
for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft;
if above shaft, headroom is required.
d) Bench Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left door/ grille head plate and connected
to the door/ grille drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required for this type
of mounting.
e) Through-Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted on other side of wall from coil side of door/ grille.
4. Electric Motors: In accordance with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 110513 Common Motor Requirements for
Equipment unless otherwise indicated/ Refer to the MEP Specification.
a) Electrical Characteristics:
1. Phase: Single.

17 September 2015
2. Volts: 230V.
3. Hertz: 50.
b) Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor
exposure indicated.
c) Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and
operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 203mm/ sec and
not more than 305mm/ sec, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
d) Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices and Wiring: Provide
manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
e) Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical
devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.
5. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door/ grille with adjustable switches interlocked with motor
controls and set to automatically stop door/ grille at fully opened and fully closed positions.
6. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door/ grille with indicated exterior automatic safety
sensor capable of protecting full width of door/ grille opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation
of device immediately stops and reverses downward door/ grille travel. For fire-rated doors, activation
delays closing.
a) Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in

door/ grille opening without contact between door/ grille and obstruction.
b) Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping
mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using
manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.
7. Remote Control Station: Momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls
labeled "Open", "Close", and "Stop".
a) Provide Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
b) Provide Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type,

NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.
8. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door/ grille with capability for
emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door/ grille operation
does not exceed 111N/ 133N.
9. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual
operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so
it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating
when emergency operator is engaged.
10. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch
adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.
11. Audible and Visual Signals: Provide audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with
regulatory requirements for accessibility.
12. For Doors, Radio Control System: Consisting of the following:
a) 3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; 1/ 2 per operator.
b) Multifunction remote control.
c) Remote-antenna mounting kit.

17 September 2015
13. For Grilles, Emergency-Egress Release: Provide flush, wall-mounted handle mechanism, not
dependent on electric power. The release allows an unlocked grille to partially open without affecting
limit switches to permit passage, and it automatically resets motor drive upon return of handle to
original position.
14. For Grilles, Self-Opening Mechanism: Provide automatic release mechanism triggered by either
smoke detector, emergency push-button station, fire alarm or power failure. When activated, the
grille self opens by means of a fail-safe operator to the fully open position without the need of power
operation or battery backup systems. When the emergency push-button is reset, and the alarm is
cleared and power is restored, the grille shall operate normally.
2.5 FINISHES
A. General Finish Requirements
1. In accordance with the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's (NAAMM) "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Clear Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010mm or thicker.
3. Color Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/ A34, Class II, 0.010mm or
thicker.
4. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603. Comply with the coating
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking.
C. Steel and Galvanized Steel Finishes
1. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with Site-applied finish. Comply
with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application and
minimum dry film thickness.
2. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
pretreatment, application and minimum dry film thickness.
2.6 TOLERANCES
A. Tolerances for Manufacture
B. Tolerances for Component Assembly

17 September 2015
element.
e) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2000mm
f) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2000mm straightedge
of the element.
A. Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all overhead coiling doors installed requiring
to be sound controlled meet the performance criteria as specified, and that values achieved in laboratory
conditions are exceeded by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide independently certified evidence that all specified variants of
components comply with specified performance requirements.
1. Smoke Passage and Air Leakage: The assemblies shall have certification illustrating conformance
with NFPA 105 and UL 1784.
C. Industry recognized independent third party certification is required indicating compliance with the
specified performance.
D. Provide 1 No. copy of the manufacturer's certification for each overhead coiling door/ grille assembly,
which is indicated for a fire-rated opening and is larger than the size limitations established by NFPA and
UL for labels. Certificate shall state that overhead coiling door/ grille assembly has been constructed in
accordance with all the applicable requirements for labeled construction.
E. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer for consideration as to the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
1. Verify dimensions and levels and surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section.
2. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
3.2 PREPARATION

17 September 2015
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to the manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling grilles hoods, and operators at the mounting locations
indicated for each door.
C. During construction, exposed components shall be protected after fitting and care taken to avoid fitting
any components whilst 'wet' trades are still in progress. Protect from abrasives, acids and other corrosive
materials.
D. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling grilles, switches and controls along
accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
E. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.
F. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.
G. Installation of fire-rated door assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members of a
nationally recognized quality assurance scheme, and ideally the same scheme to which the coiling
overhead door manufacturer subscribes.
H. Sealant Joints: Sealants for frames shall be silicone where required, as detailed on the Design Drawings.
I. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
J. Installation Tolerances
grid is ±2mm.
Dimension.
the Engineer.

17 September 2015
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Perform installation and startup checks according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. For fire-rated doors, test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release
system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
4. Test grille opening when activated by detector, fire alarm system, emergency-egress release, or
self-opening mechanism as required. Reset grille-opening mechanism after successful test.
Provide a test report demonstrating that overhead coiling doors installed meet the performance criteria
specified.
B. Carry out a Site inspection if there is damage or non-supply of the production test reports. The Engineer
shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fastened units.
carried out in accordance with the relevant ASTM and NFPA Standards.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
3. If stainless steel components have not been protected by adhesive film, thoroughly clean prior to
presentation to the Engineer for acceptance.
B. Adjusting
1. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors/ grilles operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
2. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
3. For smoke-control doors and/ or weathertight installations, adjust seals to provide weathertight fit
around entire perimeter.
4. Make good fastening holes, minor damage and adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate and maintain overhead coiling doors.
3.8 PROTECTION

17 September 2015
A. Ensure that overhead coiling doors and associated components arrive on Site with adequate surface
protection.
B. General: Protect the work from damage during construction.
3. Protection of Components after Installation: Ensure that all exposed components have protective
coverings during storage and after installation to protect factory applied finishes. Exposed finishes
shall also be protected during on-Site operations.
C. Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or damage from
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 084233 -- REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTIES 3
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 10
2.5 FABRICATION 11
2.6 FINISHES 13
PART 3 EXECUTION 14
3.1 EXAMINATION 14
3.2 PREPARATION 14
3.3 INSTALLATION 15
3.6 PROTECTION 18

Tender Issue 084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES
17 September 2015
SECTION 084233 -- REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Revolving entrance glass doors.
3. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 084233 / 1 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm of each type of door in specified finish.
2. Door frame minimum 300mm of each type.
3. Color control limits shall be submitted as samples with the Tender for review and comment by the
Engineer. The specified finishes shall be within these limits agreed and held by the Engineer.
Samples of fire and smoke seals.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm samples of all doors forming the acceptable control samples for the Project.
2. Door frame minimum 300mm of each type.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
A. Standards
1. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing

similar work.
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer. Use
applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
C. Mock-ups
D. Prototypes
1. Revolving door type including interface with surrounding walling including all specified seals and
G. Certifications
1. Provide certification to demonstrate that doors and frames have been previously tested to meet the
3. If test certificates are not made available, include for the testing of door assemblies.
A. Delivery: Do not deliver materials and fabricated items to Site until conditions of temperature and humidity
are similar to those in the finished building. Protect items from wetting, temperature and humidity changes
or damage during transportation. Do not install projecting hardware prior to shipment, unless otherwise
from damage.
system operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity are at occupancy levels.
1.7 WARRANTIES

17 September 2015
components of revolving door entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
a) Lateral deflection of glass lite edges in excess of 1/ 175 of their length or (19mm), whichever
is less.
b) Excessive air leakage.
c) Faulty operation of speed control unit and hardware.
d) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period for Revolving Door Entrances: 3 years from date of Taking-Over.
3. Warranty Period for Speed Control Units: 5 years from date of Taking-Over.
4. Warranty Period for Finishes: 20 years from date of Taking-Over.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Taking-Over, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled
employees of revolving door entrance Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
revolving door entrance operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those
used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From the Installer to the Employer, in the form of a standard yearly
maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services,
obligations, conditions and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.
2. Include 24-hour/ day, 7-days/ week emergency callback service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Dorma.
2. Besam.
3. Or acceptable equivalent.
B. Revolving Entrance Glass Door
1. Description: Fully automated revolving entry glass doors with 4 wing configuration and metal
framework to both door and housing, complete with rotary assembly, drum walls, ceiling, canopy,
hardware, glazing, fixings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Product Reference: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
3. Drum Walls: Stationary with curved aluminum profiles and curved 10mm thick laminated safety
glass with 100mm base glazing rail. Support post at ends of fixed sidelights complete with safety
contact strips and activator mountings.
4. Doors shall comprise 4 wings rotating about a central vertical axis in an anti-clockwise direction only.
a) Framing: Aluminum profile framing with a powder coated finish. Color as selected by the
Engineer.

17 September 2015
b) Glazing: 6mm thick clear, tempered safety glass.
c) The edges of the rotating leaves shall have easily exchangeable brush seals to ensure
airtightness.
5. The door shall be linked to the fire alarm system to stop the door in escape position or in case of
power failure the doors shall automatically rotate to the escape position.
a) Emergency Escape: In the event of power failure, operation of emergency stop or fire alarm
signal, the central assembly is rotated by the safety control module to a point where wings can
be manually broken out in the direction of escape.
6. Ceiling: Revolving with aluminum support structure with white laminate and 4 internal downlights.
7. Canopy: Curved aluminum sections.
8. Revolving door shall have a 230 Volt motor with high torque and infinite smooth control, and shall
have the following features:
a) Programmable logic control and safety module with status display.
b) Emergency exit/ escape function.
c) Integrated presence detection system.
d) Automatic obstruction detection.
e) Internal downlights.
9. All moving parts requiring lubrication shall have grease caps, which can easily be maintained and
shall not cause oil drips during operation.
10. Safety system: Horizontally mounted sensor strips control the speed of rotation in accordance with
the speed of passage of the people using the door. The speed is also automatically adjusted to the
speed of passage of disabled/ elderly persons. The closing edges are protected by compressible
safety contact strips. Further sensors are activated as the wings pass 500mm from the main closing
edges to detect the presence of an obstruction (danger of crushing). The revolving door shall be
stopped and prevented from further rotation.
11. Actuation: The operator shall be actuated by infrared sensors as standard equipment.
12. Electronic Interface: To provide operational control and data input and output signals for building
security and management systems, i.e. open, closed, locked. To provide direct input for fire signal
actuation and be programmable to either open or close the doors as designated.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door leaf manufacturer. All door assemblies
shall be pre-hung and to be certified to achieve the performance criteria.
B. Door hardware shall be as the Door Hardware/ Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Door Hardware
of the Specification. The door manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the
1. Refer to the Service Engineer's requirements with regard to door operations, security and additional
devices.
C. Revolving Door Entrances
1. Passageway Requirements:
a) Clear passage width shall be a minimum of 1618mm.
b) Escape route width shall be a minimum of 1050mm.
2. Door Controls:

17 September 2015
a) System Power On/ Off: By receipt of signal from building management system, from remote
switch or by swipe card reader as selected by the Engineer.
b) Include secure over-ride switch located near door.
3. In addition include the following:
a) All copings, sill caps and cappings.
b) All metal and neoprene flashings inclusive of all necessary supports.
c) All sealants, coating and seals required to provide both first and second line of protection.
d) All weepholes and drainer channels to provide a fully drained system.
e) Any steelwork and any other supporting system required.
f) All miscellaneous steel and aluminum required by the revolving door system, including all
relevant shims, relieving angles, back angles, attachment clips, cramps, corbels, bolts and
other required devices as necessary for the proper support and attachment of the system to
the cladding and having due regard for normal poured-in-place concrete tolerances at the base.
g) Cutting chases, recesses, mortises, notches, drilling holes and perforations for fastening
devices and the like, securing in position fastening brackets for casting-in concrete, by others,
grouting-in and making good as necessary.
h) All screws, fastenings, nuts, washers, rivets and distance pieces.
i) All waterbars, flashing and all other seals at the junction with adjacent work, including all due
allowance for returning to the work to complete the installation of seals after the adjacent work
has been completed.
j) Weather-sealing at interfaces with any adjoining or abutting elements and structures.
D. Acoustics
2. Include acoustic seals to suit acoustic ratings indicated.
hardware to ensure that the seals operate effectively.
4. Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-rated doors.
E. Fire
1. Fire door assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Fire Strategy Report.
2. Fire door assemblies shall be marked with a label or plug to confirm conformance to a certifying
body, or an equivalent regional and nationally recognized organisation acceptable to the Engineer.
3. Fire door assemblies shall comply with the label requirements of NFPA and applicable local codes.
Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with requirements of AIA pamphlet No.80, NFPA 80 and
UL 63 for the class of door opening indicated or scheduled.
4. Door assemblies which, by nature of their size, design or configuration fall outside of the
manufacturer's test coverage shall require independently conducted testing or at worst, a dedicated
technical assessment carried out by a nationally recognized authority.
5. Fire doors and frames including fire seals and all associated materials and installation shall comply
with the Engineer's requirements.

17 September 2015
7. All fire doors shall have steel hinges with ball bearing type except spring type hinges, all in accordance
with applicable code and NFPA requirements.
8. Fire safety signs shall be stainless steel discs 75mm diameter and set with their face flush with the
door surface.
F. All doors shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
G. The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the work as specified incorporates all
I. UL labels shall be permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size limitations
J. Ensure that all doors are clearly marked with their door number and performance, enabling them to be
reconciled with their intended location.
K. All specified items for casting-in shall be designed, fabricated and delivered to the Site for "free-issue"
to the Contractor in sufficient time for him to cast-in to meet his program. Check also that they are set
out and placed to the required tolerances, having due regard for concrete tolerances and deflections.
L. Sealants
1. Sealant shall be suitable for the purpose intended, and used strictly in accordance with the
2. Sealants shall not be in any way a potential health hazard. Maintain full up-to-date records of all
current published research and legislation in this respect. Obtain information from the sealant
manufacturer regarding storage, handling, use and disposal of sealants.
3. Wet applied sealants shall only be used in the locations indicated on the Design Drawings or the
Shop Drawings or as and where agreed with the Engineer, provided that all the requirements of the
Specification are satisfied.
4. Sealants shall be the most appropriate type and grade suitable for the intended application.
5. The chemical composition of the sealant and primers shall be compatible with the joint substrate,
and with adjacent surface treatments or building components with which they may come into contact.
6. Determine the appropriate hardness, compressibility or consistency of sealants in consultation with

the manufacturer, considering the joint movement and exposure for the size of joint. Upon request,
furnish information concerning theoretical joint movement related to the anticipated temperatures
at which sealants shall be installed and cured.
7. Sealants shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent with the degree of exposure
to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall have strength and modulus
sufficiently high to resist damage by traffic, including indentation.
8. Sealants that are likely to stain, discolor or bleed into adjacent building materials shall not be used.
Provide independent testing evidence to this effect.
M. Gaskets
installation of the work. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their elastic
the full acoustic performance of the work..
A. Revolving Door Entrances
1. General:

17 September 2015
a) Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage of 6.4L/ sec x m² of wing area when tested according to
ASTM E283 at a minimum static air pressure difference of 75Pa.
b) Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
c) Temperature Change: (67°C, ambient; 100°C, material surfaces).
d) Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes enhanced-
protection testing requirements in accordance with ASTM E1996 for the applicable wind zone
classification and when tested using the large missile test according to ASTM E1886. Test
specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project
and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.
e) Seismic Performance: Revolving door entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to
ASCE/ SEI 7:
1. Seismic Loads: Refer to Structural Specification.
2. Wind Loads: Refer to Structural Specification.
B. Hygrothermal Performance
C. Acoustics
D. Fire
1. Fire door assemblies, including the installation method within door openings shall comply with the
Civil Defense, applicable local codes, NFPA 80, and the fire performance requirements stipulated
hereunder. In the event of confliction, the more onerous requirement shall prevail.
E. Disabled Requirements: Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to open fire-rated or non-
fire-rated doors on disabled access routes are in accordance with the Engineer's requirements.
F. Durability
a) Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
1. Breakage of components and assemblies.
2. Loss of rigidity or loosening up of joints.
3. Cracking or splitting of wood and veneer.
4. Indentation.
5. Improper functioning of hardware resulting in impaired door operation.
b) Distortion arising from moisture changes, temperature changes and applied forces including
cupping, bowing or twisting beyond the specified limits or which prevents the ability of the door
in accordance with the fire, smoke and sound requirements.
c) Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints;
excessive surface indentations; color changes or yellowing of coatings, or the development of
defects.

17 September 2015
G. Weather Resistance
1. Water entering through the door opening due to 'high frequency of use' under extreme weather
conditions shall be confined to the door floor grille.
2. Airflow through the doors, when measured at a positive pressure differential of 0.45kN/ m² shall not
result in concentrated airflows in any areas or exceed 2.0m³/ hr/ m of joint.
H. Serviceability: Installed assembly shall withstand specified loads and transfer them to the building
structure without:
1. Breakage, disengagement of components or reduction in performance.
2. Displacement, distortion or unacceptable change of appearance, malfunction of doors or their

hardware and equipment.
3. Deflection that shall not:
a) Exceed 1/ 200 or 15mm, whichever is the lesser, on vertical framing members supporting
glazing (measured at right angles to the span of the member).
b) Exceed 1/ 900 or 5mm, whichever is the lesser, on horizontal framing members supporting
glazing, measured parallel to the span of the member.
c) Have more restrictive values to prevent the edge clearance or bite on the glass dropping below
75% of that required.
d) Cause movement in sealant joints to exceed 75% of the material manufacturer's stated values.
e) Cause load-bearing members to transfer loads to the cladding.
4. Safety: The work shall withstand the specified loads without failure or damage as specified, unless
it can be demonstrated it is easily repairable, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Glazing shall remain
in place when broken, without penetration.
I. Serviceability Loads
1. Concentrated Load: 1.0kN/ m, applied between 1100mm and 1500mm above floor/ ground level to
both frame and infill.
2. Uniform Load: 0.5 kN/ m² applied to infill between bottom of door and 1100mm above ground level.
3. Impact Load: 350Nm, applied at any point inside or outside to locked doors.
J. Safety Loads: Impact load: 500Nm, applied at any height up to 1500mm on outside.
K. Operating Force
1. Maximum Non-assisted Operating Force: 20N at the handle.
2. Maximum Assisted Operating Force: 1.6N at the handle.
L. Sealants
1. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
2. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or
color. Any discoloration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.
3. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the sealant joints can accommodate and are
compatible with any movements to which they may be subjected.
M. Gaskets

17 September 2015
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Metalwork, General: All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set
out in the Specification.
B. Aluminum
1. Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
2. Unless specified otherwise, aluminum sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick.
a) Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
b) Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
3. Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that all
structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of aluminum
extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
C. Tubes: To be continuously welded, seamless after final finishing.
D. Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel Type 316.
E. Sealants
1. Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
a) Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the required
fire resistance requirement.
b) Where sealants are in contact with drinking water, provide evidence of compliance with local
water quality standards.
c) Resistance to permanently wet service environments.
F. Gaskets
c) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the work.
d) Gaskets shall not shrink nor warp and shall not deteriorate between the periods stated in the
e) The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation
performance.
G. VOC Content: Adhesive and sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
H. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
I. Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 Glazing.
J. Weather Stripping: Heavy duty, single piece rubber or combination of rubber and felt.
K. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout; in accordance

with ASTM C1107/ C1107M; of consistency suitable for application.

17 September 2015
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Door Floor Grilles and Matwells
1. Fabricate fully welded assemblies from 25mm x 6mm stainless steel angles or bars.
2. Provide solid flat members under the fixed glass panels; width of member to be same as overall
width of glazing channel.
3. Include reinforcement and flanges to securely fix assembly.
B. Revolving Door Entrances
1. Fabricate revolving door entrance components to designs, sizes, thicknesses, and configurations
indicated on the Design Drawings, with profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or
deformations. Accurately fit joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs
and distortion. Prefit all hardware at the factory. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for
concealed support of assembly from the building structure.
a) Wings: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support
imposed loads and for installing hardware.
1. Glaze wings at the factory. Comply with glazing requirements specified in this Work Section
and in Section 088000 Glazing. Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of
glass indicated.
2. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into stiles and rails of wings, to be adjustable
and replaceable without dismantling wings.
3. Welded Construction: Weld reinforcement firmly in place. Weld corners. Grind and polish
welds to produce an invisible joint. Mechanically finish exposed surfaces after fabrication
to eliminate surface blemishes caused by welding, rolling, bending, and forming.
4. Mechanically Joined Construction: Joints shall be tightly bolted together. Glass stops shall
be snap-in type where possible.
5. Mechanically Joined Clad Construction: Joints shall be tightly bolted together to produce
hairline joints. Finish material before fabrication. Carefully assemble to prevent welds or
adhesives from blemishing finished surfaces. Glass stops shall be snap-in type where
possible.
b) Enclosure Walls and Canopy: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration
indicated, with welded or mechanical joints, according to the manufacturer's standards and as
specified. Provide subframes as required for a complete system to support required loads.
1. Exterior Framing: Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation
and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. Provide anchorage
and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from the building structure.
Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
C. Metalwork, General
assembled before delivery to the Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
Specification.

17 September 2015
arrises.

chemically.
2. Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for
temporary attachment.
3. Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.
4. Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible
in completed work.
6. Metal arc welding shall be to AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and
AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other methods subject to
review by the Engineer.
a) Site or Shop Welding:
1. Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert
gas tungsten-arc welding and it shall be carried out by a procedure qualified and certified
to AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural
Welding Code - Aluminum."
assembled.
b) Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
D. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
E. Aluminum
1. All aluminum fastening brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
alloy. If visible, they shall be finished to match the metal panels and framing members.
2. All extruded aluminum alloy members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade of aluminum
alloy unless otherwise specified.
acceptable.
F. Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.

17 September 2015
G. Metal Door Frames
1. The doors and frames shall be unaffected by micro-organisms, mildew, insects, vermin and/ or rats,
nor provide harborage for same.
2. The tops of doors shall align with that of the panel sub-frames.
3. Frames shall be provided to the profiles indicated, fabricated from 1.6mm zinc annealed steel, or
an acceptable alternative.
4. The method of installation of door frames to sub-frames, partitions or blockwork shall provide a seal
5. The door frames shall be reinforced at hinges, fastenings, strikes and door closer locations and
shall provide all cut-outs required for the installation of security items.
6. Suitable cut-outs shall be provided in the frames for all mortise door hardware. Metal reinforcements
shall be provided for attaching all door hardware.
7. Anchors of fire door frames shall be located immediately above or below the hinge reinforcements
on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb. All anchors shall be welded to the jambs.
8. All the frames shall have at least 3 No. pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the frame
of each door.
H. Fire and Smoke Seals: Fire, smoke and acoustic seals shall be those on which the manufacturer's
I. Glazing: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
J. Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting behind door
edging. Size as recommended by the manufacturer to achieve required performance.
K. Sealants: Sealants complying with the Specification shall be manufactured within an independently
assessed ISO 9000 series quality system. Each pack supplied shall have a batch number and date of
manufacture.
L. A high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication and installation of the work.
M. Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
N. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all exposed surfaces and edges true
O. The work elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
P. Wireways shall be allowed for connection to equipment within the framing system, back to the building
power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Works Contractor) and Building Management System
Q. Ensure that the shadow gaps indicated on the design are maintained at the head and jamb conditions.
R. Door assemblies shall be factory pre-machined, and reinforced as necessary, for all specified door
hardware, prior to the application of factory finishes. Ensure that the door manufacturer is in receipt of
specimen furniture at the earliest opportunity after order placement to enable configurations of machinery.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General

17 September 2015
3. Finish revolving door entrance components to match adjacent curtain wall or storefront.
1. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
0.04mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating and applying and baking finish.
A. General
1. Refer to Section 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls for full details of coordinated system and
finish testing requirements.
B. Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all doors installed requiring to be sound rated
C. Fire
1. Provide independently certified evidence that all specified variants of components comply with
2. Smoke Passage and Air Leakage: The door assemblies shall have the applicable certification.
D. Industry recognized independent third party certification is required indicating compliance of individual
doors with the specified performance.
E. Provide 1 No. copy of the manufacturer's certification for each metal door and frame, which is indicated
for a fire-rated opening and is larger than the size limitations established by NFPA and UL for labeling.
Certificate shall state that door and frame unit has been constructed in accordance with all the applicable
requirements for labeled construction.
F. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the structural openings, substrates,
adjacent construction and the conditions, in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and levels,
3.2 PREPARATION
C. Installation of fire door assemblies shall be carried out by Subcontractors who are members of a nationally
recognized quality assurance scheme, and ideally the same scheme to which the door manufacturer
subscribes.

17 September 2015
D. Installation of fire door assemblies shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the Architectural
and Specialist Door manufacturer's Association Installation Guide.
E. Sealants
1. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers, in accordance with the recommendations
of the joint sealer manufacturer and the following requirements:
a) Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of the
joint sealer, including dust, paints, except for permanent protective coatings tested and
accepted for sealant adhesion and compatibility; oil and grease.
b) Clean metal and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means which are
not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.
c) Mix sealants strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Use
materials within the time limits stipulated by the manufacturer.
d) Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by the joint sealer manufacturer
based on preconstruction tests or prior experience to achieve a proper bond. If the
manufacturer's instructions are indefinite on the need to prime, apply primer in accordance
with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Confine primers to contact surfaces of joint
sealer, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
e) Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing
the sealant.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install work plumb, true and without distortion, using concealed fasteners where possible. Recess
exposed fastenings and conceal with wood pellets; touch up pellets with finish to match the adjacent
surface. Cutting, trimming or machining of finished surfaces is not permitted.
B. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by the manufacturer for this
purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with corrosion-resistant coatings.
C. The work shall be securely fixed and sealed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, not compromising the performance and certification of the door assembly.
D. Overhead Mounted Speed Control Unit: Insert pivot bearing in rough-in floor opening set on level bed
of non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Fill annular space between pivot bearing and sides of recess with non-
shrink, non-metallic grout. Mix and place grout in accordance with the grout manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Connect speed control unit to electrical power distribution system.
E. Install revolving door entrances according to the manufacturer's written instructions, plumb and true,
without warp or rack of framing members and wings. Anchor securely in place.
1. Install surface mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
2. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the assembly to exterior.
3. Cut and trim framing during installation only with approval of the manufacturer.
a) Restore finish and remove and replace members, as directed, where cutting and trimming
have impaired strength or appearance.

17 September 2015
b) Do not install members that are warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise damaged or defaced
to such an extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members that
have been damaged during installation.
F. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions indicated.
G. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants to provide weathertight
installation.
1. Set continuous sill members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
H. Doors and Frames
1. Set out and install with head, jamb and bottom clearances required by the fittings/ hardware
manufacturer.
3. Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
I. Door Hardware: Assemble and fasten carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish
supplied by the door hardware manufacturer. Prevent damage to door hardware and adjacent surfaces.
At completion check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
J. Post fitting of signage shall be undertaken by methods that do not compromise the performance and
integrity of the door assembly.
K. Sealant Joints: Sealants for door frames shall be silicone where required, as detailed on the Design
Drawings.
L. Fastenings
2. The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fastenings.
6. For door hardware fastening refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
7. Generally, fastenings within aluminum framing components shall not be visible, with the exception
of capping pieces fixed to vertical mullions.
exposure to the exterior environment.
M. All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using other
N. Sealants
1. Excess sealant shall be removed and all joints shall be neat and clean. Only liquids approved by
the sealant manufacturer shall be used to tool freshly applied sealants.

17 September 2015
2. Sealant shall be evenly applied without bubbles in joints.
3. Joint fillers, when placed in the joint, shall provide a gap consistent with the required depth of sealant.
The cross section of sealant in the joint shall be of 2:1 width to depth unless otherwise accepted.
Joint fillers shall be as follows:
a) Compatible with the sealant used and surrounding construction elements.
b) Formed from closed cell foam.
c) Non-adherent to cured sealant, otherwise bond breaker tape shall be used.
O. Installation Tolerances
grid is ±2mm.
Dimension.
the Engineer.
Provide a test report demonstrating that doors installed within sound rated partitions meet the performance
criteria specified.
B. Carry out a Site inspection since, due to damage or non-supply of the production test reports, the Engineer
shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units.

17 September 2015
carried out.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon Taking-Over remove debris and unused materials from the Site, and dispose of safely. Clean
the work of dirt and splashes.
2. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Adjusting: Adjust the installation to ensure correct alignment of components and smooth unbinding
operation of doors and hardware. Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of
the Engineer. Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
C. Limit construction traffic during remainder of construction period.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Ensure that door leaf(ves) and associated panels arrive on Site with adequate surface protection. Material
used for surface protection shall be of low flammability.
B. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for
inspection; remove at Taking-Over.
C. Protection of Components: Do not deliver to Site components, which cannot be put immediately into
suitable dry, covered storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage
by and to projecting door hardware and beads.
D. Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or damage from
E. Protective Tapes/ Films: When adhesive/ protective tapes/ films are proposed to protect finished products,
tapes/ films of a low tack nature shall be used. They shall be applied at room temperature, after the
coating is fully stoved, and remain in contact with the surface for a maximum period of 6 months. Should
longer periods be required, then the tape/ film shall be removed and replaced. Care shall be taken when
removing adhesive/ protective tapes/ films. No sharp instruments or abrasive materials shall be used to
remove the tape/ film. No solvents or cleaning solutions shall be used to remove residues, without the
prior permission of the Engineer. Where adhesive/ protective tapes/ films are used, then the color shall
be white or lighter in tone than the finish it is protecting.
F. Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
G. Protection of Components after Installation: Ensure that all exposed components have protective
coverings during storage and after installation to protect factory applied finishes. Exposed finishes shall
also be protected during on-Site operations.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 084413 -- GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.8 WARRANTY 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.4 MATERIALS 13
2.5 FABRICATION 15
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES 19
PART 3 EXECUTION 21
3.1 EXAMINATION 21
3.2 PREPARATION 21
3.3 INSTALLATION 22
3.6 PROTECTION 25
3.7 MAINTENANCE 25

Tender Issue 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
17 September 2015
SECTION 084413 -- GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies.
7. Acoustic Report.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 084413 / 1 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. All color type samples 300mm x 300mm minimum size for each frame type.
2. Glass sample, 1200mm x 1200mm of all specified glass types.
3. Typical extrusions, minimum 300mm in length.
4. Typical bolts and fixings.
5. Typical hardware including hinges, budget locks and window and door handles.
6. Samples of the type and color of the sealant prior to ordering.
7. Submit full size sample of spandrel panels.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, professional engineer and preconstruction testing agency.
C. Preconstruction Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ISO/ IEC 17025 and accredited
by the ICC-ES for preconstruction testing indicated.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E699 for testing indicated.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following.
1. American Welding Code (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
2. American Welding Code (AWS) D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
F. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance,
materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if
indicated.
1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.
G. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
H. Mock-ups
I. Prototypes
J. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location to be agreed with and
K. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
4. Preconstruction Testing Service: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls that comply with test-
performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific
preconstruction testing or of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies by a Qualified
Testing Agency.
a) Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mock-ups.
b) Indicate size and other details of laboratory mock-ups on the Design Drawings or by inserts.

17 September 2015
c) Build laboratory mock-ups at testing agency facility using personnel, materials, and methods
of construction that will be used at the Site.
d) Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mock-ups will
be constructed.
e) Preconstruction Testing Program: Perform tests on laboratory mock-ups in the following order:
1. Structural performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind load design pressure
when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
2. Air infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
3. Water penetration under static pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.
4. Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1.
5. Structural performance at design load when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
6. Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind-load design

pressures when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
5. Corrosion Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified preconstruction testing agency, indicating compliance with performance requirements.
a) Submit samples, technical material and pre-test results of corrosion analysis of components.
Include written confirmation when separation of dissimilar metals is not required, signed by an
acceptable independent corrosion engineer.
6. Field quality control reports.
L. Certificates
1. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components.
Include statement of compliance with ASCE 7-10 for glass fallout under racking.
a) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Welding certificates.
materials including aluminum, finishes, glass, glass coatings, gaskets, setting blocks and backing
rods. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
4. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components,
from the manufacturer.
a) Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum
curtain wall.
A. Delivery: Deliver assemblies and component parts to the Site suitably protected to prevent damage,
staining or corrosion in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Deliver materials to the
Site in the manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name and other qualifying
information.
C. Storage: Store materials in a dry, protected location off the ground in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Handling: Handle items carefully to avoid damage and protect pre-finished materials from scratching
during handling and installation. Replace items and materials that are scratched or otherwise damaged
and unsuitable for installation.

17 September 2015
A. Site Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum curtain walls by
Site measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Loadings: Make allowance for differences between design loadings and loadings during construction
due to erection sequencing, and floor loading conditions when sizing construction and movement joints.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b) Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d) Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e) Failure of operating components.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace
aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a) Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244.
b) Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214.
c) Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Shuco.
2. Hartmann.
3. Kawneer.
4. Hueck.

17 September 2015
5. Spectrum.
6. Technal.
B. Type EWB-201 Glazed Curtain Wall Assembly
1. Description: Frameless structural silicone glazed curtain walling system comprising insulated glass
panels on metal framing configured as indicated on the Design Drawings, including necessary
brackets, fixings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Product Reference: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
3. Supporting Structure: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Support System: Concealed metal support framing (mullions and transoms) suitable for face fixed
double glazed insulated glass panels.
a) Material: Thermally broken profiled aluminum.
b) Finish: Selected powder coat finish in accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings
for Metal.
c) Color: Metallic gray colored steel, RAL 9006 unless selected otherwise by the Engineer.
5. Glazing: Combination of insulated glass panels and spandrel panels as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
a) Curtain Walling: Type GL-401 Insulating Laminated Glass. Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
b) Spandrel Panel: Type GL-201 Spandrel Laminated Glass. Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
6. Joints: High quality translucent structural silicone sealant to achieve a visually frameless
appearance.
a) Sizing: 20mm nominal joint width unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Finish: Recessed as indicated on the Design Drawings.
7. Integral Doors:
a) Aluminum framed swing glass doors as indicated on the Design Drawings. Refer also to Section
083200 Glass Doors.
b) Revolving glass doors as indicated on the Design Drawings. Refer to Section 084233 Revolving
Door Entrances.
c) Aluminum framed sliding glass doors as indicated on the Design Drawings. Refer also to
Section 083200 Glass Doors.
d) Refer also to the Door Schedule.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The work shall oversail the slab edge and be either fastened to primary structure or secondary support
structure.
B. Unless otherwise specified, aluminum framing shall provide 4-sided support for the glazed-in panels
unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings.
C. Framing profiles and other visible components shall utilize similar profiles throughout such that glazed
walling systems are consistent and matching in appearance.
D. Joints shall align and continue through interfacing exterior walling types. Visually open, recessed
horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated
on the Design Drawings

17 September 2015
E. Glass to glass exterior corners shall have joint seals to the manufacturer's recommendation and to the
F. All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
G. Glazed/ infill panels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings using codes specified.
H. Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the Design. The Contractor shall maintain these
dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these shall be stated with the
Tender.
I. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel Type 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
J. Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, insulation, fire stops, acoustic breaks, vapor
barriers, breather and waterproofing membranes, drainage channels, spigots/ anti-rotation pins, seals,
sealants, compressible fills, clips, glazing bridges, spacers, isolators, gaskets, flashings, closures and
all other accessories/ components necessary to complete the installation.
K. Fire breaks/ insulation and acoustic insulation to floor slabs and ceiling void edge, complete with metal
encapsulation finished to match the curtain walling framing.
L. Provide all necessary waterproofing membranes at openings and interfaces with adjoining trades.
Membranes shall be compatible with adjoining trades. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate
Subcontractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
M. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
N. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

preconstruction testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project
without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure as specified in
the Structural Engineer's documentation, including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column
shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a) Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b) Glass breakage.
c) Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d) Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e) Failure of operating units.
f) Failure due to impact loads.
1. Provide curtain wall systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads without failure
of materials or permanent deformation, based on testing units representative of those indicated for
the Project that pass AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
a) Design Wind Loads: Curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind
load pressures established from wind tunnel testing specified in the Structural Specification.
1. Design system to withstand design wind pressure without reductions for shielding or
venting of adjacent construction.

17 September 2015
2. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
a) Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass
plane not exceeding L/ 175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing unit or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19mm, whichever is less.
b) Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces
glazing bite to less than 75% of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance
between framing members and glazing or other fastened components to less than 3.2mm.
1. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6mm clearance between framing members and
operable units.
c) Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit deflection to
two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
d) No deflections are permitted under loadings that are detrimental to the curtain wall assemblies,
adjoining work, or adjacent structural or building elements.
e) Design components, couplings and fastenings to withstand the specified deflections without
permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
f) Design the assemblies to accommodate the specified differential structural movements due
to loads imposed by adjacent structures.
g) Reduce the magnitude of the permissible deflections when they are detrimental to the work,
support structures and internal finishes.
3. Design Loads:
a) Design the curtain wall assembly to withstand the specified loads without affecting the
assemblies' ability in accordance with the specified performance requirements and the
specified exceptional loads.
b) When calculating design loads, consider the worst combination, taking into account pressure
coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
c) Self-weight Gravity Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating the self-weight of the
assembly including its framing and supports.
4. Live Loads:
a) Design the work to withstand the following live loads without reduction in performance or
deformation of components:
1. Loads resulting from movements of the building structure and curtain wall support
structures.
2. Horizontally applied loads acting on surfaces of framing members and glazing due to
maintenance and cleaning operations.
3. A static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on the framing.
5. Known impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life, without
sustaining non-repairable damage.
6. Loads imposed during replacement of panels and units.
7. Wind loads.
8. Horizontal and vertical loads of similar magnitude to those imposed on adjoining work or
attached elements, as indicated.

17 September 2015
5. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance Performance: Curtain wall systems that are not protected
from missile impact by the exterior panel cladding system shall pass missile impact and cyclic
pressure tests specified in Section 088000 Glazing.
6. Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walling system shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ ASCE 7 unless higher loads are required by
7. Imposed Movements: Design the work to withstand imposed loads due to specified movements of
supporting structures and adjacent elements.
8. Inertial Loads: Design the work to withstand inertial loads due to the acceleration and deceleration
of moving elements including opening windows, doors and vents as specified in other Work Sections
as instructed by the Engineer.
9. See SEI/ ASCE 7 for determining Component Importance Factor.
10. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.
a) Design Displacement: As specified in the Structural Engineer's documentation.
b) Test Performance: Meeting criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested
according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement,
unless otherwise specified in the Structural Engineer's documentation.
11. Electrical Grounding: Design curtain wall systems to provide electrical grounding including for
lightning protection, in accordance with requirements of applicable codes.
12. Glass and Glazing: Comply with performance requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
C. Acoustic Performance
1. Sound Transmission:
a) Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls with fixed glazing and framing areas having Outdoor-
Indoor Transmission Classes as indicated, when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss
according to ASTM E90 and determined by ASTM E1332, unless otherwise specified.
b) Insulate internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.
c) Provide internal sound reduction between floors.
d) Provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same floor.
e) The measured noise exposure of each façade shall have been used in conjunction with the
internal noise criteria of 45dB Aeq to derive the façade sound insulation requirements of this
development.
2. Flanking Transmission:
a) Assemblies shall be tested for flanking transmission with partitions meeting the façade at the
mullions. The assemblies shall provide a weighted standardized flanking level difference
determined by the Acoustic Consultant when tested in an accredited independent laboratory
in accordance with ASTM E336.
b) Assemblies shall be tested for flanking transmission at junction with the floor/ ceiling slabs.
The assemblies shall provide a weighted standardized flanking level difference determined by
the Acoustic Consultant when tested in an accredited independent laboratory in accordance
with ASTM E336.
c) The specified test method is designed for suspended ceilings. Use an acceptable international
testing standard to suit the application, otherwise adapt the specified standard. The simulated
wall and floor constructions shall not influence the results of the junction tests.
d) Commence acoustic tests at a time acceptable to the Engineer, in an accredited independent

laboratory.

17 September 2015
e) Where existing test data is available from an accredited independent laboratory, it shall be
considered acceptable providing the tests have been performed on the same assembly
specified. Test data for similar constructions may be accepted if supporting computations are
submitted to account for differences between the proposed and tested construction.
D. Fire Performance
2. General: Curtain wall assemblies shall be non-combustible or not easily ignitable, with low flame
spread characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
3. Surface Spread of Flame:
a) Exterior walls in accordance with the unprotected limitations for exterior fire spread, as required
by the applicable building codes and NFPA.
b) Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
4. Fire and Smoke Stopping:
a) Refer to Section 078400 Fire Stopping.
b) Provide cavity barriers in the curtain wall and fire stopping, as specified, at junctions of exterior
walls with adjoining fire-resisting construction, in accordance with the requirements of the
applicable building codes.
c) Fire Stopping Between Floors:
1. Provide fire stopping to preserve integrity and insulation of compartmentation at the

junctions of floors and curtain walls to prevent fire spread from floor to floor. Seal joints
in accordance with the MEP Specification.
2. Materials shall accommodate movement between slab edge and curtain wall and their
fire resisting performance shall not be affected by water from sprinkler discharge.
3. Floor-to-Floor Fire Separation Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
5. Fire Resistance:
a) Curtain walls used to separate spaces and requiring a fire resistance, shall comply with
functional requirements of the applicable building codes.
b) Fire-Resisting Glass: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing. Comply with the specified fire ratings.
Beadings and gaskets shall be suitable for the required fire rating.
c) Reaction to Fire Properties: Exterior surfaces of the curtain wall shall comply with functional
requirements of the applicable building codes.
d) Limit combustibility of insulation exposed in ventilated cavities in exterior curtain walls, in

accordance with the requirements of the applicable building codes.
6. Fire Performance:
a) Provide fire resistant structural connection between thermally broken elements and
surrounding construction to prevent disengagement due to melting of thermal break.
b) Insulated core spandrel panels in accordance with Factory Mutual Approval standards for fire
protection performance.
E. Environmental Performance
1. Thermal Movements:

17 September 2015
a) Design support structures to accommodate changes in dimensions and shapes of components

due to changes in service temperatures below, and from differential surface temperatures
between the inside and outside of the building, without detriment to the specified performance.
The Design shall include for temporary and permanent conditions. Take into account the effects
of orientation of the building towards the sun.
b) Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures:
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67°C, ambient; 100°C, material surfaces.
2. Test Interior Ambient Air Temperature: 24°C.
3. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA
501.5.
c) Ensure that thermal movements do not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
2. Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly.
3. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Curtain wall system shall not provide evidence of water
leakage when tested according to ASTM E331 at minimum static air pressure differential of 20% of
inward acting wind load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures", but not less than 300Pa and not more than 720Pa.
4. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing
and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to 20% of
positive wind load design pressure, but not less than 300Pa and not more than 720Pa.
a) Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing

on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation.
Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to
exterior.
b) Assemblies including flashings and junctions with adjoining work shall be weatherproof and
watertight under the specified conditions with allowance for deflections and movements.
c) The Detailed Design of the work shall not be based on a single line of defense. The cavities
between the lines of defense shall be drained and ventilated to the exterior. Wet applied seals
for the purpose of preventing the ingress of water shall not be accepted with the exception of
the structural silicone seals or wet seals used for sealing the work against adjacent interfacing
systems.
d) The Detailed Design and construction of the work shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall
remain rigid and accommodate all specified thermal, building structure or other movements
and any applicable loads without compromising its watertightness. All movement joints shall
also be finally designed and constructed to accommodate such loads or movements without
compromising the glazing's watertightness.
5. Provide for control of the flow of water or moisture occurring within the curtain wall. Direct water to
the outside so that no water remains internally.
6. Capillarity: Prevent water migration caused by capillarity in areas designed to remain dry.
7. Energy Performance: Curtain wall system shall have certified and labeled energy performance
ratings in accordance with National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC).
a) Thermal Transmittance:
1. Provide maximum thermal transmittance (U-factor) as follows:
a) Area weighted average for double glazed vision areas and frames: 1.8W/ m²K.
b) Across the Whole Wall Construction: 0.25W/ m²K.
c) Figures to be taken at 24km/ hr exterior wind velocity and winter condition

temperatures when tested in accordance with NFRC 100.

17 September 2015
2. Thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
3. Thermal Transmittance: When assessed using an accepted method of computer

simulation, including lateral heat flow through the assembly, the average value for the
assembly shall not exceed the specified value, and remain free of surface condensation
on the internal face of the work.
b) Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (g value): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.27, as determined according to NFRC 200.
c) Visible Light Transmittance: Minimum 50%.
8. Air Permeability/ Infiltration:
a) Minimize airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through joints and junctions to
control concentrated airflow.
b) Provide curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not
more than 0.3L/ sec/ m² of fixed wall area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a
static air pressure difference of 300Pa.
c) Airtightness shall be ≤5m³/ hr/ m² at test pressure of 50Pa.
d) Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at one location.
e) Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to accommodate
fully the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the design,
fabrication and installation of the work. They shall be formed from materials capable of
maintaining their elastic qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and chemical
attack, sufficient to maintain the full acoustic performance of the work.
f) The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.
9. Condensation Resistance: No condensation on interior surfaces under design conditions as

determined in accordance with NFRC 500.
a) Condensation is permitted in non-visible drainage and ventilation rebates provided it does not
have a detrimental effect on performance or durability.
10. Relative Humidity Conditions:
a) Interior: 20-24°C with maximum 70% ambient relative humidity.
b) Exterior: Use criteria and values for location of the Site complying with applicable codes and
F. Durability
1. General:
a) The assemblies shall maintain their original appearance and performance throughout the
service life when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program.
a) The work shall resist abrasion from accepted cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard,
including glass coatings, to resist reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
b) Record and quantify the extent of damage determined through testing. Submit samples to the
Engineer for examination.
3. Demountability:
maintenance and/ or replacement of glazed units in the event of breakage.

17 September 2015
b) The removal of glazed units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other
part of the work. Provide a method statement for removal and replacement of glass panels for
acceptance by the Engineer.
4. Cables Within Box Sections:
a) As specified, aluminum box sections shall be capable of containing electrical cables serving
security/ access equipment to doors, activators to opening vents, others, as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
b) Openings for the installation of cables shall be provided by the Contractor, after discussion
and agreement with the Engineer.
5. Security: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local police authority.
6. Façade Floor Air Leakage: The joint between the façade cladding and the structural slab at each
floor level shall be sealed to meet the requirements of the MEP Specification.
2.4 MATERIALS
C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/ B308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/ A5.10M.
6. Structural aluminum shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
D. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
F. Glazing: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
G. Fasteners: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
1. Fasteners shall comply with all the statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of the Dubai
municipality and/ or Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall be designed to carry
all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal movements.
3. All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
aluminum shall not be used. Aluminum sub-constructions shall be separated from concrete by
bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to ASTM A240/ A240M may
be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
4. All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.

17 September 2015
5. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
6. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.
H. Flashings: Provide manufacturer's standard flashing system or as indicated on the Design Drawings.
I. Sealants
1. VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
2. General: Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content
of 250g/ L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Between System and Adjacent Building Components: In accordance with ASTM C719, compatible
with other system components.
4. Structural Silicone Glazing Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C1184, compatible with system
components, 138kPa minimum tensile or shear stress.
5. Framing Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard sealants.
6. Refer also to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
J. Gaskets
1. Non-Polluting Materials: Provide non-polluting materials that comply with the requirements as stated
2. Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone.
3. All visible room side glazing gaskets shall have factory-formed corners. All other gaskets shall have
overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between. It is a condition that the internal sealant of
the entire envelope system has a continuous vapor and air seal. This also includes all interfacing
connections.
4. The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and molded elements. These shall perform and
appear as a single element.
a) Comply with the requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
b) Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
c) Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid
d) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the work.
6. Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs are
wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the work and are compatible with all other materials
and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other materials/ components.
7. The color of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.
9. Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.
K. Spandrel Unit Insulation

17 September 2015
2. Unfaced, Mineral Wool Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C612; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84;
passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
3. Foil-Faced, Mineral Wool Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C612; faced on one side with
foil scrim or foil scrim polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 5, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C 665, consisting of fibers;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM
E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
5. Reinforced Foil-Faced, Mineral Wool Blanket Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C665, faced with
foil scrim, foil scrim kraft, or foil scrim polyethylene.
7. The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation during the life of the
work.
9. Refer also to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
L. Damp-proof Membrane
2. The membrane shall be impermeable, rot-proof and resistant to specified extremes of movement
and environmental temperatures. The membrane shall be vapor resistant, vapor permeable and
airtight where necessary.
3. Submit details of proposed materials for review.
4. The material shall be composed of elastomer base (EPDM), or acceptable equivalent.
5. Substrates to receive bonding shall be free from dust and grease, free of cavities, ridges and sharp
projections and be primed to receive adhesive as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Surfaces that are not suitable to receive membrane shall be reported to the Engineer.
6. Membrane shall be lapped at least 100mm and bonded according to the manufacturer's full
recommendations.
7. Other materials/ testing standards may be put forward for review by the Engineer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Aluminum Frames General
1. Aluminum frames made of thermally broken or separated aluminum extrusions for the glazed units.
2. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
3. Glass and other infill paneling retaining frames shall be manufactured from 2 separate extruded
aluminum profiles and assembled using composite technology with a proven continuous thermal
break material, all complying with performance and surface treatment requirements. The Shop
Drawings shall show the final extrusion design while strictly maintaining the Engineer's visual
requirements. The profiles shall be factory assembled into unit frames by means of mitered or butted
corners (as accepted by the Engineer, mechanically jointed with cleats and appropriate additional
sealants.

17 September 2015
a) The profiles shall be detailed to allow for the secure attachment of continuous sealing gaskets,
vapor and air seals, gaskets within the rebates, connections for thermal break strips and
provisions for seals, connection spigots, corner cleats, fastening brackets, clip-in profiles, other
profiles, perimeter safety rails and accessories necessary to complete the installation.
b) The thermal break system shall minimize the thermal transmittance, noise transfer and shall
inhibit condensation on any of the internal surfaces of the framing members, the composite
metal panels or the glazing under the extremes of the design temperatures stated herein.
c) Where applicable, section profiles shall comply with glazing/ infill paneling rebate depth, width
and edge clearance specified by the glass sealed unit manufacturer. The sealed unit
manufacturer's fabricating tolerances shall be accommodated. Frames shall be sufficient to
restrain the glass under maximum positive and negative wind pressures. The Contractor shall
suitably adapt these principles to accommodate other infill paneling as described.
4. Framing shall be based on the pressure equalization principle incorporating an exterior skin as a
water and weather barrier and an internal skin providing the required air and vapor tight seal, and
include a 'glazing' chamber separated by 2 No. seals, one outside the chamber the other at the
back. The chamber shall be drained to the outside, this system shall comprise:
a) An outer seal designed to prevent water ingress into glazing or other chambers to substantially
inhibit water penetration and to prevent heavy wetting of the back seal. Designs having full
width gasket seals shall incorporate capillarity breaks to prevent the ingress and entrapment
of water between surfaces in continuous contact.
b) A back seal. This seal shall act as an air seal to minimize air permeability up to limits as
specified. If subjected to light wetting in localized patches it shall prevent the ingress of this
water to the inside face of the work (Note: Designs relying upon single stage seals shall not
be used). Special openings in the framing shall comply with current glazing recommendations
in size (or suitably adapted for other infill paneling), spacing and location and shall be provided
to the exterior of the frames in order to ventilate around the double glazed or other infill paneling
units, creating a drainage system for any water or moisture. All drainage provisions shall be
provided at the lowest level of the glazing rebates or framing system cavities to positively
prevent any residue water from remaining within. State, in the Contractor's proposals, the
spacings of drainage outlets for acceptance by the Engineer and demonstrate the adequacy
and suitability of such spacings.
5. The frames shall safely and securely retain the glass or other infill paneling by dry pressure caps,
beadings and gaskets or structural silicone with and without concealed mechanical restraint/
retention, or a combination of both as described and indicated on the Design Drawings, complete
with necessary suitable aluminum/ stainless steel locating pieces, and various other accessories
necessary to complete the installation.
6. Where structural silicone is specified as the preferred means of panel fastening, it is the visual intent
achieved by this method of fastening that is required. Where secondary means of retention/ support
are required, and do not form part of the Design, to satisfy the performance requirements and/ or
local statutory requirements, these shall be minimal and inconspicuous. All means of retention/
support shall be clearly indicated as part of the Tender return and also after the Detailed Design on
the Shop Drawings for acceptance by the Engineer.
7. Weather seals shall be provided at all interfacing connections. The vapor barrier shall always be
installed on the warm side of the thermal insulation to provide a continuous air and vapor tight seal
at all interfacing joints and intersections between the units and the building structure.
8. The Detailed Design shall permit replacement of glass and other infill panels, and ancillary items
such as opening lights and integrated doors to be safely carried out with minimal disturbance to the
occupants by methods satisfactory to the Engineer, from inside of the building so as not to alter the
intended visual requirements. Replacement of the panels shall be indistinguishable from the initial
installation.
9. Jointing between units shall, where required and as necessary, accommodate movements within
the system and surrounding interfaces. Where practical, such joints shall match in appearance and
correspond with the standard frame profile as indicated on the Design Drawings. In all instances
proposals shall be fully detailed on the Shop Drawings for acceptance by the Engineer.
10. All framing shall utilize the minimum cross section necessary, or be compliant with the visual
requirements of the Engineer whilst maintaining rigidity and performance.
11. All corners shall be jointed and sufficiently flush, flat and true in accordance with the specified
tolerances.

17 September 2015
12. Frames shall be fully gasketed with vulcanized corners where in the same plane and forming the
air and vapor barrier. No butting on Site shall be permitted.
B. Frames (Structural Silicone Glazing System)
1. Systems as described shall be structural silicone bonded with only framing/ feature trims being
visible when described and indicated on the Design Drawings. Modules shall be unitized in factory
conditions for Site installation, forming a complete enveloping system, to locations as indicated,
and compliant with the visual requirements of the Engineer, all as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Where structural silicone is specified as the preferred means of panel fastening, it is the visual intent
achieved by this method of fastening that is required. Where secondary means of retention/ support
are required, and do not form part of the Design, to satisfy the performance requirements and/ or
local statutory requirements, these shall be minimal and inconspicuous. All means of retention/
support shall be clearly indicated as part of the Tender return and also after Detailed Design on the
Shop Drawings for acceptance by the Engineer.
3. Framing profiles shall be detailed to receive special 'clip-in', or other suitable means of attachment,
aluminum extrusions to receive structural bonded glazed units or other such infill panels.
C. Tolerances
1. Individual Components:
a) Length/ Width: Maximum Allowable Deviation: Lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and 3mm above
3000mm of design dimension.
b) Thickness/ Depth: Nominal Extrusion Tolerances, Maximum Allowed Deviation: ±0.5mm.
2. Assemblies, Non-cumulative:
a) Level of Horizontal Members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm.
b) Plumb of Vertical Members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm.
d) Bow: The center section of the assembly shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of its length when measured from a straight line between the ends.
e) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2000mm
straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the assembly.
f) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2000mm straightedge
g) Twist: No section of the assembly may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at either
end of the assembly.
h) Twist: ±1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
i) Line of Panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
D. Movement Joints
1. The requirement for any movement joints within the work shall be ascertained to accommodate all
movements stated herein. The work shall accommodate all movements of the joint in a manner that
does not compromise weather resistance and watertightness.
2. Maintenance of the work joints shall be by visual inspection. Externally and internally, vertical
movement joints shall appear as similar to the standard glazing system joint as possible. The material
used at the movement joint locations shall not be thermally broken or separated.
E. Metalwork General

17 September 2015
assembled before delivery to the Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
Specification.
only, Any cut edges shall be treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
arrises.

chemically.
10. Welding/ Brazing:
a) General:
1. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces
by descaling or grinding.
porosity or cracks.
in completed work.
AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum", or other methods subject to
b) Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
Code - Aluminum".
assembled.

17 September 2015
c) Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
11. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
12. Aluminum:
be acceptable.
13. Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding:
a) Bonding is required between individual sections of the work to ensure continuity between
adjacent sections, both vertically and horizontally over the whole façade.
b) Bonding between the work and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals as indicated
on the Design Drawings. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at the
highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/ bolts on the cladding for subsequent connection.
d) All straps/ connections shall be concealed.
e) No straps shall be fastened along copings.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
A. Testing of Prototypes
1. Supporting Frames: The prototypes shall be mounted in test rigs which have the same conditions
of attachment and support as elements of the work, with a supporting structure similar in stiffness
to that supporting the work. The prototypes to be tested shall not be influenced by the test chamber.
2. Provide details of all jointing, sealing and glazing techniques, materials used, type, number and
size of drainage/ ventilation apertures and section properties of the framing members.
3. The Engineer shall be given at least 7 days' notice prior to the erection and dismantling of the
prototype construction, as the Engineer may elect to observe the assembly and dismantling of the
test prototypes.
4. Tests shall not be carried out without prior notice of at least 7 days being given to the Engineer.
5. Prior to testing, sufficient time shall be allowed to permit all chemically curing sealants to achieve
their proper cure as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
6. Before the test is begun, the exterior face of the specimen shall be thoroughly washed using a mild
additive-free detergent and then rinsed.
7. Testing shall be carried out by an independent laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.
8. The prototypes shall be tested for air permeability, water leakage, and wind load resistance, plus
additional structural loading tests as necessary to demonstrate that the work is capable of
accommodating the building movements while maintaining the performance of the work.
9. Details of the testing procedures shall be provided to the Engineer for review and comment.
B. Standard Test Apparatus and Calibration

17 September 2015
1. Submit details of the following equipment intended for use in the testing process:
a) Test chamber.
b) Air system.
c) Water spray system.
d) Pressure measuring apparatus.
e) Airflow metering system.
f) Water flow metering system.
g) Deflection measuring devices.
h) Calibration.
C. Air Permeability Tests
1. Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E283.
2. Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E283.
D. Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests
1. Tests shall be carried out adopting either the static or the dynamic procedures, as appropriate to
the system type and expected conditions, set out below:
a) Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
b) Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
2. Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
E. Wind Resistance Tests
1. Perform wind tunnel testing as specified in the Structural Specification, to establish various governing
wind pressures for the wall assembly.
2. Structural performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind load design pressure when tested
according to ASTM E330.
3. Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind load design pressures
when tested according to ASTM E330.
F. Structural Test Performance in accordance with ASTM E330 as follows.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150% of positive and negative wind load design pressures, assemblies, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of
main framing members exceeding 0.2% of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
G. Off-Site Test Sequence
1. The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
2. No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the Testing Authority.

17 September 2015
3. If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken. However, If any
modification is undertaken that, in the opinion of the independent testing authority or witness,
invalidates earlier test results, the sequence shall commence again at the first test. This requirement
is not applicable to glass breakage during the wind resistance safety test when replacement of a
pane of glass may be carried out without re-starting the whole sequence.
H. Acoustic Testing - Initial Advance Test
1. Identify the glass configurations and incorporate any acoustically enhanced configurations that may
be necessary to meet the Specification.
2. Immediately following the appointment of the curtain walling Subcontractor, arrange laboratory
acoustic tests of the proposed glass configurations using similar framing to that intended with similar
dimensions and mass per meter run of framing. These prototypes shall not be used as visual samples
and shall not include glass coatings or heat treatments, but shall be used to confirm compliance
with the specified acoustic data.
3. From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each cladding type
for review.
I. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, examine the structural openings, substrate, adjacent construction and
the conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and levels, and surfaces to receive
the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine areas, with Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Maintain materials dry during installation.
B. Tolerances and Setting Out
1. Measured and monitor tolerances at a mean temperature acceptable to the Engineer.
2. Prior to commencing installation agree in writing with Engineer the method of dimensional setting-
out and cross-checking with adjoining work to achieve the required accuracy. The checking of lines
and levels by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for their correctness.
3. Site Erection:
a) Horizontal Plan Position: For any element at any level whose position is defined in relation to
a primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the design dimension to that
reference grid is ±2mm.
b) Where a series of elements are arranged in an array of 2 or more, the maximum allowed
deviation of the horizontal distance between any 2 adjacent elements is ±2mm from the
corresponding design dimension.
c) Verticality: For any element connecting 2 or more reference levels, the maximum allowed
deviation of the relative plan position in any direction of that element at any 2 successive levels
is ±2mm from the corresponding design dimension.
d) Planarity: Any element or group of elements whose position is defined from a reference plane
shall not deviate from the design dimension of the reference plane by more than ±2mm
measuring perpendicular to the defined plane.
C. Fastening to Adjacent Construction:

17 September 2015
3. Do not cut, drill or otherwise modify the work of others, unless indicated on the Shop Drawings or
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
4. Attach brackets by bolting, unless otherwise accepted. Do not modify brackets on Site; redesign
and re-manufacture at shop.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Install work plumb, square, at the correct level true to line, properly fitted and aligned with adjacent
work and planes flat. Set assemblies without distortion.
and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
5. Do not install damaged components.
6. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
7. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
8. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration
and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
9. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect

glazing surfaces from welding.
10. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
11. Make allowances for structural movements and deviations including deformations caused by the
installation, including weight of the assemblies on its supporting structure. Refer to the Structural
Specification and information document. In the absence of information make allowances as
instructed by the Structural Engineer.
12. Accurately drill, tap or otherwise prepare adjacent construction for attachments and supports.
13. Fastening and Anchoring: Install fastenings and anchoring devices in accordance with the
B. Metal Protection
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 Glazing.
D. Touch up galvanizing to bolts, welds and burned or scratched surfaces.
E. Apply damp-proof membranes as indicated, to substrates free of dust, grease, cavities, ridges and sharp
projections. Prime surfaces, apply adhesive and install membranes as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer. Lap membrane ends minimum 100mm.

17 September 2015
F. Movement: Install movement joints. Keep joints clear of obstructions. Prevent friction between moving
surfaces to ensure unrestricted and noiseless movement.
G. Install vapor barriers on the warm side of the thermal insulation. Provide a continuous air and vapor tight
seal at interfacing joints and intersections between assemblies and the building structure.
H. Installed work to be true to detail with continuous profiles, free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves,
or damage.
I. All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using other
J. Gaskets shall be free from contact with materials that have stain characteristics and be compatible with
all substrate, sealants and all other materials used in the Works.
K. Adhesives
1. Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound, unfrozen and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and materials
recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
usage of adhesives.

L. Fastening Directly to Structure
design.
M. Installation Tolerances, Non-Cumulative
1. Level:
a) In horizontal bands, each corner of the curtain wall panel to be within 2mm of the design
dimension to the corresponding Horizontal Location Reference Plane.
b) Bottom edge of each curtain wall panel to be along the mean level of the respective bottom
corners, and to within ±1mm of the design dimensions from the corresponding Location
Reference Plane.
2. Plumbness: Each exterior face (reference face) of the exterior curtain wall panel - visible face for
single side exposure panels - to be installed such that the respective offset distances of the top and
bottom edges of the panel relative to an adjacent true vertical line do not differ by more than 2mm
or 0.1% of the height of the panel, whichever is less.
3. Panel Plan Alignment: Distances of respective corners of the reference face of the curtain wall panel
Location Reference Plane to be within 3mm of the design dimension and not differ from each other
by more than 2mm. This applies both to the top and bottom edges of each panel.

17 September 2015
4. Transom Alignment: The misalignment between the edge of a curtain wall panel and its supporting
transom shall not exceed 1mm.
5. Joints: Maximum allowed step across joints of adjacent elements designed to have edges, lines or
surfaces which line through their common joint, is the lesser of ±2mm or ±10% of the joint width in
any direction.
6. Limit deviations from lines, planes and verticality to long wave formations of minimum wave length
of 20m length with a rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm,
and measured using an optical or laser reference line.
primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the design dimension to that reference
grid is ±2mm.
8. Where a series of curtain wall assemblies are arranged in an array of 2 or more, the maximum
allowed deviation of the horizontal distance between any 2 adjacent assemblies is ±2mm from the
corresponding design dimension.
9. Verticality: For curtain wall assemblies connecting 2 or more reference levels, the maximum allowed
deviation of the relative plan position in any direction of those assemblies at any 2 successive levels
is ±2mm from the corresponding design dimension.
10. Planarity: Any curtain wall assembly or group of assemblies whose position is defined from a
reference plane shall not deviate from the design dimension of the reference plane by more than
±2mm when measured perpendicular to the defined plane.
N. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the Works.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Site Tests and Inspections: Perform the specified tests and inspections using a suitably experienced
quality manager.
1. Dimensional and verticality check on structural openings.
2. Level survey of the top of each structural opening.
C. Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the curtain wall manufacturer
to do Site visits for 1 full day at the start of the installation, and once weekly as the work progresses.
Technical representative to provide surveillance of the materials installation, and monitor and report
installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
D. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls shall
take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified
requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory
testing but not more than 2.25 L/ sec/ m² of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E783
at a minimum static air pressure differential of 75Pa.
a) Test Area: 1 bay wide, but not less than 9100mm, by 1 story of glazed aluminum curtain wall.

17 September 2015
b) Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by the Engineer.
2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform
and cyclic static air pressure differential of 0.67 times the static air pressure differential specified
for laboratory testing, but not less than 300Pa, and shall not evidence water penetration.
a) Test Area: 1 bay wide, but not less than 9100mm, by 1 story of glazed aluminum curtain wall.
b) Perform a minimum of 3 No. tests in areas as directed by the Engineer.
3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by the Engineer
shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
a) Test Area: A minimum area of 23m by 1 story of glazed aluminum curtain wall.
E. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. Cleaning
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers, and without
B. Adjusting
3.6 PROTECTION
adhesive film. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for inspection; remove immediately before
Taking-Over.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Structural Silicone Maintenance
1. Document an on-going inspection/ maintenance program for the structural silicone and employ
accepted Testing Authorities to carry out these inspections which shall include the following:
a) Cleaning: Specify acceptable detergents and methods to be used.
b) Inspection: Provide forms to be filled out periodically, each pre-dated with the inspection date
and an adequate quantity for the design life of the building. The form shall state the full procedure
for the inspection.
c) Sample Cut-out: Provide forms for periodic cut-out of structural seals and weather seals to
check shore hardness and tensile properties of the seal.
d) Each of the procedures shall clearly state pass/ fail criteria and indicate action required when
a failure is obtained as a result. The Testing Authority shall be required to produce a report
based on its findings and recommendations for any remedial works to the Engineer.

17 September 2015
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 085113 -- ALUMINUM WINDOWS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 7
2.4 HARDWARE 8
2.5 ACCESSORIES 9
2.6 FABRICATION 9
2.7 FINISHES 9
PART 3 EXECUTION 10
3.1 EXAMINATION 10
3.2 PREPARATION 10
3.3 INSTALLATION 10

Tender Issue 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
17 September 2015
SECTION 085113 -- ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Fixed and operable aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 085113 / 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
17 September 2015
7. A Method Statement detailing proposals to achieve the specified tolerances shall be submitted with
the Tender. This shall demonstrate a clear understanding of the construction program, the effects
of the building structure and construction method and the fabrication method of the panels.
9. Provide a condensation risk assessment with the Tender return based upon the psychrometric
1. Samples of framing and sill members minimum 300mm long in the proposed color and finish.
2. Glass samples of each proposed type minimum 500mm x 500mm size.
3. Typical hardware components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating handle,
hinge and locking device.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
9. Quality Plan.
a) A Method Statement detailing proposals to achieve the specified tolerances shall be submitted
with the Tender. This shall demonstrate a clear understanding of the construction program, the
effects of the building structure and construction method and the fabrication method of the
panels.
11. Provide a condensation risk assessment with the Tender return based upon the psychrometric
1. Samples of framing and sill members minimum 300mm long in the proposed color and finish.
2. Glass samples of each proposed type minimum 500mm x 500mm size.
3. Typical hardware components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating handle,
hinge and locking device.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
cleaning frequency.
A. Contractor Qualifications
1. A Contractor acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this
Project.
3. Contractor's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume

engineering responsibility.
4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop Drawings,
based on testing and engineering analysis of the manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar
to those indicated for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Fenestration Standard: In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS, "North American
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors",
for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and
fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.
1. Provide either AAMA-certified or WDMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of the glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
E. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
F. Mock-ups
1. An arrangement of components and systems forming a visual and conceptual model of the Work
including interfaces with adjacent components and structure.
G. Prototypes
1. A section of the Work comprising not less than one complete window assembly in the proposed
materials and finishes.
H. Quality Benchmark Installation
1. The first fully installed and completed part of the work.
J. Site Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by Site measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on the Shop Drawings.

17 September 2015
1. Established Dimensions: Where Site measurements cannot be made without delaying the work,
establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without Site
measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
K. Life Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS.
L. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS for
operating window types indicated.
M. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150% of the design pressure.
N. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must
be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size in accordance with requirements
for performance class.
A. Delivery: Deliver assemblies and components to Site suitably protected from damage, staining or
corrosion in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protective coverings shall not cause non-
uniformity in finishes, impart residue affecting the adhesion of sealants, or cause defects to items when
removed. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name
B. Storage: Store materials in a dry, protected location, off the ground, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Prevent damage or marring of finished surfaces.
C. Handling: Handle materials using methods and equipment to avoid damage to members or finished
surfaces. Replace work that is damaged or which cannot be satisfactorily re-finished on Site to the
1.7 WARRANTY
aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Failure to meet performance requirements.
b) Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or

condensation.
c) Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d) Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering.
e) Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a) Window: 3 years from date of Taking-Over.
b) Glazing: 10 years from date of Taking-Over.
c) Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Taking-Over.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

17 September 2015
equivalent:
1. Shuco.
2. Hartmann.
3. Kawneer.
4. Hueck.
5. Spectrum.
6. Technal.
B. Source of Supply: Obtain products for each item from a single manufacturer.
C. Type EWG-601 Aluminum Window
1. Description: Aluminum window, double glazed fixed into openings including glass, gaskets, sealants,
window furniture and all accessories.
3. Framing:
a) Framing Material: Aluminum.
b) Finish: Heat-reflective super durable powder coating.
c) Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
d) Size and Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Glazing: Aluminum windows used two types of glazing to different locations:
a) Type GL-101 Clear Glass. Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
b) Type GL-105 Tempered Glass. Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
6. Hardware: Refer to Hardware Schedule.
7. Thermal Properties: As indicated on the thermal performance requirements below.
A. Windborne Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windborne
debris, based on the pass/ fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those
specified, according to ASTM E1886 and the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) and
municipality codes.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections,
and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67°C, ambient; 100°C material surfaces.
C. Moisture Movement

17 September 2015
1. The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the specified
performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of their components, resulting from variations in the
D. Atmospheric Conditions: All Work shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
E. Weather and Water Penetration Resistance
1. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/ WDMA referenced test methods at a
water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/
NAFS, Water Resistance Test:
a) Test Pressure: 15% of positive design pressure, but not less than 140Pa or more than 720Pa.
b) Test Pressure: 20% of positive design pressure, but not more than 720Pa.
2. The work shall be absolutely weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water leakage
onto the internal face of the work.
3. The work, including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building, shall be fully
weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and other
movements.
4. The construction of the work shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall remain rigid and
accommodate all thermal, building structure or other movements and any applicable loads without
compromising their watertightness. All movement joints shall also be designed and constructed to
accommodate such loads or movements without compromising the glazing's watertightness.
F. Local Factors
1. Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the location
shall be selected.
2. An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors likely
to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the Contract. More appropriate materials
shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
G. Thermal Performance Requirements
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor

maximum indicated at 24km/ hr exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested
in accordance with either AAMA 1503, ASTM E1423 or NFRC 100.
a) Double glazed assembly, including frame: 2.0 W/ m²K or better.
2. No cold bridging shall occur through the framing elements of the work. The average U-value shall
comply with the above requirements.
3. Submit thermal calculations for the various components and the average thermal performance.
4. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance
in accordance with AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45/ 52.
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC
maximum of 0.40/ 0.50/ 0.55, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
H. Glass Performance Requirements: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
I. Air Permeability/ Infiltration
1. The construction shall prevent airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through joints/
junctions to avoid areas of concentrated airflow.

17 September 2015
2. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested in accordance with AAMA/ WDMA
101/ I.S.2/ NAFS, Air Infiltration Test:
a) Maximum rate for R, C and LC performance classes: 5 m³/ h x m² of area at an inward test
pressure of 75Pa.
b) Maximum rate for HC and AW performance classes: 5 m³/ h x m² of area at an inward test
pressure of 300Pa.
c) Maximum rate for HC and AW performance classes: 2 m³/ h x m² of area at an inward test
pressure of 300Pa.
3. Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at any one location.
4. Provide actual air leakage results from tests for acceptance by the Engineer.
J. Condensation
1. Condensation shall not form, either on internal or exterior surfaces of framing members, glazing,
solid panels, or interstitially within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the Work, such
that it may lead to damage or staining.
2. Interstitial cavities within the construction, where condensation may occur, shall be adequately
drained and ventilated to the outside, such that the formation of such condensation shall not be
detrimental to the performance nor cause damage or staining of the Work.
K. Capillarity: The Detailed Design shall eliminate any possibility of water migration to the inside of the
building due to capillarity.
L. Acoustic Performance Requirements: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
M. Fire
N. Durability: The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated in the
O. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard
(including glass coatings) to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2. Impact tests shall be carried out on all work assemblies in accordance with the conditions specified
in ICC's International Building Code, unless stated otherwise.
P. Demountability
maintenance.
2. The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of these or adjacent
work.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 150mPa ultimate tensile strength,
not less than 110mPa minimum yield strength, and not less than 1.6mm thickness at any location for the
main frame and sash members.

17 September 2015
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by
manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 3.2mm thick, reinforce
interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard,
non-corrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners.
For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened,
as appropriate.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron in
accordance with ASTM B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/ chrome-plated steel in

accordance with ASTM B456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron in
accordance with ASTM B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping for permanently resilient
sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when aluminum window is closed
from the following options.
1. Weather Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets in accordance with ASTM C509.
2. Weather Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets in accordance with ASTM C864.
3. Weather Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials in accordance with
AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS.
4. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid, polypropylene
sheet or polypropylene coated material, in accordance with AAMA 701/ 702.
F. Replaceable Weather Seals: In accordance with AAMA 701/ 702.
G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
H. Glazing
1. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Section 088800 Glazing for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
2. Dual Action Windows: Provide pivoting unit for double glazing, constructed of 1 No. sheet of glass
in a removable sash for access to interior of unit, installed with airtight gaskets.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon
steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed
to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate
sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
Where exposed, provide extruded aluminum.
B. Sill Cap/ Track: Extruded-aluminum track with natural anodized finish of thickness, dimensions, and
profile indicated; designed in accordance with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the
exterior.
C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in
direction indicated and operated from the inside only.
D. Push-Bar Operators: Provide telescoping-type, push-bar operator designed to open and close ventilators
with fixed panels.

17 September 2015
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Window Cleaner Anchor Bolts: Provide window cleaner anchor bolts of standard design, complying with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Fabricate bolts of nonmagnetic stainless steel.
1. Reinforce window units or mullions to receive bolts and provide additional anchorage of units at
bolt locations.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components
and anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, low-
conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on
interior side; and in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years and has been
tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate
strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design shear flow
in accordance with the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks
at frame or vent sash.
D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator.
E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration.
G. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as indicated, matching window units, complete with anchors
for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
H. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as indicated, of profile and dimensions
indicated but not less than 1.6mm thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress
smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
I. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for
applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 Glazing and with AAMA/ WDMA
101/ I.S.2/ NAFS.
J. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Section 088000 Glazing and glazing
system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.
2.7 FINISHES
A. General

acceptable if they are within ½ of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same
within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

17 September 2015
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with the Contractor
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system; and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor
retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight
window installation. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Brackets, Support Framework and Attachments: Accurately set out the work. Drill the supporting structure
to receive brackets, support framework and attachments. Attach items using bolts, unless accepted
otherwise. Do not Site-modify support brackets which will not function as designed. Separate dissimilar
materials as necessary to avoid galvanic corrosion and effectively seal around penetrations through
waterproof membranes and the cladding.
B. Fastening to Adjacent Construction
3. Do not cut, drill or otherwise modify the work of others, unless indicated on the Shop Drawings or
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
4. Attach brackets by bolting, unless otherwise accepted. Do not modify brackets on Site; redesign
and re-manufacture at shop.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows,
hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement,
anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent
construction.
C. Joints Between Panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more
than ±2mm or 10% of the joint width whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally distributed
with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 2mm.
D. Level: The Work shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the same
locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
E. Plumbness: The Work shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 3mm from its
theoretical vertical/ diagonal plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel shall
not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane shall be within ±2mm of the theoretical plane position.
F. Sufficient analysis of the erection sequence shall be undertaken to ensure that the installation tolerances
stated above shall be met to the acceptance of the Engineer.
G. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
H. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating
within windows to the exterior.
I. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
of contact with other materials.
J. Connect automatic operators to building electrical system.

17 September 2015
K. Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and
crosschecking with adjacent trades and elements to satisfy the accuracy requirements shall be submitted
L. Alternative Tolerances: Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the Engineer's
discretion, provided they are agreed in advance of manufacture of components.
M. The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in manufacture of the work in order to
accommodate manufacturing tolerances of interfacing elements.
N. The tolerances stated herein shall be adhered to. No revisions to the tolerances to cater for inadequate
control shall be permitted.
O. The work, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting and shall be strictly rigid, firm, free
from vibration, knocking, rattles, squeaks and other noises when subject to the worst combination of
P. All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with the
Engineer.
Q. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Install in accordance with Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
R. Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding
1. Bonding to metal components shall be provided, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections,
both vertically and horizontally over the whole façade. Bonding between sections shall have a
minimum cross section of 50mm².
2. Bonding to structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals as indicated on the Design Drawings.
The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at the highest floor level of each part
of the building.
3. Provide studs/ bolts for subsequent connection.
5. No straps shall be fastened along copings.
S. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
T. Fastening Directly to Structure
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows.
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed
according to AAMA 502, Test Method A or Test Method B, by applying same test pressures required
to determine compliance with AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS in Part 2 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
2. Testing Extent: 3 No. mock-up windows as selected by the Engineer and a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately after installation.
3. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502.

17 September 2015
C. Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the window manufacturer to do
Site visits for 1 full day at the start of the installation, and once weekly as the work progresses. Technical
D. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
E. Remove and replace non-complying aluminum window and retest as specified above.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove debris from the Site and clean exposed surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Leave work clean, blemish-free, and adequately protected
against damage from construction operations. Final clean after removing temporary protection;
remove adhesive residues, dirt and fingerprints. Safely dispose of waste materials.
2. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean
surfaces.
B. Adjusting
1. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, panels, hardware, operators, and accessories for a tight
fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
4. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
C. Protection
1. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and
masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other
contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain window operating system. Refer to the Division 01 General Requirements,
Section 017900 Demonstration and Training.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 087100 -- DOOR HARDWARE 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 3
1.7 WARRANTY 5
1.8 COORDINATION 5
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS 6
2.4 MATERIALS 9
2.5 FABRICATION 13
2.6 FINISHES 15
PART 3 EXECUTION 15
3.1 EXAMINATION 15
3.2 PREPARATION 16
3.3 INSTALLATION 16
3.6 PROTECTION 19

Tender Issue 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
17 September 2015
SECTION 087100 -- DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a) Swinging doors.
b) Sliding doors.
c) Folding doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Work Sections.
3. Electrified door hardware.
3. Door Hardware Schedule.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 087100 / 1 DOOR HARDWARE
17 September 2015
9. Master key system.
10. Manufacturer: The Contractor shall confirm the door hardware manufacturer at the time of Tender.
1. 3 No. Full-size unit samples of hardware of each type in specified finish.
a) Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit
Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of Door Hardware Schedule.
b) Full-size Samples shall be returned to the Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and Site comparison process may, after final check of
operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.
2. A complete sample board of standard items. The exact extent to be agreed.
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Detail fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation
procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of door hardware.
a) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule after or concurrent with submissions of
Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware
schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work
that is critical in Project construction schedule.
b) Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the
Contract Documents.
c) Content: Include the following information:
1. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.
2. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to the Design Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
3. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size,
quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
4. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other
building control systems.
5. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7. Mounting locations for door hardware.
8. List of related door devices specified in other Work Sections for each door and frame.
2. Keying Schedule: Detail the Employer's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying
diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract
Documents.

17 September 2015
3. Shop Drawings. Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:
a) Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal and control wiring and including the following:
b) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.
c) Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware.
4. Product data on materials and components for use. For each type of product indicated. Include
construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles and finishes.
the materials/ products.
6. Statement of manufacturer's review confirming suitability of specified materials/ products.
7. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
8. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer.
a) Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors
complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
9. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of
comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for
door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
1. 3 No. Full-size unit samples of hardware of each type in specified finish.
a) Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit
Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of Door Hardware Schedule.
b) Full-size Samples shall be returned to the Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and Site comparison process may, after final check of
operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.
2. A complete sample board of standard items. The exact extent to be agreed.
1. Warranties.
and cleaning frequency for each type of door hardware.
a) Include final hardware and keying schedule.
B. Locks, Cylinders and Keys: All keys shall be labeled and handed over upon completion to the Engineer,
in sealed containers.
1. Key Handover:
a) At Taking-Over, account for and adequately label all keys.
b) Provide the Engineer with an itemized schedule and retain a duplicate schedule as a receipt.
c) The master keys shall be issued by the cylinder/ key supplier direct to the Engineer.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

17 September 2015
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Door Hardware: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
2. Electrical Parts: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
A. Standards: Comply with the codes of practice and publications of the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
and Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) and optionally the Door and Hardware
Federation (DHF) and the Guild of Architectural Ironmongers (GAI).
B. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by the
product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies
similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting

services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an Electrified Hardware
Consultant (EHC) or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC).
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless
otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
E. Hardware Compliance Marking: All markings shall be on an area of the item that will not be visible when
installed.
1. BHMA Certified Marking (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association):
a) All items of hardware shall be BHMA Certified marked in accordance with applicable ANSI/
BHMA standard.
2. UL Marking (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.):
a) All items of hardware shall be UL marked in accordance with appropriate safety requirements
and applicable ANSI/ UL standards.
3. CE Marking (Conformité Européenne):
a) All items of electrified hardware shall be CE marked in accordance with the essential
requirements set out in European Directives.
G. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
H. Prototypes
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
1. First item of hardware installed of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of
the Engineer.
A. Delivery: Deliver hardware in the manufacturer's unopened boxes, complete with fastenings, instructions,
installation templates and special cutting tools.
B. Storage: Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
the Site.
1. Store hardware in a clean, dry and secure space. Store keys in a locked cabinet.
C. Handling: Arrange the hardware in door sets, clearly identified with applicable door numbers and locking.
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include installation instructions, templates and necessary fasteners with each item
or package.
2. Package construction keys and final keys separately with individual tags identified in accordance
with the key schedule. Deliver the final keys directly to the Employer.
3. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to the Employer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty
1. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

door hardware which fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering
and use.
b) Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Taking-Over, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: 5 years from date of Taking-Over.
2. Exit Devices: 2 years from date of Taking-Over.
3. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Taking-Over.
4. Concealed Floor Closers: 25 years from date of Taking-Over.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring
inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in the Structural
Specification.
B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared.
Check the Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing door hardware in accordance with the indicated requirements.
C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with the Employer's security
consultant.
D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with
connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

17 September 2015
E. Existing Openings: Where door hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, Site verify existing conditions
and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door
operation.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions for the Employer's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Taking-Over, provide 6 months' full maintenance by skilled employees
of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or
defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware
operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation
of original products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Door Hardware Schedule
1. Door Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and developed in later design stages. The Door
Hardware Schedule shall indicate selected door hardware for each door.
B. General
1. Designations: The Door Hardware Schedule shall indicate requirements for design, grade, function,
finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware. Products shall be identified
by using door hardware designations, as follows:
a) References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
2. Select products suitable for conditions of use and for weight of doors.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: Hardware shall be consistent in color and texture both individually and collectively.
B. Design Life of Hardware: 30 years.
C. Hardware to wood or metal doors, glass door, overhead coiling doors, access panels, and all other door
types, shall be generally of one internationally recognized, fully coordinated hardware set, in continuing
production of consistent design and finish, with a ready supply of extras and spares. Hardware to fully
glazed metal units shall match designs and finishes of other hardware and comply with the Specification.
D. Hardware shall reflect the use(s) and quality of the Project, facilitate building use and maintenance,
prevent unauthorized access or egress, allow and direct escape from the building, protect against and
inhibit spread of fire, smoke and other hazards, protect doors and surfaces and enhance desired aesthetic
effects. Advise the Engineer of any item not meeting these requirements.
E. Door Closing Devices
1. All closers shall be from a product series of matching closers from one manufacturer, offering a
complete range of optional functions, such as mechanical and/ or electromagnetic stand-open and
delayed closing.
2. Unless otherwise stated, closers shall have the following features:
a) Hydraulic control from 180°.
b) Be thermo-constant.
c) Separate adjustable closing speed.

17 September 2015
d) Separate adjustable latching speed.
e) Separate sweep and latch valve.
f) Self-adjusting backcheck.
g) Fully adjustable delayed closing function.
3. Spring strength and delayed action functions shall be fully adjustable by means of an Allen key, or
acceptable equivalent, for ease of use.
4. Overhead closers shall:
a) Be matched to the sizes and weights of doors.
b) Override latches and/ or door seals when fitted.
c) Hold unlatched doors shut under normal working conditions.
F. Locks, Cylinders and Keys
1. Unless otherwise specified, keyed locks shall be of the pin tumbler, cylinder type, with a minimum
of 6 pins. Double cross cut or side-pin cylinders shall be removable when the door is open but shall
not be removable when the door is closed.
2. Where cylinders are fitted with an inside turn, this shall be with an easi-grip pattern.
3. The lock recess to fire doors shall be lined with intumescent card.
G. Self-Closing Floor Spring Hinges
1. Floor spring hinges shall be heavy-duty, fully adjustable, hydraulic check types. All floor springs
throughout the work shall be from a single product series of matching units, from one manufacturer,
offering a complete range of optional functions, such as mechanical stand-open and delayed closing.
Unless otherwise stated, floor springs shall have the following features:
a) Fully reversible, non-handed and suitable for single or double action wood or metal doors,
using compatible fittings, with concealed fixing top plates to match other hardware and with
no visible manufacturer's markings.
b) Closing speed adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds.
c) All floor springs on fire-rated doors shall incorporate delayed closing and the door, when opened
to 90° or beyond, shall stand open for an adjustable period up to not less than 60 seconds
before closing. All floor springs to non-fire rated doors shall have a mechanical stand-open at
90° in either direction.
d) Opening/ closing through 90° in either direction, with check control from any angle between
85° and closed.
e) Overload protection, to prevent damage from forced closing.
f) Special reinforced galvanized main boxes allowing vertical, longitudinal and transverse
adjustment after installation, with waterproof seal.
H. Door Stops and Holders
1. Suitable stops and holders shall be provided where required to protect doors, hardware or surfaces.
They shall have robust holders matching other hardware on the door and rubber inserts, which can
be replaced easily using simple tools without removing the unit. Stainless steel doorstops shall be
provided to doors scheduled for stainless steel hardware, and aluminum doorstops for doors
scheduled for aluminum hardware.
2. For other doors select door stop and holder types according to the following order of preference:

17 September 2015
a) Where appropriate, wall base mounted door stops/ holders shall be installed. If fitted to drywall
or other hollow construction, allowance for building in suitable provisions to receive required
bumpers shall be made.
b) Where wall base mounted door stops/ holders are inappropriate, floor mounted doorstops shall
be installed with expansion shield type fastening devices.
c) If wall and floor mounted stops are inappropriate, wall base buffer type stops shall be installed.
d) If wall and floor mounted and wall base type stops are inappropriate, concealed fixed galvanized
steel overhead limit stays shall be installed and the stays shall be painted to match the doors
and frames. On non-fire rated doors, limit stays shall be fitted with stand-open facility, if required.
I. Emergency Exit Devices
1. Emergency exit devices shall be suitable for the size of door leaf and with horizontal actuating bars
which operate when pushed or pulled downwards, at any point on their effective length. They shall
have door catches, which automatically hold bolts in the withdrawn position on operation and release
them when fully closed.
2. Panic devices generally shall be of mortise types (with concealed latches or vertical bolts) finished
identically to other hardware and incorporating security anti-thrust devices.
a) In transformer rooms or the like, rim mounted enameled steel panic devices shall be acceptable.
J. Flush pulls, pull handles and drawer pulls shall be from accepted, suitably sized units, from the same
range as the door hardware.
A. The work shall retain its specified appearance and performance when maintained in accordance with an
accepted maintenance program, without:
1. Malfunction of operating components during normal usage due to defective products or

workmanship.
2. Loss or loosening of fastenings.
3. Corrosion resulting in a malfunction of operating components, pitting or defects due to contact with
users or natural elements in the environment.
4. Discoloration or unacceptable changes in appearance.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware
rated for use in assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252
or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305.
D. Fire Exit Devices: Devices in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on
testing in accordance with UL 305 and NFPA 252.
E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are
required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 3m³/ min/ m² at the tested pressure differential of 75Pa
of water.
F. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
G. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 67N to release the latch. Locks do not require
use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

17 September 2015
H. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC/ ANSI
A117.1 and Dubai Civil Defense requirements.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 22.2N.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a) Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2N applied perpendicular to door.
b) Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2N applied parallel to door at latch.
c) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 13mm
high and 19mm high for exterior sliding doors.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70°, the door shall take at least
3 seconds to move to a point 75mm from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
I. Hinges
1. Exterior hinges shall be stainless steel with stainless steel pin.
2. Hinges for fire-rated assemblies shall be stainless steel with stainless steel pin.
J. Auxiliary Door Hooks
1. Hat, coat and garment hooks shall be acceptable to the Engineer, with at least 2 fastening points.
In areas vulnerable to abuse, use heavy duty hooks capable of withstanding not less than 100N
applied load without deformation.
a) For precise locations refer to the Design Drawings.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hinges: In accordance with BHMA A156.1.
1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow metal doors and hollow metal
frames.
B. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: In accordance with BHMA A156.17.
C. Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: In accordance with BHMA A156.4.
D. Continuous Hinges: In accordance with BHMA A156.26.
1. Continuous Hinges: Provide minimum 3.0mm thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of
102mm; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components
finished after milling and drilling are complete.
2. Pin-and-Barrel-Type Hinges: Provide stainless steel for interior or exterior hinges and for fire-rated
assemblies provide stainless steel with steel fir pins to hold fire-rated doors in place if required by
tested listing.
3. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a
continuous extruded aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.
E. Mechanical Locks and Latches
1. Lock Functions: As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2. Lock Throw: In accordance with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
a) Bored Locks: Minimum 13mm latchbolt throw.

17 September 2015
b) Mortise Locks: Minimum 19mm latchbolt throw.
c) Deadbolts: Minimum 25mm.
3. Lock Backset: 70mm, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lock Trim:
a) Description: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Levers: Cast.
c) Knobs: Wrought.
d) Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.
e) Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
f) Operating Device: Lever Knob with escutcheons (roses).
5. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt in accordance with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to
protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
a) Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with 3-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
b) Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
c) Aluminum Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
d) Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
6. Bored Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.2; Grade 1/ 2; Series 4000.
7. Mortise Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.13; Operational/ Security Grade 1/ 2; stamped steel
case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.
8. Interconnected Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.12; Grade 1/ 2; Series 5000.
9. Roller Latches: BHMA A156.16; Grade 1; rolling plunger that engages socket or catch, with
adjustable roller projection.
10. Push-Pull Latches:Bored, in accordance with BHMA A156.2; Series 4000 [Mortise, In accordance
with BHMA A156.13; Grade 1/ 2; with paddle handles that retract latchbolt; capable of being mounted
vertically or horizontally.
F. Auxiliary Locks
1. Bored Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1/ 2; with strike that suits frame.
2. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1/ 2; with strike that suits frame.
3. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1/ 2; with strike that suits
frame.
4. Push-Button Combination Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5; cylindrical; Grade 1 mortise;
Grade 2; lock opens by entering a 1 to 5 digit code by pushing correct buttons in correct sequence;
automatically relocks when door is closed; with strike that suits frame.
G. Electric Strikes: In accordance with BHMA A156.31; Grade 1/ 2; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
H. Electromagnetic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet
attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by
application indicated.

17 September 2015
1. Delayed Egress Electromagnetic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.24, electrically powered,
with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; depressing push bar for
more than 3 seconds initiates irreversible alarm and 15-second delay for egress. When integrated
with fire alarm, fire alarm voids 15-second delay.
I. Electromechanical Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.25; Grade 1/ 2; motor or solenoid driven;
bored mortise latchbolt mortise deadbolt mortise deadlocking latchbolt; with strike that suits frame.
J. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.25, bored mortise; with internal, battery-
powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism,
and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought steel case, and strike that suits frame.
Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators and ability to program at
the lock.
K. Exit Locks and Alarms: In accordance with BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
L. Surface Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16.
M. Manual Flush Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; minimum 19mm throw; designed for mortising
into door edge.
N. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; minimum 19mm throw;
designed for mortising into door edge.
O. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: In accordance with BHMA A156.3.
P. Lock Cylinders
1. Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide same
manufacturer as for locking devices.
2. Standard Lock Cylinders: In accordance with BHMA A156.5; Grade 1/ 1/ A2; permanent cores that
are interchangeable removable; face finished to match lockset.
3. High Security Lock Cylinders: In accordance with BHMA A156.30; Grade 1/ 2/ 3; Type M, mechanical
E, electrical; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.
4. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys
without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
5. Construction Cores, Temporary: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
Q. Keying
1. Keying System: Factory registered, in accordance with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.
a) No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinder.
b) Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.
c) Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate
cylinders.
d) Great Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a great
grand master key operate cylinders.
e) Existing System:
1. Master key or grand master key locks to the Employer's existing system.
2. Re-key Employer's existing master key system into new keying system.
f) Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
2. Keys: Brass.

17 September 2015
a) Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the
following notation:
1. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
b) Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
1. Cylinder Change Keys: 3 No.
2. Master Keys: 5 No.
3. Grand Master Keys: 5 No.
4. Great Grand Master Keys: 5 No.
R. Key Control System
1. Cabinet: In accordance with BHMA A156.5; provide a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering
envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150% of the number of locks.
a) Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels and key
envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides. Include single cylinder
lock to lock all drawers.
b) Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and
pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.
c) Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding panels,
envelopes, and cross-index system.
2. Key Lock Boxes (for Fire and Medical Emergency Personnel use): Designed for storage of 10 keys,
with tamper switches to connect to intrusion detection system.
3. Key Control System Software: In accordance with BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; provide a multiple-index
system for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and
printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.
a) Cross-Index System: Multiple-index system for recording key information. Include 3 receipt
forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by the key control manufacturer installer.
S. Operating Trim: In accordance with BHMA A156.6; aluminum/ stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
T. Accessories for Pairs of Doors
1. Coordinators: In accordance with BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and
inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in,
adjustable safety release.
2. Carry-Open Bars: In accordance with BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before
the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves
of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
3. Astragals: In accordance with BHMA A156.22.
U. Surface Closers: In accordance with BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep
and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged steel main arm. Comply with the
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure
to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet Site
conditions and requirements for opening force.
V. Concealed Closers: In accordance with BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable
sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with the manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet Site conditions and requirements for
opening force.

17 September 2015
W. Closer Holder Release Devices: In accordance with BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with
separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on
interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system loss
of power.
X. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or
aluminum base metal.
Y. Electromagnetic Door Holders: In accordance with BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; provide wall-mounted
electromagnetic/ single floor-mounted electromagnet single/ floor-mounted electromagnet double unit
with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm
system for labeled fire-rated door assemblies.
Z. Overhead Stops and Holders: In accordance with BHMA A156.8.
AA. Door Gasketing: In accordance with BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.000774m³/ m of crack
length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested in accordance with ASTM E283; with resilient
or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the
manufacturer.
BB. Thresholds: In accordance with BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
CC. Sliding Door Hardware: In accordance with BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails,
hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
DD. Folding Door Hardware, General: In accordance with BHMA A156.14; complete sets including overhead
rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides and accessories indicated.
EE. Metal Protective Trim Units: In accordance with BHMA A156.6; armor plates, provide kick plates, mop
plates, stretcher plates and edge/ cap door edging fabricated from 1.3mm thick aluminum/ brass/ stainless
steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
FF. Plastic Protection Plates: In accordance with BHMA A156.6; fabricated with 4 sides beveled.
1. Fabricated from plastic laminate; minimum 3.2mm thick; NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
2. Fabricated from rigid plastic; minimum 1.5mm thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic.
3. Fabricated from acrylic; minimum 3.2mm thick.
GG. Auxiliary Hardware: In accordance with BHMA A156.16.
1. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; minimum diameter 13mm; fabricated
for drilled-in application to frame.
2. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; minimum 16mm x 19mm; fabricated
for drilled-in application to frame.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have the manufacturer's name or trade name
displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish
metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured in accordance with published templates prepared for
machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized
industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips
flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

17 September 2015
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for
units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where
bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the
door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide
sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Fire-Rated Applications: In accordance with NFPA 80.
a) Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1. Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood
doors and frames.
2. Strike plates to frames.
3. Closers to doors and frames.
b) Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1. Surface hinges to doors.
2. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in Door Hardware Institute DHI WDHS.2,
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as
indicated.
D. Hinges: All butt hinges shall be template drilled, shall have removable or fixed pins and shall incorporate
stainless steel bearing washers or the manufacturer's standard antifriction bearing material.
E. Lever Handles
1. Lever handles shall be round in section, minimum 19mm diameter, and be safety shape in form,
with double security fixings incorporating captive screw thread fixings onto the roses or back plates
and positive self-tapping screw fixings onto the spindle.
2. The lever handle shall rotate freely on a ball race type bearing contained in a 25mm diameter cup
welded to the rose or backplate to give minimal wear and friction. The ball bearing cup shall be
countersunk into the door face using the drill provided to ensure stabilized seating for the handle
into the door.
3. All roses shall have a minimum 3mm thickness and be bored and countersunk with star drilling to
accept countersunk back-to-back fittings. The roses shall capture the thread screw onto the
appropriate lever handle. Nylon washers, circlips or star washer fixings are not acceptable.
4. All backplates shall have a minimum 3mm thickness and be bored and countersunk with star drillings
to accept countersunk back-to-back fittings. The backplates shall capture the thread screw onto the
appropriate lever handle. Nylon washers, circlips or star washer fixings are not acceptable.
F. Copies of accepted hardware templates or samples shall be submitted to the door manufacturers and
they shall be held responsible for ensuring that sections and details are suitable for proposed hardware
and for advising the hardware supplier of the door sizes of any doors with thicknesses greater than 54mm
or less than 38mm and of types of fixing devices to be provided for each item.
G. Door Bolts
1. Bolts generally shall be of a high quality flush type, with dovetail returns to resist door damage.
They shall have projecting slides where escape may be required and lever action in other locations.
2. Bolts to plantrooms and duct doors shall be of a good quality anodised aluminum surface type.
Where doors open outward, top bolts shall be necked types, to allow proper fixings.

17 September 2015
3. Bathroom Cubicles: Indicator bolts to WC cubicles shall be of a mortise type, unless door and frame
details are unsuitable, when a surface type shall be permitted. They shall have red/ white outside
indicator and coin operated emergency releases.
H. Metal Protective Trim Units
1. Plates shall be fixed with suitable countersunk screws located 5mm from the edges, with 1 No.
screw at each corner and screws at equal centers, not more than 240mm apart, at top and bottom
edges.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes in accordance with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in Door Hardware Schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable
if they are within ½ of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
A. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Hardware: Submit evidence of testing by an approved laboratory.
B. Provide all necessary test data to demonstrate that the hardware specified satisfies the requirements of
the following standards.
1. Materials and Finishes: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.18.
2. Hinges: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.1, ANSI/ BHMA A156.7, ANSI/ BHMA A156.17 and ANSI/ BHMA
A156.26.
3. Locks/ Latches: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.2, ANSI/ BHMA A156.5, ANSI/ BHMA A156.12 and ANSI/
BHMA A156.13.
4. Door Controls/ Closers: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.4, ANSI/ BHMA A156.8 and ANSI/ BHMA A156.15.
5. Electrically Powered Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.23, ANSI/ BHMA A156.24, ANSI/ BHMA
A156.25 and ANSI/ BHMA A156.31.
6. Exit Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.3 and ANSI/ BHMA A156.29.
7. Architectural Door Trim: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.6.
8. Thresholds: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.21.
9. Auxiliary Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.16.
10. Gasketing and Seals: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.22.
11. Cabinet Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.9.
12. All other testing requirements of the Work Sections of those openings/ frames to which the hardware
shall be attached.
C. The provision of test data does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities with respect to guarantees
provided for the hardware.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

17 September 2015
A. Examine doors and frames, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before
electrified door hardware installation.
C. Verify surfaces to receive the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with NFPA 80 for on-Site door preparation restrictions.
B. Coordinate the cutting of manufactured items to receive hardware with the fabricators of applicable Work
Sections; do not cut manufactured items on Site.
C. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames in accordance
with the Steel Door Institute ANSI/ SDI A250.6.
D. Wood Doors: Provide in accordance with Door Hardware Institute DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended
Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors".
E. Perform the following hardware coordination tasks as required for hardware work indicated.
1. To coordinate the hardware work with other trades and form holes, mortises, chases, recesses,
grooves
2. To reinforce and prepare hollow constructions to receive hardware.
3. To provide wiring, conduits and accessories for electrical items.
4. To protect hardware during construction.
5. To remove fixed items before finishing or decoration processes.
6. To make good finishes, execute protective and decorative painting where required.
7. To adjust, check, clean and lubricate hardware on completion.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights in accordance with the following unless otherwise
indicated or required in accordance with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with Steel Door Institute, ANSI/ SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: Comply with Door Hardware Institute, DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors".
4. Pull Handles: Position centerline of pull directly over and in line with center of lock cylinder.
5. Deadlocks: Position centerline of cylinder directly over center of spindle of lever handle.
6. Push Plates: Position centerline of plate directly over and in line with center of lock cylinder.
7. Signs: 1500mm from finished floor level, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Install each door hardware item in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting
and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished
in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing
work specified in Division 09 Finishes Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have
been completed on substrates involved.

17 September 2015
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors according to industry standards.
3. All items of door hardware shall be supplied complete with stainless steel screws to the type and
length recommended in writing by the manufacturer and suitable for fixing to wood or metal as
appropriate to suit the door leaf and frame.
4. Lever handles shall be fitted positively to roses by screw thread fastening and by countersunk
screws to the spindle. The roses or backplates shall be fitted back to back with countersunk head,
back to back through fixings. All other visible fixings shall have countersunk heads.
5. All items shall be provided with clear fastening instructions and all mortised items and door closing
devices shall be supplied with fastening templates.
C. Install fire-rated door assembly hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 and as tested in accordance with
the applicable NFPA and UL sections by a testing laboratory acceptable to the local authority.
D. Pilot holes to receive woodscrews shall be drilled and fixings stripped or otherwise damaged during
installation shall be replaced. Suitable plastic plugs, where woodscrews are to be fixed to masonry, shall
be provided.
E. All wood or metal doors shall be factory mortised to receive hardware, to ensure correct preparation and
avoid the potential for negation of fire ratings. Site mortising shall not be accepted.
F. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule but not fewer than the
number recommended by the manufacturer for application indicated or 1 No. hinge for every 750mm of
door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as
spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
G. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in
quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than 1 No. intermediate offset pivot for
every door and 1 No. additional intermediate offset pivot for every 750mm of door height greater than
2286mm.
H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule and directed by
the Employer/ Engineer.
2. Furnish permanent cores to the Employer for installation.
I. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as
determined by final keying schedule.
J. Boxed Power Supplies for Electrified Door Hardware: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not
indicated, above accessible ceilings in the designated service rooms. Verify location with the Engineer.
1. Configuration: Provide 1 No. power supply for each door opening; least number of power supplies
required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.
2. Electrical Wiring and Connections: Link electrically operated or remotely controlled hardware to the
building's power supply and building management system as required.
3. Enclose wiring in concealed rigid galvanized steel conduit with cast metal boxes, unless indicated
otherwise.
4. Perform work in accordance with the MEP Specification and local codes.
K. Door Bolts: Bolts shall be provided at the top and bottom of active leaf of the locking double doors. Top
bolts shall have suitable plates or keeps and bottom bolts shall have easy clean sockets.
L. Door Coordinators: Suitable door coordinators shall be provided if both leaves of a pair of rebated edge
doors have closers or latch-bolts.

17 September 2015
1. The door coordinators shall not obstruct other hardware functions nor affect the fire ratings of the
doors.
2. On doors opening outwards, spring type, under-frame mounted door coordinators shall be used. If
doors open inwards, surface mounted types shall be used.
M. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors, and other doors indicated within the Door Hardware
Schedule and indicated on the Design Drawings, in full bed of sealant in accordance with requirements
specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
N. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in the Door Hardware
Schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Provide overhead holders where floor
and wall mountings are impractical.
O. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
P. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
Q. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
A. Hardware shall be installed and checked for correct operation.
1. Each item shall be maintained and protected against damage by other trades.
2. Fastenings stripped or otherwise damaged during installation shall be replaced.
3. Pilot holes to receive woodscrews shall be drilled.
4. Provide suitable plastic plugs, where woodscrews are to be fixed to masonry.
B. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: The Employer shall engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect door hardware and state in each report
whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
2. Certificates of Taking-Over or any other document of authority accepting responsibility may not be
signed by the Engineer until he has received these reports.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion remove waste and unused material from the Site and dispose of safely.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage due to cleaning operations.
3. Clean any dirt or blemishes from exposed surfaces.
4. Wash and rinse in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
6. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
7. Leave exposed work clean and neatly finished.
8. Do not use cleaning materials or processes, which could alter the character of exposed finishes.
B. Cleaning Frequency

17 September 2015
1. For Anodized Finishes: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall be not
less than 18 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
2. For Polyester Powder Coating Finishes: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the
guarantees shall be not less than 12 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
C. Adjusting
1. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit with uniform clearances. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment and in accordance with referenced accessibility requirements.
a) Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from
an open position of 30°.
b) Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.
c) Door Closers: Adjust sweep period in accordance with accessibility requirements and
d) Finish Scratches: Made good scratched surfaces to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 3 months after date of Taking-Over, the Installer's

Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including
adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified
door hardware.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect items and surfaces from damage during construction operations.
B. Protect hardware from damage or abrasion during installation and until handover. Do not install projecting
hardware until doors have been installed.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of Taking-Over.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 General
Requirements, Section 017900 Demonstration and Training.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 088000 -- GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

C. Work Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Work Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Work Section.
1. Curtain wall assembly.
2. External balustrade.
3. Windows.
4. Doors.
5. Glazed entrances.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 088000 / 1 GLAZING
17 September 2015
9. Submit to the Engineer detailed proposals in respect of glass coatings.
1. Glass samples 1200mm x 1200mm of all specified glass types.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
11. Submit to the Engineer detailed proposals in respect of glass coatings.
1. Glass samples 1200mm x 1200mm of all specified glass types.
2. Fire Resistant Glass: Submit technical/ product information on all fire resisting glass proposed for
review by the Engineer. It is recognized that the glass shall not necessarily meet the visual quality
requirements set out in the Specification. Submit details of the visual quality and dimensional limits
of any proposed fire resistant glass for review by the Engineer.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings
1. A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass

manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified
under the National Glass Association's NGA Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the
NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM
C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of the glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Work Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual".
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing" and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped
Glazing Guidelines".
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use".
F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction or the manufacturer's standard safety labeling. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,
type of glass, thickness and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
G. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification

label of a testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether
or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 250°C
and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least 1 component

lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
I. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
J. Mock-ups
K. Prototypes
L. Quality Benchmark Installation: First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location
to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
M. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with
elastomeric glazing sealants.
a) Testing shall not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant
products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

17 September 2015
b) Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques
are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants,
gaskets and glazing channel substrates.
c) Test no fewer than 8 No. samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,
sealant backings, secondary seals and miscellaneous materials.
d) Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
e) For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
2. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Site.
a) Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b) Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
A. Delivery
1. Glass delivered to Site shall be of the required size.
2. Deliver assemblies and component parts to Site suitably protected to prevent damage, staining or
corrosion in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Deliver materials to Site in the
manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name and other qualifying
information.
C. Comply with the insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units
to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change if units are air freighted into the country.
D. Storage: Store materials in a dry, protected location off the ground in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Handling: Handle items carefully to avoid damage and protect pre-finished materials from scratching
during handling and installation. Replace items and materials that are scratched or otherwise damaged
and unsuitable for installation.
C. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by the glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, condensation or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
limits permitted by the sealant manufacturer or below 4.4°C.
D. Loadings: Make allowance for differences between design loadings and loadings during construction
due to erection sequencing, and applicable floor loading conditions when sizing construction and
movement joints.
1.7 WARRANTY

17 September 2015
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which
coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty
period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not
attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in coating.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which the
laminated glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated glass units that deteriorate within specified
warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that
are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to the
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing
vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which the
insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified
warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use
that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to the
manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or
film on interior surfaces of glass.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or an
1. Glaverbel.
2. Pilkington.
3. Guardian.
4. Ford.
5. Cardinal.
B. Type GL-101 Clear Glass
1. Description: Clear tempered safety glass unit including all necessary fasteners and accessories to
complete the installation, to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Thickness: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Size and Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings
5. Coating Layers: Not applicable.
6. Shading Coefficient: To be confirmed by the Engineer if applicable.
7. Framing and Supports: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
a) Framing profiles and other visible components shall utilize similar profiles throughout.
b) All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural
requirements and eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
8. U-value, W/ m²K: To be confirmed by the Engineer; As per Dubai Municipality Resolution No. 66.

17 September 2015
C. Type GL-102 Clear and Frosted Glass
1. Description: Frosted glass from bottom and clear glass from halfway to the top; for interior usage,
including all necessary fasteners and accessories to complete the installation, to toilet locations as
5. Frosted Glass Detail: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6. Framing and Supports
D. Type GL-105 Tempered Glass
1. Description: Tempered glass unit including all necessary framing, accessories and fastenings to
complete the installation.
6. Shading Coefficient: 0.4 as per Dubai Municipality Resolution No. 66.
E. Type GL-201 Spandrel Laminated Glass
1. Description: Laminated safety glass unit, as part of the curtain wall assembly, including all necessary
accessories and fasteners to complete the installation to locations as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
4. Size and Configuration As indicated on the Design Drawings.
5. Coating Finish: Painted finish with aluminum foiled back.
8. Framing and Supports: As indicated on the Design Drawings.

17 September 2015
F. Type GL-202 Laminated Glass
1. Description: Laminated glass unit including all necessary framing, accessories and fastenings to
complete the installation.
G. Type GL-301 Insulated Glass
1. Description: Low-e coated insulated glass unit with glare provisions such as tinting and interlayers
including all necessary framing, accessories and fastenings to complete the installation.
H. Type GL-401, GL-402, GL-403 and GL-404 Insulated and Laminated Glass
1. Description: Laminated safety glass unit including all necessary accessories and fasteners to
complete the installation to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.
a) System: Hermetically sealed double glazed unit comprising
1. Outer Lite: Low-e fully tempered glass; Refer to the Design Drawings for thickness.
2. Air Space: Argon gas fill; Refer to the Design Drawings for width.
3. Inner Lite: Clear, float, fully tempered glass; Refer to the Design Drawings for thickness.

17 September 2015
b) Color and Finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
I. Type GL-501 Fire Rated Glazing
1. Description: Fire rated glass unit with coating providing radiant heat and fire protection as indicated
3. Thickness: 25mm.
7. Fire Class Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Glazing panels as described shall be integral to the glazed systems described in other Work Sections
and as indicated on the Design Drawings to provide a consistent design irrespective of material.
B. Select all glazing materials and systems to comply with the performance requirements.
C. Certain glazing panels shall be used for both vertical and inclined conditions. Make any modifications
necessary for use in all intended conditions, whilst maintaining the visual requirements. Laminated glass
shall be used for single glazed units and the inner/ lower panel of multiple glazed units for inclined/
overhead conditions.
D. Where edges are exposed, including but not limited to bonded and unframed they shall be suitable for
open jointing or weather sealing jointing as described and indicated on the Design Drawings. Propose
the treatment to the visible glass edge for acceptance by the Engineer.
E. Where applicable, include a solid black applied finish to the perimeter of the glazing to conceal the silicone
bonding and frame behind, as accepted by the Engineer through sampling.
F. Spacer bars to double glazed units shall be black.
G. For bolt/ point fixed structural glass assemblies laminated glass shall be used for single glazed units and
the outer and inner panes forming double glazed units. The integrity of double glazed units used in such
assemblies shall be maintained at each hole position using black/ clear bosses, color coordinated sealing
rings and suitable sealants.
H. Provide glass with a color rendering index (Ra) as specified, both for the transmittance and the reflected
spectrum and provide detailed reflected and transmitted spectrum data for the purpose of identifying/
anticipating the possible problems with color reflection. Demonstrate this by provision of full size samples
of each glass type, which shall be viewed under representative lighting conditions and accepted prior to
the material manufacture.

17 September 2015
I. Ensure that glass does not contain impurities, which would detract in any way from the performance of
the glazing system.
J. All glass shall be free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches or any other visible defects unless
described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
K. Mirror glass is not acceptable unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
L. The work shall be designed to ensure that the glazing does not crack or distort or is damaged in any way
through differences of temperature on the surfaces of the glazing.
M. Laminated Glass
1. The Design Drawings shall show the visual requirements of the Engineer. Final selection of glass
type and thickness of each layer, together with type, opacity, density and location of interlayer and
coatings shall be accepted by the Engineer prior to ordering materials.
2. All glass shall meet the color and quality standards set by the Control Samples.
N. Glazing units shall accommodate integrated blinds, where required as part of the system description.
O. References to applied coatings (such as but not necessarily limited to low emissivity (low E), high
performance, acoustic) shall not affect the appearance/ hue of the glass, outside that accepted by the
Engineer through sampling.
P. Where indicated on the Design Drawings, applied finishes, as described, shall be undertaken to the
glazing panels.
Q. Safety manifestation shall be included for all safety glass types used on Site in accordance with IBC
Chapter 24.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective
manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes either basic protection or
enhanced protection testing requirements in ASTM E1996 for its respective Wind Zone when tested
according to ASTM E1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated
for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.
1. Large Missile Test: For glazing located within 9100mm of grade.
2. Small Missile Test: For glazing located more than 9100mm above grade.
3. Large Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as
indicated in the manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below.
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of nominal thickness indicated.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of nominal thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2
computer program, expressed as W/ m²x K.
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC
200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

17 September 2015
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 67°C, ambient; 100°C, material surfaces.
E. Safety Glass: Provide safety glass in accordance with IBC Chapter 24 and tested in accordance with
ANSI Z97.1 and the Consumer Product Safety Commission's CPSC 16 CFR 1201 document.
F. Optical and thermal performance values for glass infill panels shall be confirmed by the Contractor during
the Detailed Design which is to be completed in conjunction with other members of the design team.
Values shall be provided for the following factors, to achieve the performance and visual requirements
defined by the Specification, subject to acceptance by the Engineer through sampling.
1. Light factors:
a) Light transmission factor.
b) Exterior light reflectance.
c) Internal light reflectance.
d) UV radiation transmittance.
2. Solar radiant heat factors:
a) Solar radiant heat transmittance.
b) Exterior solar radiant heat reflectance.
c) Solar radiant heat absorptance/ exterior.
d) Solar radiant heat absorptance/ internal.
e) Solar factor (G-value).
f) Shading coefficient.
3. The requirement for low e coatings.
4. The requirement for high performance coatings.
G. Confirm the total solar transmission (G-value) for each glass type specified for review by the Engineer.
Glass manufacturers and types shall be acceptable to the Engineer only if they meet the performance
and visual requirements defined by the Specification.
H. Damage such as shark teeth, serration hackle, sharp flare, flake chips, rough chips, feathered edges,
shells or other imperfections shall not be acceptable if detrimental to the visual and performance criteria
of the glass.
I. Distortion shall be kept to an absolute minimum with no local defects (such as tong marks) producing
irregular reflections being allowed. All glass shall be manufactured and processed in accordance with
quality control procedures to ISO 9000 which are independently maintained.
J. Stresses in Glazing: Ensure that no glass or glazing combination develops stresses that may lead to
damage of glass, glazing materials, components and/ or framing systems.
K. Where combinations of glass types are used in a unit, the least stringent criteria for viewing shall be used
in accordance with the relevant standards.
L. Fire resisting glass shall provide the fire ratings specified, tested according to NFPA 252 for door
assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
M. Toughened/ Tempered Glass: The use of toughened/ tempered glass shall be justified by risk assessment
and/ or calculations, with the general aim of minimizing its use.
N. Structural Silicone Glazing

17 September 2015
1. Be responsible for the structural silicone glazing based upon the Design Drawings and the
2. Be responsible for the final selection of materials, testing, fabrication, transportation and installation
of the structural silicone glazing, all in accordance with ISO 11600 and/ or other standards specified
and detailed in the Specification and submit samples for review by the Engineer prior to manufacture.
3. The structural silicone glazing shall be carried out in such a manner that will not compromise the
integrity of the double glazed units' edge seals and the specified warranties.
4. Structural silicone glazing application shall only be carried out in an appropriate working environment.
The environment shall be strictly controlled in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions
to maintain temperature, humidity, dust and dirt free conditions in the working environment.
2.4 MATERIALS
B. Glass to be in accordance with the following.
1. Toughened/ Tempered Glass: BS EN 12150 and BS EN 14179: Part 1 for heat soak tested toughened
glass.
2. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication
and installation.
a) Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-
transparent-resin interlayer in accordance with interlayer manufacturer's written
recommendations.
b) Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as required in
accordance with requirements.
c) Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
3. Windborne Debris Impact Resistant Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, and complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with "Windborne Debris Impact Resistance"
Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with other requirements specified. Use materials
that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical
properties after fabrication and installation.
a) Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following in accordance with the interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations:
1. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer.
2. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film.
3. Ionoplast interlayer.
4. Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.
5. Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene

terephthalate film.
b) Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as required in
accordance with the performance requirements.
c) Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
4. Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.

17 September 2015
a) Sealing System: Dual seal, with the manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealing
system.
b) Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
c) Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
5. Fire Protection Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 251, NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
6. Fire Protection Rated Tempered Glass: Fire protection rated tempered glass, complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
7. Fire Protection Rated Laminated Glass: Fire protection rated laminated glass, complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
C. Glazing Gaskets
1. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
a) Neoprene in accordance with ASTM C864.
b) EPDM in accordance with ASTM C864.
c) Silicone in accordance with ASTM C1115.
d) Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber in accordance with ASTM C1115.
2. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene/ EPDM/

silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C509, Type II, black;
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
a) Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-
glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
3. Lock Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with
molded corner units and zipper lock strips, in accordance with ASTM C542, black.
D. Glazing Sealants
1. General:
a) VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
b) Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the sealant
manufacturer based on testing and site experience.
c) Suitability: Comply with the sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
d) Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than
250g/ L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
e) Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full
range.
f) Provide structural silicone adhesive, which shall be obtained from a single source manufacturer
and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.

17 September 2015
g) For marine, or similar environments, the structural silicone shall be resistant to damage from
algae or attack by birds.
2. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant in accordance with ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/ 50, Use NT.
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
5. Glazing Sealant: Acid-curing silicone glazing sealant in accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, Use NT.
6. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies
that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and
fire-protection ratings indicated.
E. Glazing Tapes
1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100% solids elastomeric tape;
nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
recommended in writing by the tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and in
accordance with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
a) AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
b) AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
c) AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
2. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on
both surfaces; and in accordance with AAMA 800 for the following types:
a) AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
b) AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full
bead of liquid sealant.
F. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials
1. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of the manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated,
and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
2. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by the sealant or gasket manufacturer.
3. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, ±5.
4. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by the glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
5. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
Provide hardwood where recommended by manufacturer in fire-rated assemblies.
6. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: In accordance with ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material),
of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
7. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection
rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION

17 September 2015
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, in accordance with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight
chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
D. The method of glazing adopted shall take account of the manufacturing tolerances in the glass, thus
minimizing the effects of distortion resulting.
E. The glass shall be clearly marked to show its intended final position and orientation.
F. Where it is necessary to meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) and any other
H+S requirements of the statutory authorities, manifestation shall be provided in accordance with IBC
Chapter 24. The type of manifestation shall be agreed with the Engineer and samples provided for
acceptance.
1. Manifestation:
a) Location: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Application:
1. Factory Applied: Ceramic fritting, screen printed.
2. Site Applied: Acid etched, vinyl adhesive backed film, etchlite or sand blasting to the
c) Color: As defined in the particular requirements of the IBC and as selected by the Engineer
from the manufacturer's full range of options.
d) Setting Out: Carefully set out manifestations so that upon a visual scan across panels they
have a consistent rhythm and spacing across the length of the façade.
G. Laminated Glass
1. Laminated glass shall consist of a number of sheets of flat glass with polyvinylbutyral (PVB) of not
less than 0.375mm thick, or methyl metacrylate resin interleaving between each layer. The layers
can be clear, translucent or colored depending on the design intentions of the glazing. The glass
may be annealed, heat strengthened or heat soak toughened, as required to meet the performance
2. Laminated glass edges shall be sealed with materials compatible with the interlayer. Delamination
of the laminated glass for any reason shall not be acceptable.
3. The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes shall be cut flush over the width of the pane
to provide even distribution of vertical load to the setting blocks.
H. Toughened/ Tempered Glass
1. All toughened/ tempered glass shall be heat soak tested to BS EN 14179: Part 1 paying particular
attention to temperature and duration of treatment. Demonstrate that the surface temperature of all
glass was maintained at 290°C ±10°C for 2 hours. Keep records of heat soaking for each batch for
QA/ QC inspection purposes before dispatch to Site.
2. Exposed edge working shall be flat ground with small ground arris and have a frosted appearance.
Small shells and/ or chips, exceeding a maximum diameter of 2mm, shall be ground out prior to
toughening.
3. Ensure that glass heat treatment requirements are satisfactory to meet wind, impact, thermal or
other loads anticipated in the work. The manufacturer of the toughened/ tempered glass shall be
made aware of its intended use in the construction. Any drilling and notching shall be carried out
with the agreement of the manufacturer of the toughened/ tempered glass and prior to the toughening
being carried out. All toughened/ tempered glass shall be tempered on a roller heath furnace
eliminating tong marks.

17 September 2015
4. Ensure that the toughening process does not produce iridescence, distortion, roll marks or ripples
in the glass which are unacceptable to the Engineer. Such anticipated imperfections shall be
demonstrated by the provision of full size samples prior to commencement of glass production. The
Engineer shall examine the samples provided and reasonably advise what is acceptable and what
is unacceptable. All glass produced for the Work shall comply with the acceptable samples as a
minimum standard.
5. Prior to commencement of manufacture, advise the Engineer of the glass supplier and the premises
where fabrication and processing shall be carried out.
I. Double Glazed Units
1. Unless otherwise indicated, double glazed units shall be hermetically sealed units. Double glazed
units shall utilize panes of unequal thickness, unless otherwise specified. The outer panes shall be
thicker to minimize the effects of pillowing.
2. Spacers shall be of adequate rigidity for their purpose, be continuous, with bent corners and shall
have welded joints sealed to ensure the integrity of the seal and to provide a consistent moisture
seal around the entire perimeter of the unit. They shall accommodate the seal and contain desiccant,
allowing both to operate at maximum efficiency.
3. Spacers shall separate glass panes and the units shall have a mechanically applied primary
polyisobutylene seal between glass and spacer. This shall provide a continuous vapor-proof barrier
to a minimum width of 2mm and a secondary 2-part silicone seal to the perimeter of the units to
carry wind loads.
4. Drainage of water along edge seals shall not be permitted.
5. All double glazed units shall be assembled in controlled temperature and humidity conditions.
Breather tubes shall be used, if necessary, during manufacture and transportation. These shall be
thereafter removed and the units sealed prior to manufacture.
6. With regard to mechanically restrained glazing systems, the manufacturer shall confirm the
maximum compression allowable on the edge of the units.
7. State the maximum concavity and convexity that will occur under the ambient climatic conditions
and barometer pressure differentials anticipated by the requirements of the Specification.
8. The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes within vertical double glazed units shall be
ground flush over the width of the pane to provide even distribution of load to the setting blocks.
9. Load transfer/ spacers blocks under double glazed units shall be positioned to fully support both
internal and external panes so that neither pane is cantilevered on an edge seal.
J. Structural Silicone Glazing
1. Joint design shall be in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's written recommendations for
glue-line and bite to glue-line ratio, taking into consideration the design wind pressures and panel
sizes.
2. Provide details of tensometer and any other testing equipment as required.
3. Glazing procedures shall include frame assembly, cleaning, priming (if necessary), gunning, tooling
and frame handling after glazing and curing. Sealants shall not be applied when the temperature
is below 4°C and units shall not be moved until the silicone has achieved a level of cure recommended
by the silicone supplier.
4. Adopt silicone batching logging procedures to record all batches used, including batch manufacture
date and arrival date of each batch at the fabrication plant. The location of each structural silicone
glazed panel shall be individually located on As-built Drawings of the building, recording date and
batch of structural silicone, with details of tests carried out to ensure that the highest quality of
silicone is being used.
5. The structural silicone glazing shall be recorded at the time of assembly and shall include
identification marks of every panel by a unique number, readable from the inside of the building for
the life of the building.
K. Tolerances

17 September 2015
1. Toughened/ Tempered Glass: The glass shall conform to the following requirements in the horizontal
toughening process:
a) Maximum Overall Bow: 0.003mm/ mm measured along the glass edge.
b) Maximum Local Bow: The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to trough shall not exceed
0.3mm per 300mm or 0.15mm at the edge.
c) Rollerwave: Glass shall be sized to provide for the consistent and horizontally aligned
orientation of ripples throughout the work. The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to
trough shall not exceed 0.08mm. In any event, state in the Tender submission proposals to
control the extent of rollerwave, if any. Provide full size samples of all specified heat treated
glass to signify the range of rollerwave throughout the work, prior to commencing production
of the glass.
d) Edge Dip: Maximum 0.25mm.
2.6 FINISHING
A. Glass Coatings
1. Surface Coatings: A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface
modified glass. Such coatings shall be consistent in color, durable and sufficiently hard on exposed
surfaces to avoid damage.
2. Ceramic Frit Coatings:
a) Tolerances for positioning and sizes of prints shall comply with optical quality determined
viewing from a distance of 3000mm using daylight without direct sunlight or direct spotlight,
perpendicularly to the glass, for no more than 20 seconds.
b) Apply smoothly and consistently over the whole, or part, of each glazed area as indicated on
the Design Drawings. Use a screen printing application method unless otherwise agreed.
c) Fuse into the surface of the glass, thus providing a permanent layer (with the exception of the
exposed internal surface).
d) The coatings shall have similar sheen, chromaticity and luminosity, to give non-discernible
color difference when viewed by eye and illuminated by a standard light source, and shall color
match. All ceramic fritting shall be opaque and to a color to be agreed with the Engineer.
e) Extent: Unless otherwise indicated, the frit pattern shall extend to the glass edges. There shall
be no clear border.
3. Requirements for Coatings/ Surface Modified Glass:
a) A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface modified glass.
Such coatings shall be neutral in color, durable and sufficiently hard on exposed surfaces to
avoid damage. For the purposes of the Specification, neutral shall be defined as a color having
no unacceptable hue quantified by range of samples and being capable of refracting light
without chromatic aberration when viewed from any direction.
b) Unless otherwise agreed, all low E glass shall be produced from a single source on a single
process.
c) All glass coatings shall be provided from a single manufacturer/ supplier unless agreed
otherwise by the Engineer.
4. Coatings/ Treatments/ Interlayers shall not crack, disintegrate or corrode in any way under the
extremes of conditions outlined in the Specification.
5. Advise the Engineer, prior to commencement of the glass coating, the name of the supplier and
applicator, together with the location of the premises where this work shall be carried out.
B. High Performance Glass Coatings

17 September 2015
1. Where soft coatings are used in double glazed units the glass shall be edge stripped on the coating
side to a width corresponding to the width of the spacer bar (complete with butyl strip) such that
when the panes are sealed together no discoloration to the coating by the butyl strip occurs around
the perimeter of the double glazed unit. The occurrence of a red or blue line around the perimeter
of the glass panes shall be deemed unacceptable.
2. Where soft coatings are applied to glass panes they shall be suitably protected up until time of
installation with the double glazed unit and all handling of glass shall be carried out using protective
cotton or surgical gloves so as not to damage the surface of the coating with fingerprints. After
protection is removed from the coated glass panes the panes shall be installed into the double
glazed units and sealed within the recommended time by the coating manufacturer, to avoid any
atmospheric deformation of the surface.
C. Glass Body Tints
1. Provide evidence from the glass manufacturer that the correct body tinting has been incorporated
at the appropriate stage into the materials used by the glass manufacturer when this has been
specified on the Design Drawings.
2. Provide evidence that the correct surface modified tinting has been applied by the glass
manufacturer, where this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
A. Stress in Glazing
1. Conduct a thermal stress analysis and make due allowance for any thermally treated or edge working
of annealed glass which may be required.
2. Take into account shading stresses that might occur from adjacent components, including solar
shading devices.
B. Laminated Glass
1. Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 2000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass observing it perpendicularly (the matt screen being on the other side
of the glass). Defects that are disturbing when viewed shall be marked, or.
2. Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of the room
and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (including but not limited to overcast sky), without
direct sunlight or artificial lighting.
C. Toughened/ Tempered Glass
1. Visual quality testing of toughened/ tempered glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm
from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of
the room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (including but not limited to overcast sky),
without direct sunlight or artificial lighting.
2. The surface compressive stress shall be demonstrated by non-destructive testing, to be controlled

in the work within the range of 35 to 55N/ mm².
D. Visual Quality Testing: Visual quality testing of insulated glass units of float glass shall be carried out at
a distance of 1000mm from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the
normal usage of the room and the following discrepancies, or better, shall be allowed per unit.
1. Rebate zone (width 18mm - no limit on discrepancies, with the exception of mechanical damage to
the edges):
a) External shallow damage to the edge or conchoidal fractures, which do not affect the glass
strength and which do not project beyond the width of the edge seal.
b) Internal conchoidal fractures without loose shards, which are filled by the sealant.
c) Unlimited spots or patches of residue, or scratches.
2. Edge zone - area around edge with width (W)/ 10 or height (H)/ 10 respectively:

17 September 2015
a) Inclusions, bubbles, spots and stains:
1. Pane area less than or equal to 1m²: Maximum 4 cases, each less than or equal to 3mm
diameter.
2. Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each less than or equal to 3mm diameter
per meter of perimeter.
b) Residues (spots) in the gas-filled cavity:
diameter.
2. Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each less than or equal to 3mm diameter
per meter of perimeter.
c) Residues (patches) in the gas-filled cavity: Whitish grey or transparent - maximum 1 case less
than or equal to 3cm².
d) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 90mm. Individual length; maximum 30mm.
e) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
3. Main zone (remainder of unit inside the edge zone):
a) Inclusions, bubbles, spots and stains:
diameter.
2. Pane area greater than 1m² but less than or equal to 2m²: Maximum 3 cases, each less
than or equal to 2mm diameter.
3. Pane area greater than 2m²: Maximum 5 cases, each less than or equal to 2mm diameter.
b) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 45mm. Individual length; maximum 15mm.
c) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
4. Main and edge zone combined:
a) Maximum number of allowable discrepancies as in edge zone.
b) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains of dimensions 0.5 to 1.0mm are allowable without any area
related limitation, except when they appear in higher concentration. 'Higher concentration'
means that at least 4 inclusions, bubbles, points and patches are located within a circle with
a diameter of less than or equal to 200mm.
5. Visual inspection of the glass edges, edge seals and spacers shall be unhindered, prior to glazing.
E. Structural Silicone Glazing
1. Provide documentation of the sealant manufacturer's requirements for the particular substrate of
the construction including joint sizes, limitations and requirements for mixing, cleaning, surface
preparation, priming and application.
2. Provide evidence that the sealant has been selected taking into account the sealant manufacturer's
recommendations as to use and compatibility with the contact surfaces.
3. Provide glazing records with information on each panel including silicone type, batch, date of
application, glazier's name and temperature and humidity measured inside the factory on the day
of assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

17 September 2015
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with installer present, for compliance with the following.
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members.
C. Pre-installation Testing
1. Toughened/ Tempered Glass:
a) Prior to installation of the toughened/ tempered glass, ensure that all documentary evidence
is in place and demonstrate with such evidence that the glass has been heat soaked for the
prescribed periods. Such evidence shall also include, as a minimum, the following:
1. Source of supply and evidence of batching.
2. Dates and records of toughening/ heat soaking of all glass.
3. Certification that the glass shall meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
4. Records to include details of all units that failed during the heat soak test.
b) The Engineer shall be given the opportunity of visiting the glass manufacturer's premises during
fabrication and/ or processing.
c) The toughening process shall not create any stresses in the glass that are visible within the
limits specified.
d) The toughening process shall not affect the appearance of the coating.
e) No cooling jet marks shall be visible on the finished surface of the toughened/ tempered glass.
f) Any discoloration or distortion caused by the toughening process shall be unacceptable outside
of roller wave distortion and glass bow specified.
g) Take all reasonable measures to control the toughening process so as to avoid the occurrence
of anisotropy at the time of manufacture. Glass shall be rejected if it does not fall within the
range of agreed samples.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that
exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks
in the completed work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Glazing, General
1. Comply with the combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
2. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Site conditions during installation to provide
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances.

17 September 2015
3. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Site and legally dispose of off Site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections
that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
4. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
5. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located in accordance with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by the glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
6. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by the glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
7. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 1270mm.
a) Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing
tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and in
accordance with system performance requirements.
b) Provide 3mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.
With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
8. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by the glass manufacturer and according to the
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
9. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
10. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
11. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
12. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
the gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by the gasket manufacturer.
13. No cutting or nipping of glass shall be allowed on Site.
B. Tape Glazing
1. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
2. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
3. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
4. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal
joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
5. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
6. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
7. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
8. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
C. Gasket Glazing (Dry)

17 September 2015
1. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by the gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
2. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with
joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
3. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press
firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed
to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work
toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing
bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by the gasket manufacturer.
4. Installation with Pressure Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press
firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure glazing
stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a
weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by the gasket manufacturer.
5. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
D. Sealant Glazing (Wet)
1. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into
glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for
optimum sealant performance.
2. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of
sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
3. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
E. Structural Silicone Glazing
1. Structural silicone glazing application shall not be carried out on Site unless agreed otherwise with
the Engineer.
F. Lock Strip Gasket Glazing
1. In accordance with ASTM C716 and the gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and
glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes.
B. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and
clean surfaces.
C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If,
despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances
immediately as recommended in writing by the glass manufacturer.
D. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
or stains; remove as recommended in writing by the glass manufacturer.
E. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural
causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
F. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than 4 days before date scheduled
for inspections that establish date of Taking-Over. Wash glass as recommended in writing by the glass
manufacturer.
3.5 MAINTENANCE

17 September 2015
A. All glass shall be capable of replacement without undue difficulty. Provide a Method Statement showing
the method of removing damaged glass and any associated metal framework and of installing new
components.
B. Structural Silicone Glazing
1. Recommend a periodical maintenance regime for agreement with the Engineer. This shall be
incorporated in the O+M manuals. Acceptance criteria shall be consistent with the requirements of
the testing criteria, which as a minimum shall be:
a) A standard 'peel test' on any broken panels that require replacement.
b) A close visual inspection, to be carried out exteriorly from the cleaning apparatus, including
application of hand pressure to verify continued adhesion. This exercise shall be carried out
for 1% of the cladding, at a yearly frequency for the first 3 years, then at a frequency of 5 years
following. The panels shall be randomly selected around the elevations at varying heights.
c) The tests shall be carried out by the sealant supplier, or other qualified body.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 088300 -- MIRRORS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.2 MATERIALS 4
2.3 FABRICATION 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.2 PREPARATION 7
3.3 INSTALLATION 7
3.5 PROTECTION 9

Tender Issue 088300 MIRRORS
17 September 2015
SECTION 088300 -- MIRRORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

systems and other related elements indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate
1. Glass mirror.
2. Acrylic mirror.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 088300 / 1 MIRRORS
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
1. Warranties.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified
under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations.
1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication
for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Work Section or in referenced
standards.
2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care
and Handling of Mirrors".
D. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed/ laminated/ tempered mirrors, provide products complying
with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
F. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
G. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First mirror of each type installed in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
I. Pre-construction Testing/ Reports
1. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to the mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing paint/ film and
substrates on which mirrors are installed.
A. Protect mirrors according to the mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent
damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other
causes.
B. Comply with the mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as
needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied
coatings. Store indoors.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors
that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary
to the manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots and clouding of the
silver film.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FXG-501 Mirror
1. Description: Wall mounted mirror accurately sized and fitted to wall substrate, with basic trims and
finishes complete with all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer
3. Product Reference: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
5. Frames and Supports: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6. Mirror glass shall be fully toughened silver quality twin coated mirror glass with arrised, ground and
polished edges.
B. Type FXG-510 Parking Mirror
1. Description: Parking area mirror, with basic trims and finishes complete with all necessary fastenings
and accessories to complete the installation to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings

17 September 2015
4. Type: Full Dome type mirror.
5. Material: Acrylic Mirror.
7. Fixation: Manufacturer recommended support between Ø50 and 75 fixed to pole. Fixation to wall
with Screw and nail.
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish
indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following.
1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B211M.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221M.
3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209M.
C. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following.
1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/ A36M.
D. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following.
1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666.
2. Tubing: ASTM A554.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304/ Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for interior/ exterior
use.
E. Silvered Flat Glass Mirrors
1. Glass Mirrors, General: In accordance with ASTM C1503.
2. Clear Glass: Mirror quality, ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91% visible light
transmission.
3. Tinted Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality.
4. Tempered Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements; and in accordance with ASTM
C1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied.
5. Laminated Mirrors: In accordance with ASTM C1172, Kind LM.
6. Mirrors shall not crack or deform as a result of fastening methods or incompatibility with background
materials and construction.
7. Position accurately with sides vertical and fasten securely, adjusting as necessary to ensure a true
undistorted reflection.
F. Acrylic Mirror
1. Tensile Strength: 11,030psi in accordance with ASTM D-638.
2. Flexural Modulus: 490,000psi in accordance with ASTM D-790.
3. Acrylic provides high quality image and shatterproof lens.

17 September 2015
4. Scratch resistant.
G. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion resistant coated or non-
corrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant, concealed, recessed,
and capped or plugged.
H. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, ±5.
2. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by the mirror manufacturer for
use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
3. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors
and certified by both the mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass
coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
a) Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 70g/ L when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible
with mirror backing paint as certified by the mirror manufacturer.
I. VOC Content: Adhesive products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate work in temperature and humidity conditions similar to the finished building. Shop fabricate
and pre-fit components complete before finishing.
B. Manufacture the mirrors as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling
on Site as possible. Shop manufacture the mirrors to allow for adjustments at Site for proper leveling,
anchoring and joining.
C. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape, accurate in size and profile with all exposed
surfaces free from irregularities and defects.
D. Blocking, noggings and bearers shall provide fastening points for attachment of mirror support frame
within wall construction which are accurately positioned and securely fastened. After fastening the panels
and linings over the gypsum board assembly, the positions of blockings and bearers shall be marked,
for mirror installation.
E. Do not Site cut, plane, drill, or sand pre-finished panels without the acceptance of the Engineer.
F. Adhesive joints shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination by dust
and other debris.
G. Mirrors shall be stored on Site for at least 48 hours before fastening, in conditions similar to those that
will prevail after the building has been occupied. Free circulation of air to all surfaces shall be maintained
at all times.
H. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Dimensions and levels shall be verified by the Contractor prior to manufacture of components.
J. Mirror Sizes: To suit project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
K. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and
size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
L. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished unless indicated otherwise.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric
penetration of glass coating.

17 September 2015
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after
cutting to final sizes.
M. Film Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as
recommended in writing by film backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and
other imperfections.
N. Welding/ Brazing
1. General:
attachment.
porosity or cracks.
completed work.
f) Metal arc welding shall be to AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS
D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum", or other methods subject to review by
the Engineer.
Aluminum".
assembled.
porosity and deep ridges).
O. Accuracy of Fabrication
1. Exact Site dimensions shall be taken as necessary before starting fabrication. Report any
discrepancies to the Engineer without delay and obtain instructions before proceeding.
2. Permissible Deviations for Panels:
a) Length: ±1.5mm.
b) Width: ±1.5mm.
c) Squareness: ±1.5mm in 1000mm (taking longer of 2 sides at any corner as a baseline and
measuring the deviation of the shorter side from the baseline perpendicular).
d) Flatness (of panels with a core thickness of 12mm and over, as delivered to Site): ±1mm under
a 600mm straightedge.
3. Finished dimensions of components shall be such that the required accuracy of the finished linings/
P. Shop Finishing
1. General: Apply finishes in controlled, dust-free conditions. Site finishing, including Site touchups
are not permitted.

17 September 2015
2. Preparation: Remove surface marks, roughness, open grain or contamination. Apply initial coat of
finish to surfaces, including edges, cut-outs and recesses for skirtings, immediately after preparation.
3. Staining: Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint
stains. Apply stains continuously without overlaps and with uniform color across each surface.
4. Painting and Lacquering: Mix and spray apply to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Lightly sand between coats to a uniform flat surface. Apply coatings to the paint
manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness, with a uniform sheen and texture without runs or
other defects.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with the Contractor present, for compliance
with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing
finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspection
walls and soundness of surfaces that shall affect installation of mounting brackets.
2. Spacing of sanitary appliances/ fittings shall be verified to assure compatibility with installation of
mirrors.
3. Mirrors shall not be installed until conditions are satisfactory.
B. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including
coating substrates with the mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
C. Do not install the work before building is weathertight, wet trades have finished their work and the building
is well dried out.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced
GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
B. Before, during and after installation, temperature and humidity shall be maintained at levels approximating
to those that will prevail after the building is occupied.
C. Do not cut, plane or sand pre-finished surfaces except where shown on the Shop Drawings or otherwise
agreed with the Engineer.
D. Fasten securely using manufacturer's fastening components without causing distortions to frames.
E. Workmanship: Mirrors shall be manufactured and rigidly assembled. Reinforcing shall be provided as
required to ensure a rigid and secure assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks,
warpage, buckle, glue and open joints. All joints, corner and miters shall be accurately fitted. Fastenings
shall be concealed. Threaded connections shall be made up tightly so that threads are entirely concealed.
F. All joints and corners shall be accurately fitted to shapes and dimensions indicated, with all lines, angles
and surfaces in true alignment, plumb, level and in proper plane.
G. Use the proper thickness of metal, adequate stiffeners, supports and proven details of assembly so that
the finished material shall conform to the highest standards of the industry. Reinforce members and joints
with steel plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to comply with performance
requirements.

17 September 2015
H. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design. Joints in exposed
metal work shall be accurately fitted and rigidly secured with hairline contacts. Exposed joints in flat
surfaces shall be flush, unless otherwise indicated. End joints shall have sleeves of the same outline as
the exposed shapes to assure good alignments.
I. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the work to avoid it being scratched or otherwise defaced
during the course of installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall be replaced
at the expense of the Contractor.
J. Do not install mirrors that have members that are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or
defaced. Remove and replace such members as directed.
K. Accurately cut and form the materials to the required shape and profile with all exposed surfaces free
from irregularities and defects. Carefully fit and match all components before assembly to maintain
continuity of line between them. Provide hairline joints between contact surfaces of non-welded joints,
unless indicated otherwise. Complete all cutting, drilling and welding, before the application of final
finishes.
L. Drill, countersink and tap components as necessary to receive threaded fasteners. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Set out exposed fasteners where permitted in an even manner.
M. Accurately align components and rigidly secure all non-moving joints by welding or fastening with machine
screws or bolts. Reinforce joints and components as necessary to achieve the required strength and
provide proper joint fastening. Ensure that no areas of unfinished material are visible in the finished work.
Drive in all exposed fasteners level and flush with the adjacent surfaces. Disassemble the work only to
the extent necessary to facilitate transportation to Site.
N. The work shall be earth bonded to ensure continuity.
O. Provide a minimum air space of 3mm between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation
between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
P. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely
to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install
fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 3mm thick by 100mm long at quarter
points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, 2 No. slotted weeps not less
than 6.4mm wide by 9.5mm long at bottom channel.
2. Top Channel/ Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach
top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.
3. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror
edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced unless indicated otherwise.
4. Install mastic as follows:
a) Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by the manufacturers of mirrors
and backing material.
b) Apply mastic to comply with the mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and
to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
c) After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air
space of 3mm between back of mirrors and mounting surface.
Q. Adhesives
usage of adhesives.

17 September 2015

R. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
S. Installation Tolerances
1. A high degree of accuracy shall be employed in the fabrication and installation of the work and
support structures.
2. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the work are such that within any planning grid
section the allowable tolerances are achieved.
a) All dimensions shall be checked on Site.
b) The final design shall accommodate all specified tolerances and differences between the actual
Site dimensions and dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings.
c) The work shall be erected in proper alignment in relation to established lines and grades as
shown on the Shop Drawings and account shall be taken of the installation tolerance
requirements of the panel system such that units are accurately located.
d) Cut-outs for interfacing work shall be to the dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings
±1mm.
4. The installation shall accommodate all required tolerances including differences between actual
Site dimensions and dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings.
5. Account shall be taken of the installation tolerance requirements such that repetitive units are
accurately located, relative to each other.
6. The maximum offset in plane, level or section between any 2 adjacent sections shall be ±1mm.
7. Cut-outs for interfacing work shall comply with the dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings
±1mm.
8. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the work are such that within any planning grid
section the allowable tolerances are achieved.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely. Clean
2. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than 4 days before date scheduled for inspections that
establish date of Taking-Over. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by the mirror manufacturer.
B. Adjusting
of moving parts. Make good fastening holes and minor damage, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Return items to the shop that cannot be satisfactorily repaired on Site for refinishing or replacement.
3.5 PROTECTION

17 September 2015
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
B. Remove and replace protection as directed for inspection and remove completely at Taking-Over.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from
condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 089000 -- LOUVERS AND VENTS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 5
2.4 FABRICATION 6
2.5 FINISHES 11
PART 3 EXECUTION 12
3.1 EXAMINATION 12
3.2 PREPARATION 12
3.3 INSTALLATION 12
3.5 PROTECTION 14

Tender Issue 089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS
17 September 2015
SECTION 089000 -- LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Wor Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, Division 01 General

1. Fixed louvers.
5. Acoustic Report.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 089000 / 1 LOUVERS AND VENTS
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
1. Samples of framing, blade and cill members minimum 300mm long in the proposed color and finish.
1. Warranties.
A. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar
work. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following standards from the American
Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel".
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details
and installation procedures.
D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated louvers that are
listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
F. Mock-ups
1. An arrangement of components and systems forming a visual and conceptual model of the work
including interfaces with adjacent components and the structure.
G. Prototypes
1. A section of the work comprising not less than the required unit in the proposed materials and finishes.

17 September 2015
1. The first fully installed and completed part of the work.
A. Delivery: Deliver assemblies and components to the Site suitably protected from damage, staining or
removed. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with
name and qualifying information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
equivalent:
1. Shuco.
2. Hartmann.
3. Kawneer.
4. Hueck.
5. Spectrum.
6. Technal.
B. Type EWL-101 External Louver for MEP Services
1. Description: Exterior aluminum louver system as single bank, corrosion protected roll formed
aluminum louver blades bolted or screwed onto secondary metal support system and fastened back
to primary structure.
4. Frame and Blades:

17 September 2015
a) Corrosion protected aluminum frame and blades.
b) Finish: High-performance organic finish; 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pre-
treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
c) Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
5. Birdguard: Flattened, expanded aluminum.
6. Insect Panel: Expanded aluminum mesh.
7. Acoustic Performance: Refer to Acoustic Report.
8. Air passage requirements shall be in accordance with the MEP Specification, Division 23 Heating,
Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Work Sections.
9. Joints shall align and continue through interfacing exterior walling types. Visually open, recessed
horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated
A. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ ASCE 7, unless higher loads are required by the
B. Louver Performance Ratings
1. Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by the testing

manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to
AMCA 500-L (Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.).
2. Wind Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99% effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate
of 75mm/ h and a wind speed of 13m/ sec at a core area intake velocity of 2.0m/ sec, unless
otherwise specified in the MEP Specification.
C. Strength/ Serviceability: The work shall withstand the specified loads without exceeding deflection limits.
Adjust load values when more restrictive limits are required by the material manufacturer or when the
performance of other materials or assemblies is compromised.
D. Deflections
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to the wall face: 1/ 200 of the clear span or
20mm, whichever is the lesser. Reduce values to prevent deflections exceeding 1/ 360 of the clear
span when brittle materials are affected, and 125% of the width of associated sealant joints.
2. Deflection of framing members in a direction parallel to the wall face: 1/ 500 of the clear span or
3mm, whichever is the lesser.
E. Strength/ Safety: The work shall withstand the specified loads without permanent distortion to framing
members to a maximum of 1/ 1000 of the clear span, measured 1 hour after the load has been removed.
F. Wind Loads: Assembly including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures
specified in Section 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
G. Durability: The work shall retain its specified appearance throughout its Design Life, without failure, when
maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program.
H. Thermal Movements
temperatures occurring.
2. Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperatures.

17 September 2015
a) Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperatures.
b) Test Interior Ambient Air Temperature: 24°C.
c) Test Performance: No buckling; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and
fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
I. Moisture Movement: The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction
in the specified performance due to changes in the moisture content of the components, resulting from
variations in the moisture content of the air.
J. Atmospheric Conditions: All work shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
K. Condensation
1. Condensation shall not form, either on internal or exterior surfaces of framing members or interstitially
within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the work, such that it may lead to damage
or staining.
drained and ventilated to the outside, such that the formation of such condensation is not detrimental
to the performance nor causes damage or staining of the work.
L. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
1. The work shall resist abrasion from accepted cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard, including
glass coatings, to resist reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2. Record and quantify the extent of damage determined through testing. Submit samples to the
M. Demountability
maintenance.
2. The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of this, or adjacent,
work.
N. Acoustic Performance: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
O. Fire Performance
2.3 MATERIALS
B. Aluminum shall be in accordance with the following.
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
3. Structural aluminum shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.

17 September 2015
C. Steel Support Framing
1. Structural shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A36M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123. Size sections as closely as possible to dimensions indicated and to suit load
requirements.
2. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
D. Fasteners: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation
conditions.
1. Fastening components shall comply with all statutory requirements to the acceptance of the
Structural Engineer both as to strength and type and shall be designed to carry all dead, live and
wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal movements
2. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip galvanized steel or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
5. All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
aluminum shall not be used. Aluminum sub-constructions shall be separated from concrete by
bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel in accordance with ASTM
A240/ A240M may be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
6. All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
E. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from
stainless steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads
imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing in accordance
with ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Gaskets
c) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the work.
G. VOC Content: Adhesive and sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
H. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate louvers using appropriate materials complying with the specified appearance and
performance requirements. Pre-assemble and finish items to the greatest extent possible in the shop.

17 September 2015
2. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary
for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
3. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations,
fabricate units to permit Site-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions,
reinforced with splice plates.
a) Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern.
b) Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies
are indicated.
4. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and
sill, to produce uniform appearance.
5. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made
for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
a) Frame Type: Channel, Exterior flange or Interior flange unless otherwise indicated.
6. Include supports, anchorages and accessories required for complete assembly.
7. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by the
manufacturer, or 1830mm.o.c., whichever is less.
a) Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver
blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with
close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
b) Semi-recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver
blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and
handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices
designed to permit expansion and contraction.
c) Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and
depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations,
provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.
d) Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and recessed mullions at corners.
8. Subsills and extended sills should be indicated on the Design Drawings.
9. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.
10. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view
unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame
members necessary.
B. Workmanship: Accurately cut and form the materials to the required size and shape with visible surfaces
free from irregularities and defects. Complete cutting, drilling, bending and welding before finishing,
unless accepted otherwise. Do not machine aluminum or stainless steel with equipment used to work
mild steel or equipment that will cause staining or corrosion.
1. Cutting: Perform cutting by saw, water-jet or plasma laser; shear or flame cutting not permitted.
Saw cut to maximum tolerance of ±0.5mm. Machine surfaces to specified tolerances; remove burrs,
saw marks and blemishes from exposed edges surfaces.
2. Bending: Bend materials to the required profiles without oil canning or other defects; minimize grain
separation. Form corners to the smallest radius possible without machining or grooving the back,
3. Machining: Drill holes and form cut outs using rotary drills or milling machines; stamping or shearing
not permitted. Tap, countersink or use grommet inserts for proper fastening.
4. Welding: Weld continuously along joints with even contour of metal without undercutting,
discontinuities, porosity, distortions or other defects. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, without
fillets; maintain the line of the welded members. Welds on surfaces to be painted shall not affect
the appearance of finished work.

17 September 2015
5. Fastenings: Drill, countersink and top components ready to receive threaded fasteners. Use
concealed fasteners unless accepted otherwise. Set out exposed fasteners in an even spacing and
layout.
6. Names, Logos or Other References on Visible Surfaces: Not permitted.
C. Louver Blades: Form from minimum 2.5mm thick extruded aluminum to required profiles with "key-ways"
to engage joint reinforcement, support brackets and alignment clips.
D. Accessories, Brackets and Trims
1. Louver Blade Corners and Offsets: Pre-form corners and offsets from standard blades with fabricated
miters or joints.
2. Closure Pieces and Trim: Form from minimum 2.5mm thick aluminum sheets or extrusions with
spigots or back-up plates, welded to one of the components at joints.
3. Blade Support Brackets and Clips: Form from aluminum with profile to engage and retain louver
blades accurately in place.
4. Bird Panel: Expanded Aluminum.
5. Blanking Plates: Fabricate insulated blanking plates from 2 No. sheets of aluminum, minimum 2mm
thick, bonded to a core of rigid mineral fiber insulation. Fold, lap and seal sheets at edges and
corners to completely encapsulate the core.
6. Catchments (drip trays): Form from sheet aluminum with 75mm high sides and a suitably sized
outlet for the attachment of a drainpipe to safely discharge the water. Size the trays to effectively
collect and contain water entering through active areas of louvers.
E. Tolerances for Manufacture
F. Assembly
1. Carefully fit and match pieces before assembly. Provide hairline, tight-fitting joints on non-welded
connections.
2. Accurately align components. Rigidly secure non-moving joints by welding or fastening with machine
screws or bolts.
3. Reinforce joints and components to achieve the required strength.
4. Fasten bird panels to active areas of louvers. Install blanking plates to non-active areas.
5. Conceal sealants at joints and laps; provide watertight seal.
6. Provide channels and concealed weepholes to direct and drain water entering the assembly to the
exterior.
7. Set exposed fasteners level and flush with the adjacent surfaces.
G. Tolerances for Component Assembly

17 September 2015
a) Level of Horizontal Members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm, non-cumulative.
element.
e) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than ±1.5mm from a 2000mm
f) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than ±1.5mm from a 2000mm straightedge
of the element.
3. All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities:
H. The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in the manufacture of the work in order to
I. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of the proposed methods for achieving and
constantly monitoring the fabrication tolerances during all stages of the work. Detailed records of the
J. Metalwork, General
Specification.
4. Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fastened where
moisture may be present or occur.
only, or hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M. Any cut edges shall be
arrises.

chemically.

17 September 2015
10. Welding/ Brazing:
a) General:
porosity or cracks.
in completed work.
AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other methods subject to
b) Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
Code - Aluminum."
assembled.
2. Weld finish shall be smooth with all flux residues removed and no surface defects (including
but not limited to undercut, porosity and deep ridges).
c) Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
K. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
L. Mild Steel
with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
3. Exterior visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section steelwork
shall be positioned in the work so as to be non-visible.
M. Exterior visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section steelwork shall
be positioned in the work so as to be non-visible.
N. Aluminum
acceptable.
O. Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding

17 September 2015
1. Bonding is required between individual sections of the work to ensure continuity between adjacent
2. Bonding between the work and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals as indicated on
the Design Drawings. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at the highest
3. Provide studs/ bolts on the louver panels for subsequent connection.
5. No straps shall be fastened along copings.
2.5 FINISHES
A. General
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association
for designating aluminum finishes.
2. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
A. Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified test
data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
B. Testing of Prototypes
of attachment and support as elements of the work, with a supporting structure similar in stiffness
to that supporting the work. The prototypes to be tested shall not be influenced by the test chamber.
test prototypes.
5. Before the test is begun, the external face of the specimen shall be thoroughly washed using a mild
7. The prototypes shall be tested for water leakage and wind load resistance plus additional structural
loading tests as necessary to demonstrate that the work is capable of accommodating the building
movements while maintaining the performance of the work.
C. Acoustic Testing - Initial Advance Test

17 September 2015
1. Arrange laboratory acoustic tests of the proposed louver configurations using similar framing to that
intended with similar dimensions and mass per meter run of framing. These prototypes shall not be
used as visual samples but are to be used to confirm compliance with the specified acoustic data.
2. From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each louver type
for review.
D. Discretionary Tests - Thermal Cycling
1. The prototypes shall be tested in order to determine the effects of thermal movements on the
performance of the work, in particular the joints.
2. Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to
the Engineer for consideration as to the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, examine the areas and the conditions in which the work will be
performed. Verify dimensions of the supporting construction, positions of inserts, and surfaces to receive
the work of this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine substrates and openings, with the Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the Shop Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to the Site.
B. Brackets, Support Framework and Attachments: Accurately set out the work. Drill the supporting structure
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: The work shall be erected plumb (or at the angles prescribed) and true in proper alignment and
relation to established lines and grids as indicated on the Shop Drawings. The erected system shall
present true and accurate lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be
limited to long wave formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not
exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from a laser
reference line.
B. Use concealed anchorages or fasteners where possible with allowances for differential movement
between components. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal
surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Incorporate flashings and sealant joints within the work to prevent air infiltration and water penetration
into the building.
D. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
E. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
F. Separate dissimilar materials to prevent galvanic corrosion.
G. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous
paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

17 September 2015
H. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where
weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 Joint Sealants for sealants applied
during louver installation.
I. Tolerances
1. Level: The work shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the
same locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
2. Joints Between Panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by
more than ±2mm or 10% of the joint width whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally
distributed with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 2mm.
3. Plumbness: The work shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 3mm from its
theoretical vertical/ diagonal plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel
shall not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane shall be within ±2mm of the theoretical plane position.
the Engineer.
J. Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and
K. The work, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting and shall be strictly rigid, firm, free
L. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the work.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove debris from the Site and clean exposed surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Leave work clean, blemish-free, and adequately protected
against damage from construction operations. Final clean after removing temporary protection;
remove adhesive residues, dirt and fingerprints. Safely dispose of waste materials.
2. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful
to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
B. Adjusting
1. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust operating parts to provide smooth unbinding
operation and produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.
2. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains
of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Engineer, remove
damaged units and replace with new units.

17 September 2015
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary coverings to protect items during construction, and as recommended by the louver
manufacturer. Remove protection at Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 092116 -- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 10
PART 3 EXECUTION 13
3.1 EXAMINATION 13
3.2 PREPARATION 13
3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 14
3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 14
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS 15
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 15
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 16
3.8 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING 16
3.9 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 16
3.10 INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL 17
3.11 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 18
3.12 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 18
3.13 TOLERANCES 19
3.14 PROTECTION 20
3.15 CLEANING 20

Tender Issue 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
17 September 2015
SECTION 092116 -- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Lay-In grid plasterboard ceiling tile.
2. Moisture resistant plasterboard wall partition
3. Plasterboard ceiling system.
4. Plasterboard wall lining.
5. Interior gypsum board assemblies including non-load-bearing steel framing systems for internal
partitions and wall linings.
6. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits and grid systems.
7. Access panels to walls and ceilings.
8. Tile backing panels.
1. Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping.
2. Acoustic Report.
E. Drawing Description References: Reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained in
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 092116 / 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
17 September 2015
1. 500mm x 500mm gypsum board sample of each type.
2. 500mm length of stud frame section.
3. Access panels.
4. All fixing types.
5. Cavity barrier material.
2. Supplemental Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of
the system.
9. Quality Plan.
E. Post Contract Samples: For the following products.
1. 500mm x 500mm sample of all gypsum board types.
2. 500mm lengths of all metal framing components and trim accessories.
3. Access panels and grilles.
4. All fastening types.
5. Insulation material.

17 September 2015
1. Warranties.
1. A Specialist with at least 5 years successful experience in performing similar work.
3. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
C. Mock-ups
1. 5000mm long, full height wall section including interface with typical openings, floor and ceiling
junctions.
2. Typical bay of gypsum board ceiling including access panels and cut-outs.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First structural bay of each type of partition, wall lining and ceiling system, in locations to be agreed
with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
1. Provide independently certified test literature for each type of accessory. The test result date shall
A. Delivery: Deliver boards shrink-wrapped on manufacturer's pallets. Deliver other materials in the
manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name and other qualifying
information.
B. Storage: Store materials clear of the ground in a clean and dry location protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels
flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. Do not open packaging or remove
labels until time for installation. Replace materials that are damaged or otherwise unsuitable for use.
C. Handling: Handle boards carefully to avoid damage to corners, edges and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise distort beads and trim. Properly support boards during lifting to prevent excessive bending
and stressing.
D. The work shall be installed using continuous profiles, being free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves
or damage of any nature.
E. All materials shall be stored on Site in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified before installation commences.

17 September 2015
G. Acceptance shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where indicated on the Design Drawings.
H. The work shall be installed square, regular to line, level and plane at all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances and ASTM standards.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: In accordance with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1. Knauf.
2. National Gypsum.
3. CertainTeed.
B. Ceilings
1. Type CLG-101 Plasterboard Ceiling
a) Description: Plasterboard ceiling supported by rigid adjustable hangers, secondary and main
runners, with appropriate fixings to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
b) Product Reference: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
c) Plasterboard Facing: Refer to Reflected Ceiling Layout for locations where configuration and
specific types shall be used and as indicated on the Design Drawings for other area usage:
1. 12.5mm thick fire- rated plasterboard including all necessary fastening and accessories
to complete the installation.
2. Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Finish: Skim coated to receive paint finish.
4. Perimeter Trim: Shadow line trim as per manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the
Engineer.
5. Access Panel: System shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as accepted

by the Engineer; locations of which as indicated on the Design Drawings.
d) Support and Framework
1. Metal grid consisting of furring and channels.
2. Main channels are attached to the ceiling slab with hooked wires and rapid hangers.

17 September 2015
3. Upper or main channels are attached to the lower furring channels with clips with the
framing system.
4. Channels are installed flush on the bearing system with anchor bolts.
5. Fixing to Substrate: Anchor bolt as per manufacturer's recommendation.
e) Acoustic Rating: Refer to Acoustic Report.
f) Fire Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
g) All fixings shall be concealed.
2. Type CLG-201 Lay-in Grid Plasterboard Ceiling Tile
a) Description: High grade, reinforced, acoustic gypsum tile with acoustic perforation and tegular
edges, installed semi-recessed and fully accessible as indicated on the Design Drawings.
c) Plasterboard Facing: Refer to Reflected Ceiling Layout for locations where configuration and
specific types shall be used and as indicated on the Design Drawings for other area usage:
1. 12.5mm decorative, perforated and pre-finished gypsum suspended ceiling tiles including
necessary fastenings and accessories.
2. Tile Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Edge Detail: Square edge as per manufacturer's standard.
4. Pre-finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
5. Perimeter Trim: Corner angle as per manufacturer's standard.
6. Access Panel: System shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as accepted

by the Engineer; locations of which as indicated on the Design Drawings.
1. Metal grid consisting of furring and channels
2. Main channels are attached to the ceiling slab with hooked wires and rapid hangers.
3. Upper or main channels are attached to the lower furring channels with clips with the
framing system.
4. Channels are installed flush on the bearing system with anchor bolts.
5. Fixing to Substrate: Anchor bolt as per manufacturer's recommendation.
e) Fire Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
f) Acoustic Performance: Refer to Acoustic Report.
C. Partitions
1. Type IWS-101 Plasterboard Wall Partition
a) Description: Full height fire-resistant gypsum board partition comprising gypsum board panels
on each side of the partition including all necessary fastenings and installations to complete
the installation.

17 September 2015
c) Plasterboard Facing: Refer to Design Drawings for locations where walls are used.
1. 12.5mm plasterboard with additives to enhance fire resistance of the core and surfaced
with paper on front, back and long edges including all necessary fastenings and
3. Perimeter Trim: Moulding and skirting trim as per manufacturer's standard and as accepted
by the Engineer.
1. Anchor bolt fixed on ceiling perimeter.
2. Top aluminum track.
3. Aluminum stud support with 400mm spacing center.
4. Insulation as per thermal performance requirements.
5. Bottom aluminum track.
e) Acoustic Performance: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
f) Fire Rating: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
2. Type IWS-105 Moisture Resistant Wall Partition
a) Description: Moisture resistant gypsum board wall partition to areas exposed to moisture and
humidity including all necessary fixings in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. 12.5mm moisture-resistant and pre-finished plasterboard including all necessary

fastenings and accessories.
2. Board Apperance: Green liner paper.
a) Paper surface liner treated to inhibit mould growth.
b) Hydrophobic board impregnated against absorption of moisture.
c) Water Absorption: 10%.
4. Configuration: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
by the Engineer.
6. Vertical Access Panel: System shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as

accepted by the Engineer; locations of which as indicated on the Design Drawings.
1. Anchor bolt on ceiling perimeter.
2. Top aluminum track.

17 September 2015
4. Bottom aluminum track.
f) All fixings shall be concealed.
3. Type IWS-201 Plasterboard Wall Lining
a) Description: Full height gypsum board wall lining comprising gypsum board panels with plaster
skim coat and paint finish fastened to metal stud framing mounted on wall substrate.
b) Product Reference: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
1. 12.5mm fire-resistant plasterboard.
by the Engineer.
1. Vertical aluminum channel fixed to the substrate.
2. Horizontal aluminum channels to top head and bottom base.
f) Acoustic Performance: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. Provide wall type partitions to underside of structure above, unless otherwise noted.
2. Provide double studs 20 gage thick at door jambs, openings and corners.
3. Provide continuous backer plates 16 gage for wall mounted handrails, crash rails, mirrors, and
millwork countertops and wall cabinet locations. Provide continuous blocking as required for all wall
mounted equipment, including all Employer installed equipment and devices. Coordinate all items
prior to sealing walls.
4. Provide for L/ 240 maximum deflection for all wall types.
5. Provide impact resistant gypsum board along all corridors from floor to false ceiling level.
6. Tape, spackle and sand joints full height.
7. Provide diagonal bracing to underside of structure above at door heads greater than 900mm wide
in a single direction.
8. For all partitions located on exit passageways or corridors, isolation rooms, protective environment
rooms, kitchens or pantries, seal all openings and gaps, minimum of 1 side of the partition from the
floor to underside of the structure.
9. Where required, provide 20mm Z-reveal or W-reveal perimeter shadow groove metal trim at wall
and ceiling connections.
10. Provide foil backed gypsum board at exterior wall conditions.

17 September 2015
11. Provide fire-rated and smoke partitions assemblies in accordance with the UL test or USG
Assemblies indicated herein to ensure full compliance with the International Building Code (IBC).
Provide adequate firestopping where penetrations occur in partition, refer to Section 078413
Penetration Firestopping.
a) Set partition runner tracks in continuous bead of sealant at bottom and top tracks.
b) Provide fire-resistant gypsum board for fire-rated partitions and extend to underside of structure.
c) All openings and penetrations in rated wall shall be sealed to maintain the same fire and smoke
rating.
d) For all junctions and corners between walls with different fire and smoke ratings, the walls with
the higher rating shall take precedence and shall be detailed as continuous while the walls
with the lower rating shall be detailed to abut the higher rated wall without penetrating it.
B. Setting out and project conditions shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings. Indicated fastening zone
dimensions do not include plaster skim or other applied finishes.
C. The work shall accommodate all architectural and functional features indicated on the Design Drawings,
whilst maintaining the fire and acoustic performance.
D. The Design Drawings do not identify all the framing and supporting accessories.
1. Lining, partition and ceiling systems shall include all channels, fastenings, fastening straps, wood
sections/ noggings, bearers, retaining clips, angles, trims, firestops, sealants, beads, edges, corner
reinforcements, control joints, tapes, compounds and other accessories recommended/ supplied
by the manufacturer to suit the Project conditions. Galvanized mild steel where applicable.
2. Where lining and partition systems are to receive wall tiling, stud centers shall be reduced in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Ceiling/ soffit systems shall include all necessary secondary support, connecting clips, nuts and
bolts, fastenings, firestops, sealants, beads, edges, corner reinforcements, control joints, tapes,
compounds and other accessories/ components recommended/ supplied by the manufacturer to
suit the Project conditions. Galvanized mild steel where applicable.
4. Additional framing support shall be provided at openings for doors, access hatches and service
penetrations.
E. All systems shall be sealed at the perimeter and at penetrations to maintain the fire and/ or acoustic
performance in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Systems shall include cut-outs for light fittings, switches, socket outlets and other services as indicated
on the Design Drawings. The setting-out of ceiling supports/ hangers shall be coordinated with any
services within the ceiling voids.
G. Where indicated on the Design Drawings, systems shall include access panels, which shall be fire rated
to suit the performance of the system into which they are installed.
H. Where the work will be subject to wet conditions such as in shower rooms and bathrooms, the outer
facing gypsum board shall be replaced with either glass-mat, water-resistant backing board or
cementitious backer units with the equivalent fire and acoustic performance indicated in the system
description for the gypsum board assembly.
I. Where the work will be subject to wet conditions such as in kitchens, the outer facing gypsum board shall
be replaced with water-resistant type gypsum board with the equivalent fire and acoustic performance
indicated in the system description for the gypsum board assembly.
J. Deflection details to all heads/ abutments shall be provided to suit the Project conditions and predicted
deflections.
K. Internal fastening plates, plywood sheathing and wood blocking shall be provided where necessary to
support surface-mounted fixtures and fittings.
L. Liaise with the Mechanical and Electrical Engineers and Subcontractors appointed for services related
work to ensure that access panels and ceiling mounted services are located to suit both functional
requirements and the Engineer's Design.

17 September 2015
M. Socket outlet, switch and data outlet boxes shall not be located back to back. Detailing of such boxes
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Structural Performance
1. Specific Movements:
a) Any necessary joints shall accommodate the maximum movements likely to occur at that point.
b) The work shall withstand all static and dynamic design loads imposed, without causing
permanent deformation of components or the failure of components, and shall transmit such
loads safely to the points of support.
c) The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the
work, adjacent structures or building elements.
d) All components, couplings and fastenings shall be installed in such a manner as to be capable
of accommodating deflection and tolerances without distortion, deformation or failure.
2. Specific Dead Loads:
a) The work shall accommodate the following dead loads without any reduction in performance:
1. The work's own dead load to be accommodated locally, and without causing deflections
or movements which adversely affect any component parts.
2. The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of
the work, where indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Specific Live Loads:
a) Vertical partitions and gypsum board lining shall be capable of accommodating the following
live loads without any reduction in performance or distortion:
b) The work shall be capable of accommodating, without any reduction in performance or

appearance, loads resulting from vibration caused by services installations or any fixture, fitting
or component within, or bearing onto, the work.
4. Deflections:
a) Head deflection detail to be provided to accommodate the structural movements indicated in

the Structural Specification and drawings.
B. Environmental Performance
1. All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements shall have moisture resistant properties to match
core materials.
2. Where required, wood shall be subjected to controlled drying to ensure that the moisture content
is appropriate for the situation of the finished work. Wood shall remain stable and free from expansion,
contraction or other movements that may lead to degradation, loss of appearance or performance.
3. Ensure that the moisture content of all materials is appropriate to the conditions of use and that the
components withstand the prevailing levels of relative humidity both in construction and use.
4. Ensure that all materials including supports, brackets and all fastenings are adequately corrosion
protected to meet the specified environmental conditions.

17 September 2015
C. Fire Performance
1. Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: For fire resistance rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated in accordance with ASTM E119 by an
independent testing agency. Refer to the ~Fire Strategy Report.
E. Vapor Barriers
1. The work shall effectively prevent the passage of water vapor into the system.
2. Vapor barriers shall be installed as a fully sealed and airtight assembly without holes or tears.
3. Vapor barrier membranes, vapor barrier facings and encapsulating membranes to have fire
propagation rating and a fire spread rating in accordance with NFPA 101.
2.4 MATERIALS
requirements as stated inthe Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
C. Low Emission Ceiling System Requirements
1. VOC Content: Provide materials demonstrating formaldehyde VOC content class E1 levels to comply
with the requirements as stated in the Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
D. Gypsum Board, General
1. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that
correspond with support system indicated.
E. Interior Gypsum Board
1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/ C1396M.
2. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/ C1396M.
3. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/ C1396M.
4. For Corridor Walls, Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1629/ C1629M.
5. For areas indicated on the Design Drawings, Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM
C1396/ C1396M. With moisture and mold resistant core and paper surfaces. In accordance with
ASTM D3273, score of 10 for mold resistance.
F. Tile Backing Panels
1. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with the manufacturer's
standard edges.
2. Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C1396/ C1396M, with the manufacturer's standard
edges.
G. Trim Accessories
1. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. Shapes as recommended by the system manufacturer, to include
cornerbeads, bullnose beads, LC-Beads, L-Beads, U-Beads, Expansion (control) joints and Curved-
Edge cornerbeads, to the acceptance of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
2. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. Alloy and temper with
not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T5.
H. Joint Treatment Materials
1. General: In accordance with ASTM C475/ C475M.
2. Joint Tape: Provide the following as the minimum standard, verify with the manufacturer for available
widths.
3. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
4. Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10mm x 10mm glass mesh.
5. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by the panel manufacturer.
6. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats as recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
a) Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by the backer unit manufacturer.
b) Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
I. Auxiliary Materials
1. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and the
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
3. Steel Drill Screws: In accordance with ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. Ensure fastenings
within the framing components shall not be visible.
a) If panels are attached to cold formed metal framing specified in Division 05, use screws in
accordance with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.84mm to 2.84mm
thick.
b) For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by the
panel manufacturer.
4. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant in
accordance with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E90. Acoustic sealant shall be applied at all junctions with walls,
floors, ceilings and around openings applied as a continuous bead leaving no gaps.
5. Air pressure sealant to be applied as continuous bead to perimeter junctions with walls, floors and
ceilings, air gaps around openings and other potential leakage points including framing members
and around fire stops.
J. Framing Systems
1. The framing support system shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Framing Members, General: In accordance with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
a) Steel Sheet Components: In accordance with ASTM C645 requirements for metal unless
b) Protective Coating: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, hot-dip galvanized.
3. Studs and Runners: In accordance with ASTM C645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled
steel studs and runners.

17 September 2015
4. Slip Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
a) Single Long Leg Runner System: In accordance with ASTM C645; top runner with flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and
with continuous bridging located within the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
b) Double Runner System: In accordance with ASTM C645; top runners, inside runner flanges
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to
friction fit inside runner.
c) Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied
to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less
than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
5. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire resistance rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
6. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated for
required attachment of fixture attachment as indicated on Design Drawings.
7. Cold Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 1.34mm minimum base metal thickness, with minimum 13mm
wide flanges. Provide if required for fixture attachment or lateral bracing as determined by the
Contractor.
8. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: In accordance with ASTM C645.
9. Resilient Furring Channels: Minimum 13mm deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
10. Cold Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1.34mm uncoated steel thickness, with minimum 13mm
wide flanges.
a) Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated steel
thickness of 0.8mm.
b) Tie Wire: In accordance with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, wire or
double strand diameter wire.
11. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, minimum uncoated metal thickness of 0.45mm,
and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
K. Metal Framing Suspension Systems
1. Tie Wire: In accordance with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, wire, or double
strand wire.
2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
a) Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire
hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 (to be verified with the
Structural Engineer) times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according
to ASTM E488 by an independent testing agency.
b) Powder Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion
resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction
as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E1190 by an independent testing agency.
3. Wire Hangers: In accordance with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
4. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, nominal 25mm x 5mm x length indicated, to be confirmed by the
Contractor.
5. Carrying Channels: Cold rolled, commercial steel sheet with a base metal thickness of minimum
1.34mm and minimum 13mm wide flanges.

17 September 2015
6. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Provide one of the following furring member systems as
selected at the discretion of the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer:
a) Cold Rolled Channels: Minimum 1.34mm uncoated steel thickness, with minimum 13mm wide
flanges, 19mm deep.
b) Steel Studs and Runners: In accordance with ASTM C645.
c) Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: In accordance with ASTM C645.
d) Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: In accordance with ASTM C645.
e) Resilient Furring Channels: Minimum 13mm deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
7. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: In accordance with ASTM C645, direct-hung
system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
L. Metal Framing Auxiliary Materials
1. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
a) Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
A. Carry out test or provide published and certified data to demonstrate all fire and structural requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, including welded hollow metal frames and framing, cast-in-anchors, and
structural framing, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine gypsum board and tile backing panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged and mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Preparation of Backgrounds
1. All loose material shall be removed by thoroughly brushing the structure to be lined.
2. Blocking and bearers required to provide fastening points for heads of partitions running parallel
with, but offset from main structural supports, or to support fixtures, fittings and services, shall be
accurately positioned and securely fastened. After fastening boards, the positions of blocking and
bearers shall be marked for following trades.
3. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the board manufacturer's materials and workmanship
recommendations.
B. General Site Conditions: Provide temporary lighting as necessary to simulate as closely as possible the
direction and intensity of the permanent lighting.
C. Mixing of Coating: Mix proprietary plasterboard coating materials in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mix only sufficient material that can be used before setting takes place. Discard
partially set material.

17 September 2015
D. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead

structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been
installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers shall develop their
full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of
time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. In accordance with ASTM C840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting
end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than
one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1.5mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Panels shall be installed only in
areas that have been made weathertight. Panels shall be cut neatly and accurately without damage to
core or tearing of paper facing. Cut edges shall be kept to a minimum and positioned at internal angles
wherever possible.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or
gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges
or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints
at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. Provide
movement joints as necessary and as indicated on the Design Drawings, install in accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings), except
in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage
may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 0.7m² in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/ roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 6.4mm to 9.5mm wide
joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 6.4mm to 12.7mm wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where
edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical
sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Where indicated on the Design Drawings to provide support for handrails and/ or equipment, fixtures
and fittings, provide additional support framing and fastening points within the partition as accepted by
the Engineer.
3.4 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Single Layer Application
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/ partition board application to greatest extent possible
and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/ walls, apply gypsum panels vertically, parallel to framing or horizontally, perpendicular
to framing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation or required by fire resistance
rated assembly and minimize end joints.
a) Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

17 September 2015
b) At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire resistance rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate
edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. Ensure screws not
installed within 10mm from the edge of the board panels. Heads shall be set in a depression, without
breaking the paper or the gypsum core.
B. Multilayer Application
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/
partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members
and offset face layer joints one framing member, 400mm minimum, from parallel base layer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire resistance rated assembly.
2. On partitions/ walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel
to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset
at least one stud or furring member with base layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required
by fire resistance rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically
(parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one
furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. Ensure
layers are leveled at both base and face layers to ensure finishes shall appear flush, smooth and
flat with surfaces free from bowing and abrupt changes of level. Position fastenings as recommended
C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other
than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with the gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening
adhesive has set.
D. Curved Surfaces
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across
curved surface plus 300mm long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.
2. For double layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 400mm o.c. Center gypsum
board face layer over joints in base layer and fasten to studs with screws spaced 300mm o.c.
E. Ceiling Surfaces
1. Install panels with fastening methods and layer applications noted above for jointing and finishing
in accordance with the system manufacturer including provision of movement joints as required for
the area of ceiling, ensure coordination with structural movement joints.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: Comply with ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs and where indicated locations
indicated to receive tile.
B. Water Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 6.4mm gap where panels abut other
construction or penetrations for kitchen areas.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform
plane across panel surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints in accordance with ASTM C840 and in specific locations accepted
by the Engineer for visual effect.

17 September 2015
C. Interior Trim: Install in the locations that the manufacturer recommends for appropriate system usage,
outside corners, exposed panel edges or curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads,
surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly
remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges and damaged surface areas. Joints and gaps shall be filled
and covered with continuous lengths of tape and fully bedded. Where joints are to be covered with finish
they shall be feathered out to provide a smooth seamless surface.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended
to receive tape. Joints between tapered edges of boards shall be lightly butted, leaving a 3mm gap where
cut unbound edges occur. Cut edges of boards shall be lightly sanded to remove paper burrs.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840.
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a) Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Finishes Work Sections.
5. Level 5: Where indicated on the Design Drawings.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING
A. Installation Standard: In accordance with ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing
indicated.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: In accordance with requirements in ASTM C841 that apply to framing
installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: In accordance with requirements in ASTM C1063 that apply
to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: In accordance with requirements in ASTM C844 that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab
bars, toilet accessories, furnishings or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame
both sides of joints independently.
3.9 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

17 September 2015
1. Slip Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce
joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a) Install 2 No. studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b) Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 13mm clearance from
jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c) Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure,
if suspended ceiling cannot withstand forces generated by opening and closing doors.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door
openings unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple stud framing below sills of openings to match
similar framing required above door heads.
4. Duct/ Damper Service Runs: Duct/ Dampers shall be restrained on all sides with metal angles or
channels anchored to the soffit. Movement of the duct/ dampers shall be through penetrations to
accommodate the movement range indicated by the deflection head.
5. Fire Resistance Rated Partitions: Install framing in accordance with fire resistance rated assembly
indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
structure.
a) Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire resistance rated assembly
indicated.
6. Sound Rated Partitions: Install framing in accordance with sound rated assembly indicated.
7. Curved Partitions:
a) Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b) Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On
straight lengths of no fewer than 2 No. studs at ends of arcs, place studs 150mm o.c.
D. Direct Furring
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder
driven fasteners spaced 610mm o.c.
E. Z-Furring Members
1. Erect insulation (specified in Section 072100 Thermal Insulation) vertically and hold in place with
Z-furring members spaced 610mm o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete
stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder driven fasteners spaced 610mm
o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond
corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached
channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 305mm from corner and cut
insulation to fit.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3mm from
the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.10 INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with the insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated.

17 September 2015
B. Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal and acoustical protection to building elements and
spaces. Provide full thickness over entire area to be covered, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cut and fit or form insulation tightly around obstructions and penetrations, without gaps and voids.
D. Keep insulation clear of heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, as required by applicable
regulations.
E. Do not cover electrical cables, unless they have been sized accordingly.
F. Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.
G. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
H. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers
are otherwise indicated or required to make up total thickness.
I. Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected by the Engineer.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on the Design Drawings or, if not indicated, where
the Contractor determines to place the vapor retarder to the acceptance of the Engineer. Extend vapor
retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids
in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than 2 No. studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings;
and at lap joints. Space fasteners 406mm o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner
tracks, metal studs and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor
retarders with vapor retarder tape according to the vapor retarder manufacturer's written instructions.
Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid
substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor retarder fasteners
as recommended by the vapor retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with
vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with
vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.12 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on the Design Drawings, but not
less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly
components indicated.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a) Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

17 September 2015
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a) Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws,
or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that
will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts,
eye screws or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck if Structural Engineer determines the steel roof deck cannot
carry ceiling loads. Provide an alternate attachment method for acceptance by the Engineer.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend
through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
D. Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports in general. Confirm with specific
assembly requirements for any additional stipulations.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems for Gypsum Board: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track. Suspension system shall be suitably robust and installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations fastened securely to the supporting structure.
G. Grid Suspension Systems for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Confirm with gypsum veneer plaster and grid
suspension system manufacturers if this system is acceptable for use in accordance with their
requirements.
H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3mm in 3600mm measured
lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that
will receive finishes.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances (Walls)
1. All dimensions shall be checked on Site prior to commencement of installation.
accurately located, relative to gridlines.
4. The work shall be erected in alignment and in relation to established lines and grades as indicated
5. The maximum variation in height of any part of the work from given datum shall be ±2mm.
6. The maximum offset in plane, level or section between any 2 adjacent sections shall be ±1mm.
7. The maximum variation in plan over a distance of 1800mm shall not exceed ±2mm.
±1mm.

17 September 2015
9. A detailed list of tolerances to which the work is to be installed shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer prior to commencement of installation. As a minimum this shall include the following:
a) Position on Plan.
b) Level.
c) Alignment.
d) Plumbness.
10. Analysis of the erection sequence and overall Method Statement shall be produced to satisfy the
Engineer that the installation tolerances state shall be met.
B. Installation Tolerances (Ceilings)
1. Finished ceiling levels shall be as datum indicated on the Design Drawings ±2mm
2. All dimensions shall be checked on Site prior to commencement of installation.
3. The installation shall accommodate all required tolerances including differences between the actual
4. The work shall be erected in alignment and in relation to established lines and grades as indicated
5. Install square, regular to line, level and plane within specified tolerances.
6. The maximum variation in height of any part of the work from given datum shall be ±2mm.
±1mm.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall
surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,
physical damage, wetting and staining and other causes during remainder of the construction period
until time of Taking-Over.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged including, but not limited to, discoloration,
sagging or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged including, but not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
D. Protect wet work from premature drying during curing period, to limit cracking.
3.15 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work, remove debris from Site and leave exposed work clean and neatly finished.
Safely dispose of the waste material.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 092400 -- CEMENT PLASTERING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 5
2.4 MIXING 6
2.5 FABRICATION 8
2.6 FINISHING 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 8
3.2 PREPARATION 8
3.3 INSTALLATION 9

Tender Issue 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING
17 September 2015
SECTION 092400 -- CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Sand cement render on plasterwork for external and internal substrate.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Not required.

Tender Issue 092400 / 1 CEMENT PLASTERING
17 September 2015
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Not required.
1. Warranties.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First structural bay of each type of coating in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of
the Engineer.

17 September 2015
A. Delivery: Deliver gypsum materials in manufacturer's unopened packages fully identified with name and
qualifying information.
B. Storage: Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.
A. In accordance with ASTM C926 requirements.
B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 4.4°C for at least 48 hours before plaster
application and continuously during and after application.
1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly; prevent
concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating plaster
in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until
plaster is dry.
C. Exterior Plasterwork
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required
by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings and providing barriers to deflect
sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 4.4°C.
D. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with the manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental
conditions for applying finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type EWA-101 Sand Cement Render
1. Description: External and internal cement sand render applied to surfaces of concrete and masonry
walls to receive paint finish.
2. Coating Thickness:
a) On In Situ Concrete or Concrete Blockwork:
1. First coat: Maximum 12mm.
2. Second coat: Maximum 10mm.
b) On Metal Lath:
1. For two coat work: Maximum 12mm.
2. For three coat work: Maximum 19mm.
c) The thickness, (excluding dubbing out): As indicated on the Design Drawings.

17 September 2015
d) Plaster bead: Galvanized mild steel.
e) Accessories: As per manufacturer's recommendation and as accepted by the Engineer.
3. The finish shall be smooth and prepared to the manufacturer's recommendations to receive external
grade masonry paint.
4. Movement Joints/ Expansion Joint Beads: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
1. The works shall withstand all movements of the building structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the performance of the works.
2. Movement Joints/ Expansion Joint Beads: To prevent cracking to render through thermal expansion
and compression. Must be used over a structural movement joint once settling is complete. Can
be used horizontally as a day joint to disguise a break in the application of render and provide an
attractive architectural detail with a gentle shadow in an internal corner.
3. All necessary movement joints shall accommodate the maximum movements that can be derived
from the specified and design loads and movements. Under maximum movements the joints shall
meet all the requirements of the Specification.
4. The works shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
b) The effects of repeated wind loadings.
c) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements.
f) Moisture movements.
B. Integrity: The installation shall be weathertight under all anticipated conditions.
C. Vapor Permeability: The vapor permeability of the system shall be not less than that of the construction
to which it is applied.
D. Serviceability: The work shall provide a smooth, flat, closed and unblemished surface suitable to receive
an applied decorative finish without de-bonding, cracking, crazing or other material deterioration resulting
in its unsuitability as a substrate for decorative finishes.
E. Fire
1. Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
3. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to
those of assemblies tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a) Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
F. Durability: The work shall retain its original appearance and performance characteristics throughout its
Design Life, when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program. Installed surfaces
shall remain free of efflorescence, saponification or other leaching of substrate material, corrosion of lath
or other metal components resulting in staining or discoloration or other unacceptable changes.

17 September 2015
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Plaster
1. Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150.
2. Masonry Cement: In accordance with ASTM C91, Type N.
3. Plastic Cement: In accordance with ASTM C1328.
4. Colorants for Job Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color
to match samples accepted by the Engineer.
5. Lime: In accordance with ASTM C206, Type S; or ASTM C207, Type S.
6. Sand Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897.
7. Perlite Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C35.
8. Acrylic Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with
colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over Portland cement plaster base coats.
Include the manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes.
B. Metal Lath
1. Expanded Metal Lath: In accordance with ASTM C847 and with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z180, hot-
dip galvanized zinc coating.
2. Wire Fabric Lath:
a) Welded Wire Lath: In accordance with ASTM C933; self-furring.
b) Woven Wire Lath: In accordance with ASTM C1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing.
3. Paper Backing: In accordance with FS UU-B-790, Type I.
C. Accessories
1. General: In accordance with ASTM C1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
2. Metal Accessories:
a) Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, in accordance with
ASTM A653/ A653M, Z180 zinc coating.
b) Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z180, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
c) External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath in accordance with ASTM A 653/
A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
d) Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
1. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
2. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
3. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use
on columns and for finishing masonry corners.
4. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 19.1mm minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations
e) Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style;
with expanded flanges.

17 September 2015
f) Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded
pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable
protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
g) Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
h) Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed
to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 6.34mm to 16mm wide;
with perforated flanges.
3. Plastic Accessories: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.
a) Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.
1. Small nose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 19.1mm minimum; use at locations indicated on the Design
Drawings.
b) Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and
flange length required to suit applications indicated.
1. Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bull-nose style, radius 19.1mm minimum; use at locations indicated on the Design
Drawings.
c) Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration;

with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
d) Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal; with
perforated concealed flanges.
D. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging
plaster, lath, or accessories.
2. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 13mm long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.
3. Bonding Compound: In accordance with ASTM C932.
4. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, in accordance with ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954,
as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in
lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than 3 exposed threads.
5. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: In accordance with ASTM C1063.
6. Wire: In accordance with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than
1.21mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
a) Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250g/ L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR
2.4 MIXING
A. General: In accordance with ASTM C926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply
with the fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 0.6
kg of fiber/ m³ of cementitious materials.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for 3-coat plasterwork as follows.

17 September 2015
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a) Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and ¾ to 1-½ parts lime.
Use 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b) Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and ¾ to 1-½ parts lime.
Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of
aggregate used in scratch coat.
2. Masonry Cement Mixes:
a) Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate.
b) Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of
3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:
a) Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 part masonry
cement. Use 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b) Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 part masonry cement.
4. Plastic Cement Mixes:
a) Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate.
b) Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of
5. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:
a) Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part Portland cement.
b) Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part Portland cement.
C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for 2-coat plasterwork as follows.
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 0 to ¾ part lime.
2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1
part masonry cement. Use 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate.
D. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for 2-coat plasterwork as follows.
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and ¾ to 1-½ parts
lime. Use 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate.
3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-½ to 4 parts aggregate.
E. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part Portland cement and ¾ to 1-½ parts
lime. Use 1-½ to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
2. Masonry Cement Mix: 1 part masonry cement and 1-½ to 3 parts aggregate.

17 September 2015
3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1
part masonry cement. Use 1-½ to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
4. Plastic Cement Mix: 1 part plastic cement and 1-½ to 3 parts aggregate.
F. Factory Prepared Finish Coat Mixes: For ready mixed finish coat plasters and acrylic based finish coatings,
comply with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Beads/ Stops
1. Examples of the use of beading shall be as detailed on the Design Drawings and are as follows:
a) Generally, all edge beads/ corner beads/ stop beads/ angle beads to external render shall be
stainless steel as detailed; to suit render thickness as supplied.
b) All beads to internal plaster shall be galvanized mild steel to suit plaster thickness.
B. Movement Joints
1. External render shall incorporate flexible external joints with sealant and compressible joint filler
and bond breaker.
2. Stainless steel render beads shall be provided to both sides of movement joint.
3. Primary movement joints with internal plaster.
4. 50mm gasket seal on extruded aluminum assembly.
C. Expanded Metal Lathing for External Render
1. Stainless steel rib lath shall be fixed to the entire face of the wall/ soffit.
2. Stainless steel hammerscrews shall be as recommended by the lathing manufacturer, sized to suit
mesh.
2.6 FINISHING
A. Smooth Finish: The coatings shall be finished with a trowel or float to produce a tight, matt, smooth
surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks. Water brush shall not be used and
excessive trowelling or overpolishing avoided.
A. Provide evidence to demonstrate that the works have been tested to comply with the requirements of
the Specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, examine the substrates, adjacent construction and the conditions in
which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions, levels and surfaces to receive the work of this Section.
Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Preparation by Applicator: In accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction.
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required
to bond with plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.

17 September 2015
C. Suitability of Structure
1. Before commencing installation, survey the structure, checking line, level and fixing points and
report immediately to the Engineer if the existing structure is unsuitable to receive the works as
specified.
2. If the structure is unsuitable, propose remedial action to make the structure suitable.
3. The suitability of the existing structure shall be confirmed to the Engineer before the installation of
the works.
4. The substrate shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is substantially
complete before applying the plaster finish.
D. Mixing of Materials
1. No admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be used.
2. Materials shall be mixed thoroughly to a uniform consistency in a suitable forced action mechanical
mixer.
3. Materials shall be used while sufficiently plastic to ensure full compaction.
E. Proprietary Render: Provide bonding agent to masonry walls or stainless steel expanded lath to the
surface of concrete walls or plasterboard soffits.
F. Background Preparation
1. Keying/ Bonding: Backgrounds shall be prepared as specified in the Specification for the type of
coating to be applied. Methods other than those specified shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer.
2. Treatment of Organic Growths: Only biocides recommended for the purpose and approved by the
Pesticides Safety Precautions Scheme shall be used.
G. Rib Lath: Install the lath in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mechanically fix the
lath to solid surfaces and to furring and framing members. Provide trim and movement joints where
indicated or required for a properly finished installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication.
2. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets
are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
3. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
4. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B. The mix proportions of cement to sand shall be 1 to 3½-4½ for dense, strong and smooth or moderately
strong and porous backgrounds; or 1 to 4½ for backgrounds that are moderately weak and porous.
C. Expanded Metal Lath: Install in accordance with ASTM C1063.
D. Install accessories in accordance with ASTM C1063 and at locations indicated on the Design Drawings.
E. Plaster Application
1. General: In accordance with ASTM C926.

17 September 2015
2. Each coat shall be applied firmly to achieve good adhesion in one continuous operation between
angles and joints.
3. All coats shall not be less than the thickness specified, in accordance with the Codes of Practice,
shall be firmly bonded, of even and consistent appearance and be free from rippling, hollows and
ridges.
4. Surfaces shall be finished to a true plane and to the correct line and level, with all angles and corners
to a right angle, unless specified otherwise. Walls and reveals shall be plumb and square.
5. Combing, where specified, shall be carried out as the coating stiffens using a suitable comb to
produce evenly spaced, wavy horizontal lines, approximately 20mm apart and 5mm deep, to provide
a key for the following coat, with no penetration through the coat.
6. Dissimilar Backgrounds: Where scrim or lathing or beads are not used, a cut shall be made through
the render/ plaster with a fine blade, in a neat, straight line at junctions of rendered/ plastered rigid
sheet and rendered/ plastered solid backgrounds.
7. Drying Out: Each undercoat and final coat shall be kept damp for the first 3 days by covering with
polythene sheet and/ or spraying with water. Drying out too rapidly shall be prevented and no forced
heat drying or dehumidification shall be allowed. Work shall be carried out in the shade whenever
possible. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly to ensure that drying shrinkage is
substantially complete before applying the next coat.
8. Wood float finish to a flat, level and true plane, free of irregularities, rippling, blemishes and
imperfections.
F. Concealed Interior Plasterwork
1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings and
equipment, apply finish coat.
2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations, finish
coat may be omitted.
3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes,
omit finish coat.
A. Cleaning
1. Clean off splashes from adjoining surfaces as the work proceeds. Promptly remove plaster from
door frames, windows and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered.
B. Adjusting
1. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking,
dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.
Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
C. Protection
1. Protect the work from premature drying and control drying rate to minimize cracking.
2. Prevent damage during construction.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 093000 -- TILING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 9
2.5 FABRICATION 11
PART 3 EXECUTION 11
3.1 EXAMINATION 11
3.2 PREPARATION 12
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION 13
3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION 15
3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION 15

Tender Issue 093000 TILING
17 September 2015
SECTION 093000 -- TILING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Ceramic tile and related setting materials applied to floors and walls.
2. Ceramic tile skirting.
3. Associated waterproof membrane for water bodies, wet areas and thin-set applications.
4. Metal edge strips.
5. Section 093033 Stone Tiling.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 093000 / 1 TILING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings. Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
the system.
5. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type and composition of tile, signed by the tile
manufacturer and Installer.
6. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
7. Material Test Reports: For each tile setting and tile grouting product.
1. Typical full size module unit or minimum A4 size of each type of tile in each finish required. For
ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type of tile and for each finish required, at least
900mm² and mounted on a rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color(s) approved for completed Work.
3. Tile threshold in 150mm lengths.
4. Metal edge strips in 150mm lengths.
5. Grout sample for each color required.
6. Movement joint material minimum 300mm.
1. Warranties.

17 September 2015
1. A specialist, who is a member of The Tile Association (TTA) or similar body, has at least 10 years'
successful experience in performing similar work.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each tile product type through single source from single producer.
1. Obtain tile of each tile type and color and finish from same production run and of consistent quality
in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
2. Where threshold types are identical to tile types except for size or finish, provide from same source.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each,
mortar, adhesive and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source
or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Work Section
from a single manufacturer for each product.
1. Waterproof membrane.
2. Joint sealants.
4. Tile thresholds.
F. Mock-ups
1. Interface between movement joint and the work.
G. Prototypes
1. Not required.
A. Delivery
1. Deliver materials and accessories in unopened manufacturer's packaging.
2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Storage

17 September 2015
1. Store materials in a protected location in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturers.
Inspect tiles for damage on receipt and immediately prior to installation and replace damaged
materials.
2. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location.
3. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
4. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from overheating.
C. Handling
1. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
A. Protect the work areas from direct sunlight. Strictly observe ambient air and surfaces temperatures
recommended by the material manufacturers. Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced
standards and the manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Source of Supply
1. Obtain products from manufacturers who have at least 10 years experience producing similar
products.
B. Type FLH-101 Ceramic Floor Tile
1. Description: Ceramic floor tile fastened to floor substrate as indicated on the Design Drawings,
including all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: RAK Ceramics or acceptable equivalent.
4. Module Size: 600mm x 600mm.
5. Nominal Thickness: 10mm.
6. Color and Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
7. Slip Resistance: Meets or exceeds 0.6, wet or dry.
8. Abrasive Resistance: Class 4.
9. Grout Color: To match tile color, as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard
product range.
C. Type FLH-102 Matt Ceramic Floor Tile
1. Description: Ceramic floor tile fastened to floor substrate as indicated on the Design Drawings,
including all necessary accessories to complete the installation.

17 September 2015
product range.
D. Type FLH-103 Porcelain Floor Tile
1. Description: Porcelain floor tiling on floor substrates as indicated on the Design Drawings, including
all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
6. Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
7. Finish: Polished.
product range.
E. Type FLH-105 Pool Ceramic Floor Tile
1. Description: Ceramic floor tile installed to the pool area; substrates as indicated on the Design
Drawings including all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
4. Module Size: Refer to Finishes Schedule.
product range.
F. Type LIN-601 Ceramic Wall Tile
1. Description: Ceramic wall tiling on substrates as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all

17 September 2015
6. Color: White.
7. Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
9. Grout: Epoxy grout, color to match tile color.
G. Type LIN-602 Matt Ceramic Wall Tile.
1. Description: Matt ceramic wall tiling fastened to wall substrate as indicated on the Design Drawings,
including all necessary accessories to complete the installation.
6. Finish: Matt.
product range.
H. Type LIN-603 Porcelain Wall Tile
1. Description: Porcelain wall tile fastened to wall substrate as indicated on the Design Drawings,
including all necessary support framing and accessories required to complete the work.
product range.
I. Type LIN-604 Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile
1. Description: Glazed ceramic wall tile fastened to wall substrate as indicated on the Design Drawings,
including all necessary support framing and accessories required to complete the installation.

17 September 2015
6. Finished: Glazed.
8. Grout Color: To match tile color, as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
J. Type LIN-605 Pool Ceramic Wall Tile
1. Description: Ceramic wall tiling for pool area on substrates as indicated on the Design Drawings
including all necessary fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
4. Module Size: Refer to Finishes Schedule.
product range.
K. Type TRM-505 Ceramic Skirting
1. Description: Ceramic skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary
4. Height: 150mm.
5. Color and Finish: To match floor tile.
product range.
L. Type TRM-510 Polished Porcelain Skirting
1. Description: Porcelain tile skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary
2. Height: 150mm.
4. Color: To match floor tile.
product range.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools/ on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use
back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of
mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

17 September 2015
A. Movements
1. The work shall be installed to accommodate all movements of the substrates without damage or
any reduction in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining
the requirement for and location of movement joints as necessary whether indicated on the Design
Drawings or not.
2. Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the tiling is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
3. Show all control joints on the Shop Drawings, which shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that movement joint thicknesses are adequate.
5. A Method Statement for the installation of all the work shall be provided, taking into account
movements of the structural slab including:
a) Dimensional setting out and joints alignment.
b) Floor services including trunking to be incorporated in the bedding build-up.
c) Construction tolerances.
d) Movement joints, bay joints and relief joints.
e) Full adhesion.
f) Full bed without hollows.
g) Cracking to grouted joints shall not be acceptable.
6. A full understanding of the behavior of the building structure, its movements and its effects upon
the work is required.
B. Dead Loads
1. The following loadings shall be accommodated by the work without damage being caused or any
a) Dead Loads: 3kN/ m².
C. Live Loads
1. The work shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a) Imposed Live Loads: 5kN/ m² + 1kN/ m² (where partitions are located).
b) Point Loads: 10kN.
D. Thermal Movement
1. The work shall be capable of withstanding differential surface temperatures including those induced
under the heating and cooling cycle of the floor without any progressive or permanent reduction in
the specified performance.
2. The thermal coefficients of the work and the adjoining structure shall be established as the design
caters for all thermal movement including temperature range induced by underfloor heating and
cooling pipework.
3. The climatic and thermal conditions as stated in Division 01 General Requirements, shall be noted
when finalizing the design of the tiling. Movement joints shall be provided as necessary to cater for
any thermal movement.

17 September 2015
E. Moisture Movement
1. The work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any reduction
in the specified performance:
b) Due to drying shrinkage of building components, both short term and long term.
2.4 MATERIALS
B. Modular Flooring System: Provide flooring materials that comply with the requirements as stated in the
Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.
C. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos to comply with the requirements as stated
D. Ceramic Tile: Provide tile in accordance with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other
characteristics indicated.
E. Tile Backing Panels: Refer to Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1. General Requirements for Tile Backing Panels:
a) Cementitious Backer Units: In accordance with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325, in maximum
lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
b) Fiber-Cement Underlayment: In accordance with ASTM C1288, in maximum lengths available

to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
F. Waterproof Membranes, General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with
non-woven polyester fabric; 0.76mm minimum thickness.
2. PVC Sheet: 2 No. layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of non-woven polyester.
3. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing.
4. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with

woven reinforcement facing.
5. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric

polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
6. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
7. Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.
8. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane in a

consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting
adhesive in a 2-step process.
G. Tile Setting Materials
1. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: In accordance with ANSI A108.02.
a) Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, in accordance with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15); or
polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM D4397.

17 September 2015
b) Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric; in accordance with ASTM A185 and
ASTM A82 except for minimum wire size.
c) Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath in accordance with ASTM C847.
1. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.
2. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
4. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring.
d) Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
Site-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.1.
a) For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar
in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
3. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.4.
a) For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar
in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
4. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: In accordance with ANSI A118.4. Provide product
that is approved by the manufacturer for application thickness of 16mm.
5. EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI
A118.11.
6. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
7. Organic Adhesive: In accordance with ANSI A136.1, Type I.
H. VOC Content: Adhesive and sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green
I. Tile Grout Materials: The grouting compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer. Confirm details
of the proposed grout to the Engineer.
1. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement
and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
2. Standard Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.6.
3. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.7.
4. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
5. Grout for Pre-grouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pre-grout tile sheets.
J. Tile Elastomeric Sealants General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories,
recommended by the sealant manufacturer, in accordance with the following requirements and with the
applicable requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants and that do not stain tiles. Joints shall extend
through tiles and bedding to substrate. Joints shall coincide with any movement joints left in the substrate.
1. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints
2. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS;
Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated
with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

17 September 2015
3. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type M; Grade
P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
4. Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide chemical-resistant elastomeric

sealant of type recommended and produced by the chemical-resistant mortar and grout
manufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibility with tile
and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/ grout.
K. Tile Miscellaneous Materials
1. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
2. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
stainless steel, ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed edge material.
3. Temporary Protective Coating: Formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after
grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
a) Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5% oil with a melting
point of 49° to 60°C in accordance with ASTM D87.
b) Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
4. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by the tile and grout
manufacturers.
5. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with the referenced standards and the mortar and grout manufacturers'
1. Add materials, water and additives in accurate proportions.
2. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
B. Tolerances
1. Tile sizes, where stated in the Specification, are nominal and the actual sizes required to meet the
joint sizes shall be determined by the Contractor.
2. Module size refers to the actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
3. Face size refers to the actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
4. Tiles shall be butted/ manufactured with the tolerance of ±0.5mm.
A. Grout Staining: Evaluate the risk of staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. Seek advice of
specialist/ manufacturer if discoloration occurs on trial areas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

17 September 2015
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with the Contractor present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Verification of Conditions
1. Verify dimensions of supporting construction to receive the work of this Work Section.
2. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with
tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
3. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, a bonded mortar bed or thin-
set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a) Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.
b) Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.
4. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work
and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
5. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Engineer.
6. For areas to receive waterproofing, verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period
recommended by the waterproofing manufacturer.
a) Verify by testing, that substrate is dry and free of moisture.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Preparation
1. New concrete substrates shall be scrubbed with water containing detergent to completely remove
mold, oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with the bedding. It shall then be rinsed
with clean water and allowed to dry, unless specified otherwise.
2. Remove surface projections and imperfections.
3. Fill cracks, holes and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with either adhesives
or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by
the tile-setting material manufacturer.
4. Blockwork walls to receive tiles shall be prepared for tiling using an accepted adhesive compound,
to fill in any excessive indentations prior to applying the general adhesive.
6. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed
that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1:50 toward drains.
a) Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
affecting other construction.
7. For dissimilar backgrounds, the necessary stainless steel lathing shall be installed to ensure that
cracking to grout or tile does not occur due to differential movement.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so
tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Site before
installing.

17 September 2015
C. Cover or otherwise protect adjacent work from damage or soiling during installation.
D. Provide temporary lighting as necessary to simulate as closely as possible the direction and intensity of
the permanent lighting.
E. Setting Out
1. Finishes to areas of the work shall be set out on a grid and coordinated onto this grid, except where
otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
2. Joints shall be true to line, continuous and without steps.
3. Joints in walls shall be parallel to the main axes of the space or specified features.
4. Cut tiles shall be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive locations.
5. Where positions of movement joints are not specified they shall be agreed with the Engineer.
F. Movement and Control Joints
1. Accurately locate and install joints in areas to receive tiling.
2. Provide thin ribbon screed smoothing compounds to fully support movement joints. Set joints at
correct level.
3. Protect rubber inserts with tape to prevent soiling during the placing of screed material.
4. Provide control joints where floors abut columns and concrete upstands and at crack control joint
locations in flooring.
5. Form control joints against vertical surfaces with a sheet of acoustic foam and cut off level with the
surface of the screed.
6. Leave control joints ready for filling with joint sealant as specified.
G. Waterproof Membranes: Provide beneath tiling in shower areas and beneath surfaces that receive
frequent wetting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Buried Services: Securely fasten conduit or armored cables to slabs with sufficient space between to
allow mortar to be packed around them. Finish mortar flush with tops of services; slope edges to allow
for screed to be applied. Perform work in sections, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
I. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from
staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective
coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile
installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and
apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards
for providing 95% mortar coverage:
a) Exterior tile floors.
b) Tile floors in wet areas.
c) Tile floors composed of tiles 200mm x 200mm or larger.
d) Tile floors in laundries.
e) Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

17 September 2015
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners
without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints.
Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
D. Provide the manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern
1. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.
3. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile.
4. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
a) For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile
sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
b) Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls or trim are specified or indicated to be same size,
align joints.
c) Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths.
1. Provide smallest joint permitted for tile size and recommended by the manufacturer for both floor
and wall applications to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1.6mm.
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1.6mm.
4. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1.6mm.
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Adhesives
1. Tile adhesive shall be as recommended in writing by the manufacturer and applied strictly in
accordance with printed recommendations.
2. All tiles shall be bedded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

I. Mortars
1. All tiles shall be bedded in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Checking Tile Adhesion: In the presence of the Engineer, it shall be verified that there is adhesion over
the whole tile area.

17 September 2015
K. Grouting
1. Grout shall be sanitized and match the tiles. Grout shall not be applied until the bedding material
has hardened sufficiently. The joints shall be a minimum of 5mm deep and free from dust and debris.
All joints shall be completely filled, tooled to an accepted profile and wiped down to leave free from
blemishes.
2. All grout joints shall be installed to the full depth of the tile joint. All debris shall be removed from
the joints prior to grouting. The grouting joint shall be a nominal 2mm, at no point greater than 3mm
or less than 1mm and deviations shall be non-cumulative.
3. The grout joints shall be 'washed' joints: meaning the grouting shall be washed out to the bottom
line of the arris.
4. Seal grout with a proprietary water-based sealer.
5. Grout shall not stain tiles/ slabs.
6. Surplus material shall be immediately cleaned from surfaces of tiles.
L. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds and
tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
M. Stone Thresholds: Refer to Section 093033 Stone Tiling for installation requirements.
N. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood or other flooring that
finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
O. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints used in epoxy grout installations in tile floors
according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated
grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install cementitious backer units or fiber-cement underlayment at showers and tubs and where indicated.
Refer to Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies.
B. Install panels and treat joints in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and the manufacturer's written instructions
for type of application indicated. Use latex-Portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise
directed in the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
1. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been
tested to determine that it is watertight.
A. Cleaning
1. On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign
matter.
2. Remove epoxy and latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

17 September 2015
3. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions
but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout
manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile
and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of
cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
4. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that
is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.
B. Adjusting
1. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone that does not match
adjoining tile, stone flooring or stone facing.
a) Tile may be repaired if methods and results are approved by the Engineer.
2. Remove and replace defective joints, including misaligned joints.
3. Remove and replace defective tile units.
4. Remove and replace tile units and joints not matching approved Samples and mock-ups.
5. Remove and replace tiling not complying with other requirements indicated.
6. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
C. Protection
1. Prohibit foot traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
2. On completion, when joints are hard, tiling shall be polished with a dry cloth and protected.
3. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage and wear. If recommended by the tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
4. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 093033 -- STONE TILING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 7
2.5 FABRICATION 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 10
3.1 EXAMINATION 10
3.2 PREPARATION 11
3.3 STONE TILE INSTALLATION 12
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION 13
3.5 STONE FLOORING INSTALLATION DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE 14
3.6 STONE FLOORING INSTALLATION OVER WATERPROOFING 14
3.7 STONE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 14

Tender Issue 093033 STONE TILING
17 September 2015
SECTION 093033 -- STONE TILING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Natural stone floor tile.
2. Associated waterproof membrane for water bodies, wet areas and thin-set applications.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 093033 / 1 STONE TILING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
a) Show locations of each type of stone tile and tile pattern.
b) Show widths, details and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in
substrates and finished stone tile surfaces.
c) Show stone thresholds.
d) For installed products indicated in accordance with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
e) Include large-scale shaded Shop Drawings of decorative surfaces and inscriptions.
2. Product Data on materials and components for use for each type of product indicated.
3. Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer/ supplier for the
design life of the system.
5. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in
Section 079200 Joint Sealants and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone.
6. Qualification Data: For Installer.
7. Qualification Data: For Fabricator.
1. Typical full-size module unit or minimum A4 size of each type of stone tile in each finish required.
a) Range Samples consisting of at least 3 No. full-size units of each type of stone tile, exhibiting
extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected. Range Samples
establish the standard by which individual stone tiles and thresholds shall be judged.
2. Assembled Samples with grouted joints for each type of stone tile and for each finish required, at
least 900mm² and mounted on a rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color(s) approved for completed
Work.
3. Stone thresholds in 150mm lengths.
4. Metal edge strips in 150mm lengths.
5. Grout sample for each color required.
6. Pointing mortar sample for each color required.
7. Sealant sample for each color required.
1. Warranties.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals:

17 September 2015
a) Include component list with manufacturer's reference numbers, descriptions of dimension stone
tile materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning frequency.
b) Include maintenance data for stone flooring. Provide product data for stone-care products used
or recommended by the Contractor and names, addresses and telephone numbers of local
sources for products.
A. Stone Tiling Supplier Qualifications: A firm experienced in supplying products similar to those indicated
for the Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Stone Tile and Thresholds: Obtain each stone product type through single source
from single producer.
1. For each stone product type, provide 1 No. stone variety.
2. Where threshold types are identical to stone tile types except for size or finish, provide same variety.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
cementitious material, admixture, mortar, adhesive and grout component from a single manufacturer and
each aggregate from single source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Work Section
from a single manufacturer for each product.
1. Waterproof membrane.
2. Joint sealants.
4. Stone accessories.
E. Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar
work. Waterproofing installer to be approved by the waterproofing manufacturer.
G. Mock-ups
1. Build mock-up of each type of stone floor tile installation.
H. Prototypes
1. Not required.
J. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the materials, products and systems comply
A. Delivery

17 September 2015
1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use, clearly labeled to show brand, type, class, quality and other qualifying information.
2. Deliver stone required for each area on same pallets.
3. Deliver stone to Site in a clean condition suitably protected against wetting, staining and physical
damage.
4. Ensure materials in contact with stone are non-staining.
B. Storage
1. Store stone tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location.
Observe particular requirements of the material manufacturer.
2. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
3. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
4. Store liquid materials in unopened containers.
a) Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers' and statutory requirements for storage and
C. Handling
1. Do not open the manufacturer's packaging until immediately before installation.
2. Handle material carefully to avoid damage to face, edges and corners.
3. Inspect stone for damage on receipt and immediately prior to installation. Replace damaged stone
or material otherwise unfit for use.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stone tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and
the manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Strictly observe ambient air and surface temperatures recommended by the manufacturer of the
setting products.
B. Screed: Ensure screed materials do not stiffen or dry out before placing and compaction. Cover screed
with polyethylene sheeting as recommended by the material manufacturer, to achieve proper curing.
C. Do not install work on damp surfaces. Protect uncured work from wetting or rapid drying out.
D. Protect the work from direct sunlight until fully cured.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder of construction period.
B. Install stone tile and accessories only after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1. Al Habtoor Marble.

17 September 2015
2. Al Hashem Marble.
3. Carrara Middle East.
B. Type FLH-201 Natural Stone Floor Tile
1. Description: Natural stone flooring tile fastened to floor substrate for reception area as indicated on
the Design Drawings, with beddings and all necessary accessories required to complete the work.
2. Product Reference: Light Emperador Marble or acceptable equivalent.
3. Stone Type: Marble.
5. Module Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6. Thickness: 25mm.
7. Floor Pattern: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
8. Grout Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
9. Mortar: Semi- dry setting mortar.
C. Type TRM-515 Natural Stone Skirting
1. Description: Natural stone skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary
2. Height: 150mm.
3. Color/ Finish: To match floor tile.
product range.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. The stone shall be thoroughly seasoned and free from cracks, vents, fissures or other defects that
may adversely affect appearance, strength, weathering qualities or durability. Stone to be dressed
and worked prior to delivery to Site.
2. No deleterious constituents or Pyrite shall be permitted.
3. Stone shall be insusceptible to staining.
4. Stone finishes shall be as described and accepted by sampling.
5. The desired colors and textures shall be established through range samples due to their permissible
variations in material characteristics. Present a selection of representative range samples to the
Engineer for viewing, sufficient in number to show the complete range of variations in colors and
textures of the proposed stone prior to commencing production.
6. Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated, including
cracks, seams and starts.
A. Flatness Performance
1. Polished Finish: Smooth surface that produces sharp, mirror-like reflections. Reflected images of
overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when viewed at arm's length.

17 September 2015
B. Abrasion Resistance of Stone Tile for Floors: For marble.
1. Provide stone with a value of not less than 10, as determined in accordance with ASTM C1353 or
ASTM C241.
C. Static Coefficient of Friction of Stone Tile for Floors: Provide products with the following values as
determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM C1028.
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60.
2. Properties of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated.
D. Movements
1. The works shall be detailed, manufactured and installed to accommodate all movements of the
substrates without damage or any reduction in the performance of the works. The Contractor shall
be responsible for determining the requirement for and location of movement joints as necessary
whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
2. Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the tiling is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
5. The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the works
E. Loadings
1. The works shall accommodate the following live loads without any reduction in performance or
appearance:
a) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure.
b) Loads acting on the surface arising from maintenance and cleaning operations.
c) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads that reasonably occur during their normal service life.
d) Loads imposed during replacement of components.
F. Dead Loads
1. The following loadings shall be accommodated by the works without damage being caused or any
a) Dead Loads: 3kN/ m².
G. Live Loads
1. The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a) Imposed Live Loads: 5kN/ m² + 1kN/ m² (where partitions are located).
b) Point Loads: 10kN.
H. Thermal Movement
1. The works shall be capable of withstanding differential surface temperatures including those induced

17 September 2015
2. The thermal coefficients of the works and the adjoining structure shall be established as the design
caters for all thermal movement including temperature range induced by underfloor heating and
cooling pipework.
3. The climatic and thermal conditions, as stated in Division 01 General Requirements, shall be noted
when finalizing the design of the tiling. Movement joints shall be provided as necessary to cater for
any thermal movement.
I. Moisture Movement
1. The Work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any reduction
in the specified performance:
b) Due to drying shrinkage of building components, both short term and long term.
2.4 MATERIALS
B. Modular Flooring System: Provide flooring materials that comply with the requirements as stated in the
C. Marble Stone Type: In accordance with ASTM C503, Classification I, Calcite or Classification II, Dolomite.
D. Waterproof Membranes, General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with
non-woven polyester fabric.
2. PVC Sheet: 2 No. layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of non-woven polyester.
3. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing.
4. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with

woven reinforcement facing.
5. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric

polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
6. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
7. Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.
8. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane in a

consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting
adhesive in a 2-step process.
E. Stone Tile Setting Materials
1. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: In accordance with ANSI A108.02. The
mortar bedding shall be a proprietary standard set flexible cementitious compound suitable for
natural stone tiles. Tile mortar bedding compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer and
applied strictly in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's written recommendations.
a) Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, in accordance with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15); or
polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM D4397.
b) Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath in accordance with ASTM C847.
1. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc coated (galvanized)
steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.

17 September 2015
2. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
4. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring.
c) Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with
Site-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
2. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
3. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
4. Grout Sealer: A proprietary water-based sealer that resists water, oil and acid-based contaminants,
simplifies maintenance and does not change the appearance of the grout.
F. Stone Tile Elastomeric Sealants, General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods and other sealant
accessories in accordance with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section
079200 Joint Sealants and that do not stain stone. Joints shall extend through tiles and bedding to
substrate. Joints shall coincide with any movement joints left in the substrate.
1. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in stone tile adjoining sealed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
2. One Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS;
Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated
with fungicide, intended for sealing interior stone tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are
subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
3. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type M; Grade
P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
G. Stone Tile Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with a directional pattern, provide tile with pattern
oriented parallel to one side of tile randomly oriented at various angles to sides of tiles.
1. For stone varieties that exhibit a directional pattern, provide thresholds with pattern oriented parallel
to oriented at an angle of 45° or less to randomly oriented at various angles to long edges of
thresholds.
H. Stone Tile Miscellaneous Materials
1. Trowelable Patching Compounds for Concrete Substrates: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
2. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match stone tile and setting bed thickness, metallic
or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed edge material.
3. Protective Coating: Liquid grout release coating that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of
stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with stone, mortar and grout products;
easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and recommended
for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile.
4. Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile producers and
grout manufacturers.
5. Floor Sealer: Colorless, stain- and slip-resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties of
stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated.
6. Preformed Strip/ Section Movement Joints: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, preformed
strip/ section movement joints shall be provided and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
2.5 FABRICATION

17 September 2015
A. Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Polished or Honed Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from
specified dimensions by more than ±0.4mm.
B. Thickness of Stone Tiles with Polished, Honed or Sand-Rubbed Finish: Do not vary from specified
thickness by more than ±0.8mm.
C. Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges, if any, dress joint surfaces square for full
depth of stone tile.
D. Backs of Pieces: Gage units by dressing backs of pieces smooth and flat. When tested with a 600mm
straightedge, gap shall not exceed 0.8mm.
E. Stone Thresholds: Fabricate to size and profile as indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit
height of bevel to 13mm or less and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
F. Mix mortars and grouts in accordance with the referenced standards and with the mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Add materials, water and additives in accurate proportions.
2. Use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time and other procedures
to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for
installations indicated.
G. Stone Production, General
1. Execute cutting plan to minimize waste and maximize the quantity of material closest to the mid-
range of the samples.
2. Clean stone of contamination prior to placing on pallets for shipping.
H. Stone Finishing, General
1. Accurately cut and dress stone to shapes and dimensions indicated.
2. Finish the stone as specified or as scheduled.
3. Form exposed faces true to line with edges square, unless otherwise indicated, and with backs
parallel to the face.
4. Finish, as specified or indicated, to provide slip resistance.
5. Carefully inspect stone for compliance with requirements relative to quality of workmanship, inherent
defects or damage and for match with the respective range samples.
6. Replace defective and visually unacceptable stone that will not provide a uniform appearance when
installed.
I. Stone Sealer
1. Apply sealer to the face and edges of each stone in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Allow sealer to dry completely and remove excessive build-up before placing on pallets for shipping.
J. Stone Tiling Tolerances
1. Tile sizes, where stated in the Specification, are nominal and the actual sizes required to meet the
joint sizes shall be determined by the Contractor.
2. Tiles shall be butted and manufactured with the tolerance of ±0.5mm.
K. Damage: Tiles that are chipped, crazed, scratched, damaged or have any other physical imperfections
shall not be used in the works.

17 September 2015
A. The testing regime shall be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor with regard to the specific
project conditions.
B. Preliminary Testing
1. Test certificates and reports shall be presented in their entirety and are to include all individual and
mean values obtained.
C. Sealant Testing
1. Staining: Perform test on each type of tiling in contact with sealant(s).
2. Adhesion: Test elastomeric sealants for peel strength.
D. Grout Staining: Evaluate the risk of staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. Seek advice of
specialist/ manufacturer if discoloration occurs on trial areas.
E. Slip Resistance Testing
1. Testing shall be performed at an independent laboratory accredited to perform the specified test
methods.
2. Samples shall be tested at the following stages of the Project:
a) Approval.
b) Production.
c) Post-installation (poured-in-place).
3. Submit test results to the Engineer for acceptance in due time, prior to each of the Project stages
or as agreed with the Engineer.
4. Test samples must include any surface sealer or treatment to be applied to the finished surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone tile will be installed, with the Contractor present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of installed stone tile. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Verification of Conditions
1. Verify dimensions of supporting construction to receive the work of this Work Section.
2. Verify that substrates for setting stone tile are firm, dry, clean and free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and that they comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI
A108.01 for installations indicated.
3. Verify that concrete substrates for stone tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed or
thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a) Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.
b) Verify that protrusions, bumps and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.
4. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work
and similar items located in or behind stone tile has been completed.
5. Verify that joints and cracks in stone tile substrates are coordinated with stone tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with the Engineer.

17 September 2015
6. For areas to receive waterproofing, verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period
recommended by the waterproofing manufacturer.
a) Verify by testing, that substrate is dry and free of moisture.
C. Proceed with stone tile installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Preparation
1. New concrete substrates shall be scrubbed with water containing detergent to completely remove
mold, oil, surface retarders and other materials incompatible with the bedding. It shall then be rinsed
with clean water and allowed to dry, unless specified otherwise.
2. Remove surface projections and imperfections. Fill cracks, holes and depressions in concrete
substrates for stone tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable patching
compound specifically recommended by the tile-setting material manufacturer.
4. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed
in accordance with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1:50 toward drains.
a) Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
affecting other construction.
5. For dissimilar backgrounds, the necessary stainless steel lathing shall be installed to ensure that
cracking to grout or tile does not occur due to differential movement.
B. Cover or otherwise protect adjacent work from damage or soiling during installation.
C. Provide temporary lighting as necessary to simulate as closely as possible the direction and intensity of
the permanent lighting.
D. Setting Out
1. Finishes to areas of the works shall be set out on a grid and coordinated onto this grid, except where
otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
2. Joints shall be true to line, continuous and without steps.
3. Cut tiles shall be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive locations.
4. Where positions of movement joints are not specified they shall be agreed with the Engineer.
E. Movement and Control Joints
1. Accurately locate and install joints in areas to receive stone flooring.
2. Provide thin ribbon screed smoothing compounds to fully support movement joints. Set joints at
correct level.
3. Protect rubber inserts with tape to prevent soiling during the placing of screed material.
4. Provide control joints where floors abut columns and concrete upstands and at crack control joint
locations in flooring.
5. Form control joints against vertical surfaces with a sheet of acoustic foam and cut off level with the
surface of the screed.
6. Leave control joints ready for filling with joint sealant as specified.
F. Waterproof Membranes: Provide beneath surfaces that receive frequent wetting in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

17 September 2015
G. Site-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under stone tile type or needed to prevent grout
from staining or adhering to exposed stone tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary
protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed stone tile surfaces.
3.3 STONE TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in
stone tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation
of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods specified herein and apply to types of
setting and grouting materials used.
B. Wipe backs of stone tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.
C. Extend stone tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges
and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit stone tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so plates, collars
or covers overlap stone tile.
E. Finish cut stone tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and honing cut
surfaces and beveling edges to match factory-fabricated edges unless otherwise indicated.
F. Jointing Pattern
1. Lay stone tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lay out stone tile work and center stone tile fields in both directions in each space or on each area.
3. Lay out stone tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile.
4. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
a) Tile to tile grout joint widths between tiles shall be controlled by using spacer pegs.
b) Where adjoining stone tiles on floor are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.
G. Lay out stone tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Mix stone tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns.
I. Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with directional pattern, orient pattern as directed by the Engineer.
J. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and stone tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing stone tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in stone tile surfaces directly above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants in accordance with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
K. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes,
set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar (thin set) in accordance with ANSI A108.5.
2. Do not extend cleavage membrane, waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds
set in dry-set Portland cement or latex-Portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds
and adjoining stone tile set on cleavage membrane, waterproofing or crack isolation membrane
with elastomeric sealant.
L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of stone tile flooring meets
carpet, wood or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of stone tile and no threshold is indicated.

17 September 2015
M. Adhesives
1. Tile adhesive shall be as recommended in writing by the manufacturer and applied strictly in
accordance with printed recommendations.

N. Mortars
O. Checking Tile Adhesion: In the presence of the Engineer, it shall be verified that there is adhesion over
the whole tile area.
P. Grouting
1. Grout shall be sanitized and match the tiles. Grout shall not be applied until the bedding material
has hardened sufficiently. The joints shall be a minimum of 5mm deep and free from dust and debris.
All joints shall be completely filled, tooled to an accepted profile and wiped down to leave free from
blemishes.
2. All grout joints shall be installed to the full depth of the tile joint. All debris shall be removed from
the joints prior to grouting. The grouting joint shall be a nominal 2mm, at no point greater than 3mm
or less than 1mm and deviations shall be non-cumulative.
3. The grout joints shall be 'washed' joints, meaning the grouting shall be washed out to the bottom
line of the arris.
4. Seal grout with a proprietary water-based sealer.
5. Grout shall not stain tiles.
6. Surplus material shall be immediately cleaned from surfaces of tiles.
Q. Stone Sealer
1. Ensure that the surface is clean and dry. All barriers to penetration are removed. Use stone cleaning
products as recommended by the suppliers.
2. Work in small sections no greater than 2m² at any one time.
3. Saturate the surface with sealer (use sponge applicator), allow it to soak into stone tile then re-apply
to areas that 'dry up'.
4. Remove surplus sealant by absorbent cloths and lightly polish with a clean cloth to leave a 'natural'
uniform surface.
5. Allow to cure for 4 hours at 20°C before use.
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing in accordance with ANSI A108.13 and the manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
1. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been
tested to determine that it is watertight.

17 September 2015
3.5 STONE FLOORING INSTALLATION DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water
about 1 hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating that completely
covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1.5mm thickness. Limit area of mortar bed bond coat to avoid its
drying out before placing setting bed.
1. Place reinforcing wire mesh over concrete, lapped at joints by at least 1 full mesh and supported
so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from vertical surfaces about
13mm.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform
thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply
uniform 1.5mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set
of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces
or adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout or pointing mortar as units are set.
H. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat, uniform and smooth,
without visible voids.
3.6 STONE FLOORING INSTALLATION OVER WATERPROOFING
A. Place cleavage membrane over substrates indicated to receive stone, lapped at least 100mm at joints.
1. Carefully place stone and setting materials over waterproofing so protection materials are not
displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged. Replace protection materials
that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with stone.
2. Provide cork joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces or,
if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until stone paving installation is complete.
B. Place reinforcing wire fabric over cleavage membrane or waterproofing protection board, lapped at least
1 full mesh at joints and supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges
back from vertical surfaces about 13mm.
C. Place mortar bed over cleavage membrane or waterproofing protection board with reinforcing wire fabric
fully embedded in middle of mortar bed. Spread, tamp and screed to uniform thickness at elevations
required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply
uniform 1.5mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set
of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces
or adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout or pointing mortar as units are set.
H. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat, uniform and smooth,
without visible voids.
3.7 STONE INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

17 September 2015
A. General: Sudden irregularities shall not occur. Ensure that the installed works achieve the design
tolerances and remain free from undulations, steps, slopes, flaws, ridges, bumps, ripples, rocking and
edging.
1. The works shall be flat, flush and true at abutments with adjacent surfaces at the same relative level.
2. Bay divisions and movement joints shall be accommodated in the design and coordinated with joints
and other elements as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Cut-outs for interfacing works shall comply with the dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings
±1mm.
B. Floor Applications
1. Variation in Line: For positions indicated in plan for edges of flooring, changes in color or finish and
continuous joint lines, do not exceed 3mm in 2400mm, 6mm in 6000mm, or maximum 10mm.
2. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Edging): Do not exceed 0.8mm difference between
planes of adjacent units.
3. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 2.5mm in 3000mm from level or slope indicated
when tested with a 3000mm straightedge.
a) Level of Floor: The permissible deviation in level of surface of the works (allowing for thickness
of coverings) and toppings from datum shall be ±2mm.
C. Stone Tiling, Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Edging): Do not exceed the following differences
between faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to stone tiled surface.
1. Units with Polished Faces: 0.4mm.
D. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.6mm or ¼ of nominal joint width, whichever
is less.
E. Hand Tight Joints: Do not exceed 0.4mm.
A. Inspection, Measurement and Testing of Flooring
1. Perform specified inspections, measurements and tests on the flooring.
2. Provide the Engineer with comprehensive reports without delay. Identify areas of the work that do
not comply with the specified requirements.
3. Prepare and submit additional proposals detailing remedial work to be undertaken before grouting
flooring; include revised installation procedures in the work as accepted by the Engineer.
A. Cleaning
1. On completion of placement and grouting, clean stone surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
2. Remove epoxy and latex-Portland cement grout residue from stone as soon as possible.
3. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone tiling as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before
tooling joints.
4. Clean grout smears and haze from stone tile according to stone tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by stone
tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on
samples of stone tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures
from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
5. Clean, make good or replace adjoining work that has been marred by the stone installation, to the

17 September 2015
6. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by the coating manufacturer and
acceptable to stone tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.
Do not remove floor sealer if used as protective coating.
7. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring according to the sealer manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations.
B. Adjusting
1. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone tile that does not match
adjoining stone tile.
a) Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by the Engineer.
2. Remove and replace defective joints, including misaligned joints.
3. Remove and replace stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
4. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
C. Protection
1. Protect installed stone tile floors with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period
to prevent staining, damage and wear. If recommended by the stone tile manufacturer, apply coat
of neutral protective cleaner to completed stone tile floors.
2. Prohibit foot traffic from stone tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
3. Protect stone surfaces, edges and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened
untreated wood, plywood or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.
4. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from stone
tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 095133 -- ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.8 COORDINATION 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.4 MATERIALS 7
2.5 FABRICATION 9
2.6 FINISH REQUIREMENTS 9
PART 3 EXECUTION 10
3.1 EXAMINATION 10
3.2 PREPARATION 10
3.3 INSTALLATION 11

Tender Issue 095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
17 September 2015
SECTION 095133 -- ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

2. Supply, deliver, install and warrant the works in strict compliance with the materials and workmanship
1. Perforated metal ceiling system.
1. Acoustic Report.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Paint finishes as specified.
2. Samples of panels, grilles, trims, etc.

Tender Issue 095133 / 1 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
17 September 2015
3. Ceiling grid/ support system.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Paint finishes as specified.
2. Ceiling grid/ support system.
3. Samples of panels, grilles, trims, etc.
4. All insulation materials.
5. Cavity barrier material.
6. All fastening types.
F. Preconstruction Reports
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Metal Pans: Full-size units equal to 2 % of quantity installed.

17 September 2015
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each grid and exposed molding and trim equal to
2 % of quantity installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 % of quantity installed.
1. A specialist who is a member of the Association of Interior Specialists or similar body.
B. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited

laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited
laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of
Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.
D. Mock-ups
1. Typical area, including typical access panel interface with mechanical and electrical services and
equipment.
E. Prototypes
1. 5000mm x 5000mm area of each type of ceiling including edge conditions.
1. First structural bay of each type in location to be agreed.
A. Deliver acoustical metal pans, suspension system components, and accessories to Site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
and other causes.
B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area and on flat bases to prevent distortion. Do not open packaging
or remove labels until immediately before use.
C. Handle acoustical metal pans, suspension system components, and accessories carefully to avoid
damaging units and finishes in any way. Replace components that are damaged or otherwise unsuitable
for use.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical metal pan ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Site when occupied for
its intended use.
1.8 COORDINATION

17 September 2015
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical metal pans and suspension system with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type CLG-301 Perforated Metal Ceiling System
1. Description: Metal ceiling tile system, configured as indicated on the Design Drawings including all
necessary supports, fastenings and accessories required to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or
acceptable equivalent:
a) SAS.
b) Dampa.
c) Luxalon.
3. Product Reference: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's range.
4. System: Perforated aluminum tiles.
5. Acoustic Performance: Refer to Acoustic Report.
7. Size: 600mm x 600mm.
8. Color and Finish: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's range.
9. Suspension System: Provide ceiling manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems. Provide
systems complete with runners or beams, splice sections, connector clips, alignment clips, leveling
clips, hangers, molding, trim, web covers, load-resisting struts, fixture filler pans, clips and adapters,
and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other ceiling-supported
construction.
a) Manufacturer: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows
or acceptable equivalent:
1. Hadley.
2. Fine Line Grid.
10. Cover Profiles and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard cover profiles and trim for exposed
members, and as indicated or required, for edges of grids, at changes in ceiling height, and for other
conditions, of same metal and finish as suspended decorative grids.
11. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings, Covers, Trim and Fixture Filler Panels: Provide exposed members
as indicated or required to conceal edges of and penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of
beams, to cover runner webs, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceiling height,
and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching suspended decorative grids unless otherwise
indicated.
12. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit penetration
exactly.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. The works shall be installed within the fixing zones indicated on the Design Drawings.

17 September 2015
2. The works shall accommodate all architectural and functional features indicated on the Design
Drawings.
3. The works shall include fixings, framing, bracketry, support framing, grids, seals, insulation and all
other components/ accessories necessary to complete the works as supplied/ recommended by
the manufacturer to suit the service conditions.
A. Structural Performance
1. General
a) The works shall maintain adequate performance with respect to strength, stiffness and stability
related to thickness in relation to size of panel, frequency of supports, self-weight, presence
of and interaction with structural columns, walls, slabs, etc.
b) Resist vertical and lateral loads imposed by mechanical and electrical installations and other
fittings and fixtures.
c) The ceiling system shall withstand vibrations to which they are subjected by transmitting them
to points of support or absorbing by use of dampening materials. No drumming noises shall
be audible.
d) No pipework, cabling or ductwork shall be supported by any part of the ceiling system.
e) Ensure compatibility with methods of fabrication and installation including resistance of

temporary loads and future maintenance operations.
2. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical metal pan ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
a) Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E
580.
b) CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations

for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings - Seismic Zones 0-2."
c) CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic
Zones 3 & 4."
d) UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel
Ceilings."
e) SEI/ ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,
"Earthquake Loads."
B. Movements
1. The ceiling system shall accommodate all movements imposed by the building structure in whatever
combination they may occur without distortion, damage or reduction in performance.
2. The fastenings and support structure shall accommodate all necessary tolerance required to resist
imposed movements whilst maintaining adequate stability and structural integrity.
3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-
sky heat loss.
a) Temperature Change (Range): 55°C.
4. The ceiling system shall withstand changes in the moisture content, the prevailing moisture content
in the air and within components, without any reduction in performance and appearance.
C. Deflection

17 September 2015
1. Deflection of the works due to self-weight shall be accommodated locally and shall not exceed L/
400 for spans up to 1200mm and L/ 500 for spans up to 1800mm.
2. Dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to or through the suspended
ceiling shall be accommodated locally without causing deflection or movement.
D. Rigidity
1. The construction of the works shall be such that they remain rigid, free from play and permanent
deformation caused by the normal use to which they are subjected. Panels shall be retained
mechanically under all conditions.
2. Account shall be taken of the structural requirements of the various fixtures and fittings to be fitted
into the works. Suitable brackets and supports for use with the structure to which they are fastened
shall be incorporated.
3. Details of proposed fastenings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
4. Maximum permitted mid span deflection, under imposed loading, shall not exceed span/ 400 where
span is a maximum of 1500mm. The maximum deflection shall be stated on the Shop Drawings.
E. Acoustic Sound Absorption
1. Each panel, where specified, shall be lined with a sound absorbent blanket encased in a flameproof
membrane and supported on wire grid spacers.
2. Sound absorption requirements: The random incidence sound absorption coefficient of the ceiling
system provided by the installed panels, as indicated on the Design Drawings, shall be in accordance
with the Acoustic Report.
3. The works shall not have "buzzing", "ringing" or other extraneous noise arising from fittings in the
works construction caused by internal vibration or other movements. Extraneous noise arising from
local response of the ceiling, loose fit resonant elements and scope for friction and noise shall be
avoided by means of careful quality control in assembly and installation.
4. The works shall form a complete acoustically sealed joint at junctions with interfacing elements as
5. Ensure that the works are sealed at all edge conditions to minimize transmittance of sound to
adjoining areas.
F. Fire Performance
2. Materials used in works shall be classified as 'materials of limited combustibility'.
3. The works shall be fire resistant in accordance with the NFPA.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined
by testing identical products according to ASTM E84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
6. Ensure that all works are in compliance with all statutory authorities and Civil Defense requests/
recommendations.
G. Cavity Barriers
1. All concealed spaces above the works shall have firebreaks in accordance with the conditions
specified in the International Building Code (IBC) to subdivide the ceiling void into areas not
exceeding 20 meters in any one direction. Firebreaks shall be located on the line of the required
compartments as indicated on the plan area.
2. Barriers shall be fixed securely at perimeters and joints and as necessary to ensure permanent
stability and continuity with no gaps, thus providing a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

17 September 2015
3. Fastening to the works shall not impair free expansion of grid system or otherwise affect fire-resisting
performance.
H. Appearance: The work shall retain its appearance for its Design Life, without the following defects, when
viewed from 1m.
1. Oil canning or distortion unacceptable to the Engineer.
2. Corrosion, rusting or other breakdown of metallic components.
3. Color change, fading, discoloration, staining or other blemishes to surface finishes that are
determined unacceptable by an independent expert acceptable to all parties.
I. Components
1. The works shall not deteriorate under normal usage provided regular cleaning and maintenance is
carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All visible elements of the works (e.g. panels, trims, tiles) shall be replaceable.
J. Demountability
1. Visible elements of the works shall be interchangeable and removable for maintenance purposes.
2. All ceilings' panels and support systems shall be demountable within the supporting framework for
access to the services void above.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Low Emission Ceiling System Requirements
1. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos to comply with the requirements as
B. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is
400mm away from test surface per ASTM E795.
C. Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or discolorations.
1. Aluminum Sheet: Roll-formed aluminum sheet, in accordance with ASTM B209M; alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
3. The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or poured-in-place
during the life of the works.
6. Spacer Grids: Provide manufacturer's standard metal grid units that provide an air cushion between
metal pans and insulation pads and that act to improve sound absorption.
D. Metal Suspension Systems
1. Metal Suspension System: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types,
structural classifications, and finishes indicated in accordance with applicable ASTM C635
requirements.
2. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct
Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

17 September 2015
a) Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for
attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 or
ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated in accordance with ASTM

B633, Class Fe/ Zn 5 (0.005mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components in accordance with ASTM F593 and

ASTM F594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
3. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods in

accordance with ASTM B164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
b) Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices
for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM
E1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
3. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires in accordance with the following requirements.
a) Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A580/ A580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
b) Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the hanger design load indicated in ASTM
C635, Table 1, Direct Hung will be less than yield stress of wire.
4. Hanger Rods Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
5. Angle Hangers: Angles formed with 1.0mm thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM
A653/ A653M, Z275 coating designation; with bolted connections and 8mm diameter bolts.
6. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate

seismic forces.
7. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic

forces.
8. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
metal pans in place.
9. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced to secure acoustical metal pans
in place.
10. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or as required in
accordance with seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges of and
penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and runners, for fixture trim and adapters,
for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching
acoustical metal pan ceiling units, unless otherwise indicated.
a) For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
E. Acoustical Sealant
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable,
non-staining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/ L or less when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," complying with
ASTM C834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according
to ASTM E90.

17 September 2015
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,

nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250g/ L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), that complies with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers," recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound
transmission.
F. VOC Content: Sealant products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in the Dubai Green Building
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Panels shall be protected against the effects of corrosion after fabrication and prior to application
of finishes.
2. All cutting and drilling of ceilings panels and associated members, including apertures for services,
shall take place before the application of painted finishes. Site cutting or drilling is not permitted.
3. No exposed cut ends shall remain uncoated or unfinished.
B. Support Systems and Fastenings
1. Aluminum framing members shall be fabricated using only appropriate grades, strengths and
thicknesses to provide full structural compliance. The wall thickness of aluminum extrusions shall
be sufficient to ensure rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
2. Use only continuous profiles free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves or any other damage.
C. Manufacturing Tolerances
1. A high degree of accuracy is required in the fabrication of the works in order to ensure accurate
assembly on Site. This shall include the requirement to accurately locate repetitive units in relation
to gridlines without accumulation of tolerances and that all joints are matched for level and alignment.
2. The manufacturing tolerance for metal ceiling pans shall be ±0.5mm in any direction.
3. Face deflection of pans not exceeding 600mm in any direction:
a) At edge 1mm.
b) At center 2mm.
4. Face deflection of pans exceeding 600mm in any direction:
a) At edge 1.5mm.
b) At center 3mm.
5. Edge straightness when suspended +0mm and -0.3mm per meter concave.
6. Flatness criterion: 1:1000.
7. Squareness: 0.15mm per 300mm length.
8. Side flange angle: 90°: +0.5°/ -2° relative to face.
9. Edge perforated/ plain border:
a) +0.7mm.
b) -0.7mm.
2.6 FINISH REQUIREMENTS

17 September 2015
A. General
2. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe
Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
1. Mill Finish: AA-M10C10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified; Chemical Finish: chemically
cleaned).
2. Lacquered Mill Finish: AA-M10C10R1x (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified; Chemical

Finish: chemically cleaned; Organic Coating: as specified below).
a) Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard clear organic coating.
3. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010mm or thicker.
4. Clear Mirror Anodic Finish: AA-M21C12A212, 0.005mm or thicker.
5. Color-Coated Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder-coat baked paint complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, pretreatment, application, baking, and
minimum dry film thickness.
6. Bright-Reflective Finish: Manufacturer's standard chemical/ mechanical bright-reflective metallic

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, pretreatment,
process, protective coating, and minimum thickness to produce a finish uniform in appearance and
free of blisters, pits, roughness, nodules, burning, cracks, unfinished areas, and other visible defects.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical metal pan
ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other
Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical metal pan ceilings.
B. Verify dimensions of supporting construction, services are correctly installed in the ceiling, and surfaces
to receive the work of this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical metal pans to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width pans at borders, and comply with layout
indicated on reflected ceiling plans and Coordination Drawings.
B. Setting Out
1. The works shall be set out accurately, free from undulations and edging, with all lines and joints
straight and parallel to the planning grid.
2. The works shall be fixed securely with additional bracing and stiffening as necessary to provide a
rigid system.

17 September 2015
3. Light fittings, grilles, fire and smoke barriers, etc. shall be in the correct positions relative to the
ceiling grid, prior to commencing installation. Common setting out points shall be used.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical metal pan ceilings in accordance with ASTM C636 / UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows.
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three
tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices
that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,
by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure
to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-
in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners
that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying
channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 1200mm o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers
unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200mm from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns.
Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to
permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-
place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pans.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings
before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400mm o.c. and not more than 75mm
from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 3.2mm in 3.6m. Miter corners
accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

17 September 2015
F. Cut acoustical metal pan units for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other
work through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or variations
in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.
G. Install acoustical metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim.
1. For lay-in square-edge pans, install pans with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension
system runners and moldings.
2. For lay-in reveal-edge pans on suspension system runners, install pans with bottom of reveal in
firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. For lay-in reveal-edge pans on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install pans
with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with
bottom face of runners.
4. For clip-in / torsion-spring-hinged pans, position pans according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
5. For snap-in pans, fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
6. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in both directions
7. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
8. Install directionally patterned or textured metal pans in directions indicated.
9. Install sound-absorbent fabric layers in perforated metal pans.
10. Install sound-absorbent pads in perforated metal pans over metal spacer grids.
H. Install hold-down clips where indicated.
I. Movement Joints
1. Movement joints shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. The works shall be installed in a manner that does not compromise the panels' integrity or
appearance.
3. Movement joints shall be provided as appropriate for the area of ceiling and/ or to coincide with
movement joints in the surrounding structure.
J. Fire Stopping: All gaps at junctions of the works with walls, cavity barriers, ducts, pipes and other
penetrations shall be sealed using tightly packed mineral wool, accepted intumescent sealant or other
fireproof material to prevent penetration of smoke and flame.
K. Maintain integrity of performance of ceiling system. Ensure ceiling components are not compromised by
improperly positioned supports or by the presence of light fittings or diffusers.
L. Fastenings

17 September 2015
1. Grid dimensions as indicated on the Design Drawings shall be maintained ±1mm.
2. Finished ceiling levels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings ±2mm in 1000mm length.
3. Check all Site dimensions before commencement of installation.
4. The Detailed Design shall accommodate all specified tolerances and differences between actual
Site dimensions and dimensions indicated on the Shop Drawings.
5. Joints between panels shall be consistent, square and flush, being clamped together by the support
system. Where gaskets are installed in joints they shall not vary in width by more than 10% of the
width of the gasket in place.
6. Panel to panel edging or plan offset shall not exceed 0.5mm and be non-cumulative across any
ceiling.
7. Grid creep across any ceiling shall not exceed 1.5mm in a 10m length.
8. Install square, regular to line, level and plane within specified tolerances. Do not use cartridge or
power activated methods for top fastening or rivets for bottom fastening of hangers.
9. Obtain acceptance from the Engineer before drilling or cutting parts of the structure.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections.
1. Suspended ceiling system.
2. Hangers, anchors, and fasteners.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling
hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using
methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next
area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show
compliance with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached
20% completion but no panels have been installed.
a) Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and
postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 890 N of tension;
it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete
and will test them for 1957 N of tension.
b) When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing
agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will
resume initial testing frequency.
D. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not
pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. Cleaning
1. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical metal pan ceilings, including trim and edge moldings after
removing strippable, temporary protective covering, if any. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning, and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent units.

17 September 2015
B. Adjusting
1. Repair all damage when directed by the Engineer.
2. All remedial works to surface finishes shall only be accepted if a perfect match is achieved. Failure
in accordance with this requirement will require the Contractor to replace the component.
3. Replace dented, distorted, scratched or abraded finished components to acceptance of the Engineer.
Clean and make good adjacent surfaces marred by the installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
C. Protection
1. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as instructed,
for inspection. Remove protection at Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 096500 -- RESILIENT FLOORING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.2 MATERIALS 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 6
3.3 FLOOR INSTALLATION 6
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 7

Tender Issue 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING
17 September 2015
SECTION 096500 -- RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Rubber flooring.
2. Vinyl flooring.
3. Vinyl skirting.
4. Rubber skirting.
D. Drawing Description References: Reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained in the
Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on Design
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.

Tender Issue 096500 / 1 RESILIENT FLOORING
17 September 2015
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
D. Post Contract Samples
1. 300mm x 300mm tiling/ sheeting samples.
2. All edge trims and covers.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
A. Industry Standards: Comply with the recommendations of the Contract Flooring Association.
1. A specialist, who is a member of the Contract Flooring Association or similar trade body, has at least
10 years' successful experience performing similar work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648

or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/ sq. cm.
E. Mock-up
F. Prototypes
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
1. First 9m² of each type in location to be agreed.
A. Delivery
1. The materials shall be delivered to Site in original packaging, clearly marked with the batch number.
Where possible, the use of different batches adjacent to each other shall be avoided to ensure
consistency of appearance.
2. Deliver materials and accessories to site in unopened manufacturer's packaging, clearly labelled
to show brand, type, class, quality and other qualifying information.
B. Storage: Store materials in a protected, dry location clear of the ground. Observe manufacturer's
requirements for conditioning and acclimatising materials before use.
C. Handling: Handle material carefully to avoid damage to face and edges. Inspect flooring for damage on
receipt and immediately prior to installation. Reject materials that are damaged and unfit for use and
replace with new.
A. General: Do not install work unless ambient air temperatures in the areas to receive flooring are at or
above 21°C and humidity levels are at or below 75%, for at least 2 hours. Maintain ambient air and
surfaces temperatures recommended by the material manufacturer during installation and curing.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21°C or
more than 35°C in spaces to receive flooring during the following time periods.
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
C. Until Taking-Over, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 13°C or more than 35°C.
D. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
E. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
F. Ventilation: Ensure adequate ventilation during installation and curing to prevent the build up of harmful
dust and vapours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1. Armstrong.

17 September 2015
2. Polyflor.
3. Gerflor.
B. Source of Supply
1. Obtain the flooring from a manufacturer with at least 10 years' experience producing similar materials.
2. Obtain auxiliary materials from sources recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
3. Flooring shall be obtained from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
C. Type FLS-101 Vinyl Flooring
1. Description: Synthetic sports surface vinyl flooring installed on a suitable substrate including all
3. System: Vinyl surface layer, PVC foam backing reinforced by a non-woven fiberglass mesh.
5. Color: To be selected from the manufacturer's full range.
6. Substrate: Screeded concrete as indicated on the Design Drawings.
7. A leveling screed shall be provided where necessary and as recommended for purpose by the tile
manufacturer.
8. Adhesive shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
a) Thickness: 3mm minimum.
9. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
D. Type FLS-201 Rubber Flooring
1. Description: Rubber flooring installed on a suitable substrate including all necessary fastenings and
3. System: Weatherproof extra-heavy duty decorative rubber tile flooring.
6. Substrate: Screeded concrete.
7. A leveling screed shall be provided where necessary and as recommended for purpose by the tile
manufacturer.
8. Adhesive shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
a) Thickness: As per manufacturer's standard.
9. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
E. Type TRM-525 Vinyl Skirting
1. Description: Vinyl skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary fastenings
and accessories to complete the installation.

17 September 2015
2. Height: 60mm.
product range.
F. Type TRM-530 Rubber Skirting
1. Description: Rubber skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary fastenings
2. Height: 60mm.
product range.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Flooring
1. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile Standard: In accordance with ASTM F1700.
2. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Standard: In accordance with ASTM F1066.
3. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: In accordance with ASTM F1913.
4. Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: In accordance with ASTM F1303.
B. Rubber Flooring
1. Rubber Floor Tile Standard: In accordance with ASTM F1344.
2. Rubber Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: In accordance with ASTM F1860.
3. Unbacked Rubber Sheet Floor Covering: In accordance with ASTM F1859.
C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
D. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions
indicated.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
A. Products shall be certified as 'Pass' when tested to ASTM D 2047, Test Method for Static Coefficient of
Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Coordinate requirements specified in other Sections for subfloor construction and tolerances to ensure
that they are appropriate for floor tile selected.
B. Examine substrates, with Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections
and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of floor tile.

17 September 2015
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient

products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare in accordance with ASTM F710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
a) Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 1.36kg of water/ 92.9m² in 24 hours.
b) Perform relative humidity test using poured-in-place probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. No materials shall be laid until the building is weathertight, wet trades have finished their work, the building
has dried out, all paintwork is finished and dry, and floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures
around which the materials are to be cut have been fixed. The Engineer shall be informed not less than
48 hours before commencing laying.
E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
F. All bases shall be rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and other contaminants before
coverings are applied.
G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
H. The setting out of the pattern shall be agreed with the Engineer before ordering the floor finish materials.
I. Before laying commences the materials shall be thoroughly conditioned by unpacking and spreading out
in the spaces where they are to be laid. Minimum time and temperature shall be as recommended in
writing by the manufacturer.
J. Before, during and after laying, the temperature and humidity shall be maintained at the approximate
levels that will prevail after the building is occupied.
K. Joints shall be made on the center line of the door leaf unless specified otherwise.
3.3 FLOOR INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured
and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including
built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

17 September 2015
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center
of door openings.
F. Provide integral wall base cove as indicated; continue the flooring over a cove former and up the wall.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating
on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
H. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar
items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile
installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to
cover perimeters.
I. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
J. Seams
1. Patterns shall be accurately matched at seams.
2. Seams shall be cut in to ensure a tight joint, without gaps, and be bonded to the manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Adhesive shall be completely set before commencing welding of coverings.
4. A neat, smooth, strongly bonded seam joint shall be formed flush with finished surface.
K. Adhesive

4. Primer shall be used where recommended by the adhesive manufacturer and allowed to dry
thoroughly before applying adhesive.
5. The adhesive shall be spread evenly pressing down tiles firmly and rolling (if recommended) to
ensure full contact and a good bond overall.
6. All surplus adhesive shall be removed from exposed faces of coverings as the work proceeds.
7. Ridges and high spots caused by particles on the substrate shall be removed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation.
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations
and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Before retaining first paragraph below, verify manufacturer's floor polish recommendations. Floor polish
is used with most vinyl composition floor tile and some solid vinyl floor tile.

17 September 2015
E. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
1. Apply 2 No. coats.
F. Cover floor tile until Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 096723 -- RESINOUS FLOORING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.2 SUITABILITY OF BASES 7
3.3 PREPARATION 7
3.4 APPLICATION 8

Tender Issue 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
17 September 2015
SECTION 096723 -- RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Refer to the Contractor's Responsibilities in the Division 01 General Requirements, Section 011000
2. Supply, deliver, install and warrant the work in strict compliance with materials and workmanship
1. Polyurethane flooring system.
2. Hygienic industrial resinous flooring systems.
Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on Design
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with the requirements of the Division 01 General Requirements, Section 013300
Submittal Procedures and submit the following.
2. Product data for each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application
instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

Tender Issue 096723 / 1 RESINOUS FLOORING
17 September 2015
1. Sample for each type of resinous flooring system, 150mm², applied on a suitable rigid backing.
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Product data for each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application
instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Sample for each type of resinous flooring system, 150mm², applied on a suitable rigid backing.
A. General: Comply with the requirements of the Division 01 General Requirements, Section 017800
Closeout Submittals and submit the following:
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications
1. A specialist who has at least 10 years' successful experience performing similar work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of resinous flooring systems.
1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply
resinous flooring systems indicated.

17 September 2015
C. Federal Agency Approvals: USDA or FDA approved for food-processing environments.
with the Division 01 General Requirements, Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
E. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
F. Prototypes
1. Provide full-thickness prototype on 1200mm x 1200mm floor area in location as agreed with the
Engineer.
a) Include 1200mm length of integral cove base with inside corner.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.
B. Storage: Store materials in a protected, dry location clear of the ground. Observe manufacturer's
requirements for conditioning and acclimatising materials before use.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring
application.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting
conditions during resinous flooring application.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application
unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
D. Ventilation: Ensure adequate ventilation during installation and curing to prevent the build up of harmful
dust and vapors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1. BASF Construction Chemicals.
2. Al Kamda.
3. Sports Line.

17 September 2015
B. Source of Supply
1. Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting
coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer.
2. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials,
of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
C. Type FLH-501 Polyurethane Flooring System
1. Description: Multi-component, seamless, self-smoothing, heavy-duty polyurethane based flooring

system with a pigmented, durable UV stable top coat, highly resistant to impact, abrasion and
chemical attack.
2. Product Reference: BASF Mastertop 1324 or acceptable equivalent.
3. Thickness: 2mm.
5. Tensile Strength: 30N/ mm² in accordance with DIN 53 504.
6. Breaking Elongation: +/ -10% in accordance with DIN 53 504.
7. Slip Resistance: >60 in accordance with TRL Test to BS 7976-2:2002.
8. Shore D Hardness: >75.
9. Elasticity Module: 1200 N/ mm² in accordance with DIN 53 457.
10. Abrasive Nosing:
a) Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron Class 20 with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminium
oxide, in safety yellow color. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
11. Application: As per the manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
D. Type FLH-502 Hygienic Industrial Resinous Flooring
1. Description: Abrasion-resistant, impact-resistant high temperature resistant and chemical resistant

industrial aggregate-filled, polyurethane resin based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce
a seamless floor.
2. Product Reference: BASF UCrete UD200 or acceptable equivalent.
3. Finish: Matt with anti-slip textured finish.
5. Preparation: As per the manufacturer's recommendation and as accepted by the Engineer.
6. Initial Coat: Polyurethane resin based primer.
a) Product Reference: UCRETE Primer SC.
7. Body Coat: Monolithic 4-component Polyurethane resin based coat.
a) Product Reference: UCRETE UD200 or acceptable equivalent.
8. Physical Properties of System: The product shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria:
a) Density: 2090 kg/ m³ in accordance with BS 6319: Part 5.
b) Compressive Strength: 58N/ mm² in accordance with BS 6319: Part 2.

17 September 2015
c) Tensile Strength: 6N/ mm² in accordance with ISO R527.
d) Flexural Strength: 14N/ mm² in accordance with ISO 178.
e) Dynamic Elastic Modulus: 19500N/ mm² in accordance with ASTM C597-83.
f) Adhesive Strength to Concrete: 2.4 x 10 - 5 degree C-1 in accordance with ASTM C531: Part
4.05.
g) Thermal Conductivity: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
h) Water Absorption: (CP.BM 2/67/2): 0ml.
i) Surface Spread of Flame: Class 2 in accordance with BS 476: Part 7.
E. Type TRM-520 Resin Skirting
1. Description: Resin skirting as indicated on the Design Drawings, including all necessary fastenings
2. Height: 60mm.
product range.
1. The work shall be installed to accommodate all movements of the substrates without damage or
any reduction in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining
the requirement for and location of movement joints as necessary whether indicated on the Design
Drawings or not.
2. Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the resinous
flooring is expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
5. A Method Statement for the installation of all the work shall be provided, taking into account
movements of the structural slab including:
a) Dimensional setting out and joints alignment.
b) Floor services including trunking to be incorporated in the floor build-up.
c) Construction tolerances.
d) Movement joints, bay joints and relief joints.
e) Full adhesion.
f) A full understanding of the behavior of the building structure, its movements and its effects
upon the work is required.
1. Refer to the Structural Specification.
B. Specific Live Loads

17 September 2015
1. The work shall accommodate the following live loads without any reduction in performance or
appearance:
b) Loads acting on the surface arising from maintenance and cleaning operations.
c) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads that reasonably occur during their normal service life.
d) Vertical loads applied in the form of adult foot traffic.
C. Thermal Movement
1. The work shall be capable of withstanding differential surface temperatures including those induced
D. System Physical Properties
1. Provide resinous flooring systems with physical properties as follows:
a) Compressive Strength: In accordance with ASTM C579.
b) Tensile Strength: In accordance with ASTM C307.
c) Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: In accordance with ASTM C580.
d) Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM C413.
e) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: In accordance with ASTM C531.
f) Indentation: In accordance with MIL-D-3134.
g) Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more than 1.6mm
permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134.
h) Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1.6mm per MIL-D-3134.
i) Abrasion Resistance: In accordance with ASTM D4060.
j) Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D635.
k) Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/ cm² or 0.22 W/ cm² or greater in accordance with NFPA 253.
l) Hardness: In accordance with ASTM D2240.
m) Bond Strength: In accordance with ACI 503R.
E. System Chemical Resistance
1. Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system shall be unaffected when tested in accordance
with ASTM D1308, ASTM D543 Procedure A and ASTM C267.
F. Serviceability: The work shall provide a smooth, easily cleaned and water-resistant surface. It shall also
provide the required slip resistance, in both wet and dry conditions, and withstand specified loading
without damage or failure.
G. Durability: The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout its design life,
without staining or discoloration, efflorescence or bloom, cracking or crazing of glazes, or variations in
color or gloss levels, when compared to original range samples.
H. Slip Resistance
1. When tested using the TRL Pendulum Tester, resinous flooring, inclusive of surface treatment, shall
achieve the following pendulum test value (PTV):

17 September 2015
a) Dry: Not less than 40 PTV.
b) Wet: Not less than 40 PTV.
2. When tested using the surface roughness meter, resinous flooring shall achieve the following surface
roughness (Rz) value:
a) Not less than 20 µm Rz.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. VOC Content of Liquid-Applied Flooring Components: Not more than 100 g/ L when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
C. Chemical Resistant Monolithic Resinous Floorings: In accordance with ASTM C722.
D. Accessories
1. Joint Sealants: Masterflex 60, a 2-component polyurethane sealant with excellent chemical and
temperature resistance; complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for sloping and
vertical applications elsewhere. Refer also to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2. Waterproofing Membrane: Type as recommended by the manufacturer for substrate, primer and
body coats indicated.
3. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by manufacturer for

substrate, primer and body coats indicated and that prevents substrate cracks from reflecting through
resinous flooring.
a) Provide fiberglass scrim embedded in reinforcing membrane.
4. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and
recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
and conditions in which the work shall be installed. Verify dimensions of supporting construction and
surfaces to receive the work of this Section.
B. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 SUITABILITY OF BASES
A. Ensure that before starting work
1. Bases are flat enough to permit specified levels and flatness of finished surfaces, considering the
permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of the works.
2. Bases are clean and free from dirt, dust, grease and oil. Droppings of cement mixtures and surface
contamination during application shall be removed.
3. Bases are dry to accept the works and achieve the specified requirements.
3.3 PREPARATION

17 September 2015
A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions
for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with
resinous flooring.
1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
a) Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the
dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.
b) Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for the recommended substrate preparation
and installation methods.
2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a) Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with application of resinous
flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 1.36 kg of water/
92.9 m² of slab area in 24 hours.
b) Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates
absence of moisture in substrates.
c) Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.
4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through
resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to

substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.
1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.
D. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks/ entire substrate surface.

17 September 2015
E. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling,
sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.
F. Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.
1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove
excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.
G. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel
and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended
by manufacturer.
H. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final
body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.
I. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing
by manufacturer.
A. Core Sampling: At the direction of the Engineer and at locations designated by the Engineer, take one
core sample per 92.9m² of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample that fails
to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct
deficiencies.
B. Material Sampling: The Engineer may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring
application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.
1. The Employer shall engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used.
Material samples shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency shall test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced
testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product
data.
3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing,
remove non-complying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and re-
apply flooring materials to comply with requirements.
C. Slip Resistance Testing
1. Testing for slip resistance shall comply with the following documents:
a) 'Assessing the slip resistance of flooring' by The Health and Safety Executive (latest published
version).
b) 'The assessment of floor slip resistance, the UK Slip Resistance Group guidelines' by The UK
Slip Resistance Group (latest published version).
2. Pendulum Test: Resinous flooring shall be evaluated in both dry and wet conditions using the TRL
Pendulum Tester in accordance with the recommendations of the UK Slip Resistance Group to
obtain the pendulum test value (PTV) specified.
3. Samples shall be tested at the following stages of the project:
a) Approval.
b) Production.
c) Post installation (poured-in-place).
4. Submit test results to the Engineer for acceptance in due time, prior to each of the project stages
or as agreed with the Engineer.
5. Test samples must include any surface sealer or treatment to be applied to the finished resinous
flooring.

17 September 2015
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resinous flooring.
B. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous
flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 096810 -- CARPETING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 4
1.8 EXTRA STOCK 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS 5
2.3 MATERIALS 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 8
3.2 PREPARATION 8
3.3 INSTALLATION 9
3.5 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 096810 CARPETING
17 September 2015
SECTION 096810 -- CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Broadloom carpet.
2. Carpet tile.
3. Carpet cushion.
1. Section 096900 Access Flooring.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 096810 / 1 CARPETING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings:
a) Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts
are required in carpet and carpet tiles.
b) Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
c) Locations where dye lot changes occur.
d) For carpet, seam locations, types, and methods.
e) Type of subfloor.
f) Type of installation.
g) For carpet tiles, pattern type, location and direction.
h) For carpet, pattern type, repeat size, location, direction and starting point.
i) Pile direction.
j) Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
k) Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
l) Transition details to other flooring materials.
m) Type of carpet cushion.
a) Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
b) Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
the system.
5. Certified Test Data.
6. Product Test Reports for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
12. Quality Plan.

17 September 2015
1. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern and designation
indicated on the Design Drawings and in schedules.
2. 300mm x 300mm carpet sheet sample.
3. Full size carpet tile sample.
4. Exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping: 300mm long.
5. 150mm x 150mm carpet cushion.
6. 150mm long carpet seam.
7. 300mm x 300mm mitered carpet border seam, show carpet pattern alignment.
8. Movement joint material minimum 300mm long.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
3. Include the following:
a) Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet tiles, including cleaning and stain-removal products
and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
b) Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet, carpet
tiles and carpet cushion.
A. Standards: Comply with the recommendations of the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) and
Contract Flooring Association.
1. A specialist, who is a member of the Flooring Covering Installation Contractors Association or

Contract Flooring Association, has at least 10 years' successful experience performing similar work.
2. Is certified to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Installers shall have received training at the advanced level from the Flooring Industry Training Association
or acceptable equivalent training body.
D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II or Master II certification level.
F. Mock-ups
1. Interface at movement joints.
G. Prototypes
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements, etc.
A. Comply with The Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI Standard 2011.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials and accessories to the Site in the manufacturer's packaging.
C. Storage: Store materials in a protected location and observe the manufacturer's recommendations for
conditioning or acclimatizing before use.
A. Comply with CRI Standard 2011 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles, carpet and carpet cushion until spaces
are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Ventilation: Ensure adequate ventilation during installation and curing to prevent the build up of harmful
dust and vapors.
D. Do not install carpet tiles, carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
E. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles or carpet,
install carpet tiles or carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate,
vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10% loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs,
loss of tuft bind strength/ excess static discharge, and delamination.
B. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile
installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10% edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional
stability/ excess static discharge/ loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.
C. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet
cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

17 September 2015
1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories.
2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression.
1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5% of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than
8.3m².
2. Carpet Tiles: Full-size units equal to 5% of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less
than 8.3m².
B. Deliver to Employer's storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FLS-401 Broadloom Carpet
1. Description: Broadloom carpet fastened to floor substrate, including all necessary fastenings and
accessories required to complete the installation.
4. Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
5. Pattern: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
6. Primary Backing/ Cushion: Manufacturer's standard material.
7. Secondary Backing/ Cushion: Manufacturer's standard material.
B. Type FLS-402 Carpet Tile
1. Description: Carpet tile fastened to floor substrate, including all necessary fastenings and
accessories required to complete the installation.
4. Pattern: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
5. Primary Backing/ Cushion: Manufacturer's standard material.
6. Secondary Backing/ Cushion: Manufacturer's standard material.
A. Carpet Tile Performance Characteristics
1. Appearance Retention Rating: Test in accordance with ASTM D7330.

17 September 2015
2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/ cm²/ 0.22 W/ cm².
3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 445N in accordance with ASTM D2646.
4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 22N for cut pile and not less than 45N for loop pile, in accordance with
ASTM D1335.
5. Delamination: Not less than 18N/ mm in accordance with ASTM D3936.
6. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 0.8mm of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical

measurement.
7. Dimensional Stability: 0.2% or less according to International Organization for Standardization ISO
2551 (Aachen Test).
8. Resistance to Insects for wool or wool blends only: Comply with American Association of Textile
Chemists and Colonists' AATCC 24.
9. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Test in accordance with ASTM C423.
10. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, in accordance with AATCC 165.
11. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) in accordance with AATCC
16, Option E.
12. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than
1mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, in accordance with AATCC
174.
13. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV in accordance with AATCC 134.
14. Emissions: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green
Label Plus" program.
15. Hexapod Test: Using the hexapod tumble drum test in accordance with ASTM D5252 the carpet
shall achieve a category 3 rating.
B. Tufted Carpet Sheet Performance Characteristics
3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 445 N in accordance with ASTM D2646.
4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 22N for cut pile and not less than 45N for loop pile, in accordance with
ASTM D1335.
5. Delamination: Not less than 18 N/ mm in accordance with ASTM D3936.
9. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16,
Option E.
10. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than
1mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.

17 September 2015
C. Woven Carpet Sheet Performance Characteristics
3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 445 N in accordance with ASTM D2646.
7. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option
E.
D. Carpet Cushion Performance Characteristics
E. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet, carpet tiles and carpet cushion identical
to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. The works shall comply with NFPA 101.
2. Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with ASTM E648.
3. The carpet and carpet tiles shall have been tested for smoke development in accordance with ASTM
E662.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Installation Accessories
1. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet, carpet tile and carpet cushion manufacturer.
2. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products

and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet,
carpet tile and is recommended by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer for normal installation
and carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
3. Metal Edge/ Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of
height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running
joints.
4. Tackless Carpet Stripping for Carpet Installation: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to
match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI Standard 2011.
5. Seam Adhesive for Carpet Installation: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by
carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure
seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

17 September 2015
A. Pile Reversal Test: Carry out pile reversal tests on each type of carpet in accordance with the Wool
Research Organisation of New Zealand's WRONZ Test Method 13.1 'Determination of the Risk of Pile
Reversal of Textile Floor Coverings'. Provide independently certified results of the tests classifying them
against the Pile Reversal Index.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the area and conditions in which
the work shall be installed. Verify dimensions, levels and alignments and surfaces to receive the work
of this Section.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
and carpet tile performance. Examine carpet and carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following.
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that
may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing
bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in the Structural Specification for slabs
receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
D. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond
or show through surface.
E. For painted subfloors, verify the following:
1. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer.
F. For raised access flooring systems, verify the following:
1. Access floor complies with installation requirements specified in Section 096900 Access Flooring.
2. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any.
3. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of irregularities, gaps
greater than 3mm, protrusions more than 0.8mm, and substances that may interfere with adhesive
bond or show through surface.
G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: In accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard for carpet, and with carpet and carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile
installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions
3mm wide or wider and protrusions more than 0.8mm unless more stringent requirements are required
by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods
recommended in writing by carpet and carpet tile manufacturer.

17 September 2015
D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer.
Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal
oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet and carpet tile.
F. Cover or otherwise protect adjacent work from damage or soiling during the installation. Provide temporary
lighting as necessary to simulate as closely as possible the direction and intensity of the final permanent
lighting.
G. Dampness: Where coverings are to be laid on new wet-laid bases it shall be ensured that:
1. Drying aids have been turned off not less than 4 days.
2. Readings are taken in all corners, along edges and at various points over the area being tested.
3. Coverings are not laid until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Finished coverings shall be accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and free from
air bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.
2. The materials shall be delivered to Site in original packaging, clearly marked with the batch number.
Where possible, the use of different batches adjacent to each other shall be avoided to ensure
consistency of appearance.
3. No materials shall be laid until the building is weathertight, wet trades have finished their work, the
building has dried out, all paintwork is finished and dry, and floor services outlets, duct covers and
other fixtures around which the materials are to be cut have been fixed. The Engineer shall be
informed not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.
4. Before laying commences the materials shall be thoroughly conditioned by unpacking and spreading
out in the spaces where they are to be laid. Minimum time and temperature shall be as recommended
in writing by the manufacturer.
5. Before, during and after laying, the temperature and humidity shall be maintained at the approximate
levels that will prevail after the building is occupied.
6. Adhesive:
a) Adhesive and method of adhering shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
b) Primer shall be used where recommended by the adhesive manufacturer and allowed to dry
thoroughly before applying adhesive.
c) The adhesive shall be spread evenly pressing down carpet tiles firmly and rolling (if
recommended) to ensure full contact and a good bond overall.
d) All surplus adhesive shall be removed from exposed faces of coverings as the work proceeds.
e) Ridges and high spots caused by particles on the substrate shall be removed.
B. Carpet Sheet Installation
1. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written
installation instructions for the following:
a) Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation.
2. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations
and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center
seams under the door in closed position.
3. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

17 September 2015
4. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended
by carpet manufacturer.
5. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
6. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
7. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard and with
carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.
a) Patterns shall be accurately matched at seams.
b) Seams shall be cut in to ensure a tight joint, without gaps, and be bonded to the manufacturer's
instructions.
8. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. For stretch-in installations,
install carpet cushion seams at 90 angle with carpet seams.
C. Carpet Tile Installation
1. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard and with carpet tile manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
2. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer/ Glue down; install every
tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive/ Partial glue down; install periodic tiles
with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive/ Free lay; install carpet tiles without adhesive.
3. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
4. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
5. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
6. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
7. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet and carpet tile.
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended
by carpet and carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet and carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet and carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Adjusting: Replace carpet and carpet tiles that are damaged, stained or otherwise defective or which do
not match adjacent carpet and carpet tiles as intended, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed carpet and carpet tile to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
B. Protect carpet and carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer, carpet tile manufacturer, carpet adhesive manufacturer
and carpet cushion manufacturer.

17 September 2015
C. Protect the work from damage during construction until Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 096900 -- ACCESS FLOORING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 COORDINATION 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 FLOOR PANEL MATERIALS 6
2.5 UNDERSTRUCTURE 6
2.6 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS 6
2.7 FABRICATION 7
2.8 ACCESSORIES 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 8
3.2 PREPARATION 8
3.3 INSTALLATION 9
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 10

Tender Issue 096900 ACCESS FLOORING
17 September 2015
SECTION 096900 -- ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Fully accessible raised flooring system.
1. Section 055200 Metal Railings.
2. MEP Specifications.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 096900 / 1 ACCESS FLOORING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
11. Seismic Design Calculations: For seismic design of access-flooring systems including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. 1 No. floor panel.
2. Floor pedestal.
3. Perimeter plenum with floor grille.
1. Warranties.
A. Standards: Comply with the guidelines published by the Contract Flooring Association and the Association
of Interior Specialists.
1. A specialist who is a member of the Contract Flooring Association or similar acceptable body.
3. Operatives shall have specialized in the installation of raised floors for at least 5 years.

17 September 2015
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. Not required.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials and components in sealed manufacturer's packaging, clearly labeled to show
brand, type, class, quality and other qualifying information. Inspect packaging for potential damage but
do not remove unless to investigate condition of contents. Immediately replace all material that is
damaged or otherwise unfit for use.
B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a protected, dry location clear of the floor in accordance with the
C. Handling: Handle panels carefully to avoid damage to faces and edges. Inspect components for damage
immediately prior to installation and reject all those that have been damaged or that are otherwise unfit
for use and replace with new.
A. Do not proceed with the installation of the flooring until the building is enclosed and the surfaces to receive
the work have a maximum RH of 75%.
B. Do not install access flooring until spaces are enclosed, subfloor has been sealed, ambient temperature
is between 10°C and 32°C, and relative humidity is not less than 20 and not more than 70%.
C. Maintain an ambient temperature within the range recommended by the manufacturer of the pedestal
adhesive for at least 7 days before, during and 7 days after installation, unless otherwise recommended
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference with
access-flooring pedestals.
B. The correct location of pedestals and services shall be ensured to enable mechanical and electrical work
to proceed without interfering with access-flooring pedestals. Positions of pedestals shall be indelibly
marked in advance of services installations.
C. Related work shall be suitably coordinated and shall proceed without damage to the floor, which shall
be protected as necessary.
D. Before commencing work, all fixtures around which panels are to be cut or over which supports are to
bridge shall be checked to ensure that they are complete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

17 September 2015
A. Type RAF-101 Raised Access Floor
1. Description: Fully accessible raised access flooring system including all necessary accessories and
fastenings to complete the installation.
2. Manufacturer: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or
a) Mero.
b) Kingspan.
c) Intec.
4. Sub-floor: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
5. Support System:
a) Pedestals shall be provided to support the finished floor height above the sub-floor as indicated
on Design Drawings.
b) The support system shall be provided strictly in accordance with that recommended in writing
by the manufacturer of the floor panels.
c) The fastening zones indicated on the Design Drawings shall be adhered to.
d) The works shall be supported directly onto the main structure.
6. Panels:
a) Panel: Facing shall be as per the location of each designated access panel; refer to the Design
Drawings.
b) Aluminum Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy.
c) Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
d) Thickness: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
e) The joints between flooring panels shall be constant. These shall be sealed with a serrated
compressible neoprene strip, or similar.
f) Cut-outs in panels shall be carried out at the point of manufacture and not on Site. All exposed
ends, cuts, etc. shall be suitably finished and sealed.
g) Panels shall be protected against corrosion after fabrication and prior to application of finishes.
All exposed faces of metal, including ends, shall be treated to avoid corrosion.
h) No panels shall have sharp edges.
i) The core of the panel shall be protected by metal encapsulation, foil or steel backing.
j) Cutting and drilling of flooring panels and associated works shall take place before the
application of finishes.
k) Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
7. Loading Requirements:
a) Concentrated Loads: 8896N with the following deflection and permanent set:
1. Insert requirements for bottom-surface deflection if required.

17 September 2015
2. Top-Surface Deflection: Maximum 2.54mm.
3. Permanent Set: 0.25mm.
b) Ultimate Loads: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
c) Rolling Loads: With local or overall deformation not to exceed 1.02mm.
1. CISCA Wheel 1 low-repetition, small-wheel loads: 10 passes at 8896 N.
d) Stringer Load Test: 2002 N at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.25mm.
e) Pedestal Axial Load Test: 26 690 N.
f) Verify, with authorities having jurisdiction, requirements for pedestal overturning moment in
seismic zones. Coordinate with pedestals retained.
g) Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: 113 N x meters.
h) Uniform Load Test: 23.9 kPa with a maximum top-surface deflection not to exceed 1.02mm
and a permanent set not to exceed 0.25mm.
i) Drop Impact Load Test: 79.4 kg.
8. Accessories:
a) Cut-out panels shall incorporate electrical outlets/ air supply outlets and all services outlets as
indicated on the MEP Engineer's drawings.
b) Temporary cover plates shall be included as necessary.
c) Floor air supply outlets shall be in accordance with the MEP Specifications.
d) Installation and final setting out of service outlets: All installation procedures shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to the satisfaction of MEP Engineer
and the Engineer.
9. Provide perimeter seal to cladding at perimeter conditions.
10. Provide all underfloor cavity barriers.
11. Structural movement joints, where visible, shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer.
12. Earth bonding of the works to MEP specifications.
13. Seal all gaps at the junction of the works with the walls with fireproof material to prevent penetration
of smoke and flame.
14. Seal all encapsulated tiles with sealant or welding material to prevent egress of water into the core
material.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. The works shall accommodate all architectural and functional features indicated on the Design
Drawings, while maintaining the overall system performance.
2. The works shall include pedestal fittings, stringers, bridging structures, perimeter support,fixings,
framing, bracketry, grids, seals, insulation and all other components/ accessories necessary to
complete the works as recommended by the manufacturer to suit
the service conditions.
A. Seismic Performance

17 September 2015
1. Access flooring shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/
SEI 7.
B. Movements
1. The works shall be installed to withstand all deflections and tolerances of the building structure
under all design loads or combination of loads without reduction in the performance or appearance
of the works or applied finishes.
2. All fastenings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment to achieve a level floor.
3. The works shall accommodate all movement joints as necessary.
4. The works shall withstand static and dynamic design loads without causing deformation of
components or the failure of members and shall transmit such loads safely to the points of support.
C. Structural Performance
1. Provide access-flooring systems capable of complying with the following performance requirements
according to testing procedures in CISCA's "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors."
D. Fire Performance
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b) Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Combustion Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E136.
2.4 FLOOR PANEL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy with equivalent strength
and corrosion resistance of Alloy UNS No. A03830 or UNS No. A03840 in accordance with ASTM B85.
2.5 UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap);
made of steel.
1. Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications.
2. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to base plate.
3. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height over
a range of not less than 51mm and for locking at a selected height, so deliberate action is required
to change height setting and prevent vibratory displacement.
4. Head: Designed to support the panel system indicated.
a) Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels.
b) Bolted Assemblies: Provide head with four holes aligned with holes in floor panels for bolting
of panels to pedestals.
2.6 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS
A. Modular Flooring System: Provide flooring materials that comply with the requirements as stated in the
in Dubai Green Building Regulations and Specifications.

17 September 2015
C. FloorScore Compliance: Floor panel coverings shall be in accordance with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
D. Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile: Factory applied, comply with ASTM F 1700, Class I (Monolithic Vinyl Tile),
Type A (Smooth Surface), fabricated in one piece to cover panel face with monolithic/ applied perimeter
plastic edging.
1. Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 1 megohm and no more than 1000 megohms when
installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested in accordance with ASTM F150 with 100-V
applied voltage.
2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
E. Conductive Vinyl Tile: Factory applied, comply with ASTM F 1700, Class I (Monolithic Vinyl Tile), Type
A (Smooth Surface), fabricated in one piece to cover panel face with monolithic/ applied perimeter plastic
edging.
1. Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 25,000 ohms and no more than 1 megohm when
installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested in accordance with ASTM F150 with 100-V
applied voltage.
2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication Tolerances
1. Size: ±0.50mm of required size.
2. Squareness: ±0.38mm between diagonal measurements across top of panel.
3. Flatness: ±0.89mm, measured on a diagonal on top of panel.
B. Panel Markings: Clearly and permanently mark floor panels on their underside with panel type and
concentrated-load rating.
C. Bolted Panels: Provide panels with holes drilled in corners to align precisely with threaded holes in
pedestal heads and to accept countersunk screws with heads flush with top of panel.
1. Captive Fasteners: Provide fasteners held captive to panels.
D. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide
reinforcement or additional support, where required, to make panels with cutouts comply with structural
1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: As indicated.
2. Grommets: Where indicated, fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets; or, if size of cutouts
exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic
molding with tapered top flange. Furnish removable covers for grommets.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. VOC Content: Adhesive products shall comply with VOC limits as stated in in the Dubai Green Building
B. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: For anchoring pedestal bases to subfloor, provide post-installed expansion
anchors made from carbon-steel components, zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/
Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 (Mild), with the capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 1.5
times the loads imposed by pedestal overturning moment on fasteners, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of
floor panels; for power, communication, and signal services; and complying with the following
requirements.

17 September 2015
1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1334-N concentrated load.
2. Cover and Box Type: Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables when cover
is closed and including frame and steel box or formed-steel plate for mounting electrical receptacles.
3. Location: In center of panel quadrant unless otherwise indicated.
4. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified by the
MEP Engineer.
5. Receptacles and Wiring: Equip each service outlet with power receptacles in accordance with the
following requirements:
a) Type of Receptacle: Heavy-duty duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding, 20 A, 125 V, NEMA

WD 6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.
b) Number of Receptacles for Outlet: Refer to MEP Drawings.
c) Wiring Method: Factory wired for hardwiring in site with armored cable, containing three
insulated No. 12 AWG solid-copper conductors, terminated with a long pigtail.Or:
d) Wiring Method: Power-in connectors, built into outlet housing, of type to fit power-in and power-
out connectors of branch-circuit cables supplied with building electrical system.
E. Closures: Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls or other construction, provide metal-
closure plates with manufacturer's standard finish.
F. Ramps: Manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope indicated, but not steeper than
1:12, with raised-disc or textured rubber or vinyl-tile floor coverings, and of same materials, performance,
and construction requirements as access flooring.
G. Steps
1. Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor coverings to match access flooring.
Apply nonslip aluminum nosings to treads unless otherwise indicated.
2. Vertical closure panels where steps or floor systems are provided (by others) shall be fully sealed
to achieve the specified pressurisation requirements.
H. Railings: Standard extruded-aluminum railings at ramps and open-sided perimeter of access flooring
where indicated. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and
floor flanges, plates, and anchorages where required.
1. Provide railings that comply with structural performance requirements specified in Section 055200
Metal Railings.
I. Panel Lifting Device: Where system is required in accordance with NFPA 75, provide panel manufacturer's
standard portable lifting device for each type of panel required.
J. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel edge
and forming transition between access flooring and adjoining floor coverings at same level as access
flooring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Contractor and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections
and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that
might interfere with attachment of pedestals.
3.2 PREPARATION

17 September 2015
A. Before installation works commence, ensure that the cementitious surface to the sub-floor, including
within the floor void up to the level of the platform floor, is completed.
B. Ensure that any mechanical fastenings are clear of the reinforcement in the structural slab.
C. The sub-floor shall be properly sealed and cleaned before the installation of the works commences.
Cleaning shall continue during installation to prevent entrapment of dirt or rubbish.
D. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry and free from dust, grease and other contaminants.
E. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid
using panels cut to less than 152mm.
F. Setting Out
1. Refer to the Design Drawings for setting-out requirements.
2. Whenever possible, use oversize panels to ensure that cut panels are not less than half in width,
particularly at doorways, thresholds, perimeters, etc. and provide suitable panel support
arrangements which shall not create a hazard to pedestrians.
3. Coordinate pedestals/ supports with the Shop Drawings regarding all services requirements within
the Raised Floors voids, particularly with respect to all requirements for bridging as necessary. Refer
also to MEP specifications and drawings.
4. Refer to the Structural Engineer's drawings for requirements for raised structures/ beams, etc. and
ensure that pedestals are suitably raised or bridged as necessary.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install access-flooring system and accessories under supervision of access-flooring manufacturer's

authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements
and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B. Marking Out: Pedestal positions shall be marked out in advance of the services installation. Ensure no
conflict of location.
C. Irregular Spaces: Where surrounding walls, or other building elements and features to which the works
relate, are not square, straight or level, proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer on setting out.
Cutting of tiles shall be kept to a minimum and located in unobtrusive locations. Grid pattern shall be
maintained wherever possible. All cut tiles adjacent to door thresholds, lift lobbies and other openings
shall have an additional pedestal support at mid span.
D. Coverings shall be bonded to a smooth and level panel substrate covering the entire top surface area
of the panel. Joints in the material within one panel shall not be acceptable. The bond shall remain
effective for the design life of the covering materials.
E. Where the panels are to be lifted by means of a lifting device applying force to the covering, the adhesion
between the covering and the panel shall be adequate for panels of up to 20kg to be lifted without causing
any failure or weakening of the bond. The lifting device shall not cause damage to the covering material
when used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F. Adhesive Attachment of Pedestals: Set pedestals in adhesive, according to access-flooring

manufacturer's written instructions, to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
1. Pedestals shall be bonded and remain rigid and firmly secured to the sub-floor. All pedestals shall
be fixed plumb.
G. Mechanical Attachment of Pedestals: If bolted attachment of pedestal bases is required for seismic
applications, attach pedestals to subfloor with post-installed mechanical anchors.
H. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to proper height.
I. The floor system shall have a panel location system to securely locate each panel. It shall exhibit no
rocking and the system shall not rely on the perimeter wall for lateral stability but provide resistance to
rolling loads. The floor system shall remain stable when groups of panels are removed for access or
maintenance or any other reason.

17 September 2015
J. Ensure that all changes in level of substrates are accommodated and that the required finished floor
datum level is achieved.
K. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force panels into
place.
L. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 3mm
where panels abut vertical surfaces.
1. To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of steel-encapsulated, wood-core panels with sealer
recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.
M. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote location or
as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under already-installed access flooring.
N. Grounded Flooring Access Panel Systems: Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer
and as needed in accordance with performance requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.
1. Panel-to-Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms as measured without floor coverings.
O. Underfloor Dividers: Scribe and install underfloor-cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces,
and seal with mastic.
P. Closures: Scribe closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-floor surfaces. Set in
mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.
Q. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area as
installation of floor panels proceeds.
R. Ramps/ Steps: Ensure that airtightness is maintained at steps, ramps, etc. as specified and as indicated
S. Movement Joints
1. The works shall accommodate all movement joints in the building structure without compromising
the integrity, appearance or performance of the system.
2. Refer to the Structural Engineer's specifications and drawings for locations and types of movement
joints and accommodate the works accordingly.
T. Cavity Barriers
1. Fix securely to the sub-floor to ensure permanent stability and continuity with no gaps, to provide
an effective barrier to smoke and flame.
2. Panels above cavity barriers shall be screwed down or otherwise firmly secured.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. The pedestals shall be adjustable to provide a finished floor level within ±2.5mm deviation from the
defined finished floor level; the defined finished floor level may be varied, when accepted by Engineer,
to accept variations in levels due to construction tolerances and deviations in adjacent interfacing works.
B. Sudden irregularities shall not occur.
C. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the following
tolerances.
1. ± 3mm in any -m distance.
2. ± 3mm from a level plane over entire access-flooring area.
D. Ensure that the installed works remain free from undulations, steps, ridges, bumps, ripples, rocking and
edging.
E. The works shall be flat, flush and true at abutments with adjacent surfaces at the same relative level.

17 September 2015
F. The works shall be installed such that finished surfaces shall be capable of being installed to achieve
the design tolerances, providing a flush, true and flat interface with adjacent finishes, free from steps or
flaws.
G. Bay divisions and movement joints shall be accommodated in the design and coordinated with wall joints
and other elements indicated on the Design Drawings.
H. The difference in height between adjacent finished panels shall not exceed 1.0mm after the application
of the specified load and shall not exceed 3.25mm between the edge of any panel being subjected to
any of the static loadings specified for any adjacent unloaded panel.
I. The deviation due to twisting under no load conditions of any corner in relation to the other three shall
not exceed 1.0mm over a 600mm module. The flatness shall be maintained when the panel is subjected
to any environmental conditions and also after the removal of any concentrated or distributed loads.
J. On-Site Dimensions
1. All dimensions to be checked on Site.
2. The final installation shall accommodate all specified tolerances and differences between actual
Site dimensions and dimensions indicated on the Shop Drawings.
A. Preconstruction Adhesive Site Test: Before installing pedestals, site test their adhesion to subfloor
surfaces by doing the following.
1. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same adhesive
and use methods required for the completed Work.
2. Cure time in first subparagraph below can be 30 days or longer.
3. Allow test installation to cure for manufacturer's recommended cure time, with a pressure of 111 N
applied vertically to pedestals during this period.
4. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 51mm into pedestal stems.
Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base.
5. Remove and discard failed pedestals, and clean pedestals of adhered residue.
6. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement specified
for pedestals' capability to resist overturning moment.
B. Air Leakage Tests
1. Ensure the airtightness at all perimeter conditions including seals around services penetrations at
core walls. Include for air testing the complete void of all areas of the building on a zone by zone
basis. Any failure of the raised floor or floor voids found on testing shall require retesting.
2. The underfloor fire/ smoke barriers shall also form an effective airtight seal to reduce the size of the
area of each raised floor and raised floor void that is tested. The size of test rig and areas for testing
shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to ordering.
3. The tests shall be carried out by an independent testing laboratory accepted by the Engineer.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove waste and unused material from Site and dispose of safely. Clean the
work of dirt and materials affecting appearance. Vacuum-clean floor voids.
2. Thoroughly clean all accessible areas of the sub-floor and apply a further coat of sealer to all
accessible areas.
B. Adjusting

17 September 2015
1. Adjust the installation to ensure correct alignment of components. Replace damaged, defective or
deteriorated panels and components, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Post Installation Examination
a) After completion of the mechanical and electrical installation and other associated work:
1. Thoroughly inspect the floor installation for defects and prepare a schedule of outstanding
defects for submittal to the Engineer.
C. Protection
1. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after installation
to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
2. After completing installation, vacuum access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced
paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Taking-Over.
3. Replace access-flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do not
comply with specified requirements.
4. No part of the works shall be left unprotected prior to Taking-Over. A protective covering shall be
supplied and fitted.
5. Protection/ Finishing Vinyl Flooring
a) At Taking-Over of the works package, or when otherwise agreed with the Engineer, clean all
areas of vinyl flooring. Cleaning agents for the purpose shall be accepted by the vinyl flooring
and incorporated products manufacturers:
1. Wash floor using mops dampened with water containing neutral detergent. Thoroughly
rinse with clean water and allow to dry.
2. Apply 2 No. coats of buffable or semi-buffable polish of a type recommended by the

covering manufacturer.
b) Provide a protection layer consisting of a fleece separation layer and plywood overlay, or
acceptable equivalent, to remain in place for the duration of the works. Submit details of the
protection system for acceptance by the Engineer.
c) In addition, return to remove protection layers and clean the vinyl flooring at Taking-Over of
the Project.
6. Protection/ Finishing Wood Flooring
a) Provide a protection layer consisting of a fleece separation layer and plywood overlay or
acceptable equivalent, to remain in place for the duration of the works. Submit details of the
protection system for acceptance by the Engineer.
b) At Taking-Over of the Project, apply an additional linseed oil finish coat and buffing as specified.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 099100 -- PAINTING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 9
2.5 FINISHES 9
PART 3 EXECUTION 9
3.1 EXAMINATION 9
3.2 PREPARATION 10
3.3 MIXING 11
3.4 APPLICATION 11

Tender Issue 099100 PAINTING
17 September 2015
SECTION 099100 -- PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

C. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Gypsum board (interior and exterior).
5. Plaster.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 099100 / 1 PAINTING
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm sample to specified substrate.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5%, but not less than 3.8 L of each material and color applied.
1. A specialist who has at least 10 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
C. Mock-ups

17 September 2015
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
A. Deliver products to Site in the manufacturer's unopened containers clearly identified with name and
qualifying information.
B. Store and handle materials prior to installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not open packaging or remove labels until time for installation. Replace items and materials that are
damaged or otherwise unsuitable for use.
C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures
continuously maintained at not less than 7°C.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
D. Handle materials carefully to avoid contamination.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between
10° and 35°C.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85%; at temperatures less than 3°C above the dew
point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or
1. Internal and External Paints:
a) Jotun.
b) Dulux.
c) BASF.
B. Source of Supply
1. Obtain products from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of producing similar items.
Use products for each item of work of the same type and from the same manufacturer. Obtain
products visible in the final work from the same production run.

17 September 2015
2. Coating materials shall be obtained from one source and the Engineer shall be notified of the
selected manufacturer before the work commences.
C. Type PT-101 Epoxy Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality epoxy paint ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
standard to entire surface of the area as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Substrate: As indicated on the Design Drawings
4. Preparation: In accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
7. Initial Coat (s): Apply 1 No. coat of primer.
8. Finishing Coat (s): Apply 2 No. coats of paint.
9. Application: Spray, brush or roller, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
D. Type PT-102 Epoxy Coating System
1. Description: Commercial quality epoxy paint ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
4. Preparation: In accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Finish: To be determined by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
6. Color: To be determined by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
E. Type PT-103 Epoxy Coating System with Anti-Slip Aggregates
1. Description: Epoxy coating system with anti-slip aggregates; applied as per manufacturer's standard
to entire surface of the area as indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Preparation: In accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendation.
8. Finish Coat (s): Apply 2 No. coat of paint.

17 September 2015
F. Type PT-104 Solvent Free Non-Toxic Epoxy Resin Coating
1. Description: Solvent free non-toxic epoxy resin coating applied as per manufacturer's standard to
entire surface of the area as indicated on the Design Drawings.
8. Finishing Coat (s): Apply 2 No. coat of paint.
G. Type PT-106 Off-White Satin Emulsion Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality satin emulsion paint ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
5. Color: Off-white; RAL number to be provided by the Engineer.
6. Finish: Satin.
H. Type PT-107 Anti-Carbonation Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality anti-carbonation paint, ready-mixed and applied as per

manufacturer's standard to entire surface of the area as indicated on the Design Drawings.
I. Type PT-108 Alkyd Enamel System

17 September 2015
1. Description: Alkyd enamel system on fair-face concrete or clean structural surface; applied as per
7. Finishing Coat (s): Apply 2 Nos. coat of paint.
J. Type PT-109 Alkyd Enamel System
1. Description: Commercial quality external paint, ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
6. Initial coat (s): Apply 1 No. coat of primer.
7. Finishing Coat (s): Apply 2 Nos. of paint.
8. Application: Spray, brush or roller, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
K. Type PT-110 Masonry Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality masonry paint ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
8. Finish Coat (s): Apply 2 No. coats of paint.
L. Type PT-115 Plasterboard Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality plasterboard paint ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's

17 September 2015
7. Finishing Coat (s): Apply 2 No. coat of paint.
M. Type PT-120 Anti-Bacterial Wall Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality anti-bacterial wall paint ready-mixed and applied as per
N. Type PT-125 Wall Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality wall paint, ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's standard
to entire surface of the area as indicated on the Design Drawings.
O. Type PT-130 Ceiling Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality ceiling paint, ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's

17 September 2015
7. Finishing coat (s): Apply 2 No. coats of paint.
P. Type PT-140 Elastomeric Anti-Carbonation Coating System
1. Description: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, water-based, VOC-compliant, high-build,

elastomeric, acrylic with light reflectance with integral wearing surface to locations as indicated on
2. Product Reference: Sonoshield Parkcoat or acceptable equivalent.
4. Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer to suit the service conditions.
5. Primer Coat(s): Apply 1 No. coat of water-based primer recommended for substrate and conditions
by traffic-coating manufacturer.
6. Finish Coat: Apply 1 coat water-based, VOC-compliant, high-build, elastomeric,100% acrylic with
88% light reflectance.
7. Thicknesses: As recommended in writing by the manufacturer for substrate and service conditions
indicated.
9. Application: Brush, roller or spray.
Q. Type PT-201 External Paint
1. Description: Commercial quality external paint, ready-mixed and applied as per manufacturer's
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Where not specified, primers, base coats and undercoats shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations to suit the service conditions.
3. Application shall be generally in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

17 September 2015
A. Serviceability: The work shall retain its appearance and performance between maintenance periods
without excessive fading, excessive non-uniformity of color or shade, lack of adhesion, cracking, peeling,
pitting or other defects.
B. Elongation at Break: Greater than 35% per ASTM D412.
C. Tensile Strength: 567psi (3.9 MPa) per ASTM D412
D. Water-Vapor Permeance: 2.1 dry perms per ASTM D1653.
E. Coverage Rates: Textured 2.5 to 4m² / ltr/ coat; apply 2 No. coats minimum.
F. Anti-carbonation Air Equivalent: R value >300mtr (Taywood Engg Test).
2.4 MATERIALS
A. All materials used shall be as recommended for the intended application and a warranty shall be provided
from the manufacturer for the particular surface and the conditions of exposure. They shall be compatible
with each other.
2.5 FINISHES
A. All surface finishes shall be dry to handle.
B. There shall be no variation of final surface finish.
C. All paints shall be anti-mold and stable in humid conditions and suitable to hot climate exposure.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedures.
1. Employer shall engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials
have already been delivered to Site, samples may be taken at Site. Samples will be identified,
sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used
do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying paint materials
from Site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be
required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows.
1. Concrete: 12%.
2. Masonry (CMU): 12%.
3. Wood: 15%.
4. Gypsum Board: 12%.
5. Plaster: 12%.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

17 September 2015
D. Plaster/ Portland Cement Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to
substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to
be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-
applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items
that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or
alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacture, but not less than the following.
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3. SSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint,
and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming in accordance with SSPC-PA
1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated
from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion
of subsequently applied paints.
I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J. Wood Substrates
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.

17 September 2015
K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond
of paints to substrates.
3.3 MIXING
A. Mix materials thoroughly before use. Ensure proper dispersion of ingredients, including stains and
fungicides. Do not adulterate coatings, except in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
Blend multiple containers of the same material and color. Stir materials frequently during use to maintain
pigment in suspension. Do not stir film into material.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before
final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.
4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
5. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items
to match exposed surfaces.
6. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
7. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory
finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material
are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade
of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply initial coats as soon as practical after surface preparations. Allow surfaces to dry 24 hours minimum
between coatings, unless shorter periods are permitted in the manufacturer's printed instructions.
E. Oil based stoppers/ fillers shall be applied after priming; water based stoppers/ fillers shall be used before
priming unless otherwise recommended in writing by the manufacturer. Water based stoppers/ fillers
shall be patched after priming.
F. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
G. Application of Clear Lacquer: Perform staining, filling, pre-sealing treatment and finishing in accordance
with the material manufacturer's recommendations. Spray apply lacquer to required film thickness. Finish
surfaces with a uniform sheen and texture, free of runs, holidays, sags or other defects.
H. Application of Colored Lacquer: Seal surfaces as necessary and sand smooth with fine grit sandpaper.
Apply a minimum of 8 cross coats to a minimum finished coating thickness of 1mm. Cure for minimum
24 hours and sand smooth. Polish with buffing paste. Provide a blemish-free, uniform high gloss finish.
I. Application of Oil: Perform staining and grain filling as necessary to required color and texture. Degrease
wood to provide proper absorption of stain. Apply oil by lint free cloth. Allow oil to dry between coats.
Buff surface to uniform sheen.
J. Application of Floor Paints and Sealers: Roller apply floor coatings to provide a continuous uniform finish,
free from entrapped air or solvents. Carry coating onto vertical surfaces as necessary to provide a
waterproof installation.
K. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and
Security Work

17 September 2015
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a) Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b) Uninsulated metal piping.
c) Uninsulated plastic piping.
d) Pipe hangers and supports.
e) Metal conduit.
f) Plastic conduit.
g) Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h) Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other
paintable jacket material.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a) Equipment, including panelboards.
b) Uninsulated metal piping.
c) Uninsulated plastic piping.
d) Pipe hangers and supports.
e) Metal conduit.
f) Plastic conduit.
g) Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other
paintable jacket material.
h) Other items as directed by the Engineer.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are
visible from occupied spaces.
L. Once applied the finish shall not in any way slump, flow, crack, flake, split, sag, pit, bubble, blister, float,
effloresce, craze, shrink, break, wrinkle, crinkle, yellow, chalk, fade, discolor, powder, stain, bleed or lose
its finish or gloss in any way. Full account of the extremes of all atmospheric and environmental conditions
shall be taken.
M. Environmental Conditions
1. Install coatings under environmental conditions as recommended in the manufacturer's printed

instructions.
2. Do not coat exterior surfaces in damp or rainy conditions.
3. Do not apply coatings when the air is dust laden.
4. Maintain temperature and humidity at levels recommended by the material manufacturers, during
application and drying.
5. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during the application process in accordance with the
health and safety requirements of the material manufacturer. Supplement the natural ventilation to
remove fumes and assist in drying and curing of coatings.
6. Unless required otherwise by the specified standards, do not paint surfaces when moisture content
exceeds 10%.

17 September 2015
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: The Employer may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's
written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to
provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by the Engineer, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 099646 -- INTUMESCENT PAINTING 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 4
2.3 MATERIALS 5
2.4 FINISHES 5
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 5
3.3 APPLICATION 6

Tender Issue 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
17 September 2015
SECTION 099646 -- INTUMESCENT PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Intumescent paint to interior and exterior items and surfaces.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Shop Drawings.

Tender Issue 099646 / 1 INTUMESCENT PAINTING
17 September 2015
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. A specialist who has at least 10 years' experience performing work of a similar scope and quality.
B. MPI Standards: Comply with indicated requirements for the following.
1. Products: MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and
paint systems indicated.
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First 9m² or 5m of each type in location to be agreed.

17 September 2015
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements, etc.
A. Delivery
1. Deliver coating materials to Site in the manufacturer's unopened containers or packages clearly
identified with name and qualifying information.
B. Storage
1. Store and handle materials prior to application in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not open packaging or remove labels until time for application. Replace
items and materials that are damaged or otherwise unsuitable for use
2. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
3. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7°C.
4. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
C. Handling
1. Where the steelwork has been designed without lifting holes or lugs, utilize special lifting harnesses/
nylon slings and webbing to help spread the loads over a larger surface area.
2. Separators used for transit may also be used for Site storage.
3. During transportation use separators, to prevent steel to steel contact, which are adequate for the
intended use.
4. Protect all coatings from the possible effects of ponded water.
D. All paints and other products are to be marked or labeled and stored in such a way that identification of
product and batch numbers is possible at all times.
A. General: Install coatings under environmental conditions as recommended in the manufacturer's printed
instructions. Observe the manufacturer's requirements for materials, preparation, application techniques
particular to the work; record in writing and submit as part of Submittals.
B. Apply waterborne intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 10° and 32°C.
C. Apply solvent-thinned intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and ambient
air temperatures are between 7° and 35°C.
D. Do not apply intumescent paints in rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85%; at temperatures
less than 3°C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
E. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and to attain temperature and conditions specified before starting
or continuing coating operation.
F. Perform painting in a dust-free environment after the building is enclosed and dry, and conditions comply
with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

17 September 2015
A. Furnish extra materials that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5% of each color applied, but not less than 3.8 L of each material
and color applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FP-201 Intumescent Paint System
1. Description: Factory-applied and Site-applied intumescent paint system to provide 90 minutes fire
resistance, with polyurethane topsealer coat.
a) Surface: Blast cleaned structural steelwork as specified herein.
b) Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
c) Product Reference: To be selected by the manufacturer's full range.
d) Surfaces shall be coated overall by airless spray as follows:
1. Base Coat: 1 No. coat of epoxy primer at 100 microns nominal DFT.
2. Intumescent Coat: To be confirmed by the Engineer and liaising with the manufacturer,
produce a schedule of thicknesses for coatings for individual steel sections based on the
structural steel information.
3. Where the dry film thickness is not considered to be too high and susceptible to excessive
transit/ erection damage as a result, coating can be factory applied to achieve a 90 minute
fire resistance.
4. Sealer Coat: 1 No. coat of sealer at 100 microns nominal DFT.
e) Finish: Basic.
A. Visual Requirements
1. Visual requirements shall be based upon samples submitted and agreed.
2. For the purpose of conforming with visual requirements, the work shall be viewed with normal
eyesight from a distance of 2m for color consistency and excessive fading and 1m for cracking,
pitting and other defects.
B. Life Expectancy: Life expectancy to first maintenance for paint finishes shall be a minimum of 10-12
years. The paint manufacturer shall provide a written specification at the time of tender for recoating (by
others) at the end of the life expectancy period.
C. Fire Performance
2. Fire resistance as specified shall be in accordance with the NFPA.
3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM

E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
D. Movement: The work shall withstand thermal and structural movement, including deflection.
E. Strength: The work shall withstand thermal shock and remain unaffected by activated building sprinkler
systems or water pressure from a fireman's hoses.

17 September 2015
F. Durability and Appearance: The work shall retain its appearance and performance throughout the Design
Life of the building when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program, without the
following failures or defects.
1. Loss or reduction in fire performance.
2. Reduction in original hardness.
3. Release of harmful solvents into the building's atmosphere under normal conditions.
4. Adhesion or cohesion failure.
5. Slumping, folding or crazing of the surface.
6. Other changes appearance objectionable appearance to the Engineer.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos to comply with the requirements as stated
B. All materials used shall be as recommended for the intended application and a warranty shall be provided
from the manufacturer for the particular surface and the conditions of exposure. They shall be compatible
with each other.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Basic Finish: The coating system achieves the required fire performance and corrosion protection
performance, but is not required to achieve any requirement for standard of finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's
requirements for surface treatments, shop-primed surfaces, maximum moisture content, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Begin coating only when moisture content of wood substrate is 15% or less when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions, and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
D. Compatibility
1. Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, the layer coating materials
shall be compatible with the treatment and shall not inhibit its performance.
2. The Engineer shall be informed of any discrepancy in the specification of coatings. Instructions shall
be obtained before proceeding with the application.
3. All steelwork shall have received corrosion protection treatment and the finishing coats shall be
compatible and maintain the integrity of the protective system.
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items
already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

17 September 2015
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that
were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants,
that could impair bond of coatings. Do not coat surfaces if surface moisture content or alkalinity exceeds
that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove incompatible primers, and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce
coating systems indicated.
2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
3. Blast Cleaning Steel:
a) Oil and grease shall be removed by washing with white spirit or steam.
b) Steel shall be blast cleaned in dry atmospheric conditions using abrasive of suitable type and
size, free from contamination by fines, moisture and oil, removing any existing coatings in the
process.
c) Abrasive residues shall be removed.
d) Surfaces shall be primed as soon as possible after blast cleaning, and in any case within 4 hours.
D. Inaccessible Surfaces (Steelwork): The sequence of working shall be such as to ensure that surfaces
inaccessible after assembly receive the full specified treatment and coating system including, if necessary,
local shop application of Site coatings.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply intumescent paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance
with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification.
1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces.
3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Finish doors on faces with intumescent finish. Paint tops, bottoms, and side edges with fire-inert
finish.
5. Wet film thickness measurements shall be taken as necessary during application, using a wet comb
or similar, to ensure that the required thickness of the various coatings is achieved.
6. Dry film thickness (DFT) measurement shall be taken, to ensure that the work has achieved the
required thickness.
B. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface
soiling or deterioration.
C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
1. Pigmented Finishes: If undercoats or other conditions show through pigmented topcoat/ overcoat,
apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
2. Clear Finishes: Produce a smooth surface film of even sheen.
D. Suitability of Conditions
1. Do not apply coatings:
a) To surfaces affected by moisture.

17 September 2015
b) Unless the steel temperature is at least 3°C above the dew point with conditions stable or
improving.
c) Unless the relative humidity is below 85%.
d) When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.
2. Take all necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours, providing temporary
protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that coatings are not adversely affected by
climatic conditions before, during and after application.
E. Film Thickness (Steelwork Finishes)
1. After each coat has dried, measure the total accumulated dry film thickness using a magnetic or
electromagnetic meter, checked against a smooth steel reference plate, the number and position
of measurements to be as directed by the Engineer. Carry out all measurements in the presence
of the Engineer, unless otherwise directed.
2. If at any stage the accumulated dry film thickness is deficient, the Engineer may require application
of additional coat(s), at no extra cost.
3. The dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque appearance,
irrespective of the number of applied topcoats necessary to achieve cosmetic obliteration of the
undercoat. The full specified topcoat dry film thickness shall be maintained, notwithstanding any
greater than specified undercoat dry film thickness.
F. Inspection
1. Permit the Engineer, and/ or an appointed independent inspection authority, to inspect the work at
all reasonable times and at all places where it is being carried out.
2. Provide all facilities, hand tools, lighting, etc. as necessary to ensure adequate inspection. Alert the
manufacturer and the Engineer 7 days prior to start of application program and permit the
manufacturer to inspect work in progress and prepare inspection reports in accordance with their
standard conditions of contract.
3. The manufacturer will forward a copy of any inspection report to the Engineer. Technical support
from the manufacturer does not relieve the applicator of his contractual responsibility to ensure that
the intumescent coatings are applied in accordance with the Specification.
G. Finishes
1. Once applied, the finish shall not in any way slump, flow, crack, flake, split, sag, pit, bubble, blister,
float, effloresce, craze, shrink, break, wrinkle, crinkle, yellow, chalk, fade, discolor, powder, stain,
bleed or lose its finish or gloss in any way. Full account of the extremes of all atmospheric and
environmental conditions shall be taken.
2. All surface finishes shall be dry to handle.
3. Unless otherwise specified, thinning shall only be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. There shall be no variation of final surface finish.
5. All paints shall be anti-mold and stable in humid conditions and suitable to hot climate exposure.
H. Remedial Work (Steelwork Finishes)
1. Any remedial work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, matching the
original finish in every respect. Samples of remedial work shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review prior to commencement of work.
2. Early degradation of coatings by blistering, peeling, flaking, cracking, lack of adhesion, etc. shall
be made good by complete removal, re-preparation and reapplication of all coats, as instructed.
3. Inadequate dry film thickness or surface defects due to adverse weather shall, depending on the
type of paint, be remedied by rubbing down and applying further coat(s), as instructed.

17 September 2015
4. Mechanical damage to coatings shall be made good by local cutting back of coatings, re-preparation
and reapplication of all coats to leave a neat, continuous and flat finish.
5. Where damage to coatings or subsequent surface preparation has exposed bare metal, it shall be
thoroughly cleaned and primed within 2 hours.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project
Site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by the Engineer, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 102100 -- COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 6
2.4 FABRICATION 7
2.5 SHOP FINISHING 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 PREPARATION 8
3.2 INSTALLATION 9
3.4 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 102100 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
17 September 2015
SECTION 102100 -- COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. WC cubicles.
2. Fire Strategy Report
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. 300mm x 300mm laminate sample in specified color including edging and trims.

Tender Issue 102100 / 1 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
17 September 2015
1. Shop Drawings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
a) Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
b) Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
c) Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
d) Show ceiling grid and overhead support or bracing locations.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. 300mm x 300mm laminate sample in specified color including edging and trims.
2. Hardware.
4. Access panels.
5. Supporting leg sample.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
1. A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work. Installer to be
approved by the compartment manufacturer.

17 September 2015
D. Mock-ups
E. Prototypes
1. Floor fastening detail and removable access paneling interface.
1. First framed panel cubicle partition of each type installed in location to be agreed.
A. Delivery: Do not deliver cubicle systems until conditions of temperature and humidity are similar to those
in the finished building. Deliver materials and components in sealed manufacturer's packaging, clearly
labeled to show brand, type, class, quality and other qualifying information. Replace material damaged
or otherwise unfit for use.
B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a protected, dry, ventilated location clear of the floor. Observe
particular requirements of manufacturer.
C. Handling: Handle joinery carefully to avoid distorting and overstressing joints. Protect corners and finished
surfaces from damage. Place panelling temporarily on flat bases to prevent racking.
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type PAN-101 FOH Toilet Cubicle
1. Description: Floor mounted toilet cubicle system for Front-of-House (FOH) including hinged doors,
front pilasters, pedestals, cubicle divisions, plastic laminate paneling to rear of cubicles forming
ducting out for services behind, and all necessary brackets, fixings and accessories to complete
the installation.
4. Framework: Steel framework consisting of stainless steel headrails and accessories to complete
the installation.
5. Panels, doors, posts, dividers and back panels shall be 13mm thick compact laminate.
6. Panels shall be moisture resistant, rot-proof, scratch and impact resistant and easy to clean.

17 September 2015
7. Finish: Matt surface.
8. Standard Cubicle Height: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
9. Standard Cubicle Width: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
10. Standard Cubicle Depth: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
11. System shall include anti noise EPDM buffer lining on post.
12. Configuration and cubicle sizes shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
13. Hardware:
a) Material: Stainless steel grade 304.
b) Hinges: Self-closing hinges adjustable to hold door in open or closed position.
c) Anti-trap lock with occupancy indicator and provision for emergency access.
d) Standard door knob.
e) Coat hook with rubber buffer.
f) All cubicle doors shall have 1½ pairs of self-closing stainless steel butt hinges.
14. All cubicle doors and panelling shall have local reinforcement and thicknesses to facilitate hardware
fittings.
B. Type PAN-102 BOH Toilet Cubicle
1. Description: Floor mounted toilet cubicle system for Back-of-House (BOH) including hinged doors,
front pilasters, pedestals, cubicle divisions, plastic laminate paneling to rear of cubicles forming
ducting out for services behind, and all necessary brackets, fixings and accessories to complete
the installation.
4. Framework: Steel framework consisting of stainless steel headrails and accessories to complete
the installation.
5. Panels, doors, posts, dividers and back panels shall be 13mm thick compact laminate.
6. Panels shall be moisture resistant, rot-proof, scratch and impact resistant and easy to clean.
7. Finish: Matt surface.
8. Standard Cubicle Height: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
9. Standard Cubicle Width: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
10. Standard Cubicle Depth: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
11. System shall include anti noise EPDM buffer lining on post.
12. Configuration and cubicle sizes shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
14. Hardware:

17 September 2015
a) Material: Stainless steel grade 304.
b) Hinges: Self-closing hinges adjustable to hold door in open or closed position.
c) Anti-trap lock with occupancy indicator and provision for emergency access.
d) Standard door knob.
e) Coat hook with rubber buffer.
f) All cubicle doors shall have 1½ pairs of self-closing stainless steel butt hinges.
15. All cubicle doors and panelling shall have local reinforcement and thicknesses to facilitate hardware
fittings.
A. Movements: It shall be ensured that works withstand movement without permanent deformation, or any
reduction in their performance, caused by changes in the moisture content of their components from
variations in the moisture content of the air inside the building.
1. The works shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any reduction in
performance.
a) The works own dead load to be accommodated locally, and without causing deflections or
movements which adversely affect any component parts.
b) The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the
works.
1. The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
b) Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of the works arising from maintenance and
cleaning operations. The works shall sustain safely, without reduction in performance and
without permanent deformation to any component, a static 500N load applied horizontally
through a square of 100mm sides on any part of the framing.
c) Impact loads or transferred impact loads that occur during service life, without deterioration in
performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
1. All veneer grades, core materials and preservative requirements for the works shall be selected to
satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in Division 01
General Requirements, Section 018900 Site Construction Performance Requirements.
2. All facings, adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the works shall have moisture
resistance properties to match core materials.
specified, is suitable for the situation of the finished joinery. When fastened it shall remain stable
and free from expansion, contraction or other movements detracting from the required performance
or appearance.
E. Fire Performance

17 September 2015
2. Materials used in the works shall be classified as materials of limited combustibility.
3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM

E84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency.
F. Durability
a) Damage: Loss of serviceability, shrinkage, swelling, splitting, distortion, de-lamination or

rippling of veneers resulting from periodic contact with water or persistent exposure to elevated
levels of humidity.
b) Distortion: Cupping, bowing or twisting affecting function or appearance.
G. Serviceability: The work shall withstand the specified loads and anticipated abuse without damage or
impairment to the operation of moving parts, and as follows:
1. Damage shall include breakage of components and assemblies; distortion of joints, loss of rigidity
or loosening up of joints; cracking or splitting of materials or improper functioning of hardware.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for
smoothness.
1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: In accordance with ASTM A879/ A879M, 03G.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, either hot-dip galvanized or
galvannealed.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C. Steel Framing
1. Steel framing members shall be fabricated using only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses
to provide full structural compliance. The wall thickness of steel sections shall be sufficient to ensure
rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
2. Corrosion protection, hot-dip galvanising.
3. Use only continuous profiles free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves or any other damage.
D. Plastic Laminate
1. NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade minimum 1.2mm thickness.
2. Edgings shall be provided as indicated on the Design Drawings or in accordance with the indicative
proprietary panel manufacturer's standard detail.
3. Edgings shall be applied in a manner that minimizes the visible black line.
4. Methods of edging shall be as follows:
a) Hardwood edgings.
b) Post-formed edges.
E. Compact Grade Laminate
1. Machine cut to sizes as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Concealed fastenings to be used unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.

17 September 2015
3. Exposed edges shall be chamfered/ beveled and polished.
4. Concealed panel edges shall be square edged with clean cut edge.
5. Panel edges shall be sealed where exposed in wet areas.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate work in temperature and humidity conditions similar to the finished building. Shop fabricate
and pre-fit components complete before finishing.
B. Manufacture as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling on Site as
possible. Shop manufacture to allow for adjustments at Site for proper leveling, anchoring and joining.
C. Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape, accurate in size and profile with all exposed
surfaces free from irregularities and defects.
D. Blockings, bearers, etc. shall provide fastening points for linings running parallel with but offset from main
structural supports, or to support fixtures, fittings and services which are accurately positioned and
securely fixed. After fastening the panels and linings, the positions of blockings and bearers shall be
marked, for following trades.
E. Do not site cut, plane, drill, or sand pre-finished panels without the acceptance of the Engineer.
F. Adhesive joints shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination by dust
and other debris.
G. Allowance for future moisture and temperature movement of panels shall be made.
H. Linings and panels shall be stored on Site for at least 48 hours before fastening, in conditions similar to
those that will prevail after the building has been occupied. Free circulation of air to all surfaces shall be
maintained at all times.
I. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified by the Contractor prior to manufacture of
components.
K. Factory finished boards shall be consistent in color and texture, including accessories, throughout
individual areas of work. Boards shall be laid out to ensure that any texture is in the same direction and
lined up if there is any visible repeat. Panels shall be from single piece, unless otherwise accepted by
Engineer. Use manufacturer's discreet aluminum trim where joints are permitted.
L. Provide hardwood blocks for fastening pilasters directly to finished floors
M. Provide manufacturer's standard solid phenolic plinth to partition panels, height as indicated, to receive
specified flush wall base.
N. Stainless Steel Wall base: Bend sheets to the required profile. Form without oil canning or other distortion
in longest lengths practical without requiring Site welding.
O. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
supports and leveling mechanism.
P. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with

leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal anchorage.
Q. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with

leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide
assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide
sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.
R. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps)
at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

17 September 2015
S. Urinal-Panel Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with

leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps)at posts to conceal
anchorage.
T. Bonded Decorative Laminates
1. Condition sheets before bonding. Unless specified otherwise, apply to the reverse side of flat boards
a balancing veneer of similar construction to the decorative veneer and from the same manufacturer.
2. Bond in presses whenever possible.
3. Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks, pimpling,
depressions, glue spill, staining, defects in color and pattern and the like.
4. All joints exposed to view in the finished work shall be tight butted and true with no edging. Chamfer
edges at all exterior angles.
U. Tolerances
1. Exact Site dimensions shall be taken as necessary before starting fabrication.
2. Permissible deviations for panel manufacture:
a) Length: 1mm.
b) Width: 1mm.
c) Squareness: 5mm. (Taking the longer of 2 sides at any corner as a baseline, the deviation of
the shorter side from perpendicular).
d) Flatness: 1.5mm under a 1000mm straightedge.
3. Holes/ cut-outs in rigid sheet boards shall:
a) Form 90° internal corners.
b) Form holes for fastenings oversize.
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Apply finishes in controlled, dust-free conditions. Site finishing, including Site touch-ups are
not permitted.
B. Preparation: Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Remove surface
marks, roughness, open grain or contamination. Apply initial coat of finish to surfaces, including edges,
cut outs and recesses for wall bases, immediately after preparation.
C. Staining: Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint stains.
Apply stains continuously without overlaps and with uniform color across each surface.
D. Painting and Lacquering: Mix and spray apply to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness, with a uniform sheen and texture without runs or other
defects.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection
1. Areas scheduled shall be checked before receiving the works for correct dimensions, plumbness
of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.
compartments.

17 September 2015
3. Compartments shall not be installed until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The paneling shall not be installed before the surrounding areas are made watertight, wet trades have
finished their work, wall and floor tiling is complete and the surrounding area has dried out.
B. The works shall be installed rigid, straight, plumb and level and in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
C. Installation methods shall conform to the manufacturer's written recommendations for backing and proper
support.
D. No evidence of concealed drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish shall be visible.
E. Uniform clearance shall be maintained at vertical edges of doors.
F. Top edges of doors and panels shall be installed flush.
G. Panels shall be installed with a floor clearance and ceiling line as indicated on the Design Drawings.
H. Doors shall be installed with a floor clearance and ceiling clearance as indicated on the Design Drawings.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a) Pilasters and Panels: 13mm.
b) Panels and Walls: 25mm.
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than 2 No. brackets attached
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a) Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b) Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
I. Fastenings shall be concealed unless otherwise stated.
J. Works shall be set out accurately, true to line and level, free from undulations, with lines and joints aligned,
straight and parallel unless specified otherwise.
K. Works shall be fixed securely using adequate concealed fastening components, to prevent pulling away,
bowing or other movement during use and without causing stress or distortion to panels and doors.
L. Adequate allowance shall be made for future moisture and temperature movement of boards.
M. Methods of fastening and fastenings shall be as recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
N. Trims shall be in unjointed lengths between angles or ends of runs. Where running joints are unavoidable,
acceptance of location and method of jointing miter angle joints shall be obtained from the Engineer,
unless specified otherwise.
O. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors
penetrating not less than 44mm into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written
instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors
to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace
when doors are in closed position.
P. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 51mm into structural floor
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters.
Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.
Q. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors
and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

17 September 2015
R. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and
tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed
position.
S. Urinal Panels: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb,
rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
T. Adhesives
1. Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound, unfrozen and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and materials
recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
3. Operatives shall observe the manufacturers' and statutory requirements for storage and safe usage
of adhesives.

A. Cleaning: Upon completion, remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely.
Clean the work of dirt and splashes. Clean and make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation,
B. Adjusting
1. Hardware Adjustment:
a) Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for
proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30° from
closed position when unlatched.
b) Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
of moving parts. Make good fastening holes and minor damage, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for
inspection; remove at Taking-Over.
B. Joinery
1. Protect completed joinery against damage, dirt, moisture and other deleterious substances.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 102613 -- CORNER GUARDS 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 5
3.1 EXAMINATION 5
3.2 PREPARATION 5
3.3 INSTALLATION 5

Tender Issue 102613 CORNER GUARDS
17 September 2015
SECTION 102613 -- CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Corner guards.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of each type.

Tender Issue 102613 / 1 CORNER GUARDS
17 September 2015
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
10. Quality Plan.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
A. Installer Qualifications
1. An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. Each Corner Guard installed in location to be agreed.

17 September 2015
A. Storage: Store materials on flat bases to prevent racking. Protect material from humidity and direct
B. Handling: Handle carefully to avoid distorting and damage to edges, corners and finished surfaces.
1.7 WARRANTY
components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a) Structural failures.
b) Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type TRM-401 Column Guard
1. Description: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of a high impact resistant extruded rubber profile with
yellow reflective strips which can be mounted onto clips bolted to the columns or fixed with the
appropriate epoxy adhesive.
3. Product Reference: WABO CLM COL GARD or acceptable equivalent.
4. Material: Extruded rubber profile.
5. Mounting: Surface mounted.
8. Length: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
9. Fastening System: Mounted onto clips bolted to the columns or fixed with the appropriate epoxy
adhesive
10. Fire Resistance: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
B. Type TRM-402 Wall Guard

17 September 2015
1. Description: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of a high impact resistant extruded rubber profile fixed
vertically or horizontally onto flat or curved surfaces using appropriate expanding or chemical
anchors.
3. Product Reference: WABO W WALL GARD or acceptable equivalent.
4. Material: Extruded rubber profile.
5. Mounting: Surface mounted.
8. Length: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
9. Fire Resistance: Refer to Fire Strategy Report.
10. Fastening System: Fixed vertically or horizontally onto flat or curved surfaces using appropriate
expanding or chemical anchors.
A. Movements: The works shall be designed, fabricated and installed to withstand all movement of the
building structure without damage or detriment.
B. Moisture Resistance
1. All materials, core materials and preservative requirements shall be selected to satisfy the design
life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in Division 01 General Requirements.
2. All facings, adhesives, fixings and associated elements of boarding shall have moisture resistant
C. Durability: The works shall be suitable for their intended purpose and perform satisfactorily for their full
design life.
D. Rigidity/ Strength
1. The construction of the works shall be such that they remain rigid, free from play and permanent
deformation caused by the normal use to which they are subjected.
2. Details of assembly and construction methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
3. The works shall withstand all vibration to which they are subjected either directly or indirectly or any
other such shocks, strains, stresses and movements that may be imposed by the users, and these
shall not cause fracture or deterioration of any element, particularly to any movable or openable
element of the works. Suitable devices for absorbing or damping any such vibration shall be included.
E. Fire
2. Materials used in works shall be classified as 'materials of limited combustibility'.
3. The works shall be fire resistant in accordance with the NFPA.
4. The works shall have a surface spread of flame in accordance with UL 723, ASTM E84, and the
5. Supply test certificates to verify that all materials meet this requirement
2.3 MATERIALS

17 September 2015
A. Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer (EPDM) Rubber: Tensile strength to ASTM D412: 1,750 min PSI;
Elongation to ASTM D412: 395 min; Tear Strength to ASTM D624: 229 lbs./ in; Impact resistance to
ASTM 2632: 75%; Deflection to ASTM D575: 60,000 ft./ lbs-76mm with no ruptures.
B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum
impact-resistance rating of 800 J/m of notch when tested in accordance with ASTM D256, Test Method
A.
C. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC
content of 70 g/ L or less when calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D [Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) Method 24].
D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other non-corrosive metal screws, bolts, and other
fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the areas and the conditions under
which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions, levels and alignments, and surfaces to receive the
work of this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, fire rating and other conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection/ corner guard will be attached for blocking,
grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment
of support fasteners.
1. For impact-resistant wall protection units/ corner guards attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspection
1. Scheduled areas shall be checked before receiving the works for correct dimensions, plumbness
of walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.
B. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection/ corner
guard system components.
C. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units/ corner guards level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible
in the finished Work.
B. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
C. Use the proper thickness of metal, adequate stiffeners, supports and proven details of assembly so that
the finished material will conform to the highest standards of the industry. Reinforce members and joints
with steel plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to comply with performance
requirements.
D. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the works to avoid them being scratched or otherwise
defaced during the course of installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall be
replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

17 September 2015
E. Do not install units that have members that are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or
defaced. Remove and replace such members as directed.
F. Drill, countersink and tap components as necessary to receive threaded fasteners. Use concealed
G. Adhesives
usage of adhesives.

H. Installation Tolerances
1. A high degree of accuracy shall be employed in the fabrication and installation of the works.
2. On-Site Dimensions: All dimensions to be checked on Site.
A. Cleaning
2. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
3. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.
4. Clean and polish exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Adjusting
1. Make good fixing holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the Engineer. Return items to the
shop that cannot be satisfactorily repaired on Site for refinishing or replacement.
2. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
C. Protection
1. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as directed for
inspection and remove completely at Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 107113 -- EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 5
2.5 FABRICATION 7
2.6 FINISHES 10
PART 3 EXECUTION 11
3.1 EXAMINATION 11
3.2 PREPARATION 12
3.3 INSTALLATION 12
3.5 PROTECTION 13

Tender Issue 107113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
17 September 2015
SECTION 107113 -- EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Shading screen.
5. MEP specification.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 107113 / 1 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
17 September 2015
3. All fastenings.
the system.
3. All fastenings.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
3. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
4. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in

accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
B. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
C. Prototypes
1. Typical bay demonstrating interfaces/ demountability and relocatability for all types.
D. Quality Benchmark Installation

17 September 2015
1. First installed structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with the Engineer.
E. Preconstruction Testing/ Reports
A. Delivery: Deliver assemblies and components to Site suitably protected from damage, staining or
removed. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with name
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit assembly of brise soleil system to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions
and warranty requirements. Do not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such
that a proper bond, seating or fastening cannot be ensured.
B. Site Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by site
measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type EWL-301 Shading Screen
1. Description: Fixed external shading screen system as indicated on Design Drawings including all
necessary supports, fastenings and accessories to complete the installation.
4. Screen:
a) Horizontal roll formed metal louver blades bolted, screwed or welded onto metal frame.
b) Finish and color shall be confirmed by the Engineer, selected from manufacturer's full range.
c) Blades pitch and angle shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
5. Support and Fixings: The work shall be fixed to steel support system, fastened back to the building
structure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

17 September 2015
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips, spacers,
B. All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
C. Framing profiles and other visible components shall utilize similar profiles throughout such that brise
soleil systems are consistent and matching in appearance.
D. Joints shall align and continue through interfacing EWS types. Visually open, recessed horizontal and
vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
E. When calculating loads the worst combinations shall be considered, taking account of the fact that the
pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
F. The work shall comply with the visual requirements indicated on the Design Drawings and provide a
G. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
H. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
I. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
A. Louver Performance Ratings
1. Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's

stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L (Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.).
2. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99% effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate
of 75mm per hour and a wind speed of 13 m/ s at a core-area intake velocity of 2.0 m/ s, unless
otherwise specified in the MEP Specification.
B. Strength/ Serviceability: The work shall withstand the specified loads without exceeding deflection limits.
Adjust load values when more restrictive limits are required by the material manufacturer or when the
performance of other materials or assemblies is compromised.
C. Deflections
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to the wall face: 1/ 200 of the clear span or
20mm, whichever is the lesser. Reduce values to prevent deflections exceeding 1/ 360 of the clear
span when brittle materials are affected, and 125% of the width of associated sealant joints.
2. Deflection of framing members in a direction parallel to the wall face: 1/ 500 of the clear span or
3mm, whichever is the lesser.
D. Strength/ Safety: The work shall withstand the specified loads without permanent distortion to framing
members to a maximum of 1/ 1000 of the clear span, measured 1 hour after the load has been removed.
E. Wind Loads
1. Assembly including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures specified in

Section 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
F. Durability: The work shall retain its specified appearance throughout its Design Life, without failure, when
maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program.
G. Thermal Movements

17 September 2015
temperatures occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditions
envisaged for the works.
2. Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperatures.
a) Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24°C.
b) Test Performance: No buckling; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and
fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
H. Moisture Movement: The works shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance due to changes in the moisture content of their components,
resulting from variations in the moisture content of the air.
I. Atmospheric Conditions: All works shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
J. Condensation
1. Condensation shall not form, either on internal or exterior surfaces of framing members or interstitially
within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the works, such that it may lead to damage
or staining.
drained and ventilated to the outside, such that the formation of such condensation is not detrimental
to the performance nor causes damage or staining of the works.
K. Capillarity: The Detailed Design shall eliminate any possibility of water migration to the inside of the
building due to capillarity.
L. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
1. The work shall resist abrasion from accepted cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard, including
glass coatings, to resist reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2. Record and quantify the extent of damage determined through testing. Submit samples to the
M. Demountability
1. Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance.
2. The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of these, or adjacent,
works.
N. Fire Performance
1. All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
2. Surface spread of flame: Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with UL 723 and
ASTM E84.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum
1. Aluminum shall be in accordance with:
a) Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

17 September 2015
b) Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or
as otherwise recommended by metal manufacturer for required finish.
c) Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 319.
d) Structural aluminum shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
e) Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that
all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of
aluminum extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the
final installation.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z180/ Z275 zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
C. Steel: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A1008/ A1008M sheet.
D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 316.
F. Steel Support Framing
1. Structural shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM
A123. Size sections as closely as possible to dimensions indicated and to suit load requirements.
G. Fasteners
1. General:
a) All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the works.
b) Visible fastenings shall match accepted samples.
c) Unless otherwise specified, the following basic requirements shall be adhered to:
1. Rigidity: Only fastenings that are suited to the likely stresses, movements and vibrations
in use without allowing any wobble, creaks or deflection of any fixtures or fittings shall be
used.
2. Removability: Items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with bolts.
2. Fastening components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of
the local municipality and/ or Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall be designed
to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal movements.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating in accordance with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M),
Class Fe/ Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
a) Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
b) Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
c) Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
5. Type and alloy as required for proper strength and to prevent galvanic action with materials fastened.
Exposed fasteners shall have countersunk Phillips head with finish to match adjacent surface.
H. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, in accordance with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM
F568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.

17 September 2015
I. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, in accordance with ASTM A325, Type 3 (ASTM
A325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A563, Grade C3 (ASTM A563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated,
flat washers.
J. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, in accordance
with ASTM F738M; with hex nuts, complying with ASTM F836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group 2 (A4).
K. Anchor Bolts: In accordance with ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, complying
with ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is
indicated to be galvanized.
L. Frame Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A879/ A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M or ASTM
A1011/ A1011M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B.
M. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M.
N. All aluminum fastening brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of alloy.
O. All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
aluminum shall not be used. Aluminum sub-constructions shall be separated from concrete by bitumen
paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M
may be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
P. All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
Q. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from
stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads
imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing in accordance
with ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
R. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate shading screen using appropriate materials complying with the specified appearance and
performance requirements. Pre-assemble and finish items to the greatest extent possible in the
shop.
2. Components shall be joined with a minimum of two fillet welds each 25.4mm long produced with
the Pulsed Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW/ MIG) process with minimum 3.18mm throat.
3. Maintain equal sun control blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
4. Join fixed sun control blades, fascia, outriggers and mounting plates with fillet welds concealed from
view, unless size of screen blades assembly makes concealed, bolted connections between frame
members necessary.
5. Form to required profiles to engage joint reinforcement, support brackets and alignment clips.
6. Frames and Mullions:
a) Pre-form corners and offsets from standard blades with fabricated miters or joints.
b) Closure Pieces and Trim: Form from minimum 2.5mm thick aluminum sheets or extrusions
with spigots or back-up plates, welded to one of the components at joints.
c) Blade Support Brackets and Clips: Form from aluminum or stainless steel sheets or extrusions
with profile to engage and retain screen blades accurately in place.

17 September 2015
7. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
8. Subsills and extended sills shall be indicated on the Design Drawings.
B. Workmanship: Accurately cut and form the materials to the required size and shape with visible surfaces
free from irregularities and defects. Complete cutting, drilling, bending and welding before finishing,
unless accepted otherwise. Do not machine aluminum or stainless steel with equipment used to work
mild steel or equipment that will cause staining or corrosion.
1. Cutting: Perform cutting by saw, water-jet or plasma laser; shear or flame cutting not permitted.
Saw cut to maximum tolerance of ±0.5mm. Machine surfaces to specified tolerances; remove burrs,
saw marks and blemishes from exposed edges and surfaces.
2. Bending: Bend materials to the required profiles without oil canning or other defects; minimize grain
separation. Form corners to the smallest radius possible without machining or grooving the back,
3. Machining: Drill holes and form cut outs using rotary drills or milling machines; stamping or shearing
not permitted. Tap, countersink or use grommet inserts for proper fastening.
4. Welding: Weld continuously along joints with even contour of metal without undercutting,
discontinuities, porosity, distortions or other defects. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, without
fillets; maintain the line of the welded members. Welds on surfaces to be painted shall not affect
the appearance of finished work.
5. Fastenings: Drill, countersink and top components ready to receive threaded fasteners. Use
concealed fasteners unless accepted otherwise. Set out exposed fasteners in an even spacing and
layout.
6. Names, Logos or Other References on Visible Surfaces: Not permitted.
C. Tolerances for Manufacture
1. Design tolerances shall be adhered to.
2. The provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances of the surrounding elements
shall be shown on the Shop Drawings and further information shall be obtained from the Engineer
as necessary when completing the Shop Drawings.
3. Specific tolerances shall be adhered to. A very high degree of accuracy is required in the tolerance
of works, as set out below:
a) Level of horizontal members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
b) Plumb of vertical members: As per the required dimension to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-
cumulative.
4. The detailed list of tolerances to which the works components shall be fabricated within the
requirements of the Specification and overall geometric requirements shall be submitted with the
tenders. All tolerances shall be submitted for review by the Engineer.
5. As a minimum, the statement of tolerances shall include the following:
a) Thickness.
b) Out-of-plan.
c) Straightness normal to plane.
d) Longitudinal.
e) Horizontal.
f) Vertical.
g) Diagonal.

17 September 2015
h) Eccentricity.
b) Line of panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
D. Metalwork, General
Specification.
only, or hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M Any cut edges shall be
arrises.

chemically.
E. Welding/ Brazing
1. General:
attachment.
porosity or cracks.
completed work.
f) Metal arc welding shall be to AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS
D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other methods subject to review by
the Engineer.

17 September 2015
Aluminum."
assembled.
porosity, deep ridges, etc.).
F. Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
G. Mild Steel
with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
3. Exterior visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section steelwork
shall be positioned in the works so as to be non-visible.
H. Aluminum
acceptable.
I. Lightning Protection
1. Bonding is required between individual sections of the works to ensure continuity between adjacent
2. Bonding between the works and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals as indicated
on the Design Drawings. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at the highest
3. Provide studs/ bolts on the cladding for subsequent connection.
5. No straps shall be fixed along copings.
J. Bending: Bend sheet metal to the required shape. Bent items shall be free of grain separation, oil canning
K. The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in manufacture of the works in order to
L. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of the proposed methods for achieving and
constantly monitoring the fabrication tolerances during all stages of the work. Detailed records of the
2.6 FINISHES

17 September 2015
A. General
3. Prime visible surfaces of non?ferrous metals. Prime all surfaces, including joint faces, of ferrous

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
A. Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified test
data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
B. Testing of Prototypes
of attachment and support as elements of the works, with a supporting structure similar in stiffness
to that supporting the works. The prototypes to be tested shall not be influenced by the test chamber.
test prototypes.
5. Before the test is begun, the external face of the specimen shall be thoroughly washed using a mild
7. The prototypes shall be tested for water leakage and wind load resistance plus additional structural
loading tests as necessary to demonstrate that the works are capable of accommodating the building
movements while maintaining the performance of the works.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
which the work will be performed. Verify dimensions of the supporting construction, positions of inserts,
and surfaces to receive the work of this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine substrates and openings, with Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

17 September 2015
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Brackets, Support Framework and Attachments: Accurately set out the work. Drill the supporting structure
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: The works shall be erected plumb (or at the angles prescribed) and true in proper alignment
and relation to established lines and grids as shown on the Shop Drawings. The erected system shall
present true and accurate lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be
limited to long wave formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not
exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from a laser
reference line.
B. Attach using concealed fasteners with allowances for differential movement between components.
C. Incorporate flashings and sealant joints within the work to prevent air infiltration and water penetration
into the building.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Separate dissimilar materials to prevent galvanic corrosion.
F. Joints between panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more
than ±2mm or 10% of the joint width whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally distributed
with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 2mm.
G. Installation Tolerances
1. Level: The works shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the
same locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
2. Plumbness: The works shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 3mm from its
theoretical vertical/ diagonal plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel
shall not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane shall be within ±2mm of the theoretical plane position.
the Engineer.
H. Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and
I. The works, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting and shall be strictly rigid, firm, free
J. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the works.

17 September 2015
A. Cleaning: Upon completion, remove debris from the Site and clean exposed surfaces in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Leave work clean, blemish-free, and adequately protected against
damage from construction operations. Final clean after removing temporary protection; remove adhesive
residues, dirt and fingerprints. Safely dispose of waste materials.
B. Adjusting: Touch up, repair, remove and/ or replace scratched, bent or damaged items to the acceptance
of the Engineer. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust operating parts to provide smooth
unbinding operation and produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.
C. Minor scratches and blemishes to finishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer's
recommended products and system, matching original finish for color, texture and gloss. Repair coatings
shall be visually acceptable to the Engineer. Confirmation shall be provided that the repair to the damaged
finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification. Guarantee in writing that the
damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed remedial paint system. Employ an
independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection and any necessary tests and supply a full
report to the Engineer.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary coverings to protect items during construction, and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Remove protection at Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 124816 -- ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 6
2.4 FABRICATION 6
2.5 FINISHING 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.2 INSTALLATION 8
3.5 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
17 September 2015
SECTION 124816 -- ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

systems and other required elements, indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate
1. Entrance mat.
2. Secion 078413 Penetration Firestopping
3. Section 099100 Painting
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 124816 / 1 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
17 September 2015
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of assembled foot grille and frame members and tread rails with the
selected tread surface and metal finish.
the system.
1. 300mm x 300mm sample of assembled foot grille and frame members and tread rails with the
selected tread surface and metal finish.
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
1. A specialist with at least 10 years successful experience in performing similar work.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide

materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical
products in accordance with the test method indicated by UL, ITS or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities
having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that shall be concealed from view after installation.
D. Mock-ups
1. Not required.
E. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First installed structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
G. Preconstruction Testing

17 September 2015
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Site ready for use in largest sections feasible. Identify deliveries in
materials to the Site as close to installation time as possible.
C. Handling
1. Handle materials using methods and equipment without damage to members or coatings. Inspect
components before installation.
2. Replace damaged items or work which cannot be satisfactorily re-finished on Site to the acceptance
of the Engineer.
A. General
1. Install materials and components in weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Do

not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such that a proper bond, seating
C. Site Measurements: Verify locations of framing members and dimensions by Site measurements and
indicate measurements on the Shop Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
components of assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b) Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FLS-801 Floor Mat and Grille
1. Description: Floor matting and grille finish on suitable substrate including all necessary fasteners

17 September 2015
4. Material: Stainless steel grate.
6. Depth: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
7. Framing: As per manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
8. Rolling Load: 1000 lbs./ wheel.
9. Uniform Load: 1000 lbs./ ft³.
10. Slip Resistance: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
12. Fastening: As per manufacturer's standard and as accepted by the Engineer.
A. General
1. Floor grille and frame assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Slip Resistance
1. In accordance with ASTM D2047: Coefficient of friction.
C. Specific Movements
1. The works shall be fabricated and installed to withstand all movements of the building structure
under all specified design loads or combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the
performance of the works.
shims, which shall be agreed with and accepted by the Engineer.
3. All necessary movement joints shall be incorporated to accommodate the maximum movements
that can be derived from the specified and determined design loads and movements. Under
maximum movements the joints shall meet the requirements of the Specification.
5. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any elements of the works
b) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements, including
c) Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
d) Thermal movements.
D. Specific Dead Loads
performance:

17 September 2015
b) The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the
works.
E. Specific Live Loads
in performance:
b) A horizontal line load applied to the works, due to the occupants and vehicles, in accordance
with the IBC and Structural Engineer's requirements.
c) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the works, without
F. Deflections
1. The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of themselves
the work, its support structure or internal finishes.
G. Specific Fire Performance Requirements: Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with
UL 723 and ASTM E84.
H. Demountability
1. Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
a) The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part
of the work.
I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
J. Durability
without failure when maintained in accordance with an agreed maintenance program. Failure shall
be defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following defects arising from deficiencies in
material selection or workmanship.
b) Distortion, displacement or other damage to a woven metal fabric that renders it unserviceable
or unattractive.
c) Atmospheric corrosion, stress corrosion, bi-metallic/ electro-chemical corrosion or other

d) Degradation of protective coatings causing galvanized items to suffer corrosion during their

17 September 2015
e) Component parts that may suffer damage under design safety loading shall permit easy
K. Impact and Abrasion Resistance
1. The work shall resist abrasion from acceptable cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist
all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2. Impact tests shall be carried out to all works adjacent to pedestrian areas in accordance with the
conditions specified in the International Building Code, unless stated otherwise.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications
exposed to view in the completed work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names, or blemishes.
2. Materials shall be non-corrosive and suitable for use in high humidity and salt air.
3. Materials shall be flame-proofed (with a non-saline solution) and treated with appropriate stain and/
or repellant prior to use.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars
1. Shall be to a minimum of 76mm thick austenitic stainless steel sheet in accordance with ASTM
A666, Type 304, soft, with type 2B/ 2D rolled, unpolished finish..
C. Stainless-Steel Angles
1. In accordance with ASTM A276 or ASTM A479/ A479M, corrosion resistant, Type 304.
D. Fastenings
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for heavy traffic use.
2. All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the works.
3. Direct contact between aluminum or aluminum alloys shall be avoided, unless with the prior
4. Visible fastenings shall match approved samples.
6. Fasteners: Type and alloy as required for proper strength and to prevent galvanic action with
materials fastened. Exposed fasteners shall have countersunk Phillips head with finish to match
adjacent surface.
E. Inserts: Stainless steel Type 304 of suitable design and strength to suit application.
2.4 FABRICATION

17 September 2015
A. General
1. Fabricate foot grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes
for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles are necessary,
space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
2. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available
lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces
spliced together by straight connecting pins.
B. Evaporation Pan
1. Fabricate from stainless steel sheet, to the manufacturer's standard, to suit floor slab recess
dimensions.
C. Adhesive Bonding
1. Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or

chemically.
2. Use adhesives to the manufacturer's written recommendations.
3. Form bond under pressure.
2.5 FINISHING
A. General

acceptable if they are within ½ of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same
within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
8. Site Applied Paint: In accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
B. Stainless Steel Finishes
1. Mill finish.
2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
a) When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

17 September 2015
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine substrates and floor conditions for
compliance with requirements for location, size, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting
installation of foot grilles and frames. Verify dimensions of supporting construction and surfaces to receive
the work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine roughing-in for drainage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
foot grille and frame and drain pan installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All works shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, which shall be free from marks, defects,
flaws, steps, waves, or damage of any nature.
2. Install recessed foot grilles and frames in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions
at locations indicated on the Design Drawings and with top of foot grilles and frames in relationship
to one another and to adjoining finished flooring as recommended by the manufacturer. Set foot-
grille tops at height for most effective cleaning action. Coordinate top of foot-grille surfaces with
doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door.
3. All fastening bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
4. Materials shall be dry until fastened.
5. Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between
dissimilar metals shall be used.
6. Bars shall be set out at evenly spaced centers, straight, parallel and truly aligned with other features,
where indicated on the Shop Drawings.
7. The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane, with a satisfactory fit at all
junctions.
8. Corners: All corner conditions shall appear identical at each level or as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
9. Fastenings:
a) Use only shop-drilled holes for the assembling items, unless otherwise accepted by the
Engineer. When acceptable Site drill holes in accepted locations by the Engineer.
b) Set fasteners with heads parallel to the surface; set countersunk heads flush.
c) Use countersunk fastenings where in physical contact with the body, to prevent injury.
d) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bimetallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminum components from cementitious surfaces. To this end attention is drawn
to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its alleviation.
e) Visible fastenings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support

steelwork, using round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
f) Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanized and effectively weatherproofed to avoid
g) Provide cast-in channel fastenings in concrete and fastenings directly made to structural
steelwork.
h) Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting
for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor
bolts and fastenings where necessary.
i) The method of fastening shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fastenings.

17 September 2015
j) Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Engineer.
k) Fasteners shall be installed with a coordinated purpose design tooling system that incorporates
a mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates perpendicular
installation. The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site instruction in the
use of the fastener installation tooling system.
l) Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
10. Adhesives:
a) Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and
materials recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
b) Surfaces shall be sufficiently smooth and even to suit the gap-filling and bonding characteristics
of the adhesive. Prepare as necessary.
c) Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers' and statutory requirements for storage and
d) No adhesives shall be used in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the

manufacturer's recommended maximum shelf life or open-pot time periods.
e) Adhesives shall be applied using recommended spreaders/ applicators to ensure correct

coverage. Bring surfaces together within the recommended time period and apply pressure
evenly over the full area of contact surfaces to ensure full bonding.
f) Surplus adhesive shall be removed using methods and materials recommended by the
adhesive manufacturer and without damage to affected surfaces.
B. Fire Protection: Install fire protective materials in accordance with Section 078413 Penetration
Firestopping, to achieve the required fire performance.
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing and inspecting agency shall be engaged to perform site
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Remove and replace materials where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
C. Site Tests and Inspections: Perform the specified tests and inspections using a suitably experienced
quality manager.
D. Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the manufacturer to do Site
visits for 1 full day at the start of the installation, and twice weekly as the work progresses. Technical
E. Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and
F. Additional tests and inspections, at the Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements
A. Cleaning: Remove debris and unused materials from Site upon completion and dispose of safely. Clean
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers, and without scratching
surfaces. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials that shall damage adjacent work.
B. If stainless steel has not been protected by adhesive film, thoroughly clean prior to presentation to the
Engineer for acceptance.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean Site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
in accordance with ASTM A780.

17 September 2015
D. Adjusting, General: Adjust operating parts to provide smooth unbinding operation. Make good adjacent
surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Engineer. Repair or replace damaged or
defective items to acceptance of the Engineer.
E. Touch-up Painting
1. Immediately after erection, clean Site welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated
and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting in accordance with SSPC-PA
1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
2. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05mm dry film thickness.
F. After installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in foot-grille recesses
and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended
and Project is near Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 125000 -- FURNITURE 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.3 MATERIALS 5
2.4 SHOP FINISHING 6
2.5 FINISHES 7
PART 3 EXECUTION 7
3.1 EXAMINATION 7
3.2 PREPARATION 7
3.3 INSTALLATION 7
3.4 TOLERANCES 9

Tender Issue 125000 FURNITURE
17 September 2015
SECTION 125000 -- FURNITURE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Requirements, Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.

systems and other required elements, indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate
1. Lockers.
2. Reception desk.
3. Vanity units.
D. Related Work Sections and documentation
4. Section 224000 Plumbing Fixtures.
Design Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 125000 / 1 FURNITURE
17 September 2015
2. All fastenings.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
2. All fastenings.
Submittals and submit the following
1. Warranties.
cleaning frequency.
C. Mock-ups
D. Prototypes
1. Each item of Furniture installed in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.

17 September 2015
A. Delivery: Do not deliver joinery until conditions of temperature and humidity are similar to those in the
finished building. Protect joinery from wetting or damage during transportation.
B. Storage: Store materials on flat bases to prevent racking. Protect material from humidity and direct
C. Handling: Handle joinery carefully to avoid distorting and damage to edges, corners and finished surfaces.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of mobile shelving systems
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type FXG-301 Locker
1. Description: Locker unit including all necessary fastening and accessories to complete the
installation, configured as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3. Product Reference: To be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's range.
5. Locker Arrangement: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6. Material: Solid phenolic core panels composed of melamine impregranted decorative surface papers
superimposed over kraft phenolic core sheets to achieve desired thickness, forming a one piece
panel that would not delaminate.
8. Support and Fixings: Manufacturer's standard.
9. Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
10. Phenolic Locker Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard phenolic locker hardware complying
with the requirements in this Work Section.

17 September 2015
B. Type FXG-601 Reception Desk
1. Description: Reception desk comprising countertop and front and side panels including all necessary
brackets, fastenings and accessories required to complete the assembly.
3. Framework: The framework, which shall be common to the work, shall be mild steel with the facility
for bolt-on or welded components to support the cladding and work surfaces. The minimum thickness
of all steel shall be 2mm, and all exposed stainless steel edges shall be 5mm or 10mm with pencil
round edges.
a) Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b) Where possible, metalwork assembly shall take place in properly equipped workshops with
Sitework restricted to fastening. Consult with the Engineer regarding Sitework, deliveries and
the storage of equipment or assembled units.
c) All metal frames shall have rubber protection strips on panel contact faces.
4. Countertop: Non porous homogeneous solid acrylic surface.
a) Thickness: 12mm.
5. Front and Side Panels: Plastic laminated panels.
a) Plastic Laminate Thickness: 1.5mm.
6. Other Requirements: Provide storage and drawers where indicated on the Design Drawings;
materials and finishes shall be confirmed by the Engineer.
7. Fastening System: Provide a fully concealed fastening system.
C. Type FXG-602 Vanity Unit
1. Description: Cantilevered vanity unit comprising vanity top with rear and side panels and hand
washbasin including all necessary trims, brackets, fastenings and accessories required to complete
the assembly.
3. Support: Provide a rigid, robust and concealed framework suitable to support the vanity unit.
4. Worktop
a) Type: Acrylic countertop.
b) Finished: Polished.
c) Provide preformed aperture for inset hand washbasin. Refer to the Sanitary Schedule and
Section 224000 Plumbing Fixtures.
d) Open Shelf: Solid core high pressure laminate. Color shall be confirmed by the Engineer.
1. Veneer Type: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
5. Backsplash: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, provide backsplash using same material as
vanity top.
6. Fastening System: Provide a fully concealed fastening system.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General

17 September 2015
1. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an
FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria
for Forest Stewardship".
2. Low-Emitting Materials: Composite wood products shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Wood
1. No damaged, rotten or discolored materials shall be used.
2. Materials shall be relatively knot free, free from distortion, cracks or other blemishes.
3. All wood shall be selected for its final use (of particular importance for dry structural wood):
a) For internal use, wood shall be graded and stamped DRY or KD (kiln dried) and shall have a
moisture content of 20% or less.
4. Moisture content at the time of erection shall not be more than 20% internally in continuously heated
spaces
5. Moisture content of wood and wood based boards shall be maintained during storage and installation
within the range specified for the component.
C. Plywood
1. Plywood durability must have moisture content frequently above 20% unless otherwise agreed.
2. Dimensional tolerances must satisfy any additional requirements of the Specification.
3. Ensure that fastenings do not protrude above surface of board. Fastenings shall be of a type
4. Finish shall be suitable for its location, sanded where finished or unsanded where not visible.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Solid–Surfacing Material: Homogenous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.
B. Decorative Laminate
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required
by woodwork quality standard.
2. Decorative high-pressure laminates of less than 2mm in thickness forming bonded panels shall be
manufactured in accordance with BS EN 438: Part 3.
3. Compact grade laminates of a thickness of 2mm or greater shall be manufactured in accordance

with BS EN 438: Part 4.
4. The substrate for decorative laminate bonded board shall be one of the following:
a) Particleboard in accordance with BS EN 312, grade P5.
b) Plywood in accordance with BS EN 636.
c) MDF in accordance with BS EN 622: Part 5.
d) Blockboard/ Laminboard in accordance with BS EN 636.
5. Determine the final thickness of bonded panels in order to provide the required structural strength,
dimensional stability and impact resistance.
6. Ensure that the laminate is thoroughly bonded to the plywood backing in accordance with the
recommendations of the British Laminate Fabricators Association

17 September 2015
7. Particleboard in accordance with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and in accordance with requirements of NEMA LD3,
Grade VGL.
C. Plywood
1. Softwood Plywood: In accordance with U.S. Department of Commerce (DOC) PS 1 standard.
2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): In accordance with Hardwood Plywood and
formaldehyde.
D. Hardboard: In accordance with American Hardboard Association (AHA) ANSI/ AHA A135.4.
E. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings for metal fastenings requirements.
F. Wood Preservative Treated Materials: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
G. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Refer to Section 060573 Wood Treatment.
H. Mild Steel, General
1. All mild steel shall be in accordance with the Engineer's requirements where applicable, unless
stated otherwise.
indicated.
I. Stainless Steel, General
1. Stainless steel shall be made of corrosion resistant nickel chromium steel for solid bar and for tube.
Bead blasted finish.
Fastenings.
2.4 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Apply finishes in controlled, dust-free conditions. Site finishing, including Site touchups are not
permitted.
B. Preparation: Remove surface marks, roughness, open grain or contamination. Apply initial coat of finish
to surfaces, including edges, cut outs and recesses for wall bases, immediately after preparation.
C. Staining: Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint stains.
Apply stains continuously without overlaps and with uniform color across each surface.
D. Painting and Lacquering: Mix and spray apply to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness, with a uniform sheen and texture without runs or other
defects.

17 September 2015
E. Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal for metal coating requirements.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish consisting of

prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05mm.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the areas and the conditions under
which the work shall be installed. Verify dimensions, levels and alignments, and surfaces to receive the
work of this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
B. Examine areas, with the Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
location of framing and reinforcements, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting
performance of shelving system.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspection
walls and soundness of surfaces that would affect installation of mounting brackets.
compartments.
3. Compartments shall not be installed until conditions are satisfactory.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the works in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Workmanship
1. All workmanship shall be of a high standard using fully proven practices.
2. The setting out of the works shall be accurate and in accordance with the Design Drawings. All
dimensions shall be checked on Site and any discrepancies notified to the Engineer. The setting
out of the works shall ensure that in all cases it is square to the building grid unless otherwise
3. All joints within the works shall be horizontal or vertical, with all edges and joints square, unless
otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
4. Take responsibility for ensuring that any molding deflections and distortion characteristics are
allowed for in the pattern making so as to achieve the finished form indicated on the Design Drawings.
C. Do not install the works before building is weathertight, wet trades have finished their work and the
building is well dried out.
D. Do not cut, plane or sand prefinished surfaces except where shown on the Shop Drawings or otherwise
E. Fasten securely using manufacturer's fixing components without causing distortions to frames, panels
and doors.

17 September 2015
F. Doors and drawers shall be accurately aligned and not binding. Adjust as necessary to ensure smooth
operation.
G. Hardware shall be checked, adjusted and lubricated as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
H. Fixtures/ Furnishing Systems
1. Workmanship: Fixtures/ Furnishings shall be manufactured and rigidly assembled. Reinforcing shall
be provided as required to ensure a rigid and secure assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from
dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open joints. All joints, corner and miters shall be
accurately fitted. Fastenings shall be concealed. Threaded connections shall be made up tightly so
that threads are entirely concealed.
2. All joints and corners shall be accurately fitted to shapes and dimensions indicated, with all lines,
angles and surfaces in true alignment, plumb, level and in proper plane.
3. Use the proper thickness of metal, adequate stiffeners, supports and proven details of assembly
so that the finished material will conform to the highest standards of the industry. Reinforce members
and joints with steel plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to comply with
4. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design. Joints in
exposed metal work shall be accurately fitted and rigidly secured with hairline contacts. Exposed
joints in flat surfaces shall be flush, unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings. End joints
shall have sleeves of the same outline as the exposed shapes to assure good alignments.
5. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the works to avoid them being scratched or otherwise
defaced during the course of installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall
be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
6. Do not install units that have members that are warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged
or defaced. Remove and replace such members as directed by the Engineer.
7. Accurately cut and form the materials to the required shape and profile with all exposed surfaces
free from irregularities and defects. Carefully fit and match all components before assembly to
maintain continuity of line between them. Provide hairline joints between contact surfaces of non-
welded joints, unless indicated otherwise on the Shop Drawings. Complete all cutting, drilling,
welding, etc., before the application of final finishes.
8. Drill, countersink and tap components as necessary to receive threaded fasteners. Use concealed
9. Accurately align components and rigidly secure all non-moving joints by welding or fastening with
machine screws or bolts. Reinforce joints and components as necessary to achieve the required
strength and provide proper joint fastening. Ensure that no areas of unfinished material are visible
in the finished work. Drive in all exposed fasteners level and flush with the adjacent surfaces.
Disassemble the works only to the extent necessary to facilitate transportation to the Site.
10. All elements of framework and associated beads and strips shall be stored on Site such that they
do not get damaged or distort.
I. Adhesives
1. Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound, free from dust, grease and any other contamination
usage of adhesives.


17 September 2015
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances
1. A high degree of accuracy shall be employed in the fabrication and installation of the works and
support structures.
2. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the works are such that within any planning
grid section the allowable tolerances are achieved.
3. Level and plumb tracks to a tolerance of 2.4mm in 3048mm with no more than 1.5mm variation
between adjacent rails. Use permanent shims or non-shrink grout as indicated by manufacturer.
a) All dimensions shall be checked on Site.
b) The final design shall accommodate all specified tolerances and differences between actual
Site dimensions and dimensions as indicated on the Shop Drawings.
c) The works shall be erected in proper alignment in relation to established lines and grades as
indicated on the Shop Drawings and account shall be taken of the installation tolerance
requirements of the panel system such that units are accurately located.
d) Cut-outs for interfacing works shall be to the dimensions as indicated on the Design Drawings
±1mm.
Site dimensions and dimensions as indicated on the Design Drawings.
accurately located, relative to each other.
7. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the works are such that within any planning
grid section the allowable tolerances are achieved.
A. Cleaning
1. Upon completion, remove debris and unused materials from the Site and dispose of safely. Clean
the work of dirt, splashes and excess material.
2. Make good adjacent surfaces marred by the execution of the work, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
B. Adjusting
1. Hardware shall be adjusted for proper operation after installation.
2. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation
of moving parts.
4. Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the Engineer. Return items to
the shop that cannot be satisfactorily repaired on Site for refinishing or replacement.
C. Protection
1. Do not deliver components to the Site until required and do not remove protective packaging/
coverings until immediately before required for fastening.
2. Protect the work from damage during construction. Remove and replace protection as directed by
the Engineer for inspection and remove completely at Taking-Over.
3. Joinery

17 September 2015
a) Protect completed joinery against damage, dirt, moisture and other deleterious substances.
b) Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
4. Stack boards and panels flat on bearers and separated by spacers where necessary to prevent
damage.
5. Keep components and completed work clean and dry, and adequately protect from physical damage
until Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 149100 -- FACILITY CHUTES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 7
2.5 FABRICATION 8
PART 3 EXECUTION 8
3.1 EXAMINATION 8
3.2 PREPARATION 8
3.3 INSTALLATION 8
3.7 PROTECTION 10

Tender Issue 149100 FACILITY CHUTES
17 September 2015
SECTION 149100 -- FACILITY CHUTES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.

1. Laundry chutes.
4. Acoustic Report.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 149100 / 1 FACILITY CHUTES
17 September 2015
1. Not required.
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
1. Sample of hopper in specified finish.
1. Warranties.
frequency.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire ratings indicated.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
2. Intake Door: Class B labeled, 1 hour fire rated with 30 minute temperature rise of 140°C.
3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled;,1 hour fire rated with 30 minute temperature rise of 140°C.
4. Access Door: Class B labeled, 1 hour fire rated with 30 minute temperature rise of 140°C.
C. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified
testing agency and marked for intended location and application.
D. Standard: Provide chutes in accordance with NFPA 82.
F. Mock-ups
1. Typical work interface with surrounding structure including all fastening details.
G. Prototypes
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
1. The first completed full story installation in location to be agreed.
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve Contractor of his
affecting finishes, imparting residue, affecting adhesion of sealants or causing deleterious effects in the
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products and systems from one of the listed manufacturers as follows or
1. Ostermeier.
2. Chab.
3. Wilkinson.
B. Type AM-702 Laundry Chute
1. Description: Linen chute including all necessary fasteners and accessories to complete the
installation and shall be located and configured as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2. Chute shall be accommodated by a ventilated void and lobby areas as indicated on the Design
Drawings. Ventilation shall be fan assisted in accordance with the MEP Engineer's requirements
via a stainless steel duct penetrating through the roof.
3. Apertures within the structural slab shall be provided to accept the work, as indicated on the Design
Drawings.

17 September 2015
4. Chute (Components):
a) Refuse chute including all vertical trunking, chute entry sections and vent pipes manufactured
from minimum 1.5mm thick stainless steel sheet Type 316.
1. Internal Diameter: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b) All internal items shall be factory welded tight and ground smooth to give a clean, unobstructed
finish.
c) The chute entry sections shall be manufactured from the same material as the tube and shall
have a clear opening as per the requirement of the Engineer.
d) The intake door shall be 500mm x 500mm, bottom hinged, self closing, with an automatic
locking device which operates at the time of cleaning and maintenance. Door shall ensure that
refuse inserted cannot cause a blockage in the chute. Intake door shall be manufactured from
stainless steel Type 316 polished to hairline finish.
e) The complete exterior surface of the chute tube and the intake throats must be factory coated
with noise dampening compound to a minimum thickness of 2mm to 3mm.
f) The chute shall extend through the roof with a pipe, terminating above roof level with a
weathering terminal or as specified.
g) Offsetting of the chute shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
h) Rodding eye access shall be provided at maximum intervals as recommended by the

manufacturer.
i) The chute shall be supported at the first slab and at every third thereafter with a special corrosion
resistant mounting frame made from 50mm x 8mm flat bars and 50mm x 50mm x 6mm angles
including all necessary fastenings as required to achieve the requirements of the Specification.
Allow for provision for sound insulation within fastening systems. Applied means of corrosion
resistance shall be undertaken after manufacture.
1. Sound Insulation: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
j) Deep drawn sheet metal clamping rings shall be used on each tube joint. Rings shall be hot-
dipped galvanized.
k) Provide a fire shutter door in the Garbage Room. The fire door shall run on smooth rollers and
shall normally be held open on a guide rail by a fusible link rated to brake at 71°C.
l) Heat and Smoke Detector System: Interlock system with temperature-rise elements that locks
chute doors when temperature in chute reaches a predetermined, adjustable temperature.
1. Locate smoke detector outside discharge door with solenoid to close discharge door.
m) Provide automatic glass bulb sprinkler on every floor: Actuating temperature 68°C.
n) Cleaning and Disinfecting:
1. Provide a valve operated flushing spray head in tandem with a disinfecting unit together
with an automated mechanical brush system for cleaning, above the topmost door on all
floors including all the necessary piping and control valves (electrically controlled solenoid
valve).
2. Provide 600mm x 600mm access door for maintenance of the unit.
o) Venting:
1. Provide a factory fitted foul air exhaust fan, the fan to be fitted internally in the refuse
chute above roof level with the provision of an access door for maintaining and servicing
of the fan. The fan shall be protected above and below with removable lightweight mesh
screens.
p) Master Control Panel: Control panel shall be provided with necessary switches and controls
for the exhaust fan, cleaning devices and locks.

17 September 2015
q) Manual Control System: Control system with manual switches that lock doors of chute during
shutdown hours and service operations.
6. Acoustic Report: Refer to Acoustic Report.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 82.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of construction, fabrication, detailing and installation
to comply with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing requirements relating to
the building structure and other systems are accommodated in accordance with the Structural Engineer's
details, and that interfaces with any exterior envelope elements are fully weathertight.
C. Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the design intent. The Contractor shall maintain
these dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these shall be stated with
the Tender.
D. Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips, spacers,
E. All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
F. The work shall comply with the visual requirements indicated on the Design Drawings and provide a
G. The Contractor shall propose grades and thickness to suit the service conditions and meet the
H. Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
I. Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
J. Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
shims, which shall be agreed with the Engineer.
3. All necessary movement joints shall be designed to accommodate the maximum movements that
can be derived from the specified and determined design loads and movements. Under maximum
movements the joints shall meet the requirements of the Specification.

17 September 2015
b) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements, including
c) Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
d) Thermal movements.
performance:
b) The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the work.
2. When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered, taking account of the fact that
the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
in performance:
b) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the work, without
c) Loads imposed during replacement.
2. When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered, taking account of the fact that
the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
D. Structural Integrity: The work indicated on the Shop Drawings and described in the Specification shall
be in accordance with the conditions specified in the International Building Code (IBC), unless stated
otherwise.
E. Acoustic Performance
1. Installed work shall be free of unacceptable noise and vibration during normal operations.
F. Fire Performance
1. Fire resistance shall be in accordance with the Fire Strategy Report and NFPA 80.
2. Refer to the Fire Strategy documentation and the NFPA.
4. The junction of the floor and the refuse chute shall preserve the integrity and insulation of
compartmentation to prevent fire spread from floor to floor.
G. Demountability
work.

17 September 2015
H. Thermal Movement: The work shall withstand expansion and contraction forces, including differential
rates of movement between different materials, components and color finishes, resulting from temperature
changes.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed work, provide materials without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names or blemishes.
2. Metalwork, General: All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards
set out in the Specification.
3. Aluminum:
be acceptable.
4. Stainless Steel:
a) Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304/ Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for interior/
exterior use.
b) Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication
and installation of stainless steel elements/ materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the
simultaneous presence of any of the following:
1. Tensile stresses.
2. Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
3. Aggressive local environmental conditions.
4. Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion
cracking.
c) Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel: After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
B. Ferrous metals in accordance with the following.
1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36/ A36M.
2. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip and Plate: ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316L.
3. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L.
4. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/ A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/ A36M
or ASTM A283/ A283M, Grade C or D.
5. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793.
6. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing.
7. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/ A53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
8. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
9. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/ A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/ A47M, unless otherwise
indicated.

17 September 2015
C. Non-ferrous metals in accordance with the following.
1. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
3. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/ B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
F. Shims: Horseshoe type made from stainless or suitably coated steel where concealed. Use sleeve type
spacers of stainless steel for visible shims.
G. Isolating Materials: Self-adhesive PVC tape, polyester powder coat or two-pack epoxy paint as
recommended by the manufacturer to suit application.
H. Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or lock-seamed
joints without bolts, rivets or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake door assemblies and metal
supporting framing at each floor and chute expansion joints between each support point.
B. A minimum of one slip or telescopic joint per story shall be allowed to provide working tolerances.
C. The intake doors shall be bolted in place on the entry sections and checked to ensure accurate and
proper alignment with the inner baffle plate.
D. Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend 1200mm above roof unless otherwise indicated on the Design
Drawings, with full-diameter, screened vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap.
Fabricate with roof-deck flange, counterflashing and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with
chute metal.
E. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service opening of
chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two stories tall and at the lowest
service level.
F. Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within the chute,
such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers and plumbing and electrical connections.
G. Tolerances for Manufacture and Element Fabrication: The tolerances shall permit the installation and
commissioning of the system without detriment to performance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions and alignments, and surfaces to receive the work of
this Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Separate materials identified as reactive to prevent electro-chemical corrosion.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written instructions.
Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to supporting structure to withstand
impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and components to maintain fire-resistive construction
of chute and enclosing chase.
B. Materials shall be protected at all times from physical damage and kept dry until fixed.

17 September 2015
C. Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
D. Conditions detrimental to the installation of the work shall be documented and presented to the Engineer,
with proposals of rectification work by the Contractor.
E. Installation shall be by competent and experienced operatives recommended in writing by the

manufacturer.
F. Acceptance shall be obtained from the Engineer before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where shown on the Shop Drawings.
G. Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means shall be used to prevent bi-metallic corrosion
between dissimilar metals.
H. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free falling within
chutes.
I. The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions.
J. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent counter-
flashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed.
K. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe, snag-resistant,
sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users.
1. Coordinate installation of foot-pedal door operator with installation of door and enclosing chase.
2. Interconnect sanitizer control with door interlock system.
L. Electrical Interlock System: Comply with applicable NECA 1 recommendations.
M. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks and interlock systems to demonstrate
that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Complete test operations before
installing chase enclosures.
N. Test heat and smoke sensing devices for proper operation.
O. Operate sanitizing unit through one complete cycle of chute use and cleanup and replenish chemicals
or cleaning fluids in unit containers.
P. The Contractor shall provide sealants to ensure all joints are watertight and provide all other equipment
necessary in accordance with the system manufacturer's written recommendations to execute the work
in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
Q. Under no circumstances shall the work be used for construction waste.
R. Metalwork
1. All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the work.
2. No welds other than those shown on the Shop Drawings, even for temporary attachments or repairs,
shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the Engineer. If welded temporary connections
are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be in accordance with AWS
requirements.
S. Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding: The system shall be constructed and installed such that the
elements are electrically continuous for the purposes of equipotential bonding and lightning protection.
T. All fastening bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
procedures.
U. Installation Tolerances: The work shall be installed to meet tolerances in accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations so as to achieve the requirements of the Specification.
A. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

17 September 2015
A. Cleaning
1. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components. Do not
remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies.
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers and without
the Engineer for acceptance
B. Adjusting
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to the Employer's personnel.
B. Demonstrate replenishment of sanitizing-unit chemicals or cleaning fluids.
3.7 PROTECTION
adhesive film. Remove and replace protection as instructed for inspection; remove immediately before
Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015
SECTION 224000 -- PLUMBING FIXTURES 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1
1.1 SUMMARY 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS 1
1.7 WARRANTY 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS 3
2.4 MATERIALS 4
PART 3 EXECUTION 6
3.1 EXAMINATION 6
3.2 PREPARATION 6
3.3 INSTALLATION 6
3.4 CONNECTIONS 7

Tender Issue 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
17 September 2015
SECTION 224000 -- PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

C. Section Includes
1. Faucets for lavatories, bathtubs, bathtub/ showers, showers and sinks.
2. Water closets.
3. Urinals.
4. Lavatories.
5. Bathtubs.
6. Individual showers.
7. Kitchen sinks.
8. Cleaner's sinks.
D. Related Work Sections and documentation
3. Sanitaryware Schedule.
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Tender Issue 224000 / 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
17 September 2015
1. Shop Drawings.
the system.
D. Post Contract Samples
1. Each specified appliance shall be submitted prior to ordering and incorporated into the works
following acceptance by the Engineer.
1. Warranties.
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Mock-ups
1. Not required.

17 September 2015
D. Prototypes
1. Not required.
1. First appliance of each type installed in location to be agreed.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials and components to the Site in sealed manufacturer's packaging, clearly
labeled to show brand, type, class, quality and other qualifying information.
B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry, secure space, and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Handling: Handle material carefully to avoid damage to faces, edges and corners. Replace damaged
items and those unfit for use. Do not unpack materials until immediately prior to installation.
A. Strictly observe ambient air and surface temperatures recommended by the manufacturer of the adhesive
products.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Structural failures of unit shell.
b) Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: 3 year(s) from date of Taking-Over.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: 20 years from date of Taking-Over.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: 20 years from date of Taking-
Over.
5. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: 5 years from date of Taking-Over.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General: Refer to the Design Drawings and Sanitaryware Schedule for sanitaryware items.
B. Source of Supply

17 September 2015
1. One manufacturer shall supply all fixtures, unless specified otherwise.
2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience providing similar types of accessories.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General
1. All fixtures to be free from imperfections, true to line, angles, curves and colors, smooth, watertight
and complete in every respect.
2. All vitreousware shall be fired vitreous chinaware of the best quality, non-absorbent and burned so
that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified, producing a material, consistent in color, which
when fractured shall show a homogeneous mass, close grained and free from pores.
3. The glazing of vitreous china fixtures shall be thoroughly fused and unitized to the body, without
discoloration, chips or flaws, and shall be free from craze. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures
shall not be accepted.
4. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
5. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act,"
about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
6. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
7. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
A. Serviceability: Grab rails shall remain rigidly fixed.
B. Safety: Glass, when damaged or broken, shall not produce detached fragments or expose sharp edges
that could cause injury to building occupants.
C. Durability: Materials and components to withstand the required use, humidity and wetting, and cleaning
materials used in commercial buildings of this type, and shall remain free from:
1. Breakage, cracking or chipping of glass.
2. Failure of mirror glass as specified in Section 088000 Glazing.
3. Unacceptable changes in the appearance of mirror glass, including cracking, peeling, color variations
and deterioration of coating.
4. Peeling, pitting, color or gloss level variations to chromium plating.
5. Breakage or component disengagement, opening of joints, oil canning, distortion, pitting, corrosion
and other unacceptable changes in appearance of metal components.
6. Defects in sanitary sealant as specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures.
1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
2. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
3. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink
faucets.

17 September 2015
1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
2. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
3. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
5. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
6. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
7. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower and shower
faucets.
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Deck-Mounted Bath/ Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F444.
7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F444 and ASSE 1016.
8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
D. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous
fittings.
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous
components.
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F446.
6. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

17 September 2015
9. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
10. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
11. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Drill supporting construction for the attachment of brackets and supports. Carefully cut openings for
recessed items, using templates provided by the manufacturer. Do not cut structural items or supports
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
B. Coordinate the cutting of manufactured items to receive accessories with the fabricators of the applicable
Sections; do not cut items on Site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
D. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of
compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
E. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
F. Set bathtubs, shower receptors and service basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealant application shall be as Section
H. Non-ferrous or stainless steel fastenings shall be used unless otherwise specified.
I. Jointing and bedding compounds recommended in writing by the manufacturers of the appliances,
accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded shall be used.
J. Appliances shall not be used for any purpose until Taking-Over.

17 September 2015
K. On Taking-Over, protective coverings, tapes, etc. shall be removed and appliances checked for damage
and defects. They shall be tested for satisfactory operation and all damaged or defective components/
accessories replaced. The whole installation shall be thoroughly cleaned.
L. Blockings and bearers required to support sanitary appliances and fittings shall be accurately positioned,
securely fixed and concealed from view.
M. Appliances
1. WC seats and lids shall be stable when raised and capable of remaining in a vertical position.
2. Cisterns:
a) Cistern operating components to be as recommended by the cistern manufacturer. The ball

valve shall match pressure of water supply.
b) A cistern shall be fixed at the height recommended by the manufacturer unless otherwise
specified or shown on the Design Drawings.
c) The overflow pipe shall be fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge. Agree
the position with the Engineer where not shown on the Design Drawings.
3. Faucets shall be fastened securely, making a watertight seal with the appliance.
4. Wastes/ Overflows shall be bedded in waterproof jointing compound and fastened with a resilient
washer between appliance and backnut.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use
size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Ensure suitable earth bonding/ grounding connections are installed for equipment/ fixtures with integrated
electrical systems.
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning
fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
A. Cleaning
1. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials. Do the following.
a) Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
b) Remove sediment and debris from drains.
2. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
B. Adjusting

17 September 2015
1. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
2. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream.
3. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
4. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
C. Protection
1. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. Remove protection prior to Taking-
Over, and when instructed by the Engineer.
2. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Employer
or Engineer.
END OF SECTION

17 September 2015

AECOM AL GARHOUD Mixed-Use Arch Specs (Tender Clean Version) 20-09-2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AECOM AL GARHOUD Mixed-Use Arch Specs (Tender Clean Version) 20-09-2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

17 September 2015 AL GARHOUD MIXED-USE DEVELOPMENT

Document Architectural Specification

Ref ADH-GMD-DMP-SPC-Y15-00007-0 Date 17 September 2015

Revision Revision Date Details Name/Position Signature

00 17 September 2015 Tender Issue Hanadi Ali

Technical Reference Sheet [T-Sheet]

034500 - Precast Architectural Concrete

035400 - Cast Underlayment

042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry

050513 - Shop Applied Coatings For Metal

050523 - Metal Fastenings

055200 - Metal Railings

060573 - Wood Treatment

062023 - Interior Finish Carpentry

064200 - Wood Paneling

071352 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing

071353 - Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing

071416 - Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing

071450 - Grp Lining Waterproofing

071600 - Cementitious And Reactive Waterproofing

071800 - Traffic Coatings

072100 - Thermal Insulation

074200 - Wall Panels

077200 - Roof Accessories

078413 - Penetration Firestopping

079200 - Joint Sealants

079513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

081100 - Metal Doors And Frames

081416 - Flush Wood Doors

083200 - Glass Doors

083323 - Overhead Coiling Doors

084233 - Revolving Door Entrances

084413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

087100 - Door Hardware

089000 - Louvers And Vents

092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

092400 - Cement Plastering

093033 - Stone Tiling

095133 - Acoustical Metal Pan Ceilings

096500 - Resilient Flooring

096723 - Resinous Flooring

096900 - Access Flooring

099646 - Intumescent Painting

102100 - Compartments And Cubicles

102613 - Corner Guards

107113 - Exterior Sun Control Devices

124816 - Entrance Floor Grilles

149100 - Facility Chutes

224000 - Plumbing Fixtures

FLH-101 Ceramic Floor Tile 093000

IWS-100 Series GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS 092116

TRM-515 Natural Stone Skirting 093033

SECTION 034500 -- PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 1

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 4

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 4

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 4

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 4

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA 5

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 20

3.3 SITE QUALITY CONTROL 25